user manual

KASEMAKE

KASEMAKE Screen Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Command Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

MDI Style Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Tabbed Design Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Nudge factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Nudge Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Inside / Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Flute Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Special Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Docking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Pinning A Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Auto Hiding A Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Rolldown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Rollup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

3D Screen Layout - Timeline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Floating / Docking a Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Customising Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Quick Customize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Add or Remove Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Customize.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Predefined Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Main Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Standard Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Style Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Mode Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Draw Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Dimension Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Parametrics Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Tools Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Build Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Edit Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Diemaking Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Quick Parametrics Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Construct Lines Tool Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153D View Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153D Lights Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153D Folding Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-153D Curvature Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163D Alignment and Rotation Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163D Drawing Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163D Animation Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

KASEMAKE - User’s Guide© AG/CAD Limited 2006

Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Kaseweb Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Rotary Diemaking Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Dialog Boxes and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Check Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Radio Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Combo Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Edit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Spin Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Calculator (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Defining Colours (3D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Other.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Features of Right Mouse Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Pop-up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Quick Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Moving The On Screen Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Zooming The On Screen Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Features of the Mouse Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23System Instability Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23Preserving Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3D Driver... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Image Compression Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Display Driver Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

New 2D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4New 3D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

File Open dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

File Suffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

File Save As dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Next Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Save Selected Elements Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Email Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Drawing Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Send To Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Publish/e-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Publish to the World Wide Web. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Web Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10User Name and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Publish to a server on my local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10File Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10User Name and Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Send files via e-Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11E-Mail Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Profile Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Are you sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Publishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Project Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Project Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Project Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Design Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Revision Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Project Bar Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Create New Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13New Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Edit Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Delete Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Show Tiled View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Save Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Project Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15New Project.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Open Project... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Close Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Save Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Save Project As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Create Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Pack Project.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Unpack Project... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Revision Info... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Print dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Print Progress Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Print Preview Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Page Setup dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Plotter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Plotter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23Plot Circles Below. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Lock X and Y Depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Pass Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Depth In X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Depth In Y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Crossover Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Optimise Choice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Common Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Paper Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Scale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Centred In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26Flip About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Bounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Linestyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Completing Plotter Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Plotter…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Plot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27

Plot Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29CF2 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30DXF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31CF2 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32CF2 Message Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Save As. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Delete Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33CF2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

HGL Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33EPS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34 AI Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34DXF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

DXF Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35DXF Layer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35DXF Linestyle Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35DXF Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Elliptical Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35Layer Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

RP2 Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36RPT Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36CMF Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36DDES Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Comment Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

DAT, DSP, M and N Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37PDF Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37DDES3 Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Multi Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38Current Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38File Formats List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39E-mail Single Recipient. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39Dialog Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39

Load Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Preferences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41

Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Nudge Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Small Gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Selection Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Visible Rectangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Visible Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Drill Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Line Angle Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Line Length Inc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43Size of Plotted Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Number of items in window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44Convert to Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45AutoSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45AutoSave 3D Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Save Images Compressed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Back up drawing files on saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45Backup file prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46File Preview Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Clear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Modify.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Extents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47Quickzoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Zoom To Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Use Auto Snap with Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Snap Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Exchangeable Toolbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Allow Autoscroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Quick Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Lock Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Rollup Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Mouse Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Mode highlight colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Construct line colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Default View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50Mix And Match Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Bitmap Zoom Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Default Ground Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Flute / Grain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Data Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Default Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Area Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52Rule Length Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Import / Export Ground Mappings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Import / Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53Table of values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Add New... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Delete... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54Kasemake Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54

Kasemake Look . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Animations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Enable Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55More Tabs Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Configure Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56Autohide Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57Recover Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57Undo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Paste. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Delete Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Delete Visible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Clear Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Delete Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Image Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Quick Edit Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Move Horizontal Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Move Vertical Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Copy Horizontal Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Copy Vertical Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Corner Copy... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Move / Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Defining the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Command Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Scale / Rotate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Reduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Resize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Rotate To Specific Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Step And Repeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Linear Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Radial Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Completing Move/Copy with Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Move Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Completing the Move Points Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Use Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Nudge Facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Move Points with Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14Move Points Poly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Use Reference Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Nudge Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Change Nudge Angle... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Element Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Copy Properties From... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19TrueType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Bezier Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Clone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Pick Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Select Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

Manipulation of the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Adding to the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Clearing the Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Auto Scroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Freehand Move / Copy of the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Freehand Move - Horizontal / Vertical Movement Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22Resizing the Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Mirroring the Selection Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Rotating the Selection Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Nudge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Pop-Up Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Selecting Elements Individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Selecting Elements with a Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Selecting Text Strings for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Select Command Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Selection Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Graphics Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Show Elements when Dragging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Select Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Select Last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28Select All. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Select None . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Select Entities Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29By Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29By Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Select Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Select Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Select Polygon Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Selection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Graphics Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Show Elements when Dragging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Select Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Individual Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Multiple Construct Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Delete Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Lines Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Angle Relative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Angle Super . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Relative. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Specifying Direction by Cursor Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Specifying a Pre-Defined Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Specifying the Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Box Command Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Polyline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Sketch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Arrow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Arrow Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Arrow Head Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Arrow Head Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Chamfer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Chamfer Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Line of Known Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Line of Known Length Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Parallel Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Perpendicular Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Number Of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Start Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10End Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

Multi Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Multi-Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

No. of Additional Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Point Tangent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Arc Tangent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Create Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Height of panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Taper Sides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

Polygon Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13Polygon Centre Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

Polygon Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Polygon Sides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14Point Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Radius Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Polygon Edge Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Polygon Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

Polygon Start / End Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Polygon Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Polygon Sides. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Circle Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Radius Circle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Radius Circle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Fixed Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Drag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

2 Point Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-183 Point Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Arc Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Radius. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Radius Arc Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Fixed Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20

Centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-203 Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21

Fillet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Trim Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Fit Fillet between 2 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Anticlockwise Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

2 Entity Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-222 Entity Fillet Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22First Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Second Arc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

3 Entity Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-233 Entity Fillet Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23First Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Second Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Third Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Envelope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Envelope Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Fillet Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Ellipse Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

Ellipse Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Semi Major Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Semi Minor Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25

Elliptical Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Elliptical Arc Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

3 Point Elliptical Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Curve Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Cubic Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Cubic Spline Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Starting Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Final Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Curve Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Bezier Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28Bezier Curve Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Text Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Justification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Rotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Paragraph Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Block Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

TrueType. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Text Input Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Font Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Text Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Dimensions Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Dimension Toolbar - Modes of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32

Report Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Linear Dimension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Diameter Dimension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Dimensions General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Perpendicular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Horizontal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Overall Horizontal Dimension for Selected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35

Overall Vertical Dimension for Selected Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Arc Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Crease To Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39Dimension Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Dimension Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Arrow Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Arrow Size % Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Vary Arrow Head to Text Gap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Gap % Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Use Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Leader Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Show Leader Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Leader Line Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Auto Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Dimension Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Font Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Dimension Text Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Fixed Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Horizontal Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Blank Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Additional Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Display Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Show Trailing Zeroes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Display Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Automatic Overall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Nett Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46Wastage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46

Wastage Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Wastage Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47Corrugated Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Solid Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

Report Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

Build Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Point Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50Multi Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50Quick Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Auto Cut. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51Auto Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52Bisect Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Bisect Element Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53Divide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53

Divide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54

Break Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55Bisect Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55Thicken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Thicken Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56Perpendicular Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56Number of Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56

Point On Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56Point On Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57

Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57Adjust Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Adjust by distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Adjust To Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58Move attached elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59Island . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59Amend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Hatch Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Angle Of Hatch Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Gap Between Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60Selection Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60

Hatch Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Hatch Holes Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Angle Of Hatch Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Gap Between Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61

Enlarge Detail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61Straighten Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Straighten Arc Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62Bulge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Bulge Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63Radius Bulge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

Bulge Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Lead In Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64Element Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64

External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Internal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Element Path Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Selection Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Close Unbound Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Ground Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

Inflate / Deflate Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Inflate / Deflate Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Ground Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Generate Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Fillet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67

Offset Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67Offset Element Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67Perpendicular Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67Number of Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

Convert To Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68Convert to Contour Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68

Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69Image Proportional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70Freehand Construct Lines Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70

Draw Freehand Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71Construct Line Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

Offset Construct Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72Offset Construct Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

Perpendicular Construct Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74Perpendicular Construct Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Bisect Angle Between Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Show / Hide Freehand Construct Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75Fold Box… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76Folding Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Identification of Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Arc Splitting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Crease Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Number of Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77Crease Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Artwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Default Artwork Colours... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78Material Colours (blended with artwork) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-803D Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

Folding Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80Gaps in Lines / Joins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80.Dangling Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82Moving About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83Orthogonal Views (Front, Top, Side, Folding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83Navigation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84Selecting and Moving Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Multiple Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84Movement Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84Object Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85Worked Example of Folding Fefco Style 0422 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

Extrude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86Extrude Multi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90Fill Element. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Remove Fill From Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94Freehand Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Lock To End Point Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Lock Drawing Mode in a Command File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Snap To Midpoint Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Snap Along Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Snap To Grid Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Snap To Arc Centre Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Snap To Intersection Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Snap Quad Point Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Auto Snap Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Coordinate Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Relative 1 Drawing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Relative 1 In A Command File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Relative 2 Drawing Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Relative Endpoint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Between 2 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Snap To Construct Line Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Orthogonal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Joined. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Auto Snap Properties... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Ungroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Ungroup All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Unclone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Unclone All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Explode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Set Inside/Outside View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Align Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Align To Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Align To Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Running a Parametric Design Non-Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Running a Parametric Design Interactively . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

Redo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Prev . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Next . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Def Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Run Insert... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Record To Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Variables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

Defining Variable Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Defining Mathematical Formulae . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7Condition Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Commands Available With The Variable Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Append . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Clear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Delete Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Delete Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Insert Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Recalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Run Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Show Associated Database Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Show Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Show All Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Print Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Trigonometry Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Additional Commands for Working With Different Materials. . . . . . . . . . . 7-15View Defined Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Add New Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Delete Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Edit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Link Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Show Active Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Example of Working with Different Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Set Point1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Resetting the Chosen Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Set Point2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Resetting the Chosen Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Set Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Entity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21

File Suffixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Create Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Set Units... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Top Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Bottom Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Mix And Match Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24

Folding Carton... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Corrugated... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Pallet... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25Defining Panels & Flaps to use with Mix & Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

File Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 Defining the .DSC Style Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 Defining the Parts to be called . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31Global Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Run Mix Match Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32MixMatch Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33Symbol Lock Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33Quick Parametrics - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Generate Guide Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Regenerate Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Edit Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34Copy Dim. Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Show Guide Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Show Parametric Dims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Open Quick... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Save Quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Save As Quick... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36

Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Layout… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Layout Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Vertical. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Interlocking Options (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Horizontal Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Vertical Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4Interlocking Options (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Minimum Knife Distance Constraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Time Limit Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Panel Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Array… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Interlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Layout Wizard... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Step 1 - Sheet Size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Step 2 - Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Step 3 - Layout Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Automatic Regular Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Regular Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Multipart Layout Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Step 4 - Perform Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10Step 5 - Choosing A Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Optimise Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Operation with the Shift Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Operation with the Ctrl Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Completing Manual Optimisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13

Slot Optimise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13Optimise and Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14

Common Lines… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16Remove Zero Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Convert To Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17Direction Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Indicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Indicate Bevels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

End Markers Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Show End Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Setup Display End Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21

Manipulate Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Flip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Rotate 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Rotate -90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Rotate 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22Rotate -45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Tool Passes Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Edit (Tool Passes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23Display (Tool Passes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Mount Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25Bevel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25VGroove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28Reverse Bevel Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28

Cut & Crease Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29Specify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29

Cut Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30Cut by Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Cut by Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31 Even Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31Variable Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Example 1 - Cut by Length Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32Example 2 - Cut by Number Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Display Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Label Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34Zipper Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Specify Zipper Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35Zipper Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36Alterations to Zipper Rule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Display Zipper Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37Defining Zipper Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37

Counters Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Sample Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40

Crease Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Counter Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40Horizontal Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Vertical Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Channel Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41

Chamfer Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Chamfer Guide Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Die board/counter locating holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Die board/counter locating holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Auto Counter Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42Chamfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Angle from creases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43Angle from cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Crease Rule Pointage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Board Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44Matrix Thickness mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Grain Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Horizontal Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Vertical Crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Extended Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Extended Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45Internal Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Internal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Generate Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Simulation Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46

Simulate Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46Crease Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47Counter Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47Horizontal Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Vertical Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48Compression Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

Load CMP File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48Load VLS File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

Material Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Board Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Liner Type for Double Backer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Liner Type for Single Facer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Flute Media Grammage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Liner Type for Centre Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Liner Type for Second Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Save Material Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Delete Current Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49Compression Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50Print.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50Proceed... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50

Stora Compression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51

Add Frames... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51Registration Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Adjust Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54Border Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54

Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

Command Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55Delete Mask. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55

Create. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55Loading the border template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56Identifying the Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56Identifying the Prompt and Mask Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56Saving the Border File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57

Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58

Allow Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58Changing a Registration Mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59Remove Existing Registration Marks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60Apply to Selected Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60

Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Convert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61Min Line Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61

Centre Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62Check Integrity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62Indicate Overlaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62Remove Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63Symbols Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63

Create DB Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63Modify DB Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64

Calculator... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65Fractional Keypad... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65Task Lists - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65

Run Current Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66Edit Task List... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66

Sheets Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68Sheet Settings... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68

Adding A Stock Sheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69Deleting a Stock Sheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70Changing a Stock Sheet Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70Adjusting a Stock Sheet once placed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70

Trim... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71Hide/Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71

Stripping Knives Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Manual Stripping Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Stripping Knives Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Automatic Stripping Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Grip Edge Stripping Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Single Knife . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5L-Shaped Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

L-Shaped Knives Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Stripper Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Perimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Stripper Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Male. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Male Raised Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Female . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Inside Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Inside Stripper Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Male Raised Section 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Male Raised Section 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Male Raised Section Pin Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Female Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Front Edge Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

Front Edge Stripper Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Front Edge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Magic Eyes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Air Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Stripper Air Holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

Carrot Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Stripper Carrot Holes Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Repeat Copy Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19

Auto Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Pins And Struts Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Move Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Add Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Change Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Remove Strut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Move Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Add Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Change Pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Remove Pin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Die Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Mounting and Grip Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Dowel Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Handholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Balance Knives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

CITO Clip Stripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Support Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Nicks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Nicks Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Bridging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Roll-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Flat Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Manual Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Rotary Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Bridge Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Machine Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Items to Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Adjustments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Show Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Add Freehand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Remove Freehand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Move Bridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Adjust Bridge Width. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42Align Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Remove All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Rotary Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43Rotary Move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Rotary Shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Rotary Remove All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Rotary Indicate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45 Rotary Show End Markers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Add Tie Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Remove Tie Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Move Tie Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Rule Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Costings… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47Table… . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Miscellaneous Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Drill Freehand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Drill Toggle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Hide Drill Holes/Show Drill Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Rotary Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Shell Template Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Load Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Shell History List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Trim Shell Width... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Handholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Distance from edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Trim to top shell only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54

View Shell. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Split Shell... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Merge Shell with Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Manual Edit Bolt Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Show removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Auto Remove Bolt Holes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Ignore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Knife Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Lower Priority Hole Tolerance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Delete Hidden Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Reset Bolt Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Shell Construction Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Load Template... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Save Template... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Define Bolt Hole Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Auto Bolt Hole Settings.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58

Current Job Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59Edit Job Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Select Job Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60The DieMaking Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Toolbar Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60The Jobs View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62The Customers View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62The Machines View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63The Job Parameters View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64The DieBoard View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65The Stripping Knives View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66The Male Stripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67Female Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71Front Edge Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-71Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72Handholds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72Ground Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73

Ground Table... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Create Layout Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Window... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Set Grid... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Hide Grid/Show Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Redraw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Inside/Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Horizontal / Vertical Flute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Navigating around the Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Zooming the Current Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Zoom Slider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Zoom All Button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Symbols.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Symbols Rollup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Loading A Basic Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Loading A Smart Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Modifying a Smart Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Symbol Variables... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Adjust Lock Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Creating a Parametric Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Clone Edit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Ground Table... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

Ground Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Ground Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Colour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Pen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Ground Table Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9

Load... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9All On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10All Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Line Styles... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Linetype Properties…. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11

New(Insert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Move Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Move Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Custom Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Units... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Drawing Info... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Layout Info. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Database... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Materials... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Papers... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Plotters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Adding a New Plotter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Amending Settings for an Existing Plotter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

Show / Hide Project Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Personal Setup Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18

Load Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Save Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Remove Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Customise Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Toolbars.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Creating a Customised Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Customising the Style Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

ShortCuts... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Create Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Create File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Removing a Shortcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Reset All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Context Menu... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Modifying the Context Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Add Separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Add Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Status Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Zoom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Zoom All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Zoom Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Zoom Last. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Zoom In Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

10% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-320% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-330% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-340% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-350% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4

Zoom Out Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-410% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-420% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-430% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-440% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-450% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5100% . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5

Zoom Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5Quickzoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5New Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Close All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Tile Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Tile Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2Arrange Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Changing the Active Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3More Windows... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2

Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2Right Button Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Adding and Deleting Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Copying a Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5Query syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Borders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Border format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Transfer from database to border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7Transfer from border to database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8Create reports using Kasemake drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8Using AG/DATA reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Parametrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Default associations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9Parametric file associations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10Updating the database from a parametric variable table. . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Projects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11New Project... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11Associate Project Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12Associate Project Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Format of Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12AG Database configuration settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12Database Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Guide to changing database properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13Edit Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Adding a new field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14Deleting a field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Editing a field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Compact Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Configuration for network database file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Configuration for network drawing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15File Commands - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

3D File Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1.VIZ File Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Import Object... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Export Object... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Import Theme... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Export Theme... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Paste Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Selection Mode Sub-Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Panels / Sub Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2

Scene Mode Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3Rotate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3Examine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Walk Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Fly Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Static Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4

Plane / Axis Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4Horizontal plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5Vertical plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5Side plane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5X Axis only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5Y Axis only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6Z Axis only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-6

Edit artwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Import artwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Attach Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2Geometry Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

Mesh Subdivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3Corrugate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4

Dimensions Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5Centre of Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-5

Freeform Deformation Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-54x4x4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Parametric Deformation Sub Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6Bend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6

Panel Deformation Sub Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6Curve 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6Curve 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7Curve 180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7Curve 270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7Curve 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7Curve -90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8Curve -180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8Curve -270 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8Curve -360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-8Curve Angle (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9Curve Angle ( - ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Remove Curvature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-9Show / Hide Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Take Snapshot.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Take Snapshot (vector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10Constrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Fold To 90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Fold To 180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Fold To 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Fold To Angle... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Increase Fold Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Decrease Fold Angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Fold Increment... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3Centre At Origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Stand on ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Reset Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Stand up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Lie on side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Lie Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Align Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2

Abut left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3Centre. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3Right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3Abut right. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Abut top. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Tops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Middles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-4Bottoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5Abut bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5

Horizontal Spacing Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5Make equal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6Decrease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6

Vertical Spacing Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6Make equal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7Increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7Decrease. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7Remove. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7

Make Same Size Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8Horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8Vertically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8

Rotate +. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8Rotate -. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Rotation Angle... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9Lights 1 ... Lights 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1Ambient... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1Reset All Light Positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1Toggle Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

Animation - General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1Recording An Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

Animation Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1PlayBack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2Quick Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2Example 1: Recording A Movement Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2Editing An Animation Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3Example 2: Recording a Folding Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4Quick Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4Example 3: Recording a Camera Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4Example 4: Recording a Light Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4Object Hierarchy And Key Frames Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Show/Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Cut Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Copy Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Paste Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Create Key Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Insert Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Remove Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5Destroy Key Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6Destroy All Key Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6Recording A Camera Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6Adding Sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6Playing an Animation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6KASEPLAYER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6

New Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1Cameras... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1Import Cameras... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1Export Cameras... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1One pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Horizontal split. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Vertical split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Horizontal split - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Horizontal split - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2Vertical split - 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3Vertical split - 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3Horizontal split - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3Horizontal split - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Vertical split - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-3Vertical split - 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4Four panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-4VRML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

VRML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1HTML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3

AVI Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4Codec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4Prologue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-4Epilogue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5

Snapshots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-5Image export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6Image export multiple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-6

Kasemake (2D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-7Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8

POVRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-8Rendering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9Reflections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9Sky Sphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-9 Published File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10

Launch POVRAY.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10KASEPLAYER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-10Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1Fill Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Wireframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1Hidden line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1Textured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-1

Shade Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2Facet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2Smooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2

Outline Sub-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2None. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2White . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2Colour. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3

Background... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3Solid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3Gradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-4

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5Cubic Panorama . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5

Environment Map... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-6Advanced... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-7

Avatar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-8Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-9Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-10

Artwork... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11Snapshots... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11Nudge... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-11

Movement Nudge Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12Rotation Nudge Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12Spacing Nudge Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-12

Timeline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-13Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-14

Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-15Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-15Artwork Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-18Attaching A Note To An Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-19Modifying Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20Adding Sub Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-20Deleting Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-21

Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22Pipette Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22Paint with Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-22Apply Material to Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23Edit Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-23


Release 8.0

KASEMAKE

Release 8.0


KASEMAKE

1 - Getting Started

1 KASEMAKE Screen LayoutThe KASEMAKE screen is the interface between the user and the KASEMAKE system. Itprovides access to commands through menus and tool bars. It displays prompts and helpmessages to assist you in the operation of commands. It also displays information aboutcurrent settings, e.g. window size and drawing mode. In addition, it provides a drawing areafor you to display, edit and create your designs.

The KASEMAKE screen is divided into eight areas, each of which will be describedindividually.

The exact appearance of the KASEMAKE screen is determined from one of five availableschemes accessible through the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Please referto File->Preferences for further details.

1.1 Title BarThe title bar, at the top of the screen, displays the KASEMAKE name and the title of thecurrent design.


Release 8.0Page 1-1

1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

In addition, the title bar provides access to some standard Microsoft Windows functions providedby the version of Windows you are currently running. These relate to the currently runningKASEMAKE system.

1.2 Menu BarThe menu bar comprises the pull down menus provided by KASEMAKE. These menus giveaccess to the suite of commands available with your KASEMAKE system.

If standard MDI windows are used rather than tabbed design windows, the menu bar alsoincludes buttons to access standard Microsoft Windows functions affecting the current drawingwindow. The available functions will depend on the version of Windows you are running.

There are three sets of menus currently used by KASEMAKE.

• a complete set of 2D menus is available when a 2D drawing is being worked on either as a new design or an existing design for alteration

• a reduced set of these 2D menus is provided when no drawings are open• a set of 3D menus which include some of the 2D menus and commands but have additional

commands and menus specific to 3D is available when working on a 3D design

To select a command from a pull down menu:-

• Press the left mouse button once on the name of the menu you wish to view. Move the cur-sor to the name of the required command and press again to select this command

Information about each command is displayed in the status bar, at the bottom of the screen,as you move over the command name.

The contents of a menu can be viewed by pressing the left mouse button on the desired menuname. Once a menu has been displayed in this way, moving the cursor over any of the other menunames will cause their menu contents to be displayed.

To remove a menu without selecting a command simply press the left mouse button anywhereoutside the menu area.

Menus can display only the most recently used / popular commands, or the full list of commandsas before. Where only the most recently used commands are displayed, a double chevron isappended to the list of commands to show that it has been cropped. Simply click on the chevronsymbol to reveal the full list of commands.

Where cropped menus are used, it is also possible to have the full list reveal after a short delayrather than having to click on the double chevron to reveal it.

The options governing the behaviour of menus are determined through the Options page of theCustomise dialog. Please refer to “Options” on page 10-23 for further explanation of thesesettings.

There are also settings which govern the appearance of the menus. These are accessed throughthe Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Please refer to “Kasemake Look” on page 2-55 for further details.

1.3 Command BarThe command bar is where open tool bars are displayed.

There is a command bar below the menu bar where the standard tool bar and style tool barare displayed by default. There is also a command bar above the status bar and one at either

Release 8.0Page 1-2


KASEMAKE Screen Layout

KASEMAKE

side of the drawing area. Tool bars and dockable dialogs can be placed in any of the commandbars as desired. The main tool bar is displayed in the command bar to the left of the drawingarea by default.

Command bars are only visible when they contain one or more tool bars. The command bars tothe right and bottom of the screen are not visible by default.

Tool bars placed within a command bar are referred to as docked. A command bar can consistof several rows / columns of docked tool bars depending on how the tool bars are positionedwithin the command bar and how many are displayed. The command bar will grow in sizeautomatically to accommodate any open tool bars.

Moving the mouse over any button in a tool bar gives a brief description of the underlyingcommand in the status bar. To select a command press the left mouse button on the tool barbutton corresponding to the required command.

For further information on using tool bars refer to “Toolbars” on page 1-9.

1.4 Drawing AreaThe drawing area is the central work area of the KASEMAKE screen. This is where a design iscreated and manipulated. Two types of design window can be used MDI style or tabbed asdetermined by the enable tabs option of the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog.Please refer to “Kasemake Look” on page 2-55 for further details of this option.

In the 2D, the drawing area has a vertical and horizontal scroll bar to allow you to scroll the designwithin the visible drawing area. Simply press one of the arrows at either end of the scroll bar orclick on the scroller and drag it to the required position. The view will be adjusted accordingly.

For the 3D there are five tabs at the bottom of the drawing area corresponding to five differentviews of the current 3D scene. Simply click on a tab to display the corresponding view. Furthertabs may also appear when accessing certain of the 3D commands.

1.4.1 MDI Style WindowsWhere the standard MDI style windows are used, each design is held within its own windowwhich can be maximised or resized using the standard windows functions accessed through themenu bar. The window is automatically created whenever an existing design is accessed or a newdesign is started. Multiple designs can therefore be worked on at any one time. To move betweenthe designs access the Window menu and select the required design from the list of currentlyopen designs displayed in the bottom half of the Window pull down. Refer to Menu Bar onpage 1-2 for more information on selecting a command from a menu.

1.4.2 Tabbed Design WindowsMultiple designs can also be displayed overlaying each other with tabs to allow instant access tothe underlying design. A new window is automatically created whenever a new design is startedoverlaying any existing designs.

Once the maximum number of designs that can be accomodated in the drawing area is reached,older designs are removed from the display. To access the other designs, you can choose to scrollthrough them with arrow buttons or select from a menu by accessing a menu button.

The tabs can be positioned either at the top or bottom of the design. Their appearance can alsobe customised.


Release 8.0Page 1-3

1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

The customisation of tabs is through the Kasemake Look page of the Preferences dialog. Pleaserefer to “Kasemake Look” on page 2-55 for further details.

1.5 Status BarThe status bar is located at the bottom of the drawing screen. It is used to display information toassist you in using the KASEMAKE system. This includes descriptions of commands, when youmove through a tool bar or menu. It also includes prompts to guide you through using thecurrently selected command.

The right hand end of the status bar is used to display system settings.

• Information about the current element as it is drawn e.g. for a line - current angle and length. Also used to report a dimension - where report only is selected.

• Window size• Cursor position• Nudge factor currently in use• Nudge angle currently in use• Inside/Outside indicating the view currently on display• Flute direction• Database - Indicating whether a database is currently open

1.5.1 Nudge factorThe nudge factor can be altered directly through the indicator. Simply click in the indicator boxand type the required value.

1.5.2 Nudge AngleThe nudge angle can be altered using the Nudge Angle dialog which can be accessed throughthe indicator. Simply double click in the indicator to display the Nudge Angle dialog and enter anew angle in one of three ways. The indicator will automatically be updated. Refer to “ChangeNudge Angle...” on page 3-16.

1.5.3 Inside / OutsideThe Inside / Outside indicator can be accessed as a short cut to the View->Inside / Outsidecommand. Double click in the indicator to be prompted for confirmation that you wish to togglethe current view. Click on Yes to confirm and flip the view. Click on No to leave the viewunchanged.

1.5.4 Flute DirectionThe Flute Direction indicator, represented by a horizontal or vertical line with arrows at each end,provides a shortcut to the View->Horizontal / Vertical Flute command. Double click in theindicator to be prompted for confirmation that you wish to toggle the flute direction. Click onYes to confirm and alter the direction. Click on No to leave the flute direction unchanged.

1.6 Special DialogsThe Symbols, Array / Layout, Move / Copy and Bridging roll ups as well as the Properties, Notesand Project dialogs and the Overview window have special behaviour. They can be docked orfloating.

Release 8.0Page 1-4



KASEMAKE

When docked they can be overlaid, placed side by side or one above the other. They can also bepushpinned to display them permanently or can be made to auto hide, appearing only whenaccessed, otherwise they are displayed as tabs.

When floating they have rollup functionality. They can be push pinned for permanent display ormade to auto hide when not being accessed. They can also be made to roll up / down manually.

1.6.1 DockingDocking is achieved by dragging over special handles with arrows to indicate possible dockingpositions. A shaded area is displayed as each handle is accessed. This represents the position ofthe dialog if docked.

A handle will appear near each edge of the screen with an arrow pointing towards the edge itrepresents. In addition a special locator similar to a compass will be displayed in the centre of thecurrent window. This provides quick access to each of the four edge handles plus there is a centralhandle which if available can be used to overlay the dialog over any other items currently docked


Release 8.0Page 1-5

1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

in this area. Please refer to the following figure for an example of handles and possible dockingareas.

To dock a dialog simply hold down the left mouse button in the title area. Drag the dialog overthe handle which represents the area where you wish to dock this dialog. Release the mousebutton to dock the dialog at this new position.

1.6.1.1 Pinning A Dialog If you wish the dialog to be permanently displayed you should ensure the pin in its title bar isupright by clicking on it if necessary. Once pinned a dialog will be permanently on display.

Note: If you wish to float a dialog you must ensure it is pinned first.

1.6.1.2 Auto Hiding A DialogIf you wish a dialog to auto hide when not being accessed you should ensure that the pin in itstitle bar is horizontal by clicking on it if necessary. In this mode, the dialog will be displayed as atab only. To access the dialog move the cursor over the tab. The dialog will automatically bedisplayed allowing access to the dialog while the cursor remains within the dialog or tab. Oncethe cursor moves outside the dialog / tab it will be hidden.

Release 8.0Page 1-6



KASEMAKE

1.6.2 FloatingTo float a dialog, first ensure it is pinned. Then simply hold down the left mouse button in thetitle area (or tab). Drag the dialog to a suitable position within the drawing area. Release themouse button to place the dialog at this new position.

1.6.2.1 Rolldown If you wish the dialog to be permanently displayed you should ensure the pin in its title bar isupright by clicking on it if necessary. Once pinned a dialog will be displayed rolled down andremain permanently on display.

1.6.2.2 RollupIf you wish the dialog to roll up displaying only the title bar, you should ensure that the pin in itstitle bar is horizontal by clicking on it if necessary. To access the dialog you should do one of thefollowing depending upon your preferences. Please refer to “Rollup Dialogs” on page 2-49.

• If you have selected automatic rollup, move the cursor over the title bar. The dialog will roll-down allowing access to its controls while the cursor remains within the dialog or title bar. Once the cursor moves outside the dialog / title bar it will be rolled up again.

• If you have selected manual rollup, you should click on the pin to ensure it is vertical. The dia-log will rolldown allowing access to its controls and is now pinned and will remain perma-nently on display. To rollup the dialog again, simply click on the pin again to set it back to horizontal and the dialog will roll up displaying only its title bar again.

1.6.3 Context MenuThere is also a context menu available for docking / floating the dialogs. Simply right click over adialog to access the menu of commands. Where the dialog is currently pinned options areavailable to float it, set it to auto hide or to hide it completely. Simply click on the requiredcommand to activate it.

Where the dialog is currently set to auto hide only this command is displayed. Choosing thecommand will toggle the auto hide option. This is particularly useful where dialogs are overlaidand you wish to float an individual dialog since once overlaid dialogs are treated as a whole unitrather than individually so cannot otherwise be docked / floated independently.

1.7 3D Screen Layout - TimelineThe 3D screen layout varies from the 2D screen layout in that the drawing area is tabbed, eachtab representing a different view of the 3D scene. This is illustrated.

In addition a timeline window can be displayed using the View->Timeline command. Thetimeline window displays a hierarchy of object(s) and any components defined in the currentscene, in a column format to the left of the display. Any corresponding animation is shown frameby frame to the right.

Within a typical 3D scene you might have one or more boxes. Each of these is made up of one ormore panels. This is reflected in the object hierarchy. Other objects affecting the view e.g. camerasand lighting are also displayed.

Any animation is displayed in the form of keyframes. As in the making of films, KASEMAKEanimation divides lengths of time into frames. A keyframe is a frame in which you define a changein an animation or include frame actions to modify a movie. Keyframes are used to produceanimation without the need to draw each frame; they make creating movies easier. KASEMAKEcan tween, or fill in the frames between keyframes to produce fluid animations.


Release 8.0Page 1-7

1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

The timeline header at the top of the timeline indicates frame numbers. The timeline statusdisplay at the bottom of the timeline indicates the selected frame number, the current frame rate,and the elapsed time to the current frame.

Note: When an animation is played, the actual frame rate is displayed; thismay differ from the movie frame rate if the computer can't displaythe animation quickly enough.

The order in which frames and keyframes appear in the Timeline determines the order in whichthey are displayed in a movie. You can change the length of a tweened animation by dragging akeyframe in the timeline. By rearranging keyframes in the timeline you can edit the sequence ofevents in a movie. You can also insert, delete, select, and move frames in the Timeline by rightclicking to access a pop up menu of animation commands.

Release 8.0Page 1-8


Toolbars

KASEMAKE

2 ToolbarsTool bars provide an easy way of accessing commands. Each tool bar contains a set of buttonswith a bitmap representation of the corresponding command. Moving the mouse over anybutton in a tool bar will display a brief description of the underlying command as a tool tip. Todisplay tool tips refer to View->Customise->Toolbars on page 10-19. To select a commandsimply press the left mouse button on the tool bar button which represents the requiredcommand.

Tool bars can be either floating where they have a title bar and close button and can bepositioned anywhere within the physical limits of the screen, or docked where they are positionedwithin one of the command bars and have a gripper at the start of the toolbar to allow it to bemoved.

Toolbars also have a customize button at the end of the toolbar to allow access to furthercommands where the toolbar is docked and has been cropped to fit and to enable the toolbar tobe customized whether docked or floating.

Some of the tool bars are opened automatically by default. However, you can open and closethem, as required, to determine which tool bars are on view at any one time.

Tool bars are opened in one of two ways:-

• Moving the cursor into the main tool bar and pressing the left mouse button on the button corresponding to the required tool bar. The tool bar button is displayed as pushed in to show that the tool bar is open

• Selecting the View->Customise->Toolbars command and checking the box corre-sponding to the required tool bar, using the left mouse button

Tool bars are closed in one of the following ways:-

• Moving the cursor into the main tool bar and pressing the left mouse button on the button corresponding to the tool bar to be closed. The tool bar button will be shown as popped out to show that the tool bar is not on display

• Selecting the View->Customise->Toolbars command and unchecking the box corre-sponding to the required tool bar, by pressing the left mouse button

For floating tool bars only click on the close button at the end of the title bar

2.1 Floating / Docking a ToolbarThe gripper button is located at the beginning of each toolbar when it is docked. It allows thetoolbar to be moved. The gripper is represented by a column of dots in the above illustration butits exact appearance is determined by the current KASEMAKE scheme being used.

To float a tool bar:-

Move the cursor over the gripper. The move cursor will be displayed. Hold down the leftmouse button and drag the tool bar to the required position. Release the mouse to place it.A floating tool bar may be resized as per any window.


Release 8.0Page 1-9

1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

To dock a tool bar:-

Move the cursor over the title bar to display the move cursor. Hold down the left mousebutton and drag the tool bar to the required command bar. The toolbar will automaticallydock when you enter a command bar. Release the mouse button and the tool bar will bedocked within the command bar. The command bar will automatically increase in size, ifnecessary, to accommodate the newly placed tool bar.

2.2 Customising ToolbarsThe more button is located at the end of each toolbar when it is docked and the toolbar has hadto be cropped to fit within the command bar. It is used to access any commands not currentlydisplayed. It is also used to customize the toolbar.

If the toolbar has been cropped the more button represented by a chevron symbol is displayed,as shown. Clicking on the more button displays a drop down list of the missing commands:-

Simply select a command from the list as per a menu.

2.2.1 Quick CustomizeToolbars can be customized using the Add or Remove Buttons command. Click on the morebutton at the end of the toolbar to display this command in one of the following ways :-

• If the toolbar has been cropped the more button is represented by chevrons and an arrow as illustrated above. Click on it to reveal a dropdown list of missing commands for this toolbar. The final command displayed is the Add or Remove Buttons command.

Release 8.0Page 1-10


Toolbars

KASEMAKE

• If the toolbar has not been cropped the more button is represented by an arrow. Click on it to reveal the Add or Remove Buttons command.

In either case, move the cursor over the Add or Remove Buttons command to display a contextsensitive menu comprising a menu for each toolbar that is docked in the same row (or column)as the current toolbar. In addition, a Customize... command is also displayed.

2.2.1.1 Add or Remove ButtonsMove the cursor over the menu for the toolbar you wish to customize. A drop down list of all thepossible commands for this toolbar will now be displayed. Each command is preceded by a boxwhich is used to identify which commands are included in the toolbar. If the box contains a tickthe command is currently included. If it is empty the command is not currently included. Click inthe box corresponding to a command to add / remove the command within the toolbar.

If at any stage you wish to return to the default settings for this toolbar, simply click on ResetToolbar. You will then be prompted for confirmation that you wish to reset the toolbar as anychanges will be lost. Click on OK to confirm and the toolbar will be restored to its default settings.Click on Cancel to ignore the Reset Toolbar command and leave the toolbar unchanged.

2.2.1.2 Customize...The tool bars are fully customisable which means that you can alter them to contain thecommands most relevant to your individual requirements. This includes menus.

You can also define your own tool bars, which similarly, can contain command buttons or menus.

The Customize... command allows quick access to the Customize dialog also accessible throughthe View->Customize... command. This provides three pages of settings. Toolbars to controlwhich toolbars are displayed and which are hidden. Commands which allows new commands tobe placed into toolbars and new menus to be created. Options which controls the appearance oftooltips and menus.



1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

For a full explanation of customising tool bars refer to “View->Customise->Toolbars” on page10-20.

2.3 Predefined ToolbarsThere are twenty two predefined tool bars provided by the KASEMAKE system.

1 Main tool bar

2 Standard tool bar

3 Style tool bar

4 Mode tool bar

5 Draw tool bar

6 Dimension tool bar

7 Parametrics tool bar

8 Tools tool bar

9 Build tool bar

10 Edit tool bar

11 Diemaking tool bar

12 Quick parametrics tool bar

13 Construct lines tool bar

14 3D View tool bar

15 3D Lights tool bar

16 3D Folding tool bar

17 3D Curvature tool bar

18 3D Alignment and Rotation tool bar

19 3D Drawing tool bar

20 3D Animation tool bar

21 Kaseweb tool bar

22 Rotary Diemaking tool bar

The tool bars numbered six to nine can be made exchangeable, meaning that only one will everbe visible at any one time. This swapping of tool bars helps to reduce the amount of informationon display, leaving more room for the drawing area and making it easier to find your way around,particularly useful when you are new to the KASEMAKE system.

To make the tool bars exchangeable use the Files->Preferences command and check theexchangeable tool bars option. Conversely, unchecking this command will make the tool barsappear simultaneously.

2.3.1 Main Tool Bar



Toolbars

KASEMAKE

The main tool bar provides access to other tool bars. The tool bars are opened or closed byselecting or deselecting the corresponding tool bar button. An open tool bar is illustrated by thecorresponding tool bar button appearing pressed in. A closed tool bar is illustrated by the toolbar button being drawn popped out.

In addition, the main tool bar provides instant access to the select and text drawing tools. It alsoprovides access to the calculator and a numerical keypad. It also provides a way of toggling thedisplay of the project toolbars on and off.

2.3.2 Standard Tool Bar

The standard tool bar provides quick access to frequently used commands from the files, edit,view and help menus as well as to the 3D Fold Box and the Overview command.

In addition, it provides access to any drawing tool options applicable to the currently selecteddrawing tool. The options button appears greyed out where a tool does not have any options.Pressing the options button brings up a dialog box containing options specific to the current toolwhich can then be altered as desired. For further information on using dialog boxes see “UsingDialog Boxes and Controls in KASEMAKE” on page 1-17.

2.3.3 Style Tool Bar

The style tool bar displays information about the attributes which determine how drawingelements are displayed. These are the current line style, current line width and current groundsettings, including the ground table currently in use. They can be changed directly by clicking onthe arrow of the appropriate combo box. Scrolling through the list of available values and clickingon the required value to set it. For further information on using a combo box control refer to“Using Dialog Boxes and Controls in KASEMAKE” on page 1-17

In addition, the style tool bar provides access to the ground table dialog where attributes such asvisibility, colour and pen within the current ground table can be altered for any or all grounds.See also “Ground Table...” in the Views commands on page 10-8.

2.3.4 Mode Tool Bar

The mode tool bar allows access to the different entry modes which control the entering ofinformation into the design. Where coordinate mode is chosen a further tool bar is provided toenter the x and y values of the desired coordinate.

Orthogonal mode which forces all lines to be adjusted orthogonally can be set or unset throughthe mode tool bar. The corresponding button is shown pressed in where this option is set.

Joined mode, where lines are drawn as a continuous sequence each starting where the previousline ended, can also be set through this tool bar. Again, the tool bar button is shown pressed inwhen this option is set.

The auto snap properties to use when auto snap is engaged, are also set through this tool bar.



1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

2.3.5 Draw Tool Bar

The draw tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used draw commands. Simplyclick on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.6 Dimension Tool Bar

The dimension tool bar provides instant access to dimension commands. Simply click on theappropriate tool bar button to select a command.

In addition, the dimension tool bar contains settings which control the method used to constructa dimension. This includes report dimension, which when set causes the dimension value toappear in the status bar rather than constructing a dimension within the design. It is advisable todisplay the dimension tool bar when dimensioning as these settings are not available through themenu process.

2.3.7 Parametrics Tool Bar

The parametrics tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used parametriccommands. Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.8 Tools Tool Bar

The tools tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used tools commands. Simplyclick on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.9 Build Tool Bar

The build tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used build commands. Simplyclick on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.10 Edit Tool Bar

The edit tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used edit commands. In addition,it allows access to the group and ungroup commands.



Toolbars

KASEMAKE

Simply click on the appropriate tool bar button to select the required command.

2.3.11 Diemaking Tool Bar

The diemaking tool bar provides instant access to the most frequently used diemakingcommands. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.12 Quick Parametrics Tool Bar

The quick parametrics tool bar provides instant access to the quick parametric commands. Simplyclick on the appropriate tool bar button to select a command.

2.3.13 Construct Lines Tool Bar

The Construct Lines tool bar provides instant access to the commands available for placing andmanipulating construct lines. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate therequired command.

2.3.14 3D View Tool Bar

The 3D view tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the mostfrequently used 3D commands relating to the display of the 3D scene. Simply click on thecorresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.15 3D Lights Tool Bar

The 3D lights tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to thecommands for displaying lights within the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool barbutton to activate the required command.

2.3.16 3D Folding Tool Bar



1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

The 3D folding tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the foldingcommands available within the 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button toactivate the required command.

2.3.17 3D Curvature Tool Bar

The 3D curvature tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to thecommands available for handling curved panels. Simply click on the corresponding tool barbutton to activate the required command.

2.3.18 3D Alignment and Rotation Tool Bar

The 3D alignment and rotation tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instantaccess to the most frequently used 3D commands for manipulating objects within the 3D scene.Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.19 3D Drawing Tool Bar

The 3D drawing tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to the mostfrequently used 3D commands for amending objects within the 3D scene. Simply click on thecorresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

2.3.20 3D Animation Tool Bar

The 3D animation tool bar is available for use in the 3D view. It provides instant access to theanimation commands available for animating a 3D scene. Simply click on the corresponding toolbar button to activate the required command.

2.3.21 Kaseweb Tool Bar

The Kaseweb tool bar provides instant access to the kaseweb commands. Simply click on theappropriate tool bar button to select a command.



Dialog Boxes and Controls

KASEMAKE

2.3.22 Rotary Diemaking Tool Bar

The rotary diemaking tool bar provides instant access to the commands applicable to rotarydiemaking. Simply click on the corresponding tool bar button to activate the required command.

3 Dialog Boxes and ControlsDialog boxes are used extensively throughout KASEMAKE providing a means of gettinginformation about how a command should work.

They operate as small windows so can be moved, resized or closed in the normal way. Eachcontains a set of buttons, normally OK and Cancel to allow changes to be saved or abandoned.

Tabbed dialog boxes are also used. They are used in the same way as standard dialog boxes butcomprise several pages of settings placed one on top of the other. Simply click on the tab at thetop of each page to activate it. Each tab has a title to help identify which settings it controls.

Various dialog controls are used to set individual values. An explanation of how to use each ofthese controls now follows:-

3.1 Button

Buttons are used to set values and to activate commands as per tool bars. Buttons can have twostates:-

On - where they are drawn with a shaded rectangle to show they are selected

Off - where they are drawn without shading to show they are deselected

Simply click on a button with the mouse to toggle its state.

3.2 Check Box

Check boxes have a set / unset state. Again, you just click on them to toggle their value. Theirstate can be used to determine whether further options are enabled / disabled.



1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

3.3 Radio Buttons

Radio buttons are used where only one value from a set of values can be set at one time. Again,clicking on the required value will set it.

3.4 Combo Box

Combo boxes are used to select a value from a list of values. Click on the arrow to display a partof the list. Scroll through the list either with the arrow keys or using the mouse and clicking onthe scrolling arrows, or by using the mouse to drag the scroll button. Clicking on the requireditem will set it.

Combo boxes are used within the style tool bar to set the current ground etc.

3.5 Edit Control

Edit controls are used to enter text directly. Contents of an edit control can be modified byselecting the contents then retyping them. This is done by clicking at the beginning of the stringthen dragging the cursor. Each character is highlighted as the cursor moves over it. Release themouse to set the selection.

3.6 Spin Box

Spin boxes are used to set numerical values. The spin allows you to scan a range of values at a setinterval from the starting value. Click and hold an arrow to increment / decrement the currentvalue. Note: the rate at which the value within the spin box changes, accelerates the longeryou hold down the arrow key. The increment used to determine the next value in the sequencetherefore increases / decreases accordingly.

Alternatively, you can select the text within the edit part of the control and enter the new valuedirectly.



Dialog Boxes and Controls

KASEMAKE

3.7 Calculator (3D)A calculator symbol is displayed alongside numerical values where input via a calculator issupported:-

To define a value, click on the calculator symbol to reveal a calculator. Input the required numberusing the relevant numeric keys. Alternatively calculate the required number if appropriate. Toenter the value into the current field, simply choose the = key. This will close the calculator andcopy the given value.

3.8 Defining Colours (3D)Throughout the 3D, colours can be changed by clicking on the current value field which producesa drop down palette of predefined colours as shown:-

To choose a predefined colour, simply click on the required colour. This will close the palette andupdate the current value field with the new colour information.



1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

3.8.1 Other...Further colours can be defined by clicking on the word Other... in the colour palette to producethe Colors dialog comprising two tabbed pages for either standard or customised colour selection:-

3.8.1.1 StandardThe Standard page allows you to select from the entire spectrum of predefined colours ratherthan just the small selection provided in the drop down palette.

A preview area to the right displays the current colour and contrasts this with the newly selectedcolour. The individual hexagon representing the colour currently selected is also outlined in black.

Select a different colour in one of the following ways:-

• Click on the small hexagon representing the colour you require, this will then be displayed as the new colour in the preview area

• Click on Select.... A pipette will appear and as you move this over each colour hexagon it will be previewed in the new colour rectangle helping you to guage the correct colour. Click on the hexagon to select it.

3.8.1.2 CustomClick on the Custom tab to display the Custom page of settings. The Custom page as the namesuggests, allows you to define your own colours.

A preview area to the right displays the current colour and contrasts this with the newly selectedcolour. A marker is also displayed within the colour spectrum to represent the current selectedcolour. The amount of red, green and blue and the hue, saturation and luminosity values aredisplayed for the current colour. A marker is also displayed next to a sliding scale correspondingto the degree of luminosity.



Features of Right Mouse Button

KASEMAKE

.

Select a different colour in one of the following ways:-

• Click in the colour spectrum to select the colour you require, this will then be displayed as the new colour in the preview area. The RGB and HSL values and scale will also be updated.

• Change the HSL and RGB values directly either by typing an alternative value or scrolling with the arrows. Vary the intensity by sliding the arrow. Again, the new colour will be previewed as the values are changed

• Click on Select.... A pipette will appear and as you move this within the colour spectrum the colour will be previewed in the new colour rectangle helping you to guage the correct colour. Click within the colour spectrum to select the required colour.

In either case, click on OK to close the Colors dialog and update the current colour field.

4 Features of Right Mouse Button

4.1 Pop-up MenusPop-up menus are used throughout the KASEMAKE system to assist with functionality of thecurrent command. To access a pop-up menu simply click with the right mouse button within thedrawing area. A context specific menu of commands will now appear. To choose a commandsimply move the cursor to the appropriate command and click to activate it.

Several pop-up menus are available. Most of them are command specific and used to completea command or to complete a specific step within a command. The use of the command specificpop-up menus is explained as part of the individual command‘s documentation.

There is also a general pop-up menu available with most of the tools which gives quick access tocommand options, the Quick Zoom command and Reset as well as other useful commands.



1 - Getting Started

KASEMAKE

4.1.1 Quick ZoomThe Quick Zoom command is a temporary single use command available through the pop-upmenu or the View menu. It allows you to zoom into an area of a design without breaking out ofthe current command.

Activate the command from the pop-up menu. The current command is frozen and the QuickZoom command initiated.

You now need to identify two points on the diagonal of the zoom box this is done in one of twoways depending on the value selected for quickzoom in preferences. Please refer to “Quickzoom”on page 2-48

OriginalFirst identify the first corner of the area to zoom by clicking and releasing the left mouse buttonto define the point. Any of the available drawing modes can be used.

Move the cursor. A dotted selection box will begin to rubber band from the marked corner, fol-lowing the cursor to assist with identifying the area to zoom. When the box encloses therequired area, click and release the left mouse button to identify the top right corner. Again, anyof the drawing modes can be used to identify this corner.

Click & DragIf this option is set click and hold the left mouse button to define the first corner of the box.Hold down the button whilst moving the mouse and the dotted selection box will rubber bandfrom the marked corner, following the cursor to assist with identifying the area to zoom. Releasethe mouse button to define the second corner and complete the zoom box.

In both cases, the enclosed part of the design will now zoom to show this area in detail. Theoriginal command will now be restored, at the point where you called Quickzoom, ready for youto complete any further steps.

4.1.2 ResetReset is another useful command which is only available through the pop-up menu. It allows youto restart the current command at any stage, cancelling any steps already completed.

4.1.3 OptionsOptions are available for a lot of the commands. They are used to tailor individual commands.Once set options remain in effect until they are changed explicitly through the options command.Options can be accessed quickly through the pop-up menu. Activating the options command inthis way will bring up the options of the current command.

4.2 Moving The On Screen DesignThe entire design can be moved on screen by using the right mouse button in conjunction withthe SHIFT key. Simply hold down the button and SHIFT key simultaneously. Move the mouse andthe entire design will start to move. Release the mouse button and SHIFT key and the drawingwill be repositioned at the current cursor position.

4.3 Zooming The On Screen DesignTo zoom the entire design you can use the right mouse button in conjunction with the CTRL key.Hold down the right mouse button and the CTRL key. Move the cursor up the screen to zoom



Features of the Mouse Wheel

KASEMAKE

into or enlarge the design. Move the cursor down the screen to zoom out or reduce the size ofthe design. Release the mouse button and CTRL key when you are happy with the new view ofthe design.

5 Features of the Mouse WheelOperation of the mouse wheel will cause the drawing to zoom or pan as per the setting on theview page of File->Preferences.

Holding down the ALT key in conjunction with the mouse wheel toggles the effect i.e. if thepreference setting is currently zoom the effect will be to pan and vice versa.

6 System Instability ProtectionIn an attempt to make the KASEMAKE system more secure, we have built in measures to safe-guard against loss of unsaved work. KASEMAKE now regularly checks for signs of the operat-ing system becoming unstable and prompts with a warning if a problem is detected. If such aproblem does arise, it is necessary for KASEMAKE to close down. For your protection, KASE-MAKE will automatically save any design(s) being worked on to temporary files before it shutsdown.

The first time that the KASEMAKE system is loaded following an enforced shut down, theDrawing Recovery dialog will appear displaying a list of any files which were recovered and theircorresponding preview. Simply click on the name of a file to display its preview.

The recovered files are only temporary, but remain available for recovery until KASEMAKE isclosed down. You can therefore choose to identify which file(s) to recover or alternatively youcan defer recovery.

• To recover file(s), click on a file name to highlight it. For multiple selections, hold down the SHIFT key with subsequent clicks. Finally, click on OK to recover any selected designs.

• To defer recovery click on Cancel.

Please refer to “Recover Drawings” on page 2-57 for details of how to recover subsequent files.

7 Preserving SettingsIn order to preserve settings between different sessions of KASEMAKE, all settings are writtento the registry under appropriate keys.



KASEMAKE

This page is intentionally blank



KASEMAKE

2 - File Commands

1 New

Use this command to create a new design. Each new design created, or existing designopened, is placed in its own window. The windows can be resized, moved etc. as per all stan-dard Windows windows.

When you activate this function the New empty document dialog appears giving you theoption to start either a 2D drawing or a 3D scene. Click on the appropriate option andchoose OK to close the dialog.

In both cases a new window is opened ready for you to start work on your new design. Thenew window is given a default title of Drawing 1, Drawing 2 in sequence for 2D designs andScene1, Scene 2 etc for 3D designs; depending on how many new designs have been startedthis session.

If you choose to start a new 3D scene, a new window is opened as described for the 2D butin addition the display changes to the 3D view with 3D menus and toolbars.

The new window is opened in addition to any other windows already opened. To swapbetween windows use the Window menu and select the required design from the given list.For further details refer to “Changing the Active Window” in the Windows Menu chapter onpage 12-3.

You can open an existing design with the Open command.

1.1 3D Driver...The 3D Driver... option is an advanced user command allowing you to configure your displayand the display driver used by the 3D. It can also be accessed through Windows ControlPanel command.

Activating this option produces the Kasemake Options dialog:-

Command New

Menu File > New

Shortcuts Standard Toolbar

Keys Ctrl + N


Release 8.0Page 2-1

2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

1.1.1 Image Compression OptionsUse Image Compression

Set this option if you wish to apply compression to images stored in 3D files. This will result insmaller files being produced.

Clear this option to disable image compression for 3D files.

Compress Images not in useSet this option to compress images not currently on display. Reduces the amount of memorybeing used up.

Clear this option if you don’t wish to compress images not currently in use.

1.1.2 Display Driver OptionsThe Display Driver options page gives details of Drivers which are available. It also gives a con-formance report for your display adaptor to show if it is suitable for the selected driver.

Simply click on the name of the driver and the conformance report is displayed beneath the driv-ers list as shown.

In addition details about the currently selected display driver are shown in the bottom section ofthe dialog.

Release 8.0Page 2-2


New

KASEMAKE

Finally, two command buttons are also displayed, Configure to specify settings for the currentlyselected driver and Display Properties to set the properties of your display.

The Configure command is explained in the next section.

The Display Properties command produces the Display Properties configuration dialog used byWindows and accessed through Control Panel - Display. Refer to your Windows manual for fur-ther explanation.

ConfigureClick on the Configure button to display the Configuration options for the selected driver (whereavailable) as follows:

Per panel artworkSet this option if you wish to apply bitmaps to each individual panel.

Clear this option if you require one bitmap to overlay the entire design

Maximum texture sizeSet the maximum size to use for each bitmap. Click on the arrow and select from the predefinedlist of available sizes.

Stipple transparencySet this option if you wish to create a transparent effect where different colours overlap can beseen.

Clear this option if you wish overlapping colours to merge.

Use MIP mapsSet this option to generate alternative resolutions for the bitmap which can be swapped in whenzooming. Reduces processing required when zooming.

Clear this option if you do not wish to create MIP maps.


Release 8.0Page 2-3

2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Texture format (RGB)This defines the texture applied to bitmaps. Generally Automatic is the best option. To change itclick on the arrow and select from the predefined list of formats.

Texture format (RGBA)This defines the texture applied with transparency. Generally Automatic is the best option. Tochange it click on the arrow and select from the predefined list of available formats.

Depth buffer formatThis defines the depth buffer format applied to a bitmap. .Click on the arrow and select from thepredefined list of available sizes or leave as Automatic for KASEMAKE to determine it.

AntialiasingSet the level of antialiasing if any to sharpen the image. Click on the arrow and select from thepredefined list of settings.

Default back colourThis defines the default background colour used within the 3D scene. Click on the arrow and apalette of predefined colours will be displayed. Click on the required colour to select it or chooseautomatic and the system will determine the background colour. Alternatively, choose Morecolours... to define your own colour.

Front view backgroundThis defines the background colour used for the front view display of the 3D scene. Set it as"Default back colour" above.

Top view backgroundThis defines the background colour used for the top view display of the 3D scene. Set it as"Default back colour" above.

Side view backgroundThis defines the background colour used for the side view display of the 3D scene. Set it as"Default back colour" above.

Fold view backgroundThis defines the background colour used for the folding view display of the 3D scene. Set it as"Default back colour" above.

Artwork view backgroundThis defines the background colour used for the artwork display of the 3D scene. Set it as"Default back colour" above.

Playback timer periodSet the time scale for frame by frame animation. Drag the slider to increase or decrease thenumber of milliseconds to replay each frame.

2 New 2D

This command provides a quick way to start a new 2D design.

Command New 2D

Menu File > New 2D


Keys

Release 8.0Page 2-4


New 3D

KASEMAKE

Select this command and a new window is opened. In addition, the 2D menus and toolbars areautomatically loaded ready for you to start creating the new design.

The new window is given a default title of Drawing 1, Drawing 2 in sequence depending onhow many new designs have been started this session.

3 New 3D

This command provides a quick way to start a new 3D design.

Select this command and a new 3D scene is created. The display changes to the 3D view with 3Dmenus and toolbars ready for you to start creating the new design.

The new window is given a default title of Scene 1, Scene 2 in sequence depending on howmany new 3D designs have been started this session.

4 Open

Use this command to open an existing design in a new window. Both designs created withKASEMAKE, .AGD files by default and designs created with previous versions .PIC files bydefault, can be opened. 3D files including 3D scenes, .KSN files, 3D objects, .KOB files, 3Dthemes, .KTH files and 3D panoramas, .KPN files, can also be opened. Opening a 3D file willautomatically launch the 3D view with corresponding menus and toolbars. Database report files,.AGR can also be opened.

Note: 3D replay files, .VIZ files created with earlier versions of KASEMAKE can also beopened. However, as they are now obsolete, they can no longer be played to refoldyour 3D design. Instead, they are loaded as an unfolded 2D design, allowing you to re-fold and save the design in the new 3D format, where you no longer have the original.AGD design file.

For quick access to the most recently used designs refer to ”History List” on page 2-40

Activating the command opens a File Open dialog box. Set the Files of type filter to the type offile required, .AGD files are given by default. Click on the name of the required design. Thename will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the requireddesign directly into the filename entry field. If a preview exists for this design it will now be dis-played. Refer to "File Open dialog box" in next section for further details of defining the filename with this dialog box.

Click on the Options… button to display further settings. The scale and rotation parameters tobe applied to this design will now be displayed and can be altered if required. Any descriptiongiven for the design will also be displayed.

Finally, click on the Open button to bring in the design. The design will be placed in a new win-dow with the window title set to the design name. The newly opened window will automaticallybecome the active window.

Command New 3D

Menu File > New 3D


Keys

Command Open

Menu File > Open


Keys Ctrl + O


Release 8.0Page 2-5

2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

You can open multiple designs at once. Use the Window menu to switch among the currentlyopen designs. See "Changing the Active Window" in the Windows Menu chapter on page 12-3.

You can create new designs with the New command.

4.1 File Open dialog boxThe following options allow you to specify which file to open.

File NameType or select the filename you want to open. This box lists files with the extension you selectin the List Files of Type box.

List Files of TypeSelect the type of file you want to open .AGD files, .PIC files, .AGR files or 3D files (.KSN,.KOB, .KTH, .KPN) or .VIZ files.

Look InSelect the drive and directory in which KASEMAKE stores the file that you want to open byselecting from the drop down list or using the button shown to go back a level.

5 Insert

The insert command allows you to insert another design into the design you are currently work-ing on. As before, .AGD files, .PIC files, .AGR files .AGR files or 3D files (.KSN, .KOB, .KTH,.KPN) can be used.

Note: .VIZ files are no longer compatible with this command

Activating the command opens an Insert file dialog box. The Insert dialog box is very similar tothe Open dialog but requires the following additional information which can be accessed byclicking on the Options… button.

5.1 File SuffixAn optional suffix can be appended to the design name. This can be numerical or a variablewhere a parametric design is being worked on. The value is appended to the filename immedi-ately before the extension.

E.gFilename is cubic.agd file suffix is 3file cubic3.agd will be inserted.

The file suffix is particularly useful when working on a parametric design where you require aspecific non-parameterised design to be loaded depending on which flute is being used.

5.2 OriginYou will also need to specify the origin where the incoming design should be inserted within the

Command Insert

Menu File > Insert

Shortcuts Not available

Keys Ctrl + I

Release 8.0Page 2-6


Close

KASEMAKE

current design.

There are three methods of specifying the origin:-

• Original origin - positions the incoming design at the origin specified when the incoming design was originally created

• Absolute coordinates - selecting this option allows you to enter an x and y value to be used to position the incoming design

• Specify - selecting this option allows you to pick an origin point within the current design, using any of the drawing modes. With this option, you are prompted for the origin point once the dialog is closed

Click on Insert to select a file and close the dialog. If one of the first two origin methods werechosen the selected design will now be inserted. If the latter option was chosen you must pick apoint using the desired drawing mode. The design will then be inserted at this point.

6 Close

Use this command to close all windows containing the active design. If you have made anychanges to the design, KASEMAKE prompts you to save the design before you close it. If youclose a design without saving, you lose all changes made since the last time you saved it. If youare closing an untitled design and opt to save it, KASEMAKE displays the Save As dialog box toprompt you for the name of the document.

A Close command can also be generated by clicking on the close icon at the top right handcorner of the drawing window.

7 Save

Use this command to save the active design to its current name and folder. If you save a designfor the first time, KASEMAKE displays the Save As dialog box so you can name your design. Ifthe design has already been saved, i.e. is titled, the previous file name and origin are used andno further action is required.

If you want to change the name and folder of an existing design before you save it, choose theSave As command. For further information regarding the use of this dialog see the "Save As"section which follows.

8 Save As

Use this command to save and name the active design. KASEMAKE displays the Save As dialogbox so you can name your document.

Command Close

Menu File > Close

Shortcuts Click the active window's Close button

Keys ALT+F4

Command Save

Menu File > Save


Keys Ctrl + S

Command Save As

Menu File > Save As



Release 8.0Page 2-7

2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

To save a document with its existing name and directory, use the Save command.

Files of type .AGD are created by default. A preview of the file is also generated automatically asthe file is saved.

• Enter the name to be used for the design directly into the filename entry field. Alternatively, click on a similar name from the list of existing designs. The name will be copied to the filename entry field and can then be edited to the required name.

• Alternatively, the filename can be generated automatically using the next available option which copies the current value to the filename field and generates the next number in the sequence.

8.1 File Save As dialog boxThe following options allow you to specify the name and location of the file you're about tosave:

File NameType a new filename to save a design with a different name. A filename can contain anextension of up to three characters. KASEMAKE adds the extension you specify in the Saveas Type box.

Save As TypeSelect the type of file you want to create .AGD files or database report files, .AGR files

Save InSelect the drive and directory in which KASEMAKE stores the file that you want to create byselecting from the drop down list or using the button shown to go back a level.

8.2 OriginYou will also need to specify the origin to be stored with the current design. This will be used byother commands e.g. File->Insert to position the design.

There are three methods of specifying the origin:-

• Min X,Y - stores the bottom left corner of the design as its origin

• Absolute coordinates - selecting this option allows you to enter an x and y value to be stored as the origin

• Specify - selecting this option allows you to pick any point within the design, using any of the drawing modes. With this option, you are prompted for the origin point once the Save As dialog is closed

8.2.1 Next AvailableClick on the Next Available button to choose its current setting as the required filename. Youwill be prompted to accept the current value. Choose Yes to copy the current value to the file-name field and automatically generate the next number in the sequence. Choosing No will leavethe current setting unchanged and not update the filename field.

Release 8.0Page 2-8


Send To Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

8.2.2 DatabaseSet the Update database from drawing option to update the database with any informa-tion held for the border.

Choose the Set fields... option to set up which fields in the datatbase are updated. Clicking onthis option produces a dialog containing a list of database fields with a corresponding checkbox. Set or clear the check boxes to identify the required fields. Finally, choose OK to save thenew field selection or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

See also, Transfer from border to database on page 13-7 for further details.

8.2.3 Save Selected Elements OnlyYou can perform a partial save by setting this option. Only the elements which are selected willthen be saved. This option should be cleared if you wish to save the entire design.

This option is only available where elements have been selected before File->Save As was acti-vated.

8.2.4 Email DrawingYou can save the drawing as an email attachment by setting this option. A new email will bestarted and the file automatically included as an attachment if this option is set. This optionshould be cleared if you do not wish to save the design as an email attachment.

8.2.5 Drawing DescriptionIf required, type a description of the design in the Drawing Description entry box.

Click on Save to set the filename and close the dialog. If one of the first two origin methodswere chosen the design will now be saved. If the latter option was chosen you must pick a pointusing the desired drawing mode. The design will then be saved with this point as its origin.

9 Send To Sub-MenuSend To is based on the Windows Send To command and allows you to quickly send a file to avaritety of locations including, your desktop, another person using e-mail, or the My Documentsfolder.

The list of available locations correspond to the folders located in the Windows Send To folder sowill vary. Further locations can be identified using Windows commands.

Click on Send To then move over the required location to highlight it. Click again to identify thelocation. The current design will now be sent to the corresponding location / application accord-ing to the option chosen.

If the design has not previously been saved, you will first be asked if you wish to save it. Uponconfirmation, you will be prompted for a filename in the usual way. Once the design is saved,the Send To command will be carried out.

10 Publish/e-Mail

This command provides access to a web / e-mail publishing wizard . The wizard will guide youthrough the necessary steps to publish file(s) on the World Wide Web via FTP or HTTP, to publish

Command Publish/e-Mail

Menu File > Publish/e-Mail



Release 8.0Page 2-9

2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

files on your local network, or to send files to customers / clients via e-mail.

First determine which of these options you wish to follow. Activate this command. The web / e-mail publishing wizard will appear which will guide you through the appropriate steps to com-plete the requested task.

The Next and Back buttons are provided to allow you to proceed to the next stage or to go backto previous stages respectively.

10.1 Publish to the World Wide WebClick the Publish to the World Wide Web button.

10.1.1 Web AddressNow you have to choose the type of Web Server you are publishing to. You may need the adviceof a system administrator at this stage. Your choices are FTP, HTTP or HTTPS. HTTP and HTTPS areavailable if your web server has the Microsoft Front Page Server extensions installed - this is thecase for most Microsoft Internet Information Server servers or other web servers such as Apachewith this add-on installed. You will normally pay extra to server providers for Front Page Serverextensions on Apache web servers. If you only have FTP access to your web server you will usethis option. This is often the case for free service providers such as FreeServe.

Type the web address you would like to publish to, such as uploads.myserver.com/mydir. Do notinclude the ftp://, http:// or https:// prefix in this box otherwise publication will fail. Once youhave typed the address, click the This is the correct URL button to proceed, otherwise click theI’ve changed my mind button which will take you back to the start.

10.1.2 User Name and PasswordYour web server will usually need a user name and password. Type these into the boxes and clickThis is the correct user-name and password to continue , or click the I’ve changed my mind but-ton which will take you back to the start.

Finally, click the Go to the next wizard page to confirm button to continue or click the I’vechanged my mind button which will take you back to the start.

10.2 Publish to a server on my local networkClick the Publish to a server on my local network button.

10.2.1 File PathFirstly, you supply the path to the directory you wish to publish in. This is a UNC path whichmeans that you can also specify the machine name by putting two slashes infront of the path.

For instance \\server\publishdir will publish to a share called publishdir on the server machine.You can also specify a directory on your own machine such as c:\publishdir. Note that the direc-tory must exist already otherwise publication will fail. The target machine must be visible on yournetwork (open network neighbourhood to find out) and you must have access rights to theshare in order for publication to succeed. Access rights are normally granted by your networkadministrator. Once you have typed the path, click the This is the correct file path button to con-tinue, or click the I’ve changed my mind button which will take you back to the start .

10.2.2 User Name and PasswordPresently this page is ignored, but will be used in later versions to specify the user name andpassword to access a share on your network. Click the This is the correct user-name button toproceed or click the I’ve changed my mind button which will take you back to the start.

Click the Go to the next wizard page to confirm button to continue or click the I’ve changed mymind button which will take you back to the start.



Project Management

KASEMAKE

10.3 Send files via e-MailClick the Send files via e-Mail button.

10.3.1 E-Mail AddressNow supply the e-Mail address of the recipient you wish to receive your publication. Only one e-Mail address is allowed at the moment. All of the files will be sent as attachments in a single e-Mail.

If you are happy with the e-Mail address you have typed, click the This is the correct e-Mailaddress button or click the I’ve changed my mind button which will take you back to the start.

10.3.2 Profile NameChoose the profile name used to send e-Mail on your computer, and the password requiredalong with this profile. If you choose an invalid profile name, you will be prompted for one lateranyway. However, you can find a valid profile name by opening Control Panel on your machine,clicking the Mail Icon, then clicking on the Show Profiles button. If you are happy with the pro-file and password click the This is the correct profile and password button, otherwise click theI’ve changed my mind button which will take you back to the start.

Click the Go to the next wizard page to confirm button to continue or click the I’ve changed mymind button which will take you back to the start.

10.4 Are you sureYou should now see information relating to the publication you are about to make. If you aresending e-mail, it is imperative that you shut Microsoft Outlook before clicking Next otherwisepublication will fail. Click next to begin publishing your files.

10.5 PublishingYour files are published and any error or success messages are displayed. After reading the mes-sages, click the Finish button to exit the wizard and return to the system.

11 Project ManagementKASEMAKE supports project management which allows you to effectively organise jobs madeup of multiple designs.

Designs often undergo a series of revisions before final approval by the customer. The facility tocreate and manage revisions of a design is provided to support this requirement.

A project is made up of one or more designs which can be stored within a folder or as part ofthe main project. Multiple folders are allowed. Each design can be a one off or comprise of oneor more revisions. Each design and revision has a set of properties associated with it which con-tains information about its creation as well as a preview of the individual design. Notes about aspecific design can also be stored.

11.1 Project BarThe project bar is opened when either a new project is started or an existing project is opened.The project bar is positioned at the left hand edge of the drawing area by default, although itcan be repositioned or floated if required.

The project bar consists of a command area where commands for maintaining a project are pro-vided in the form of buttons and drop downs. It is also made up of a viewing area where theproject components for the current project are displayed in a tree style layout.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

11.1.1 Project Tree The project tree displays the hierarchy of designs and folders of designs which make up the cur-rent project. There are four basic nodes which make up the project as follows:-

• Project - At the top level is the project name itself.• Folder - Beneath the project you can have folders used for grouping designs or further fold-

ers. • Design - the .agd drawings for the current project stored as part of the main project or as

part of a folder.• Revision - a design can have one or more revisions each linked to a .agd drawing file. The main project and individual folders can be expanded using the + icon or collapsed using the- icon as per Windows Explorer. Double clicking on a project / folder name has the same effect.

Designs can be opened in the drawing area for examination or amendment by double clickingon the required design name.

Right clicking on a tree node will pop up a context menu of commands depending upon thetype of node.

11.1.1.1 Project Context MenuThe project context menu comprises the following commands :-

Edit LabelThis command enables you to change the name of the project. Click on the current project nameand an edit box with cursor will appear. You can now edit the name as required. Use the enterkey to accept the new name and leave edit mode.

Print AllThis command prints each design within the project in turn.

PropertiesThis command displays the project properties. They are displayed in a property view beneath theproject bar by default. They can be repositioned or floated as per the project bar.

The properties for a project consist of a notes page containing a reference field and any notes tobe stored for this project.

11.1.1.2 Design Context MenuThe design context menu comprises four commands as follows:-

OpenThis command opens the current design in the drawing area readyfor amendments or examina-tion.

Edit LabelThis command enables you to change the name of the design. Click on the current design nameand an edit box with cursor will appear. You can now edit the name as required. Use the enterkey to accept the new name and leave edit mode.

PropertiesThis command displays the design properties. They are displayed in a tabbed page layout. Eachtab contains a description of the properties on that page. Click on a tab to display the propertiesfor that tab type. Properties consist of :-

Dates - Information about when created and who by.

Preview - A preview of the design

Notes - Provision for a reference and notes to be entered for this design



Project Management

KASEMAKE

Drawing Info. - Statistics about the current design including overall dimensions and rulelength.

Upgrade File FormatThis command upgrades any designs made with a previous version of KASEMAKE to the sameformat as those produced in the current version. This ensures that revisions of the design can becreated. Simply activate the command and the current design will be converted.

Create RevisionThis command saves the current design as the latest revision of itself. Simpy activate this com-mand a new revision will then appear beneath the design with a default revision number andtitle and the current date and time. The title can be changed. The drawing representing this revi-sion is created with the same title as the current design but a # followed by the revision numberis appended to differentiate it from the current design. e.g. Base.agd#1 is revision 1 of designBase.

Note: You can only create a revision once a design has been saved to disk as a result of savingthe project.

11.1.1.3 Revision Context MenuThe revision context menu comprises three commands as follows:-

OpenThis command opens the selected revision for the current design in the drawing area ready forexamination. The revision is read only.

Edit LabelThis command enables you to change the name of the revision. Click on the current revisionname and an edit box with cursor will appear. You can now edit the name as required. Use theenter key to accept the new name and leave edit mode.

PropertiesThis command displays the properties of the revision. They are displayed in a tabbed page lay-out. The properties are the same as those for a design but relate to the current revision of thedesign only. See “Design Context Menu” on page 12.

Set ActiveThis command makes the current revision active which means that amendments can be made.The selected revision becomes the new current design overwriting the current version of it.When the command is activated you will be prompted “Create a new revision from the currentdrawing?” If you choose “Yes”, the current version of the design will be saved as the latest revi-sion before the selected revision becomes the current version of the design. If you choose “No”,the current version of the design will be replaced bythe selected revision and any unsavedchanges will be lost.

11.1.2 Project Bar CommandsBefore activating a project bar command you should ensure that you click on the design / foldername you wish to work with as all the commands work on the currently selected design / folder.

The project bar gives access to the following commands.:-

11.1.2.1 Create New DocumentThis is a drop down list of commands available for adding a document to the current project orfolder. First make sure that the project or folder you wish to add to is active by clicking on itsname in the project view. Click on the arrow to display the available options then drag the cursorto the required command and click on it to select it. The icon corresponding to the chosen com-mand will be displayed. Each command is now explained:-



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Blank DrawingThis command creates a blank document in the drawing area ready for a new design, adding itto the current folder or direct to the current project depending upon which is active. Simply dragthe cursor over the blank drawing option and a new drawing is added with a default name.

ParametricRuns a parametric standard and adds it to the current project or folder. Activating this commanddisplays the Run Dialog. Simply enter the name of the required standard in the usual way and setany options as appropriate. Click on Run to display the chosen standard. Full details of running astandard can be found in the Parametrics section of this manual. See “Run” on page 7-1.

Insert FilesThis command will insert 2D and 3D drawings into the current project or folder. Select this com-mand and the File Insert dialog will be displayed. You should now select the type of file you wishto insert and the filename in the usual way. Finally select Open to display the design and insert itinto the current project or folder. For full details of how to specify a file to insert refer to the FileOpen command in this section. See “File Open dialog box” on page 6.

11.1.2.2 New FolderThis command allows you to create a folder into which you can add related designs to keepthem together. Select the command. A new folder is automatically added to the project or cur-rent folder. A default name is given which you can accept by hitting the enter key. Alternativelytype an appropriate name and hit enter to set it. The new folder now becomes the current folderto enable you to start adding designs.

11.1.2.3 Edit LabelThis command allows you to alter a folder or design name. First click on the folder or designname to select it. Now activate this command. The label will be removed and you can now typethe required name. Press enter to store the new label.

11.1.2.4 Delete FilesThis command allows you to delete a folder or design from the current project. First click on thefolder or design name to select it. Now activate this command. The design or folder and alldesigns within the folder will now be removed. No confirmation is required so this commandshould be used with caution.

11.1.2.5 Show Tiled ViewThis command opens all the designs contained within the current project including thosegrouped into folders. They are displayed in a tiled format in the drawing area.

11.1.2.6 Save ProjectThis is a drop down list containing a subset of the commands which are provided by the Files->Project Menu. They include commands for saving the current project as well as starting a newproject.. Click on the arrow to display the available options then drag the cursor to the requiredcommand and click on it to select it. The icon corresponding to the chosen command will be dis-played. Each command is now explained:-

New ProjectThis command creates a new empty project, placing it above any currently opened projects inthe project bar. Simply drag the cursor over this option and a dialog will appear asking for thename and location for the new project. Whatever name you choose a folder with the givenname will be automatically created to hold the designs for the new project. The folder will becreated as a subfolder of the location you specify. Once you have entered the project name andchosen an appropriate location click on OK to create the new project view ready for you to adddesigns.

SaveThis command saves the entire contents of the current project tree to disk. The filenames used tostore each design are appended to the design label in the project tree to reflect they have been



Project Management

KASEMAKE

saved. A .PRJ file is created for the project using the project name and location previously speci-fied. A .AGD file is also created for each design in the project. Activate this command andKASEMAKE will save the files without need for further intervention.

Save AsThis command saves the entire contents of the project to a new location changing the projectname as specified. After activating this command you will be prompted to enter a new projectname and a location for the project. Type in appropriate values then click on OK. A new folderwill now be created with the given project name as a subfolder of the given location. A .PRJ filewill be created with the project name and a .AGD file will be created for each of the designs inthe project. Options are also available to create a database record for the project and also to cre-ate records for each design within the project. The project tree will be updated to show the newproject name.

Pack ProjectThis command allows you to compress all the designs in a project into one file. This function isuseful when you wish to send a project to another KASEMAKE user or you wish to archive aproject. Activate this command. You will now be required to specify a filename for the com-pressed .CAB file. Enter a name in the usual way. A single cabinet file with this name will now becreated containing a compressed version of all the files in the project. The Unpack Project com-mand explained in the next section can be used to restore a .CAB file.

11.2 Project Sub-MenuThe project menu gives access to the project management commands which allow you to createand manipulate any projects.

11.2.1 New Project...

This command creates a new project. Activate this command. The following dialog will now bedisplayed:-

Command New Project...

Menu File > Project > New Project...

Shortcuts Project Bar



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Project NameType in an appropriate value for the project name.

Alternatively, if you wish the name to be automatically generated, click on the Next Availablebutton. You will be prompted with the next available value for the project name. Click on Yes ifyou wish to accept this value, or No if you wish to type your own name.

It is also possible to associate the project name with a database field. Please refer to “AssociateProject Name” on page 13-12 for further details.

Project LocationA default location for the project will automatically be displayed. This is determined from theProject Folder setting in Preferences->File Locations. See “File Locations” on page 46.

If you wish to use an alternative location, you can enter the required project location directly.Alternatively, click on the ... button to display the Browse for Folder dialog to assist you withidentifying the required location. Click on the appropriate folder names until the required loca-tion is displayed. Finally click on OK to enter the location automatically.

It is also possible to associate the project location with a database field. Please refer to “AssociateProject Location” on page 13-12 for further details.

Add Project to DatabaseIf you wish to create a database record for the project, set this option otherwise clear it.

Add Drawing(s) to DatabaseIf you wish to create a database record for each design in the project, set this option otherwiseclear it.

Full PathA folder with the same name as that given for the project, is automatically created to store thenew project and its related design files. This is placed beneath the folder specified by the projectlocation. The Full Path field is used to give visual confirmation of the final location of the project.

Finally, click on OK to create the project view showing the new empty project tree ready for youto add your designs.

As more than one project can be opened at once, the new project is placed above any currentlyopened projects in the project bar.

A disk folder with the chosen project name is automatically created to hold the designs for thisproject. It is created as a subfolder of the folder specified for the project location.

11.2.2 Open Project...

This command enables you to open an existing project. Activate the command and an Open dia-log will appear asking for the name of the project. to open. Select the name in the usual waythen click on OK to open the requested project in the project view displaying its contents in atree structure ready for you to examine and add to your designs.

As more than one project can be opened at once, the project is placed above any currentlyopened projects in the project bar.

Command Open Project...

Menu File > Project > Open Project...




Project Management

KASEMAKE

11.2.3 Close Project

This command closes the current project. Activate the command. If there are any unsavedchanges to the project you will be asked whether to save the project first. Click on “Yes” to savethe changes or “No” to close the project and abandon any changes. If no changes have beenmade the project and associated files will be closed and the project view removed from theproject bar.

11.2.4 Save Project

This command saves the entire contents of the current project tree to disk. The filenames used tostore each design are appended to the design label in the project tree to reflect they have beensaved. A .PRJ file is created for the project using the project name and location previously speci-fied. A .AGD file is also created for each design in the project. Activate this command andKASEMAKE will save the files without need for further intervention.

11.2.5 Save Project As...

This command saves the entire contents of the project to a new location changing the projectname as specified.

Activate this command. A dialog will now be displayed requesting the name and location for theproject file. Please refer to “New Project...” on page 15 for further details.

Once the project details are confirmed, a new folder will be created with the given project nameas a subfolder of the given location. A .PRJ file will be created with the project name and a .AGDfile will be created for each of the designs in the project. If applicable, a database record corre-sponding to the project and one for each of the designs within it will also be created. Finally, theproject tree will be updated to show the new project name.

11.2.6 Create Preview

This command creates a preview for the project which will be displayed when the databaserecord corresponding to that project is viewed. The contents of the preview will correspond towhichever project design is visible when the command is activated.

Activate this command to automatically create a corresponding preview file.

Command Close Project

Menu File > Project > Close Project


Command Save Project

Menu File > Project > Save Project


Command Save Project As...

Menu File > Project > Save Project As...


Command Create Preview

Menu File > Project > Create Preview




2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

11.2.7 Pack Project...

This command allows you to compress all the designs in a project into one file. This function isuseful when you wish to send a project to another KASEMAKE user or you wish to archive aproject. Activate this command. You will now be required to specify a filename for the com-pressed .CAB file. Enter a name in the usual way. A single cabinet file with this name will now becreated containing a compressed version of all the files in the project.

11.2.8 Unpack Project...

The Unpack Project command is used to restore a project from a .CAB file. Activate the com-mand. You will now be prompted for the name of the .CAB cabinet file to unpack. Enter the file-name in the usual way. Click on OK. You will now be asked where you wish to place the restoredfiles. Enter the location for the project. The project will now be decompressed and the .prj fileand .agd files stored in a subfolder with the project name below the location you specified. Theproject can now be loaded using the Open Project command as detailed previously. See “OpenProject...” on page 16.

12 Revision Info...

This command allows you to view all the revision information for the current design. Activate thecommand . An Edit Revisions dialog is now displayed. A list of the revisions for the currentdesign is displayed to the left of the dialog. Details of the current revision are displayed in atabbed format at the right of the dialog. The details include dates revision was created andamended, a preview of the revision and any notes held for that revision. Click on the corre-sponding tab to view the page of details. A full description of the revision details available aredescribed for Project Properties. See “Design Context Menu” on page 12.

13 Print

Use this command to print the current design using one of your standard Windows printer driv-ers. This command presents a Print dialog box, where you may specify the number of copies, thedestination printer, whether you are printing to file or directly to the printer and other printersetup options.

Further print options are available through the Print->Options command on page 2-20.

Command Pack Project...

Menu File > Project > Pack Project...


Command Unpack Project...

Menu File > Project > Unpack Project...


Command Revision Info...

Menu File > Revision Info...


Command Print

Menu File > Print


Keys Ctrl + P



Print Preview

KASEMAKE

13.1 Print dialog boxThe following options allow you to specify how the design should be printed:

PrinterThis is the active printer and printer connection. Choose from the drop down list. Details aboutthe selected printer are then displayed.

Print RangeIf you choose a scale to print for your design rather than Auto scale, the design will normallyoverlap onto more than one page.

The Print Range allows you to determine which pages of the design to print.

•Choose All to print the entire design.

•Choose Pages and set the start page and end page to be printed by typing directly into the corresponding edit boxes.

•Choose Selection if you just want to print selected items.

For details of scaling refer to the Print->Options command on page 2-20.

CopiesSpecify the number of copies of the design you want to print.

PropertiesAll other printer settings are accessed through the Properties button. Click on this to accessthe properties of the selected printer. The resulting dialog is dependent upon the printerselected.

Refer to your printer manual for a full explanation of these settings.

FileSet the print to file option if you wish to send the design to file rather than directly to theprinter.

If you have chosen to print to file the Print to File dialog will appear after the Print dialog isclosed. This requests the file name for the saved printed design. The default extension is .PRN.Simply set the filename then click on Save to create the print file. See "File Save As dialog box"on page 2-8 for further details on setting a filename.

13.2 Print Progress DialogThe Printing dialog box is shown during the time that KASEMAKE is sending output to theprinter. The page number indicates the progress of the printing.

To abort printing, choose Cancel.

14 Print Preview

Use this command to display the active design, as it would appear when printed. It is useful forchecking that scaling and positioning are correct.

Command Print Preview

Menu File > Print Preview




2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

When you choose this command, the main window will be replaced with a print preview win-dow in which the design will be displayed in its printed format. The print preview toolbar offersyou options to zoom in and out of the design, to examine the different pages which make upthe design, dependent upon scaling chosen. You can also use this command to initiate a printjob.

14.1 Print Preview ToolbarThe print preview toolbar offers you the following options:

PrintBring up the print dialog box, to start a print job. Restores the normal view of the design.

Next PageTake a look at the next page of the design. Only available where scaling is selected.

Prev PageTake a look at the previous page of the design. Only available where scaling is selected.

Two Page / One PageToggles between a two page representation of the design or a single page representation ofthe design.

Zoom InTake a closer look at the current page.

Zoom OutTake a look at more of the current page.

CloseReturn from print preview to the editing window.

15 Print Options

The print options supplement the other printer specific settings set through the File->Printcommand.

Activating this command produces the Print Options dialog, where you specify the scaling andalignment of the printed output.

ScaleSelect the required scale. Autoscale means the design will be adjusted to fill the page.

UnitsIf a scaling ratio is selected, you will need to specify the type of units you are working with.Click on the appropriate value.

Whole Drawing Check this option to print the whole design rather than just the section of design currentlywithin the drawing area. This is only applicable where auto scaling has been selected.

Command Print Options

Menu File > Print Options




Page Setup

KASEMAKE

CentredCheck this option to centre the design on the printed page. Alternatively, uncheck this optionif you are using a large output device driven by a Windows printer driver. This will position thedesign in the bottom left corner of the page.

Merge from DatabaseThis option is only available when printing .AGR files. If checked, any fields within the reportfile which link to the database, will have the corresponding information added for each recordin the database.

Click on Print... to invoke the File->Print command. Alternatively, click OK to save the set-tings for future use or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

16 Page Setup

The page setup command supplements the other printer specific settings set through theFile->Print command and File->Print Options command.

Use this command to define the page specific settings. Activating this command produces thePage Setup dialog box.

After defining the page setup, use the Print command to bring up the Print dialog box, tostart a print job.

16.1 Page Setup dialog box

Paper SizeSelect the size of paper that the design is to be printed on.

Paper SourceSome printers offer multiple trays for different paper sources. Specify the tray here.

OrientationChoose Portrait or Landscape.

MarginsSet individual margins if required, by clicking in the corresponding edit box and selecting thecurrent value, then typing the new value.

Printer…Choose this option to select the destination printer and its connection. A further Page Setupdialog box will be displayed with the following options:

Printer

Select the printer you want to use from the currently installed printers shown in the dropdown list. You can install printers and configure ports using Windows Control Panel.

Network...

If you wish to select a printer from the network, choose this option. A dialog will thenappear to help you to locate a printer from those available through your network.

Command Page Setup

Menu File > Page Setup

Toolbar Button Standard Toolbar



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Properties

Displays a dialog box where you can make additional choices about printing, specific tothe type of printer you have selected.

17 Plot

The Plot command allows you to produce a hard copy of your design on any available plotter.You may need to run the command View->Plotters to install your plotter if you have notdone this previously. Refer to "Plotters" on page 10-14 in the Views Menu chapter for furtherdetails.

Only the visible elements of the design will be plotted. The bottom left of the design is placed atthe bottom left of the sheet of paper being used. The design will be plotted one ground at atime., in order of grounds, i.e. ground 0 then ground 1 etc.

Activate this command. The Plotting Setup dialog now appears:-

Command Plot

Menu File > Plot




Plot

KASEMAKE

This displays the current plotter settings together with a preview of the design as it will appearon the selected sheet of paper utilising the current settings. The white area represents the cur-rent sheet of paper selected. The overall size of the design is also displayed to assist in determin-ing the correct scale to use.

17.1 Plotter Settings

17.1.1 PlotterSet the plotter to use from the drop down list of available plotters. If the plotter you wish to usedoes not appear in the drop down list, you will need to add the plotter first using the View->Plotters command. Refer to "Plotters" on page 10-14 in the Views Menu chapter for furtherdetails of installing additional plotters.

17.1.1.1 Plotter SetupFor certain plotters the Setup button is available which when accessed allows further parametersto be defined specific to that plotter. For example if the 3020 Rotary Mill is selected as the plotterto be used, accessing the Setup command will produce the following dialog:-

Set the appropriate values by typing directly or using the arrows to scroll. Click on OK to acceptthe new settings or Cancel to abandon any changes.

17.1.2 ProfileYou can define a tool profile for certain plotting tables. The profile controls the speed and depthof the tool. Some plotters only support pen speed, others only support pen depth.

This option only becomes available when you select a plotter which supports profiles.

Select the required profile from the drop down list. If you wish to add a new profile, or alter anexisting profile, click on Edit...



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

The pen settings dialog, comprising a table of settings for each tool on the currently selectedplotter which make up the current profile, now appears.

To display a different profile, select an alternative from the drop down list. The correspondingsettings will appear.

Three command buttons are also displayed.

Add NewChoose this command to add a new profile. The Add New Profile dialog will appear. Type in aname for your profile. Click on OK to accept the new profile adopting the settings of the previ-ous displayed profile. Click on Cancel to return to the tool details dialog and ignore any changes.

DeleteUse this command to delete the current profile. Confirmation is required.

OKUse this command to save any changes and return to the Plotter Setup dialog.

The tool details can be set up as follows:-

17.1.2.1 Plot Circles BelowFor certain materials, cutting small circles can produce a spiral effect where the start and enddon’t meet. This option is provide to allow the circle to be cut from the start point in eitherdirection ensuringa complete circle is produced.

Enable this option to plot circles twice, in the manner described above, if their radius is belowthe given value. When this option is set, the radius control is enabled. You can now specify thevalue to use for the radius or leave it at the current setting.

17.1.2.2 Lock X and Y DepthIf this option is set, and tool depths are supported by the current plotter, the Depth in X andDepth in Y will always be equal. Changing one automatically sets the other.

17.1.2.3 Pass NumberA different profile can be determined for each tool pass. For example, when cutting very denseboard, it is not always possible to cut through it in one pass without deflecting the blade orindeed breaking it. The problem is solved by allowing more than one pass with the tool. Differ-ent depths are specified for each pass to ensure the required depth of cut is achieved.



Plot

KASEMAKE

Set the pass number to show and alter the settings for a specific pass as described next.

17.1.2.4 SpeedA percentage of the maximum speed to use for this tool. To change the value, click in the speedcolumn. If speed is supported by the selected plotter, a spin control now appears allowing youto scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and type the new value.

17.1.2.5 Depth In XThe depth in mm to penetrate the material for movement of the tool in the X direction. Tochange the value, click in the corresponding column. If pen depths are supported, a spin controlnow appears allowing you to scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and typethe new value.

17.1.2.6 Depth In YThe depth in mm to penetrate the material for movement of the tool in the Y direction. Tochange the value, click in the corresponding column. If pen depths are supported, a spin controlnow appears allowing you to scroll the value. Alternatively, click on the value to select it and typethe new value.

17.1.2.7 Crossover AngleThe angle in degrees to use to differentiate between movement in the X direction and move-ment in the Y direction, when deciding which depth to apply. Movement less than the crossoverangle is considered to be movement in the X direction. Movement greater than the crossoverangle is considered to be movement in the Y direction.

17.1.2.8 WidthWhere a laser is used, the width of cut to use can be specified. To change the value, click in thecorresponding column. If width is supported, a spin control now appears allowing you to scrollthe value. Alternatively, click on the current value to select it and type the new value.

17.1.3 Optimise ChoiceOptimise Choice determines the optimization method to apply to the current plot. It is setthrough the Optimise And Order command. See “Optimise and Order” on page 8-14.

17.1.4 Common LineCommon lines exist where one line overlays another and are a natural consequence of certaingeometric techniques. Normally they exist within a design without having any undesired effect.Unfortunately, when it comes to sample making / die making they can cause problems. A Com-mon Line function which allows these problem lines to be removed, has therefore been inte-grated into the Plot command to remove any such lines before the sample / die is made.

If you wish to remove common lines , set the Common Line check box.

When this setting is chosen, the Options button becomes available. Simply click on the Optionsbutton to display the Common Line Options dialog:-



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Merge Touching Lines

If you answer Yes all lines in the same direction with a common start or end point will bejoined into one as part of the sorting process.

If you answer No then this joining process will not take place.

Explode Groups

If you answer Yes any grouping information for your current design will be removed and onlysingle elements will remain.

If you answer No the grouping information will be retained.

Remove Zero Length Items

It is possible for a drawing to contain elements of zero length as a result of a particularsequence of commands. This option allows you to tidy up these unnecessary elements.

If you answer Yes any zero length items will automatically be removed if found.

If you answer No zero length items will be ignored.

Finally, click on OK to set the options to use.

Note: Common Line removal is carried out automatically upon confirmation of the Plot...Command.

17.1.5 Paper SizeSet the size of paper you wish to work with either by selecting from a predefined range of sizesor by typing the values directly.

To choose a predefined size, set the predefined paper size check box. Select the paper size to usefrom the available list of sizes.

To define your own paper size, clear the predefined paper size check box. Enter the x and ydimensions for your sheet of paper in the corresponding boxes.

The design will be redisplayed to show the new sheet size and the position and size of thedesign with respect to the new paper size.

17.1.6 ScaleSet the scale to use from the available list. Auto scale will adjust the design to fill the sheet ofpaper being used. Again, the design will be redisplayed to show the effect of the change inscale.

17.1.7 UnitsYou should set the units that you are using by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Theoverall size and margins will be redisplayed to reflect the chosen units.

17.1.8 MarginsA left and bottom margin can be set if required. The margins only have an effect if the drawingis not centred. Click on the current value to select it then retype the required value.

17.1.9 Centred InThe design can be centred in X, in Y or in both. Click on the X / Y buttons to set the option on oroff. The margins are ignored if centring is applied. The design will be redisplayed to show theeffect of the Centred In settings.



Plot

KASEMAKE

17.1.10 Flip AboutThe design can be mirrored about the horizontal axis, vertical axis or both. Click on the horizon-tal / vertical buttons to set the options on or off. The design will be redisplayed to show theeffect of the Flip About settings.

17.1.11 RotationA design can be rotated by a factor of 90 degrees to follow flute or grain direction or toachieve a better fit when plotted. The design can be rotated form 0 degrees up to 270 degreesthen resorts back to 0 degrees.

Click on the +90 button to rotate the design an additional 90 degrees. The design will be redis-played to show its positioning within the plotted sheet.

Note: The original design is not affected by this command.

17.1.12 BoundsYou can select to change the bounding rectangle of your design which determines its positionand scale on the current plotter page. Click on the option required from :-

• Absolute - all elements within the design will be taken into account regardless of whether they are on view or not.

• Visible - only those elements which are currently visible will be taken into accountThe dotted rectangle representing the plotting area and the position of your design will updatein the preview area to reflect the option you have chosen.

17.1.13 LinestyleYou can select to plot everything in a single given linestyle, or to plot in the linestyle the elementsare drawn in. Click on the single linestyle check box to set / unset the option. A tick will appearto show that it is set. Choose the linestyle to use by clicking on the arrow to reveal a list of line-styles. Click on the arrows to scroll to the required value. Click on the required value to select it.No visual changes will be shown.

17.2 Completing Plotter SetupOnce adjustments to the settings are complete. You can select one of the following to proceed:-

17.2.1 OKClick on OK to store the new settings ready for future plot commands. The Plotter Setup dialogwill close and the settings will be saved. No plotting will be performed.

17.2.2 CancelClick on Cancel to abandon any changes to the settings. The Plotter Setup dialog will close andthe previous settings will be restored. No plotting will be performed.

17.2.3 Plotter…Choose this option to select the plotter and plotter specific properties.

17.2.4 PlotThe Plot command allows you to send the design to the selected plotter, using the current set-tings.

Click on Plot to activate the Plot dialog. This dialog confirms the status and type of plotterselected and the port to which the plotter is connected.

You can change the plotter at this stage if required, by clicking on the arrow to open the Namedrop down list. Scrolling through the available list of plotters and clicking on the name of the



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

required plotter to select it. You can also view the selected plotters properties, by clicking on theProperties button to access the Properties dialog specific to that plotter. Refer to "Plotters" onpage 10-14 in the Views Menu chapter for further details on changing plotter properties.

The Plot dialog also has a Plot to File option. Click on the corresponding check box if you wishyour plotter output to be directed to file, rather than directly to the selected plotter.

If you wish to plot more than one copy, click on the Enable buffer repeating check box to set it.

Finally, if you wish to proceed with the plot, click on OK. If you have selected to plot to file, youwill now be prompted for the filename. Enter the filename in the usual way, see ""Save As"" onpage 2-7 for a full explanation. Click on Save to proceed. The design will now be output to theselected plotter or be sent to the named file if this option has been set.

Click on Cancel to abandon the plot command.

18 Plot Selected

This command plots only selected elements within a design. Before you can activate this com-mand you should identify the elements you wish to plot.

Once the elements are identified. Activate the command. The command now works as per theFile->Plot command described in the previous section but uses only the selected elements. See“Plot” on page 2-22.

19 Import

The import command provides a way of loading designs stored in an alternative file format tothe standard .AGD and .PIC design file format. These can be files produced by other systems.

The following formats are currently supported:-

1 CF2 - Common file format files

2 PLT - HP Artwork files

3 HGL - HP Graphics Language files

4 EPS - Postscript files including those with tiff header files

5 PDF - Adobe portable document format files

6 DWG - AutoCad Drawing File

7 DXF - Data Exchange format files

8 RP2 - Report Files 32 bit version only

9 RP1 - DXF conversion report files

10 RPT - Report Files compatible with 16 bit version

11 EMF – Windows enhanced metafiles

Command Plot Selected

Menu File > Plot Selected


Command Import

Menu File > Import




Import

KASEMAKE

12 DDS – Ddes format files

13 DAT - IPDS format files

14 LAY – IPDS layout files

15 DSP – MasterCAD design files

16 DAT – MasterCAD layout files

17 M – BCSI PD2000 design files

18 N – Elcede layout files

19 S – Elcede design files

20 DD3 - Ddes version 3 format files

Activating the Files->Import command produces an Import dialog. This works in the sameway as the Open dialog. Set the Files of type filter to the required file format.

Set the preview option to display a preview of the currently selected file or clear this option if thisfacility is not required.

If you are importing several files and wish to import them all into the current design set theImport to current drawing, check box. Alternatively, clear this check box to import each file to anindividual design.

Set the directory. Now specify one or more files to be imported holding down the SHIFT/CTRLkeys to enable multiple selection. Finally, click on Open to import the requested files. Refer to"Open" on page 2-5 for further details on setting the directory and filename.

If you have opted to import the file(s) to the current drawing, you will now be prompted for anorigin for each of the selected files as it is imported. Simply select an appropriate origin whenprompted using any of the available drawing modes. The imported file will then be inserted intothe current design at the given position.

Some of the file formats have options namely formats 1 - 5, 7 and 12 - 20 as listed above.Where the Files of type filter is set to one of these options, the Options button will be enabled.

The options available for the chosen file format can be displayed by clicking on the Options>>button which expands the dialog box. Conversely, clicking on the <<Options button will shrinkthe dialog hiding any options.

19.1 OptionsConvert short lines to arcs

This option applies to formats 2 and 3 only. Set this option, if you require short lines to be con-verted to arcs as they are imported. Clear this option if you want short lines to be imported asnormal.

The settings which determine how the lines are converted are determined in Preferences. See“Convert to Arcs” on page 2-44.

MappingCurrently the file formats 1, 7 and 12 - 20 have a mapping option. This provides KASEMAKEwith information on how to map line types in the imported file to its own grounds.

Click on the arrow to display a list of available mappings. Click on the required mapping name inthe list to select it.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Note: Mappings are defined with the File->Preferences command. See “Preferences” on page2-41.

Curve GenerationFor formats 4, 5 and 7 the handling of Bezier curves can be defined both for importing and tobe retained for use by any subsequent Arrange->Explode command.

Click on the Options>> button, if necessary, to display the following options:-

•Short lines when exploded - choose this setting if you wish any bezier curves to be replaced by short lines if they are subsequently exploded

•Arcs when exploded - choose this setting if you wish any bezier curves to be replaced by a sequence of arcs if they are subequently exploded

Arc Slider - only accessible where Arcs when exploded is chosen. This varies the number ofarcs used to replace the bezier curve. Simply click on the slider and drag it to the requiredsetting. Generally, the more arcs used the smoother the result on screen, but there may bea performance cost.

•Explode Curves - determines whether the bezier curves are exploded as they are imported or not. Set or clear the corresponding check box as appropriate.

Set the options as required. Finally click on Open to load the chosen file.

For most of the file formats, the KASEMAKE system requires no further information, therequested file will be loaded when the Open button is pressed. However, the following formatsrequire extra user interaction before the requested file can be imported.

19.2 CF2 FormatThe system will display a window containing all the customer information relating to this order.In addition to visually examining the information, you have the option to save the prompts andresponses as a .CFM message file that you can use with future CF2 export commands.

Click on Close to close the order information window and view the imported design.

19.3 DXF FormatThe system will display a dialog box requesting:-

• DXF Units - the units used when the file was created

Click on the appropriate button. Finally, press OK to import the file.



Export

KASEMAKE

20 Export

The export command provides a way of creating designs in an alternative file format to the stan-dard .AGD and .PIC design file format. These files can then be used by systems other thanKASEMAKE.

The following formats are currently supported:-

• CF2 - Common file format files

• Pacer CFF2 - Common file format files compatible with the Pacer range of routers

• HGL - Artwork files

• EPS - Postscript files

• AI – Adobe Illustrator files

• DXF - Data Exchange format files

• RP2 - Report Files 32 bit version only

• RP1 - DXF conversion report files

• RPT - Report Files compatible with 16 bit version

• CMF - Parametric command files

• BMP – Windows bitmap files

• TIF – Tiff image files (Tagged image file format)

• JPG – JPEG image files (Joint Photographic Experts Group)

• PNG - Portable Network Graphics Files

• GIF - Graphics Interchange Files

• EMF – Windows enhanced metafiles

• DDS – Ddes format files

• DAT - IPDS format files

• DSP – MasterCAD design files

• M – BCSI PD2000 design files

• N – Elcede layout files

• PDF – Adobe Portable Document Format files

• DD3 - DDes version 3 format files

• SWF - Shock Wave format files

Activating the Files->Export command produces an Export dialog. This works in the sameway as the Save dialog. Set the Save as type filter to the required file format. Set the directoryand filename.

It is possible to export only part of a design. Set the export selected items only option if you wishto do this. Otherwise clear it to export the entire design.

Note: You should select the elements to be exported using one of the available selectionmethods, before you activate the Export command.

Command Export

Menu File > Export




2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Set the Email File option, if you wish to e-mail the exported design, otherwise clear it.

Finally, click on Save to export the current design (part design) to the named file. Refer to ""SaveAs"" on page 2-7 for further details on setting the directory and filename.

If you have set the Email File option a new e-mail will also be created with an attachment to thenewly exported design, ready for you to add any text and complete the sender details.

Some of the file formats have additional options which are revealed by clicking on theOptions>> button. This button is only enabled where options exist for the current format dis-played in the Save as type filter drop down. Full details of available options are described foreach individual format as applicable.

For most of the file formats, the KASEMAKE system requires no further information, thenamed file will be created when the Save button is pressed.

More detailed information is now given for individual formats, where either options exist orwhere further user interaction is required before the design can be exported.

20.1 CF2 Format

20.1.1 Options

Elliptical ElementsThis format does not support elliptical elements. Choose either to convert them to individuallines segments or to a representation made up from a number of circular arcs.

Where circular arcs is chosen, the sliding scale control for the number of arcs used to representan elliptical element now becomes accessible. Increase the number of arcs for a smoother effect.Decrease it where less accuracy is needed. Simply click on the slider and drag it to change thisvalue.

TextCFF2 file format does not support truetype text. This option is included to determine an alterna-tive method for outputting truetype text.

If this option is set, a linear outline representation of the text string is written to the export file.

If it is not set, the text will be output as small lines representing each of the characters in the textstring

MappingThe CFF2 file format has a mapping option. This provides KASEMAKE with information on howto map its grounds to CFF2 line types in the exported file.

Click on the arrow to display a list of available mappings. Click on the required mapping name inthe list to select it.



Export

KASEMAKE

Note: Mappings are defined with the File->Preferences command. See “Preferences” on page2-41.

20.1.2 CF2 Message DialogThe system will display a window for you to enter the customer information relating to thisorder. A standard set of prompts will be loaded for you to enter an appropriate response. Youcan alter these prompts by selecting them and retyping as required.

Once the prompts and responses are set as required, click on the CF2 button or the WindowsClose button to close the message window and generate the named .CF2 file.

A menu of command buttons providing functions to help you define the prompts and responsesis available as follows:-

20.1.2.1 Append You can choose to load an alternative set of prompts which can include standard responses,from an existing .CFM message file. Specify the filename as described in "Open" on page 2-5.The prompts and corresponding responses if available, will be loaded at the end of the currentlist of prompts. If you want to replace the current responses completely, you should first use theClear command to remove the current list. See "Clear" on page 2-33 for further details.

20.1.2.2 SaveSave allows you to save the current list of prompts and responses to the currently open .CFMmessage file. This is AGCAD.CFM by default.

20.1.2.3 Save AsSave As is similar to Save but allows you to specify the filename. This allows you to preserve thecurrently open .CFM file, making an alternative file with the new prompts.

20.1.2.4 ClearThis command allows you to remove all the current prompts and responses from the CF2 mes-sage window. You must confirm that this is your intention by clicking the Yes button, before theprompts are removed. Click on No to leave the messages unchanged.

20.1.2.5 Delete FieldDelete field will remove the contents of the field where the cursor is. This can be a prompt or aresponse. Click in the field to be removed before selecting this command as no confirmation isrequired.

20.1.2.6 DeleteDelete removes an entire message entry, both prompt and response. Ensure that the cursor ispositioned on the correct entry, either in the prompt or in the message field, before selecting thiscommand as confirmation is not required.

20.1.2.7 InsertInsert will insert a blank message entry at the current cursor position. The message where thecursor is positioned and any succeeding messages will be shuffled down to make room for thenew entry.

20.1.2.8 CF2Clicking on CF2 will generate the .CF2 file using the customer information that is currently dis-played in the CF2 message window. The message window will also be closed.

20.2 HGL FormatIt is essential that the design is passed to any artworking system accurately. This can be at truesize or scaled. The scale is dictated by the artworking system to be used. For example, at thetime of going to print CORELDRAW could accept items up to 762 mm square. Therefore, to fit acorrugated case with an overall blank size of 1800 mm by 1000 mm you would require a scale



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

of 1:3.

Alternatively, you can specify the scale as a paper size. The design will then be scaled up or downto fit the limits of the paper size specified.

In order to set the scale you need to activate the options for this format. Please refer to ”Scale”on page 2-34 for a full explanation of the options.

20.3 EPS FormatProduces Postscript format files used by artworking programs on MAC systems. The commandoperates in the same way as HGL Format but produces .EPS files. A tiff preview header can alsobe added, optionally.

20.3.1 OptionsThe following options are provided :-

Scale• Click on Scale to give an exact scale. The pulldown list of available scales now becomes

selectable. Choose the required scale from the pulldown list of available values.

• Click on Fit to Paper to specify the scale as a paper size. The paper size options now become selectable. Click on the required paper size option.

Include Preview - (EPS only)Set this option to include a tiff header with the exported file. This is used as a preview of the filecontents. Clear if a header is not required.

20.4 AI FormatProduces Adobe Illustrator format files. The command operates in the same way as HGL Formatbut produces .AI files. Refer to the section "HGL Format" for further details.



Export

KASEMAKE

20.5 DXF FormatA description of the options for DXF format now follows:-

20.5.1 DXF Units The units to be used to create the DXF file.

20.5.2 DXF Layer InformationYou are required to choose a method for determining which layer an element is placed in. This isbecause DXF supports multiple colours in a single layer, whereas KASEMAKE only allows onecolour per layer.

• One colour per layer - check this option to maintain the layering information ignoring the colour if necessary

• Many colours on a single layer - check this option to keep colours the same, relayering as necessary.

20.5.3 DXF Linestyle InformationYou are required to choose a method for determining which linestyle an element is drawn in.This is because DXF supports linestyles which are not available in KASEMAKE.

• Single linestyle (Solid) - check this option to define all elements with solid linestyle

• Multiple linestyles - check this option to maintain the linestyle settings, attempting to emulate them where necessary

20.5.4 DXF TextRefer to options for CFF2. See “Text” on page 2-32.

20.5.5 Elliptical ElementsRefer to options for CFF2. See “Options” on page 2-32.

20.5.6 MappingRefer to options for CFF2. See “Options” on page 2-32.

20.5.7 Layer OutputThis option is mainly for compatibility with Pacer routers as they expect layer information to benumerical.

If set this option will prepend the “AG_LAYER_” prefix to the layer name before exporting it.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

If clear, only the numerical part of the layer name will be output.

20.6 RP2 FormatThe system will display a dialog of options as follows:-

• Output to screen - if checked, the report will be displayed in a window rather than writ-ten to file

• Explode elements - if checked, all elements will be described in their most basic form. e.g. dimensions will be shown as lines, arcs and text

• Include lines - check to include information about all lines in the design

• Include arcs - check to include information about all arcs in the design

• Include text - check to include information about all text in the design

• Include points - check to include information about all points in the design

• Include dimensions - check to include information about all dimensions in the design

• Include groups - check to include information about all grouped items in the design. E.g. polygons, borders.

Set the options by clicking the corresponding check boxes as required. Click on OK to create thefile. If you have requested output to screen, a window will now appear displaying the reportcontents.

20.7 RPT FormatThis format works the same as RP2 format except that all elements are automatically exploded totheir most basic form. This ensures that they are compatible with the 16 bit version which doesnot have some of the new element types e.g. groups. Refer to "RP2 Format" on page 2-36 forfurther details on the options applicable to this format.

20.8 CMF FormatThis requires no further information to produce the named .CMF file. However, the resulting filewill be based entirely on specific coordinate values. The design will need to be redefined usingset point and set element to make it fully parametric.

20.9 DDES FormatThis format prompts you for comments to be included at the beginning of the DDES file.Options are also available as elliptical elements are not supported.

20.9.1 OptionsDetails of the options available for this format are as for CFF2 format. See “Elliptical Elements”on page 2-32.



Export

KASEMAKE

20.9.2 Comment DialogEnter any comments as appropriate, then click on OK to generate the DDES format file.

20.10 DAT, DSP, M and N FormatsOptions are available for mapping of KASEMAKE grounds.

See “Mapping” on page 2-32.

20.11 PDF FormatPortable Document Format (PDF) is used by Adobe Acrobat, Adobe’s electronic publishing soft-ware for Windows, Mac OS, UNIX® and MS DOS. You can view PDF files using the AcrobatReader® software. PDF files can represent both vector and bitmap graphics and can containelectronic document search.

20.11.1 OptionsWhen exporting the following options are provided :-

Elliptical ElementsElliptical elements are not supported for PDF format. Options to determine how they are outputare as described for CFF2 format. See “Elliptical Elements” on page 2-32.

Colour / MonochromeThis option determines whether the PDF information is output in colour or monochrome. Set orclear as approptiate.

Portrait / LandscapeDetermines whether the design is output using a portrait or landscape oritentation.

Set this option to output as portrait.

Clear this option to output as landscape.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

SizeThis determines the size that the design is exported at. It can either be exported so as to fill asheet of A4 or at the size it was originally drawn at.

Choose Fit to A4 if you wish to export the design at the correct size to fill an A4 sheet.

Choose Life Size if you wish to export the design at its original size.

Margin

If a margin is required around the edge of the design, it can be set by scrolling with the arrowbuttons to the correct size.

20.12 DDES3 FormatDetails of the options available for this format are as for CFF2 format. See “Elliptical Elements”on page 2-32.

21 Multi Export

The multi export command provides a quick way of exporting a design to more than one format.Each format has the same options and requires the same information as described for the File->Export command.

Activate this command. The multi export dialog is now displayed as follows:-

21.1 Current ProfileIndividual profiles can be saved representing different combinations of export filters and

Command Multi Export

Menu File > Multi Export

Toolbar Button Not available



Multi Export

KASEMAKE

options. Set the profile to use by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the list of availableprofiles.

The saving of a profile is achieved by using the Save As... option described shortly.

21.2 File Formats ListA scrolling list of available formats is provided. Simply click and drag the vertical slider to displayother formats in the list.

Set or clear the check box corresponding to each format to determine whether that format isgenerated or not.

OptionsWhere a format is chosen to be exported and options are available, the Options>> button willnow become accessible. Simply click on this button to display the options for the chosen format.See the appropriate section of the File->Export command on page 2-31 for details of theoptions provided.

E-mailIt is possible to e-mail an exported file as an attachment. Where a format is chosen to beexported, the corresponding check box in the e-mail column will become accessible. Set thecheck box to request that the corresponding format is included as an e-mail attachment. Clear itif this is not required.

21.3 E-mail Single RecipientIf you have selected the e-mail setting for several formats, you can choose to send all theexported formats as multiple attachments to a single recipient or send each exported format toindividual recipients.

Simply set this check box to produce a single e-mail with multiple attachments.

Alternativley, if you wish to send the exported files to several recipients, you should clear thisoption. Each selected file format will then produce a separate e-mail with the exported file as asingle attachment.

21.4 Dialog CommandsOK

Choose OK when you have finished with the multi export command and you wish to close themulti export dialog retaining any current dialog settings.

Save As...Choose Save As... to save the current settings to a named profile for future use. You will beprompted for the name for the profile. Type a suitable name then click on OK to close the SaveAs... dialog. The current profile field will be updated to reflect the given name.

DeleteChoose Delete to delete the current profile. Confirmation is required before the profile is perma-nently removed.

ExportChoose Export to export the information in the chosen formats.

You will be prompted for a filename and location for the exported files. For each file generated,the given filename stem will be used, but the extension will be determined automatically toreflect the format used. e.g. design1.cf2, design1.dxf, design1.dat etc.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

Choose whether you wish only selected elements or the entire design to be exported.

Finally click on Save to generate the requested files. Each file will be generated in turn. You willbe prompted for any additional information need to complete a chosen format as that format isgenerated. Enter the required information as you would for a single File->Export. See the appro-priate section of the File->Export command on page 2-31.

CancelChoose Cancel when you have finished with the multi export command and you wish to closethe multi export dialog without saving any changes to the dialog settings.

22 Load Image

The load image command allows you to read in a .TIF image file (such as is created when anitem is scanned) as a background.

Activating this command produces a file Open dialog. Specify the name of the .TIF file to load.See "Open" on page 2-5 for further details on how to set the filename.

Once the filename is set, click on Open. Some systems automatically store the scanner resolu-tion as part of the .TIF file. If this is not the case you will now be prompted for this information.

The default setting is 300 dots per inch. If this is not the resolution you used to create the .TIFfile you have named, you will need to change it. Click and hold the arrows to adjust the value upor down. Alternatively, click and select the numerical value and type its new value.

An Image Scale dialog will now appear. This requires you to define the scale and units to work toas follows:-

22.1 Scale• Image - Set this to the scale used when the image was scanned e.g. 1 for 1:1, 100 for

1:100

• Display - Normally, set to 1

22.2 UnitsSet the units to those used for the scanned image. Click on the button corresponding to eitherMetres or Millimetres.

Finally, click on OK to close the dialog and display the requested image.

23 History ListLocated between File->Load Image and File->Drawing Info... is the file history list. Thiscomprises a list of up to five of the most recently accessed filenames, so varies from day to day.

The history list provides a quick way of accessing designs. Simply drag the cursor to the requiredfilename and click on it. The chosen design will then be displayed in its own window ready foryou to alter as required.

Command Load Image

Menu File > Load Image




Preferences

KASEMAKE

24 Preferences

Preferences are settings which affect the overall appearance and or operation of the KASE-MAKE system. They stay in effect until you change them using the File->Preferences command.They are written away to the registry so will be preserved between instances of KASEMAKE.

After making any changes click on OK to save them and bring them into effect. Click Cancel toabandon any changes.

Activating this command opens the Preferences dialog containing several tabbed pages of set-tings. Click on the appropriate tab to display the corresponding settings. The available settingsare described page by page as follows:-

24.1 Selection

24.1.1 ToleranceThe selection tolerance can be set from the following:-

• Fine - the cursor must be over an element for it to be selected

• Medium - the cursor must be on or fairly close to the element to select it

• Coarse - the cursor does not have to be too precise to select an item

Click on the button corresponding to the required selection tolerance.

Command Preferences

Menu File > Preferences




2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.1.2 ColourThe selection colour can be set as required. By default, items are selected in black. Choose a newcolour from the Colour pulldown list. Click on the arrow to open the list. Scroll to the desiredcolour using the scrolling arrows. Then click on the required colour to select it.

If you choose the same colour as the background, KASEMAKE will automatically use theinverse colour to ensure selected items are visible.

24.1.3 Nudge FactorThe nudge feature can be used to move selected objects a fixed amount. The nudge facility alsoworks during a “ Move Points” command to move by a fixed amount rather than defining anorigin and new position. See “Move Points” on page 3-13.

The “nudge factor” is the amount that the selection set will move with each press of an arrowkey. Set the desired nudge factor using the arrows to increase or decrease the current value, ortype the new value directly.

24.1.4 Small GapSmall gap is used as a tolerance in hatching when defining the outline of the boundary orisland. Since only a continuous path is allowed for the outline, small gap determines the toler-ance within which a path can be regarded as continuous.

To set this tolerance use the arrows to increase or decrease the current value, or type a new valuedirectly.

24.1.5 Selection RectangleThe selection rectangle options determine the visibility of the selection rectangle and the appear-ance of its handles i.e. the resize position indicators represented by boxes.

24.1.5.1 Visible RectangleSet this option if you wish to display the selection rectangle usually shown as a dotted rectanglearound any selected items. Clear this option if you wish to turn off the display of the selectionrectangle.

24.1.5.2 Visible HandlesSet this option if you wish to display the selection handles, usually shown as rectangles at theactive points of the selection rectangle. Clear this option if you wish to turn off the display of theselection rectangle’s handles.

Where you opt for visible handles, you can also determine the appearance and size of the han-dles as follows:-

Solid HandlesSet this option for filled in handles. Clear this option if you wish just the outline of the handleto be drawn.

Handle SizeSet the size of the handle. Choose from :-

•small

•medium

•large



Preferences

KASEMAKE

24.2 Settings

24.2.1 Drill HolesThe size of the drill holes when they are displayed on the screen can be altered. Choose from thefollowing:-

• Actual diameter - the actual size of the drill hole, useful for checking there is no overlap

• Percentage of the window width – size is set as a percentage of the window width so that when zooming in the drill holes do not obliterate the rest of the drawing but stay in pro-portion to the current window size. Click and hold the arrow until the required percentage is displayed.

24.2.2 Line Angle IncThis setting is used by the line command and allows you to determine a fixed increment for theangle of any lines drawn. The increment is only applied if this option is set and you hold downthe CTRL key whilst moving the cursor to define the end point of the line.

• Set this option if you wish the angle of any subsequently drawn lines to be determined at a fixed increment.

• Clear this option if you wish the angle of any drawn lines to be determined by the current cursor position with respect to the start of the line.

If this option is set the increment field will be displayed. Type the required increment directly oruse the arrows to set it.

24.2.3 Line Length IncThis setting is used by the line command and allows you to determine a fixed increment for thelength of any lines drawn. The increment is only applied if this option is set and you hold downthe CTRL key whilst moving the cursor to define the end point of the line.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

• Set this option if you wish the length of any subsequently drawn lines to be determined at a fixed increment.

• Clear this option if you wish the length of any drawn lines to be determined by the current cursor position with respect to the start of the line.

If this option is set the increment field will be displayed. Type the required increment directly oruse the arrows to set it.

24.2.4 Size of Plotted PointsSet the size to use for points when plotting. Type the value directly or scroll using the arrows.

24.2.5 Number of items in windowThis setting relates to the number of entries which are to be displayed in the currently open win-dows list located in the Windows menu. All other open windows can be activated by first choos-ing the More Windows... option. Refer to "Changing the Active Window" on page 12-3 forfurther details.

24.2.6 Convert to ArcsThis setting relates to the conversion of a sequence of short lines to an arc. The values are con-sidered when importing files with the Convert Short Lines to Arcs option set. It is also usedby the Tools->Convert to Arcs command.

Short Line Limit

This is the maximum length a line can be to be considered as a short line which could potentiallyform part of an arc.

Angle Diff Limit

This determines the maximum angle allowed between two lines for them to be considered aspart of the sequence of lines which will be converted to an arc.

Angle Diff Tolerance

This determines the maximum difference allowed between angles when considering sets ofadjoining lines to determine if they will be converted to an arc.

Algorithm

There are currently two algorithms which can be applied to determine how the lines are con-verted to an arc and therefore how the resulting arc will be drawn. In the majority of cases theresult of using either algorithm will be identical. However, it is possible that in a small percent-age of cases one algorithm might give a more suitable result than the other. It is possible there-fore to control which algorithm is applied through this setting.

Simply click on the radio button corresponding to the algorithm you wish to use.



Preferences

KASEMAKE

24.3 File

24.3.1 AutoSaveThe KASEMAKE system can if requested, automatically save the current design to the fileBACKUP.AGD after a given time interval. Choose whether you wish your designs to be savedautomatically by setting or clearing the corresponding check box.

If you activate the auto save option, the interval between automatic saves can be set. The timeinterval is set to every five minutes by default. Click and hold the arrow until the required timeinterval is displayed.

24.3.2 AutoSave 3D FilesThe KASEMAKE system can also optionally save 3D designs after a given time interval. Choosewhether you wish your 3D designs to be saved automatically by setting or clearing the corre-sponding check box.

If you activate the auto save 3D option, the interval between automatic saves can be set. Thetime interval is set to every five minutes by default. Click and hold the arrow until the requiredtime interval is displayed.

24.3.3 Save Images CompressedThis setting is used when saving a design containing one or more bitmaps.

• Set this option if you wish to save any bitmaps in the current design in compressed form.

• Clear this option if you wish to save any bitmaps in the current design uncompressed.

24.3.4 Back up drawing files on savingThis option allows you to decide whether KASEMAKE should make a backup of your currentdesign each time you overwrite it or not.

Set this option if you wish to make a backup with each overwrite or clear it if you don’t want tocreate backup files.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.3.5 Backup file prefixThis setting enables you to specify a prefix to place in front of the current design name to distin-guish each backup file. By specifying the prefix you can group backups together so for examplethey always appear at the end of a file list.

If your design is called Design1, and you use the prefix shown i.e. Backup of the resulting file willbe Backup of Design1.agd.

24.3.6 File Preview DelayThis setting enables you to build a delay between selecting a filename in one of the file open dia-logs and the preview for that file being displayed. This is to allow a list of filenames to bescrolled through without having to wait for each preview to appear.

Set the value in milliseconds by typing a suitable value directly or using the arrows to scroll.

24.4 File Locations

This page displays the default locations for all the different types of files utilised or created byKASEMAKE. You can either change a location or remove it and leave it blank.

24.4.1 ClearTo remove a file location :-

• Scroll through the list to the required file description• Click on the file description to select the setting to change• Choose Clear to blank out the current setting

24.4.2 Modify...To change a file location :-

• Scroll through the list to the required file description• Click on the file description to select the setting to change



Preferences

KASEMAKE

• Choose Modify... to produce the Select Directory dialog• Identify the required path changing the Drive and Folder to retrieve the required file location• Choose OK to reset the file location, which will now be displayed

24.5 View

24.5.1 Zoom24.5.1.1 ExtentsChoose the bounds to zoom to from the following:-

• Visible bounds - only the limits of elements currently on display will be used to calculated the bounds of the design

• Absolute bounds - all elements in the design will be considered when calculating the bounds of the design



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.5.1.2 QuickzoomThis setting determines the way the zoom box is defined for the Quick Zoom and Zoom Boxcommands. The choices are:-

• Click & Drag - if this option is set the zoom box is determined using a click and drag method. The box will begin to rubber band as soon as the left mouse button is pressed to define the start point for the box. Holding down the button and moving the mouse will cause the zoom box to rubber band. Releasing the mouse button will complete the zoom box.

• Original - two discrete points must be given for each diagonal point of the required zoom box by clicking and releasing the mouse button to define each point. Rubber banding only starts after the mouse button is released to define the start point of the box.

24.5.2 Zoom To CursorKASEMAKE can temporarily zoom to a chosen area about the cursor. This is particularly usefulwhere you need to see part of a design in more detail to accurately complete a command forexample.

The options which you can define for the Zoom to Cursor command are set as follows:-

Zoom RadiusThe zoom radius determines the distance around the cursor to zoom in to. Set the radius by typ-ing a value directly or scroll with the arrows to the required value.

Centred on Snap CursorThis option if set chooses the position of the snap cursor as the centre of the zoomed area,rather than the absolute position of the mouse cursor. It means you can accurately centre yourview on an end point, centre point, mid point etc. according to which snap modes are enabledby the Auto Snap Properties.

Clear this setting if you want to centre the zoomed area about the absolute cursor position.

24.5.3 Use Auto Snap with FreehandAuto snap modes can be automatically engaged when the current drawing mode is set to free-hand. The snap modes are selected using the Auto Snap Properties... command.

Set this option if you wish to identify potential snap points based on the selected snap modes,as the cursor is moved. The snap cursor will automatically update to the nearest point whichcomplies with the selected snap modes.

Clear this option if you wish to use freehand positioning.

Where this option is chosen, moving the cursor will cause the snap cursor to move to the near-est point which satisfies any selected snap modes. Identifying a point in the normal way willautomatically adopt the snap cursor position.

This setting can be overriden by holding down the SHIFT key whilst moving the cursor if a free-hand position is required.

24.5.3.1 ToleranceThe tolerance determines how close you need to be to a potential snap point before it isadopted. If you don’t move within this tolerance, freehand positioning will persist.

Set a suitable value by scrolling with the arrows or typing it directly.

24.5.4 Snap CursorA snap cursor can be optionally displayed to illustrate the nearest snap point available, this isdependent upon the current mode. Where “Auto Snap” is used the snap points displayed varyaccording to the Auto Snap properties selected. See “Auto Snap Properties...” on page 5-13 for



Preferences

KASEMAKE

further details.

Choose to display the snap cursor in one of the following ways:-

• Always on - dependent upon current mode some form of snap point will always be illus-trated

• Always off - the snap cursor will be switched off for all modes• On only in autosnap mode - the snap cursor will only be displayed in conjunction with Auto

Snap mode according to the Auto Snap properties

A hot key should be defined to activate the snap cursor command. This is usually the PGUP keyby default. Once the Snap Cursor options are set, move the cursor to the required position andhold down the hot key (PGUP) key to effect the zoom. The view automatically returns to its pre-vious state on releasing the hot key. See “ShortCuts...” on page 10-23.

24.5.5 Exchangeable ToolbarsCheck this item if you require toolbars to be exchangeable, where opening up a new toolbarreplaces an already open one. Alternatively, you can uncheck this item and all open toolbars willbe displayed simultaneously.

Only some of the toolbars are exchangeable. The fundamental system toolbars are notexchangeable. Refer to “Toolbars" on page 1-9.

24.5.6 Allow AutoscrollAuto scroll if set will automatically scroll the current design into view when the cursor is placednear one of the edges of the drawing area. Placing the cursor near to the top or bottom edge ofthe drawing area causes the design to scroll vertically. Similarly, placing the cursor near to theleft or right hand edge of the drawing area will cause the design to scroll horizontally.

Set this option to enable the auto scroll facility. Clear it to disable this feature.

24.5.7 Quick ChangeThis option when enabled allows you to alter the linestyle or ground of any selected elements asin the Edit->Change command. However, the change is made using the appropriate combo boxin the style toolbar so is quicker to achieve.

Enable this option. Select the elements to change. Choose a new ground or linestyle directlyfrom the ground / linestyle combo boxes in the style toolbar and the elements update immedi-ately.

Clear this option if you wish to disable the Quick Change facility.

24.5.8 Lock ToolbarsCheck this item if you wish to lock any toolbars so that they cannot be moved. Clear this item ifyou want the toolbars to be moveable.

24.5.9 Rollup DialogsThe Notes, Properties, Project, Array / Layout, Symbol, Move/Copy and Bridging dialogs and theOverview window have rollup capabilities when floated.

This setting determines whether these rollup dialogs automatically hide when not beingaccessed or have to be manually rolled up or down when needed.

Click on Auto Rollup if you wish to adopt the auto hide / push pin capabilites of the dialog.

Click on Manual Rollup if you wish to override the autohide capability and manually click on thepin to roll up / roll down the dialog.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.5.10 DelayThe symbols dialog when set to automatic rollup will instantly rollup when the cursor is movedoutside the dialog and will instantly rolldown when the cursor is moved over the dialog captionbar. A delay can be optionally built in before the rollup / rolldown occurs.

RollupThis is the delay in milliseconds to wait before rolling up the symbols dialog. Type a suitablevalue directly or use the arrows to scroll.

RolldownThis is the delay in milliseconds to wait before rolling down the symbols dialog. Type a suitablevalue directly or use the arrows to scroll.

24.5.11 Mouse WheelThe mouse wheel can be used to automatically zoom or scroll the current design about the cur-rent cursor position. Roll the wheel downwards to move the design down or zoom out. Roll thewheel upwards to move the design upwards or zoom in.

Set this option to determine whether the mouse wheel will cause the current design to zoom orpan.

This setting can be overriden by holding down the ALT key whilst moving the wheel. Please referto “Features of the Mouse Wheel” on page 1-23 for further details.

24.5.12 Mode highlight colourThis option allows you to determine whether you wish to highlight the current mode to make iteasier to identify, or not. If you do wish to highlight the current mode, the background of thetoolbar button will be displayed in the mode highlight colour. Set or clear the correspondingcheck box as required.

If you opt to highlight the current mode, the mode highlight colour will now be accessible con-firming the current colour and allowing you to change it if required. Click on the arrow to dis-play a palette of available colours. Simply click on the appropriate one to select it. Alternatively,click on other colours if you wish to customise the colours available.

Note: The change of colour does not come into effect until you click on OK to close the Pref-erences dialog and accept any new settings.

24.5.13 Construct line colourThis setting enables you to define the colour to be used to display construct lines.

Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available colours. Simply move the cursor overthe colours or click on an arrow to scroll to the required one. Click on it to select it.

24.5.14 Default ViewThe default view for a design can be set. This information is stored with each design. Atering thissetting will not affect the current design only subsequently created or loaded designs. The viewsetting for the current design is displayed at the right hand edge of the status bar.

Set this value to one of the following:-

• Inside - assume subsequently created or loaded designs are drawn from the inside

• Outside - assume subsequently created or loaded designs are drawn from the outside

24.5.15 AxesSet the View origin axes option to display the drawing area axes. Clear this option if you wish tohide them.



Preferences

KASEMAKE

24.5.16 Mix And Match GroundMix and match ground to ignore in previews allows you to select a ground which will not be dis-played when a mix and match design is previewed. For example, if you switch off the grounddisplaying dimensions you can create a less cluttered and effectively larger preview of the currentdesign.

Click on the ground combo and select the ground to ignore from the drop down list.

24.5.17 Bitmap Zoom FactorsThe bitmap zoom factors are used within the Draw->Image Proportional command when load-ing a .EPS image. They determine how far you can zoom before the medium and high resolu-tion images respectively are loaded.

Set each zoom factor by typing directly or scroll using the arrows to the required value.

24.5.18 Default Ground TableThis setting allows the user to determine which ground table is loaded as the default whenKASEMAKE is started up.

Simply type the name of the required ground table in the edit box. Alternatively, click on the ...button to display a file open dialog allowing you to search for and select the required groundtable. On clicking Open to select the ground table name and close the Open dialog, the selectedground table name will automatically be copied to the Default Ground Table field on the Viewpage of Preferences.

24.5.19 Flute / GrainThis field is used to determine the default flute when a new drawing is started. It will not over-ride the flute setting for any current design

Click on the horizontal or vertical radio button to select the corresponding flute.

24.5.20 LanguageThis field allows you to specify which language you wish KASEMAKE to use to display its vari-ous prompts and user information in. Select the required language by clicking on the arrow andchoosing from the drop down list.

Note: It is necessary to restart your computer before a change of language can take effect.

24.5.21 CursorThis option allows you to select a full screen cursor rather than the default small cross hair cursorused by KASEMAKE. Set this option if you want to switch to a full screen cursor. Clear it toselect the small cross hair cursor.

If you select a full screen cursor a further three options are displayed so that you can specify thetype of full screen cursor required. Simply click on the required option to select it.

Choose from :-

•Solid - The cursor will consist of two lines drawn in a solid linestyle.

•Dotted - The cursor will consist of two lines drawn in a dotted linestyle.

•Dashed - The cursor will consist of two lines drawn in a dashed linestyle.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.6 Data Units

24.6.1 Default UnitsSet the default units for all subsequently created designs. It does not affect any previously drawndesigns.

Default Units can be set to millimetres, centimetres, metres or inches.

24.6.2 Area UnitsSpecify the units to measure area calculations in and the number of decimal places to displaywhen generating drawing information. See “Drawing Info...” on page 10-13.

Set the required units by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

Set the number of decimal places by scrolling the current value using the arrow keys or by typ-ing the new value.

24.6.3 Rule Length UnitsSpecify the units to measure rule length calculations in and the number of decimal places to dis-play when generating drawing information. See “Drawing Info...” on page 10-13.

Set the units and decimal place as described for Area Units above.

24.7 Import / Export Ground MappingsMappings can be defined for some of the import / export filters. These are used to determinehow the different layer or linetype combinations used by other systems are mapped to specificground and linestyle combinations within KASEMAKE.

Acivate the Import / Export Ground Mappings tab to display the following table and settings:-



Preferences

KASEMAKE

24.7.1 File TypeOnly some of the filters support mapping in this way. Choose the type of filter you wish to definea mapping for by clicking on the arrow and choosing the required type from the given list.

The values currently defined for that file type will now be displayed.

24.7.2 Import / ExportDecide whether you wish to determine the mapping for importing from or exporting to the cho-sen file type. Click on the corresponding option. The table will update to show import or exportsettings according to your choice.

24.7.3 MappingSeveral mappings can exist for one import /export filter where alternative ground / linestyle com-binations are required.

Choose the mapping to use for the given import / export filter by clicking on the arrow to displaythe names of mappings that are currently defined and selecting the appropriate name

Again the table of values will change to reflect the newly selected mapping.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.7.4 Table of valuesThe table both displays values which cannot be altered as well as values which can be deter-mined by the user. The actual values displayed depend upon the previous three settings.

In the case of import filters, the first one or more columns are used to display information aboutlinetypes, layers which are used by the chosen file filter, the final columns ground and linestyleare editable to allow you to set a corresponding value to use when importing said linetype, layercombination into KASEMAKE.

In the case of export filters, the first column displays each KASEMAKE ground and the finalone or more columns are used to determine the linetype, layer combination to use for eachground when exporting to the chosen file filter.

24.7.5 Add New...The Add New... command allows you to create a new mapping for the given import / export filetype. This allows you to create alternative settings which can be saved and used according torequirements.

Choose the Add New... option. The Add New dialog now appears allowing you to specify aname for the new settings. Type a suitable name then click OK. The current settings will now becopied and your given name will be displayed.

24.7.6 Delete...This command deletes the current mapping. Ensure that you have selected the correct namefrom the mapping list before activating this command, as once deleted a mapping cannot beretrieved. Confirmation is requested before the mapping is permanently removed.

24.8 Kasemake LookKasemake Look is a page of options which affect the appearance of the KASEMAKE screen andcomplement the user interface:-



Preferences

KASEMAKE

24.8.1 Kasemake LookThis setting determines the appearance of the toolbars. Click on a radio button to select its cor-responding look. The toolbars will instantly change to reflect the look that has been selected.

24.8.2 ToolbarsThe option to determine whether you use normal size or larger toolbar buttons is now locatedon this page. It was formerly found in the Customise dialog accessed through the View menu.

24.8.3 MenuThis group of options determines the way in which KASEMAKE’S menus are displayed.

24.8.3.1 AnimationsThis determines the way the menus are displayed. Click on the arrow to display a drop down listof available styles. Drag the cursor over the required style. Release the mouse button to select it.

24.8.3.2 ShadowsDetermines whether a shadow is displayed at the edge of the menu or not. Set or clear thisoption as required.

24.8.4 TabsDesigns can now be overlayed with a tab which enables instant access to the underlying designin addition to the MDI format used previously where they had to be accessed through the Win-dows menu.

This group of options determines whether tabbed or MDI format windows are required. Wheretabbed windows are used the options determine the appearance and behaviour of tabs on indi-vidual designs.

24.8.4.1 Enable TabsThis setting determines whether tabs are displayed on each design or not. Set it to display tabsor clear it if they are not required. The documents will be redisplayed to reflect any changes.

24.8.4.2 AppearanceThis group of settings governs the appearance of each tab.

Document Icons On TabsThe tabs can display an icon to illustrate the type of design assigned to that document. Set thisoption if you wish to display icons, otherwise clear it.

Autocolour TabsEach tab can be displayed in colour. The colour used is automatically assigned for each individualtab. Set this option if you wish the tabs to be displayed in colour, otherwise clear it.

Max Number Of Characters On TabEach tab displays the filename of the associated design. This option controls the number ofcharacters displayed and therefore the size of the tab needed to display them. Specifying 0means that their is no limit and the whole filename is always displayed.

Set the number of characters to display by typing an appropriate value, or use the arrow keys toscroll to it.

24.8.4.3 PositionThis option determines whether the tabs are displayed at the top or bottom of each document.Click on the radio button adjacent to the required position to select that position. The documenttabs will be redisplayed in the new position.



2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

24.8.4.4 More Tabs OptionThere is a limit to the number of documents which can be displayed overlayed at any one time.Once there are more tabbed documents open than can be displayed it is possible to access theadditional documents either through a menu or by scrolling the documents currently on view.

Set this option to Scroll Buttons if you wish to scroll the currently displayed designs into view.Scrolling arrows will be displayed at either end of the row of tabs. Click on an arrow to scrolldesigns in to view. Click on a tab to activate the underlying design.

Set this option to Menu if you wish to choose a specific design from a drop down list. Choosinga design in this way automatically scrolls it into view and activates it as the current design.

24.8.4.5 Configure TabsThe appearance of the tabs is configurable. First click on the Configure Tabs button. A Tab Con-figure dialog is now displayed:-

Use Default Appearance

Set this option if you wish tabs to adopt the default appearance.

Active Tab Appearance

The appearance of the active tab can be specifed as follows:-

Text ColourCheck this option if you wish to specify the colour to use for the tab’s label. The colour controlto define the text colour will now be displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of predefinedcolours. Click on a suitable colour to select it. Custom colours can defined by selecting the Oth-ers... option.

Tab ColourCheck this option if you wish to specify the colour to use for the tab’s background. The colour



Exit

KASEMAKE

control to define the tab colour will now be displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of pre-defined colours. Click on a suitable colour to select it. Custom colours can defined by selectingthe Others... option.

Border ColourCheck this option if you wish to display a coloured border around the active tab. The colour con-trol to define the border colour will now be displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list of pre-defined colours. Click on a suitable colour to select it.

Border WidthAlso, specify the required width for the border. Click on the arrows to scroll between 0 and 4where 0 means no border and 4 is the thickest border.

24.8.5 Autohide BarThis option relates to dialogs which are docked and have the autohide option set. It is possiblewhere a low specification graphics card is used for there to be a slight delay in removing and dis-playing an autohide dialog. This option ensures that the dialogs are removed / displayed withoutdelay.

For most cases, where the sliding in / sliding out of these dialogs is virtually instant, set thisoption to Normal. If however, you experience reduced performance displaying these dialogs, setthis option to Instant.

25 Exit

Use this command to end your KASEMAKE session. You can also use the Close button at theright hand end of the title bar. KASEMAKE prompts you to save designs with unsaved changes.

26 Recover Drawings

The File->Recover Drawings command is only available the first time that KASEMAKE is loadedafter it has been forced to shut down by an unstable operating system. This command allowsyou to recover any files which KASEMAKE has temporarily stored because they were unsavedat the time it was forced to shut down.

Activate this command. The Drawing Recovery dialog will appear displaying a list of any fileswhich were recovered and their corresponding preview. Simply click on the name of a file to dis-play its preview:-

Command Exit

Menu File > Exit


Command Recover Drawings

Menu File > Recover Drawings




2 - File Commands

KASEMAKE

To recover a file, click on its file name to highlight it. If you wish to select more than one file,hold down the SHIFT key whilst making subsequent clicks. Finally, click on OK to recover anyselected designs. To defer recovery click on Cancel.

The recovered files are only temporary, but remain available for recovery until KASEMAKE isclosed down. Simply activate this command again to access any remaining unrecovered files.



KASEMAKE

3 - Edit Commands

1 Undo

Use this command to remove the effect of the last editing action(s) where possible. The Undocommand only becomes available when a reversible command has been performed. Until thisis the case undo appears greyed out both in the menu and in the tool bar. Also, if you havetraversed the entire undo list, the undo command will be greyed out indicating that no furtherundo commands are available.

Accessing this command through the menu will allow one action at a time to be reversed. TheUndo command displayed in the menu has the name of the last action appended to it forclarity. This name changes each time an Undo command is executed. The command name isdisplayed as Can't Undo if the last action cannot be reversed.

The Undo command can also be executed one action at a time by accessing the Undo toolbarbutton in the Standard Toolbar.

It is also possible to undo several commands at once. This extended functionality is onlyavailable through the Undo toolbar button. First click on the arrow which is located next tothe Undo toolbar button. A list of completed commands starting with the most recentlyexecuted will now be displayed.

Move the cursor over the most recently executed command and it will be highlighted. Aprompt will be displayed at the bottom of the list to confirm how many actions are to beundone. Move the cursor down the list and further commands will be highlighted and theprompt will update to include the additional commands.

Once you have highlighted all the commands you wish to undo, click on the last command inthe highlighted list and all the highlighted commands will be undone starting with the mostrecently executed first.

Command Undo

Menu Edit > Undo


Keys Ctrl + Z or Alt+Backspace


Release 8.0Page 3-1

3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

2 Redo

The Redo command reverses the effect of the undo command. Each time an undo command isissued, a redo command is added to the redo list. This gives the option of reversing the undocommand if it is performed in error.

Redo commands are only stored until a command other than Undo is activated. The redocommand appears greyed out indicating that the redo list is empty under the followingcircumstances:-

• no undo commands have been performed

• the entire redo list has been traversed

• a command other than undo is activated

Accessing the redo command through the menu will reverse the last undo command, restoringthe original command. Continually, selecting this command will cause the KASEMAKE systemto step back reversing each undo command most recent first.

As is the case for the undo command, the redo command displayed in the menu has the nameof the last action appended to it for clarity. This name changes each time a Redo command isexecuted.

The Redo command can similarly be executed one action at a time by accessing the Redo toolbarbutton in the Standard Toolbar.

It is also possible to redo several commands at once through the Redo toolbar button. First clickon the arrow which is located next to the Redo toolbar button. A list of commands which havebeen undone, starting with the most recent will now be displayed.

Move the cursor over the most recently executed undo command and it will be highlighted. Aprompt will be displayed at the bottom of the list to confirm how many actions are to be reversed.Move the cursor down the list and further commands will be highlighted and the prompt willupdate to include the additional commands.

Once you have highlighted all the commands you wish to redo, click on the last command in thehighlighted list and all the highlighted undo commands will be reversed starting with the mostrecently executed first.

Command Redo

Menu Edit > Redo


Keys Ctrl + Y

Release 8.0Page 3-2


Reset

KASEMAKE

3 Reset

The Reset command which allows commands to be restarted part way through has now been putinto the Edit menu. This means that a shortcut can be defined to make access to it even quicker.

Reset was formerly only available through the context menu accessed with the right hand mousebutton.

4 Cut

Use this command to remove the currently selected data from the current design and place it intothe Windows clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can then be pasted into another design oranother software package using the Paste command.

Each time you issue an Edit->Cut command the current contents of the clipboard are replacedwith the newly cut items.

Before you can cut items from your design you will need to identify which items to choose. Thisis done by selecting them using any of the selection methods provided by KASEMAKE. Forfurther information on selecting elements please refer to “Select” on page 3-26.

Once you have selected the items to cut, the Cut command will become accessible from themenu and tool bar. Activate the command and the selected items will be removed from yourdesign and stored on the clipboard for future use.

5 Copy

Use this command to copy any selected data onto the Windows clipboard leaving the designunchanged. This command is unavailable if there is no data currently selected.

Once you have selected the items to copy, the Copy command will become accessible from themenu and tool bar. Activate the command and all selected items will be stored on the clipboardfor future use.

Command Reset

Menu Edit > Reset

Shortcuts Context Menu

Command Cut

Menu Edit > Cut


Keys Ctrl + X

Mouse Button: Right hand mouse button

Command Copy

Menu Edit > Copy


Keys Ctrl + C



Release 8.0Page 3-3

3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

Note: each time you issue an Edit->Copy command the current contents of the clip-board are replaced with the newly copied items.

6 Paste

The paste command copies the contents of the Windows clipboard into your current design. Thecontents of the clipboard are placed at the centre of your current view and are automaticallyselected to allow you to move them to the desired position.

The paste command can only paste items placed in the clipboard by the KASEMAKE system. Ifthere are items available to KASEMAKE in the clipboard, the Paste command will becomeaccessible from the menu and tool bar. Activate the command to insert the clipboard items intoyour design.

7 Delete Selection

The delete selection command works in the same way as the cut command except that thedeleted items are not placed in the Windows clipboard.

Once you have selected the items to remove, the Delete Selection command will becomeaccessible from the menu and tool bar. Activate the command and all selected items will beremoved from your design. Pressing the delete key is a shortcut to this command.

8 Delete Visible

The delete visible command removes all visible items from the current design. There is no need toselect anything before using this command.

Activate this command and all visible items will be removed. No confirmation is required so careshould be taken when using this command. Any items not currently visible will remainunchanged.

For further details on visibility of drawing elements refer to “Ground Table...” on page 10-8 inthe Views Menu chapter.

Command Paste

Menu Edit > Paste


Keys Ctrl + V


Command Delete

Menu Edit->Delete Selection


Keys Delete key

Command Delete Visible

Menu Edit > Delete Visible


Release 8.0Page 3-4


Clear Area

KASEMAKE

9 Clear Area

The clear area command removes the area of drawing defined by a given box, trimming elementswhere necessary. You can either remove the area within the box or everything outside the box.

Activate the command. Check or set the options. Mark the first corner of the area to remove /leave intact. A rubber band box will now appear as you move the cursor. Once the area is enclosedmark the end of the box. The enclosed items will now be removed / trimmed as per the options.

10 Delete Image

The delete image command removes the scanned image from your current design. There is noneed to select anything before using this command.

Activate this command and the image will be removed. No confirmation is required so careshould be taken when using this command.

11 Image Ground

The image ground command alters the ground that the image is placed in within your currentdesign. There is no need to select anything before using this command.

Activate this command and you will be prompted for the new ground that the image is to beplaced in. Click on the arrow to display the pulldown list of available settings. Set the ground tothe required value using the up and down arrows. Click on the new value to set it. Finally, clickon OK. The image will now be redisplayed in the newly selected ground.

12 Quick Edit Sub-MenuQuick Edit provides a menu of Quick Move and Copy functions These features are designed tospeed up the copy and move functions without having to go into the normal MOVE / COPYrollup dialog.

Command Clear Area

Menu Edit > Clear Area


Command Delete Image

Menu Edit > Delete Image


Command Image Ground

Menu Edit > Image Ground



Release 8.0Page 3-5

3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

12.1 Move

The move command allows you to move all or part of the design. First select the items to move.

Activate this command. Firstly, you are prompted for an origin point to use to offset the selecteditems. This must be identified using the appropriate mode (e.g.Lock to Endpoint).

Next you are prompted to pick the new position for the selected items, again using theappropriate mode. As you start to move the cursor to identify the required position, the selecteditems will move as well to help you to reposition them correctly. On identifying the new position,the selected items will be redrawn at their new position.

12.2 Move Horizontal Mirror

With one or more items selected, choose this command to Mirror the selected items horizontally.

First of all you are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating the selected items.Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint).

Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the selected items. Again, pick a point usingthe appropriate mode. The selected items will be displayed mirrored and will move with thecursor, to help you to relocate them correctly.

Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be redrawn mirrored at the newposition.

12.3 Move Vertical Mirror

Choose this command to Mirror part or all of your design vertically. First select the item(s) to bemirrored.

Acivate this command. You are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating theselected items. Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint).

Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the selected items. Again, pick a point usingthe appropriate mode. The selected items will be displayed mirrored and will move with thecursor, to help you to relocate them correctly.

Command Move

Menu Edit > Quick Edit->Move

Toolbar Button: Edit Toolbar

Command Move Horizontal Mirror

Menu Edit > Quick Edit->Move Horizontal Mirror


Command Move Vertical Mirror

Menu Edit > Quick Edit->Move Vertical Mirror


Release 8.0Page 3-6


Quick Edit Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be redrawn mirrored at the newposition.

12.4 Copy

The copy command allows you to copy all or part of the design. First select the items to copy.

Activate this command. You are prompted for an origin point to use to offset the selected items.This must be identified using the appropriate mode (e.g.Lock to Endpoint).

Next you are prompted to pick the position for the copied items, again using the appropriatemode. As you start to move the cursor to identify the required position, the copied items will bedisplayed and will move with the cursor to help you to position them correctly. On identifying thenew position, the selected items are copied to the given position.

12.5 Copy Horizontal Mirror

With one or more items selected, choose this command to make a horizontally mirrored copy ofthe selected items.

First of all you are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating the selected items.Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint).

Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the copied items. Again, pick a point usingthe appropriate mode. The copied items will be displayed mirrored and will move with the cursor,to help you to locate them correctly.

Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be mirrored and copied to the givenposition.

12.6 Copy Vertical Mirror

Choose this command to make a vertically.mirrored copy of part or all of your design First selectthe item(s) to be mirrored.

Command Copy

Menu Edit > Quick Edit->Copy


Command Copy Horizontal Mirror

Menu Edit > Quick Edit->Copy Horizontal Mirror


Command Copy Vertical Mirror

Menu Edit > Quick Edit->Copy Vertical Mirror



Release 8.0Page 3-7

3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

Acivate this command. You are prompted to identify an origin point to assist with locating theselected items. Pick the required point using an appropriate mode (e.g. Lock to Endpoint).

Next you are prompted to identify a new position for the copied items. Again, pick a point usingthe appropriate mode. The selected items will be displayed mirrored and will move with thecursor, to help you to position them correctly.

Once the new position is identified, the selected items will be mirrored and copied to the givenposition.

13 Corner Copy...

This command allows you to take a corner of a design and generate the entire symmetricaldesign. It effectively performs a double mirror.

Activate this command. The Copy Corner dialog is displayed:-

Existing Corner

Set the corner which best describes the corner of the design you have already completed byclicking on the corresponding radio button.

If you wish to leave a gap between copies make sure the Use Extents check box is cleared to makethe X Offset and Y Offset fields accessible. Set them by typing a value directly or using the arrowsas follows:-

• X Offset - the horizontal distance to leave between copies.

• Y Offset - the vertical distance to leave between copies

If you wish to copy the design exactly with no gaps, set the Use Extents check box.

Finally click on OK to accept the new settings. The current design will now be mirror copied withany given gaps to produce the complete design.

Command Corner Copy...

Menu Edit > Corner Copy...


Release 8.0Page 3-8


Move / Copy

KASEMAKE

14 Move / Copy

The move / copy command is a multi-function command allowing you to mirror, scale and rotate,reduce by a percentage or resize part or all of your design. Elements can either be altered directlyor a copy can be made which is then altered. In addition, a cloned copy can be made.

This command can also be used to step and repeat part or all of your design i.e. to producemultiple copies at a fixed offset.

Activating the move / copy command produces a move / copy rollup which is a special type oftabbed dialog box. It is non-modal, meaning that you can continue to work whilst it is on display.It also has rollup functionality to allow you to close it up, leaving only a title bar, when you needto access the drawing area beneath. It can then be opened out fully when you wish to access themove / copy functions. It can also be docked and made to auto hide as detailed in the firstchapter. See “Special Dialogs” on page 1-4.

Each command is allocated a page of options within the move / copy rollup. Simply click on thecorresponding tab to access the options available for the required command.

With the exception of the step and repeat and reduction command, all the commands haveMove, Copy and Clone buttons . Move operates on the original selection set. Copygenerates a copy of the selection set which is then operated on, leaving the original elementsunchanged. Clone produces a copy of the selection set which is then operated on and convertsthe original elements to a master clone.

For step and repeat, where the nature of the command is to produce multiple copies, the Applybutton produces the “Copy” effect of the command.

14.1 Reference Points Again, excepting reduction and step and repeat, the commands make use of reference points toposition the new / altered elements.

Decide whether you wish to specify a reference point or use a predefined reference point. Clickon the Use Reference Points check box to set or clear it accordingly.

If you set the Use Reference Points check box, the Drag check box will appear. Set it if youwish the selection set to be displayed with the cursor as you move to the new position.

If you are not using reference points, select a reference point from the grid of predefinedreference points. Each point in the grid can be thought of as corresponding to one of the resizehandles of the selection box, surrounding the elements you have selected. You are thereforedeciding which of these resize handles corresponds to the position you wish to mirror about.

14.2 Defining the Selection SetWith the exception of reduction which works on the entire design, you need to select part or allof your design for the move / copy functions to operate on. The selected items are enclosed withina selection box with resize handles and are referred to as the selection set. There are severalmethods available for selecting elements. Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 for further details.

Command Move / Copy

Menu Edit > Move / Copy

Shortcuts Edit Toolbar

Mouse Button Right hand mouse button


Release 8.0Page 3-9

3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

14.3 Command PagesClick on the appropriate tab of the move / copy rollup to access the required command page andits settings. Each command should be set up as follows:-

14.3.1 MirrorMirror allows you to mirror horizontally, vertically or in both directions. Alternatively, you canmirror about a given line. Mirroring can also be switched off if you wish to make a single copy ofthe selection set.

Set the type of mirroring required by clicking on the Mirror button(s) to set / unset them.

Set the Drag and Use Reference Points check boxes as required. Refer to “Reference Points”on page 3-9 for a full explanation of these check boxes.

Finally, click on Move, Copy or Clone as appropriate.

If you have chosen to mirror about a given line, the system will now prompt you to identify theline. Click near to the line you wish to identify.

If you are not using reference points the mirror settings will now be applied to the selection set.The resulting elements will appear selected ready for further commands if required.

If you have selected to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with ReferencePoints” on page 3-12.

14.3.2 Scale / RotateThis command allows you to apply scaling and or rotation either to the original selection set orto a copy of the selection set.

Set the scale factor to apply to all the X coordinates using the up and down arrows, or typingdirectly.

Set the scale factor to apply to all the Y coordinates using the up and down arrows, or typingdirectly.

Set the rotation to apply using the up and down arrows, or by typing directly.

Set the Drag and Use Reference Points check boxes as required. Refer to “ReferencePoints” on page 3-9 for a full explanation of these check boxes.


If you are not using reference points the scale and rotation settings will now be applied to theselection set. The resulting elements will appear selected ready for further commands if required.

If you have selected to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with ReferencePoints” on page 3-12.

14.3.3 Reduction This command allows you to reduce your design by a given percentage either in the horizontal orvertical direction.

Unlike the other move / copy commands, reduction does not require a selection set. The entirevisible design is affected by the reduction command.

Choose which axis to apply the reduction by clicking on the corresponding Direction radiobutton.



Move / Copy

KASEMAKE

Set the Shrinkage Factor percentage using the up and down arrows or by typing it directly.

Finally, click on Apply and the selected items will reduce accordingly.

14.3.4 ResizeThe resize command allows you to specify an exact size to scale the selection set to.

Set the X size value to use as the new overall horizontal measurement for the selection set.Click on the arrows, or type the value directly.

Set the Y size value to use as the new overall vertical measurement for the selection set. Clickon the arrows, or type the value directly.



If you are not using reference points the selected elements will now be resized. The resultingelements will appear selected ready for further commands if required.

If you have chosen to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with ReferencePoints” which follows.

14.3.5 Rotate To Specific AngleThis command allows you to rotate either the original selection set or a copy of the selection setto a given angle.

Set the Current Angle, this is the orientation of the selected elements. You can opt tospecify the current angle by choosing an existing element by setting the Specify byElement check box. Alternatively, you can clear this check box and specify the currentorientation by choosing one of the predefined angles, or you can set a specific angle using theup and down arrows, or by typing the required value directly.

Set the Final Angle, this is the angle to rotate the selected elements by with respect to thecurrent angle. You can opt to specify the final angle by choosing an existing element. To dothis, set the Specify by Element check box. Alternatively, you can clear this check box andspecify the final angle by choosing one of the predefined angles, or you can set a specific angleusing the up and down arrows, or by typing the required value directly.



if you have chosen to specify either the current angle or final angle or both by identifying anelement, you will now be prompted to identify these element(s) in turn as appropriate. Identifythe element(s) in the usual way using any of the drawing modes.

If you are not using reference points the selection set will now be rotated. The resulting elementswill appear selected and you will be asked to confirm this is the required solution.

Choose Yes to accept this solution. The newly placed elements will now become the selectionset for subsequent commands.

Choose No to display an alternative solution. Again you will be required to confirmwhether this is the required solution.

Choose Cancel to reset the command, restoring the original selection set.



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

If you have selected to specify reference points, refer to “Completing Move/Copy with ReferencePoints” on page 3-12. Having completed the identification of the reference points, the selectedelements will be rotated and you will be prompted for confirmation, proceed as described in theprevious paragraph.

14.3.6 Step And RepeatThe Step and Repeat… command is used to produce a given number of copies of the selectedelements. Copies can be generated linearly, by specifying a horizontal offset and a vertical offsetto apply to the selection set producing a stepped effect. Alternatively, copies can be generatedradially, where the selected elements are rotated around a given point at a given angle.

Set the Copies field to the number of copies required.

Decide whether you require a linear or a radial layout by setting the corresponding radio button.

14.3.6.1 Linear CopiesIf you have opted for linear copies, the X Offset and Y Offset fields will be displayed.

Set the horizontal offset to use for each copy by setting the X Offset field. To generate acolumn effect, set this value to zero.

Set the vertical offset to use for each copy by setting the Y Offset field. To generate a roweffect, set this value to zero.

Click on Apply. The system will now generate the requested number of copies of the selectedelements using the given offsets.

14.3.6.2 Radial CopiesIf you have opted for radial copies, the Angle field will be displayed.

Set the angle of rotation to apply to each copy by setting the Angle field. This value iscumulative i.e. each copy will take the rotation of the previous value plus this given angle ofrotation.

Click on Apply. The system will now request a rotation point around which to rotate andposition the copies.

Specify the point using any of the available drawing modes. The copies will now be generatedaccording to the given settings.

14.4 Completing Move/Copy with Reference PointsIf you have chosen to use reference points you will now be prompted to identify an origin to beused to position the selection set.

Click with the left mouse button on a suitable point using any of the available drawing modes.

Next you must identify the new position for this origin point. If you have set the Drag option,the selected items will be transformed according to the command settings you have specifiedand will move with the cursor to help you to determine the correct new position. Click withthe left mouse button on the required point. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used.

Finally, the selected items will be transformed and repositioned at the given origin. Theresulting elements whether they are a copy of the original selection set, or the originalselection set modified, will now be selected automatically ready for further commands ifrequired.



Move Points

KASEMAKE

If you wish to unselect them simply click anywhere outside the selection box. Alternatively, youcan select a different set of elements using any of the selection methods available.

15 Move Points

This command allows you to stretch or shrink elements by moving one or more end points. Ensurethat the options are set appropriately.

Activate the command and you will be prompted Mark Start. There are two ways to proceed toidentify the points to be moved:-

• Define a box which encloses the end points to be moved. To do this click and hold the left mouse button to define the start point of the box. Drag the cursor and a rubber band box will appear. When the box surrounds the required end points, release the mouse button to define the end point. Note: Any of the drawing modes can be used to define the move points box. If coordinatemode is chosen, no rubber banding will occur.

• Alternatively, identify individual points using a single click close to the required point. All of the points which have been chosen are illustrated with markers drawn in the selectioncolour. If an entire element is enclosed, the element is drawn in the selection colour instead.

You can repeatedly identify single points or groups of points using a combination of the abovetwo methods whilst simultaneously holding down the CTRL key.

Coincident Points

If you have coincident points but only wish one element to be moved, hold down the CTRL keyand use a single click near to the element you wish to identify. A marker will be drawn at thecoincident point but only the element nearest to the cursor will be altered.

15.1 Completing the Move Points CommandOnce all points are identified, you must identify a new position for the chosen end points. Thereare two ways to do this. Either by defining an origin and new position or using the nudge featureto move the selected items by a fixed amount.

15.1.1 Use Reference PointsMark the point using any of the available drawing modes. If you have not set the option to dragelements, the bounding rectangle for the selected elements will now appear to assist you inrelocating the origin point.

Now identify the new position for the origin point. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used.If you have set the option to drag elements, the elements will move with the cursor to assist youin relocating them.

15.1.2 Nudge FacilityAlternatively, use the Nudge facility to move the identified elements using the arrow keys asdirection indicators. Each time an arrow key is pressed the selected elements are moved in the

Command Move Points

Menu Edit > Move Points




3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

corresponding direction by a fixed distance known as the nudge factor. Click anywhere within thedrawing area when the design is at the correct position to complete the move.

The Nudge factor can be altered using the File->Preferences command described on page 2-41,or by editing the current setting which is displayed to the right hand side of the status bar. See“Status Bar” on page 1-4.

The nudge angle can also be altered so the the arrow keys cause a move at a given angle to thecorresponding direction. Refer to for further details.

Note: Holding shift during a nudge multiplies the nudge factor by 10

Once the new position is identified, the elements are altered according to how the move pointsbox was placed:-

• If all the elements end points where enclosed by the move points box, the element will simply be shifted to the new position.

• If one endpoint of a line was enclosed by the move points box, this point will be moved but the other endpoint will remain unchanged, thus the line will be stretched, or shrunk as appropriate.

• If one endpoint of an arc, or one endpoint and the centre of the arc are enclosed by the move points box, these points will move and a new arc which maintains the original radius will be generated. The other end point may be adjusted to maintain this radius.

15.1.3 Move Points with DimensionsIf you identify any of the lines used for a parallel dimension by enclosing both of its end points,the dimension will automatically be identified as well and subsequently adjusted to redimensionthe new position of the lines.

Similarly, if you identify one or more end points for either of the lines between which an angledimension has been placed, the angle dimension will be automatically selected and adjust toreflect the new angle between the moving lines.

15.2 OptionsYou can choose whether you wish to drag the selected elements or not, when relocating theorigin point.

Set the drag option, if you wish the selected elements to follow the cursor and help you to identifythe new position for them.

Clear the drag option, if you wish to relocate the selected elements using the bounding rectanglefor these elements.

16 Move Points Poly

This command is similar to Move Points as it allows you to stretch or shrink elements by movingone or more end points. However with this command the points to move are enclosed by apolygon to enable awkward areas to be accessed.

Command Move Points Poly

Menu Edit > Move Points Poly




Move Points Poly

KASEMAKE

Ensure that the options are set appropriately. Activate the command and you will be promptedMark Start. Identify a start point for the polygon.

You will now be prompted Mark End. Drag the cursor and a rubber band line will appear. Thisline forms the base of the polygon. Identify a suitable end point.

You will now be prompted Mark Origin. Drag the cursor and a three sided rubber band polygonwill be drawn. Identify the next vertex.

Drag the cursor and a four sided polygon will rubber band. Continue to identify vertices for thepolygon until all the points you wish to move are enclosed. Double click to identify the final vertexand complete the polygon definition process.

Note: Any of the drawing modes can be used to define the move points polygon. If coordinatemode is chosen, no rubber banding will occur.

All of the points which have been surrounded by the polygon are illustrated with markers drawnin the selection colour. If an entire element is enclosed, the element is drawn in the selectioncolour instead.

Once all points are identified, you must identify a new position for the chosen end points. Thereare two ways to do this. Either by defining an origin and new position or using the nudge featureto move the selected items by a fixed amount.

16.1 Use Reference PointsMark an origin point using any of the available drawing modes. If you have not set the option todrag elements, the poygon will now appear to assist you in relocating the origin point. If you haveset the option to drag elements, the elements will move with the cursor to assist you in relocatingthem.

Now identify the new position for the origin point. Again, any of the drawing modes can be used.

16.2 Nudge FacilityAlternatively, use the Nudge facility to move the identified elements using the arrow keys asdirection indicators. Each time an arrow key is pressed the selected elements are moved in thecorresponding direction by a fixed distance known as the nudge factor. Click anywhere within thedrawing area when the design is at the correct position to complete the move.

The Nudge factor can be altered using the File->Preferences command described on page 2-41,or by editing the current setting which is displayed to the right hand side of the status bar. See“Status Bar” on page 1-4.

The nudge angle can also be altered so the the arrow keys cause a move at a given angle to thecorresponding direction. Refer to for further details.

Note: Holding shift during a nudge multiplies the nudge factor by 10

Once the new position is identified, the elements are altered according to how the move pointspolygon was placed:-

• If all the elements end points where enclosed by the move points polygon, the element will simply be shifted to the new position.

• If one endpoint of a line was enclosed by the move points polygon, this point will be moved but the other endpoint will remain unchanged, thus the line will be stretched, or shrunk as appropriate.



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

• If one endpoint of an arc, or one endpoint and the centre of the arc are enclosed by the move points polygon, these points will move and a new arc which maintains the original radius will be generated. The other end point may be adjusted to maintain this radius.

16.3 OptionsYou can choose whether you wish to drag the selected elements or not, when relocating theorigin point.

Set the drag option, if you wish the selected elements to follow the cursor and help you to identifythe new position for them.

Clear the drag option, if you wish to relocate the selected elements using the rubber bandpolygon.

17 Change Nudge Angle...

The Change Nudge Angle... command is used to redefine the nudge angle used by the nudgefeature of Move Points or Select . A nudge angle can be useful if you want to nudge items alongan angled line. (e.g. nudging a tab along the side of a sloping tray).

Activate the command. The Nudge Angle dialog is displayed.

The angle can be entered as a fixed value, or defined by selecting an element in the drawing area.

• To specify a fixed value either choose from the predefined angles by clicking on the corre-sponding button. The angle is automatically displayed. Alternatively, type an angle directly into the angle edit box or use the arrow keys to scroll the current setting.

• If you wish to identify the angle by selecting an existing element, click on the Get Angle From Element button.

Once the nudge angle is defined, press OK. If Get Angle From Element was chosen, you will beprompted to select an element within the drawing area that is drawn at the angle you want touse as the nudge angle. Simply click on the appropriate element to identify it.

Command Change Nudge Angle...

Menu Edit > Change Nudge Angle...

Shortcuts None



Change

KASEMAKE

Once an angle is determined, this becomes the current nudge angle. All nudge functions will usethis angle until it is reset.

To return the nudge angle to the default angle, use the Change Nudge Angle... command toreset the nudge angle to 0.

Note: The change nudge angle command can be set to a keyboard shortcut of yourchoice. Try CTRL + N

Note: Changing the nudge angle can be useful for moving points along a defined angle

18 Change

The change command allows you to alter the attributes of a selection of elements, i.e. linestyle,ground etc.

You must first select the items you wish to change using one of the standard selection methods.Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 for further details on selecting elements.

Activating this command produces the change dialog. Set the options as required then click OKto make these changes to the selection set. Click on Cancel to leave the selected elementsunchanged.

The options available for this command are associated with a check box. All attributes whoseassociated check box is ticked, will be applied to the selection set. The attribute check boxesshould therefore be cleared if no change is required. The attributes which are available are:-

18.1 Element StyleGround

Check the ground check box to change the ground that the selected items are associated with.The ground combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the dropdown list of grounds. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on thisvalue to select it.

Line Style

Check the linestyle check box to change the linestyle that the selected items are drawn in. Thelinestyle combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop downlist of line styles. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this valueto select it.

Line Width

Check the line width check box to change the line width that the selected items are drawn at.The line width combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the dropdown list of widths. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on thisvalue to select it.

Command Change

Menu Edit > Change...





3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

Profile

Check the profile check box to change the profile that the selected items are associated with.The profile combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop downlist of available profiles. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click onthis value to select it.

18.2 Text SettingsThe following attributes can also be altered for selected text:-

Text Size

Check the text size check box to change the size of selected text. The text size edit box nowbecomes accessible. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows, or click on thevalue to retype it.

Dimension Text Size

Check the dimension text size check box to change the size of text for selected dimensions.The text size edit box now becomes accessible. Scroll to the required value using the up anddown arrows, or click on the value to retype it.

Font

Check the font check box to change the font that the selected text elements are drawn in. Thefont combo box now becomes accessible. Click on the arrow to open up the drop down listof fonts. Scroll to the required value using the up and down arrows. Click on this value toselect it.

19 Copy Properties From...

This command allows you to copy specific properties from a given element to the currentlyselected elements. You should select the elements you wish to update before you activate thiscommand, using any of the available select commands.

Activate the Copy Properties From... command. The Copy Properties dialog will be displayed asfollows:-

Command Copy Properties From...

Menu Edit > Copy Properties From...




Text

KASEMAKE

Simply set or clear the check box corresponding to the ground, line style or line width properties.Text properties, namely font and size, can also be applied to any selected text elements if required.Set or clear the text settings check box as appropriate.

Click on OK to confirm any new settings, otherwise click on Cancel to leave the settings as theywere.

You will now be prompted to mark an element. This is the element from which the chosenproperties will be copied. The cursor will change to a hand to help you to identify the element.Move the hand close to the element you wish to identify and click with the left hand mousebutton to pick it.

The selected elements will now be updated as per the chosen settings using the properties of theelement just identified.

20 Text

This command allows you to amend the contents of a selected text string. The text string musttherefore be selected before you can activate this command. Refer to “Select” on page 3-26 forfurther details on selecting the text string.

Note: Alternatively as a shortcut to this command simply double click on a text string toselect it and activate the edit command.

Once this command has been activated the text cursor will appear. You can now move the cursorabout the text string using the left and right arrow keys. Simply insert new characters or use deleteor backspace to remove characters as required.

Once the text string has been amended press Enter to leave Edit->Text changing the stringpermanently.

21 TrueType

This command allows you to amend the contents of a selected truetype text string. The text stringmust therefore be selected before you can activate this command. Refer to“Select” on page 3-26for further details on selecting the text string.

Note: Alternatively as a shortcut to this command simply double click on a truetype textstring to select it and activate the edit command.

Once this command has been activated the text input dialog will be displayed. You can now alterany of the attributes of the truetype text string by adjusting the attributes. The result of anychanges will be reflected in the Sample section of the dialog. Refer to the section Draw->TrueType on page 4-31 for a full explanation of the attributes.

Command Text

Menu Edit > Text


Keys Alt+F8

Command TrueType

Menu Edit > TrueType




3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

To alter the contents of the text string, use the arrow keys to move along the string. Simply insertnew characters or use delete or backspace to remove characters as required.

Once the text string has been amended press OK to close the text input dialog, any new attributeswill now be applied to the truetype string. Any changes to the text string will also be made.Cancel will ignore any changes made and leave the string unchanged.

22 Bezier Curve

This command allows you to alter a previously drawn bezier curve. First select the bezier curveyou wish to amend using one of the available Select commands. Refer to “Select” on page 26 forfurther details on how to select the required bezier curve.

Activate this command. Markers will now be drawn to illustrate all the nodes for the chosenbezier curve. You will also be prompted to identify a node to edit. Click near the centre of therequired node to identify it. Two lines will now appear through the centre of the nodes tangentialto the sections of curve to either side of the chosen node. Each line displays an additional controlpoint at its end.

You can now click on to and while holding down the left hand mouse button drag either of thesecontrol points or the original node to edit the curve. The curve is updated as you move the mouseto show the effect. Release the mouse button when you are happy with the adjustment. You cancontinue to make further adjustments using one of the other control points.

To complete the adjustment or to access other commands which can be used to alter the chosenbezier curve, click with the right hand mouse button in the drawing area to display a contextmenu of commands as follows :-

Cusp

Choose the cusp command to restrict the adjustments to one section of the curve only. Afterselecting this command. Click on a control point and drag it. Any movement is only applied tothe line with the control point you move and onlythe section of bezier curve associated with it isupdated.

Smooth

Choose the smooth command to apply a smoothing factor to both sections of the curve.

Symmetric

Choose the symmetric command to apply the same adjustments to both sections of curve.Afterselecting this command. Click on a control point and drag it. Movement is applied to both lines.The fixed line is automatically adjusted to mirror the one you move and both sections of beziercurve are updated to reflect the movement.

Delete

Choose this command to remove the current node. No confirmation is required.

Command Bezier Curve

Menu Edit > Bezier Curve




Clone

KASEMAKE

Add Node

Choose this command to add an additional node. You should identify the position for the newnode by clicking with the left mouse button. A new node will appear. The new section of curvewill be added and the tangential lines and control points for the new sections will also appear.

Accept

Choose this command to accept any adjustments you have made to the selected bezier curve andmake them permanent.

Any control points will be removed and the bezier curve drawn in its original colour with anyadjustments made.

23 Clone

This command allows you to clone the selected elements i.e. to take a copy of them. The originalelements are grouped after this command has been executed. The resulting clone is therefore alsogrouped.

Activate this command. The selected elements are cloned producing a copy of the original whichis drawn slightly offset from the original elements. The resulting clone is drawn highlighted as itautomatically replaces the original selection set.

24 Pick Ground

Pick Ground allows you to select all elements in the same ground as a chosen element.

Activate the command from the Edit menu or by clicking with the right hand mouse buttonwithin the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. You will now be prompted to markan element. Click on or near to the required element. The element and all grounds drawn in thesame ground as the marked element, will now be displayed in the selection colour. The selectionbox with resize handles will also be displayed.

If you wish to pick more than one ground, choose Pick Ground again and hold down the Shiftkey before identifying an element in the additional ground. This process can be repeated forfurther grounds if required.

25 Select Sub-MenuMany of the commands require elements to be selected, before they can be used. Several selectcommands are available providing different methods for selecting elements.

Command Edit Clone

Menu Edit > Clone


Command Pick Ground

Menu Edit > Pick Ground


Right hand mouse button



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

Elements that have been selected are displayed in the current selection color, black by default, todistinguish them. See “Preferences” on page 2-41 for details of how to change the selectioncolour.

The selected items are referred to as the selection set. The extents of the selection set are enclosedby a dotted rectangle known as the selection box or tracker. Small black markers appear aroundthe edge of the selection box. These are resize handles.

25.1 Manipulation of the Selection SetThere are additional functions available with the selection set which are not available as menucommands. These are described in the following:-

25.1.1 Adding to the Selection SetYou can add to an existing selection set by holding the Shift key whilst clicking and releasing themouse button on or near the element to be added. If successful, the newly identified element willbe displayed in the selection colour and the selection box adjusted where necessary to enclosethe new element. Any number of elements can be added in this way.

Note: Elements can only be added to the selection set individually and in conjunctionwith the Shift key. Picking an element that is already selected, results in it beingremoved from the selection set. Refer to “Selecting Elements Individually” on page3-27 for details of selecting individual items.

25.1.2 Clearing the Selection SetChoosing an element or elements not already selected will add these elements to the selectionset replacing the current selection set.

If you wish to clear the selection set without identifying further elements, simply click and releasethe mouse button away from any elements.

Elements removed from a selection set are redisplayed in their original colour. If no new selectionset is defined, the selection box and resize handles are also removed.

25.1.3 Auto ScrollManipulation of the selection set may cause the design to automatically scroll if the cursor ismoved to one of the edges of the drawing area, depending upon current settings.

The option to automatically scroll is determined from the Allow Autoscroll setting located on theView page of File->Preferences. See “View” on page 2-47.

25.1.4 Freehand Move / Copy of the Selection SetThe selection set can also be moved by clicking and holding anywhere inside the selection box.The cursor changes to a cross to show that the items can be moved. Drag the cursor to the newposition. Release the mouse button and the selection set will be redisplayed relative to the newcursor position.

To make a copy of the selected items, click the right hand mouse button once whilst draggingthe cursor. When the mouse button is released, the selected items will be copied relative to thenew cursor position, leaving the original selection set unchanged.

25.1.4.1 Freehand Move - Horizontal / Vertical Movement Only



Select Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

The selection set can be moved in a horizontal / vertical direction only by holding down the CTRLkey in conjunction with the left mouse button. Again, the cursor must stay within the selectionset. Click and hold the left mouse button whilst holding down the CTRL key.

Vertical Only

Keep the cursor within the horizontal extents of the selection box and move up or down to restrictmovement to vertical movement only.

Horizontal Only

Move the cursor outside of the horizontal extents of the selection box, or from side to side whilstwithin the extents of the selection box to restrict movement to horizontal movement only.

In both cases, release the left mouse button to reposition the selection set.

25.1.5 Resizing the Selection SetThe selection set can be resized by clicking and holding the left mouse button on one of the resizehandles and dragging it to a new position. The cursor changes as you move over the handle toshow the direction in which you can drag. Releasing the mouse button resizes the selection boxand causes the selection set to be stretched or shrunk to fit the newly sized box.

Resizing Proportionately

The selection set can be scaled proportionately using the corner resize handles. Click and drag acorner in any direction, the selected items will resize in both x and y dimensions to retain theiroriginal proportion.

Resizing by a Factor of 100%

The selected items can be resized by a factor of 100% by holding down the CTRL key whilstdragging one of the resize handles. The selected items will not be resized until you move



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

approximately the width or height of the original items. They will then resize to the nearest factorof 100% according to where the final cursor position is with respect to the original cursorposition.

Note: A copy of the selected items can be made during any of the above resize methods,by clicking the right mouse button once whilst dragging the cursor. The resizingwill then be applied to a copy of the selection set, leaving the original elementsunchanged.

25.1.6 Mirroring the Selection SetThe selection set can be mirrored horizontally or vertically using any of the side resize handles.

The two resize handles on the vertical sides of the selection box can be used to perform ahorizontal mirror and the two resize handles on the horizontal sides of the selection box can beused to perform a vertical mirror.

Always choose the resize handle furthest away from the side you wish to perform the mirror. Ineffect, you have to drag the selected items across themselves to achieve a mirror.

Identify the handle you wish to use, by moving the cursor over the available handles. The cursorwill change as you move over each handle to show the direction in which you can drag. Click andholdthe left mouse button on the appropriate resize handle and drag it across the originalselection set to a new position. Releasing the mouse button gives a mirrored version of theselection box and causes the selection set to be mirrored within the newly sized box.

Mirroring Proportionately

The selection set can be mirrored proportionately using the corner resize handles. Click and draga corner in any direction, again you must cross over the original selection set to achieve the mirror.The selected items will be mirrored once you cross the original selection set and will resize in bothx and y dimensions to retain their original proportion.

Mirroring by a Factor of 100%



Select Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

The selected items can be mirrored and resized by a factor of 100% by holding down the CTRLkey whilst dragging one of the resize handles. As before the mirror effect is not produced untilyou cross the original selection set. The selected items will then appear mirrored and resized onlywhen you move approximately the width or height of the original items again. They will then bemirrored and resized to the nearest factor of 100% according to where the final cursor positionis with respect to the original cursor position.

Note: A mirrored copy of the selected items can be made during any of the above meth-ods, by clicking the right mouse button once whilst dragging the cursor. The mir-roring and any resizing will then be applied to a copy of the selection set, leavingthe original elements unchanged.

25.1.7 Rotating the Selection SetThe selection set can be rotated about its centre using any of the resize handles in conjunctionwith the SHIFT key.

Identify the handle you wish to use by holding down the SHIFT key and moving the cursor overthe available handles. The cursor will change to a rotation arrow as you move over each handle.Click and hold the left mouse button on the appropriate handle whilst continuing to hold downthe SHIFT key. Drag the rotation cursor to begin to rotate the selection set about its centre.Releasing the mouse button causes the selection set to be rotated to the new position.

Rotating by a Fixed Increment

The selection set can also be rotated as above but by a fixed increment. The increment isdetermined by the Line Angle Inc. setting available through File->Preferences on the Settingspage. Ensure that this is set to the increment you wish to use. See “Settings” on page 2-43.

Hold down the SHIFT key for rotation and in addition the CTRL key to confirm that a fixedincrement is required. Now move the cursor over the available handles. The cursor will change toa rotation arrow as you move over each handle. Click and hold the left mouse button on theappropriate handle whilst continuing to hold down the SHIFT and CTRL keys simultaneously. Dragthe rotation cursor to begin to rotate the selection set about its centre a given increment at atime. Releasing the mouse button causes the selection set to be rotated to the new position.

25.1.8 NudgeThe nudge feature can be used to move the selected elements by a fixed amount.

The arrow keys are used as direction indicators for nudging. Each time an arrow is pressed, theobjects will move in that direction by a fixed distance known as the nudge factor.

The nudge factor is displayed in the lower right hand side of the status bar. To change the nudgefactor simply click on the current value in the status bar and either retype it or use the arrows toscroll to the required value.

The Nudge factor can also be changed using Preferences. See “Nudge Factor” on page 2-42 forfurther details.

Note: Holding shift during a nudge multiplies the nudge factor by 10.

The nudge angle can be redefined using the “Change nudge angle” command on page 16. Thiscan be useful if you want to nudge items along an angled line. (e.g. nudging a tab along the sideof a sloping tray).

25.1.9 Pop-Up Menu



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

A pop up menu providing a short cut to some of the edit commands is available when using theselect command.

Click the right hand mouse button within the drawing area to activate the pop up menu. Acommand can then be activated by clicking with the mouse on the required command name.

Note: Some of the items in the pop up menu may appear greyed out if no elements arecurrently selected.

25.2 Select

“Select “ is a powerful command that allows you to identify one or more elements which are tobe added to the selection set.

Activating this command prompts for the start of the selection box. Items can either be selectedusing a box or individually as follows:-

Command Select

Menu Edit > Select > Select

Toolbar Button Main Tool Bar



Select Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

25.2.1 Selecting Elements IndividuallyItems can be selected individually by clicking and releasing the left mouse button on or near tothe required item. The element if picked correctly, will now be drawn in the selection colour andthe selection box with resize handles will appear.

If you fail to select an element, try picking a point closer to the required element. If you still havedifficulty, you may need to relax the selection tolerance. See “Preferences” on page 2-41 fordetails of how to change the selection tolerance.

25.2.2 Selecting Elements with a BoxElements can be selected and placed in the selection set using a box to identify them. Theelements will be selected depending upon the position of the box and the select commandoptions currently set. Before defining the box, you should check the selection options are correctand reset them if necessary. Once the options are set they will retain their value, so it may notalways be necessary to change them. Please refer to the next section “Select Command Options”for a full explanation of setting the select options.

Mark the start of the box by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Drag the cursor and thebox will rubber band. Release the button to define the other diagonal point of the box. Theselection box with resize handles will now appear. All the elements which are chosen by applyingthe box and the select command options, will now be displayed in the selection colour to showthat they belong to the selection set.

If you wish to temporarily override the select options, you can hold down the ALT key whilstidentifying the box. The options will automatically toggle as follows:-

25.2.3 Selecting Text Strings for EditingThe Select command can be used to edit text strings. Simply double click to identify the text entityyou wish to edit. If you select a text entity it will now be drawn in the selection colour and thetext cursor will appear ready for you to make alterations to the text string as per the Edit->Textcommand. Please see “Text” on page 19 of this chapter.

Similarly, the Select command can be used to edit truetype text. If you double click to identify atruetype string, the Text Input dialog used to enter / amend truetype text will be displayed readyfor you to make any amendments as per the Edit->Truetype command. Please see “TrueType” onpage 19 of this chapter.

25.2.4 Select Command OptionsOptions are available for the select command to help to determine which Activate the Optionscommand, Draw->Options from the menu, or click on the Options button in the StandardTool Bar. The select tool options should now be set as follows:-

25.2.4.1 Selection MethodChoose the selection method to be used to identify which elements to include in the selection setby clicking on one of the following:-

Current setting Effect of ALT key

Inside Part Inside

Part Inside Inside

Outside Inside



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

• Inside - Only elements entirely contained within the selection box will be included • Part Inside - Any elements either partly or wholly contained within the selection box

will be included• Outside - Only elements completely outside the selection box will be included

25.2.4.2 Graphics TypeIf a .TIF image has been loaded in to your design, the graphics type option will appear. This isused to determine whether the image, or the design or both should be selected. Click on therequired setting as follows:-

• Image - Only the image part will be selected• Vectors - Only the design elements will be selected• Both - The image and design elements will be selected

25.2.4.3 Show Elements when DraggingSet this option if you wish to rubber band any selected items when moving the selection set.

Clear this option if you just want to move the selection box. Moving the elements only when itis given a final positon.

Finally, click OK to save the new settings, or Cancel to abandon any changes.

25.3 Select Next

Select Next works in conjunction with the Select command to help you to identify the correctelement, where several elements overlap or are very close together.

After using Select, choose Select Next from the Edit menu or by clicking the right hand mousebutton within the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu.

The KASEMAKE system will now search again for another drawing element which is within theselection tolerance of the given cursor point.

Select Next can be activated as many times as is necessary to cycle through all the elementswhich are within the selection tolerance of the original cursor point.

See “Preferences” on page 2-41 for details of how to change the selection tolerance.

25.4 Select Last

The Select Last command will automatically replace the current selection set with the previousselection set. Where nothing is currently selected, Select Last will simply select the last drawingelement(s) to be selected.

Command Select Next

Menu Edit > Select > Select->Next


Command Select Last

Menu Edit >Select >Select Last




Select Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Choose Select Last from the Edit menu or by clicking the right hand mouse button within thedrawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. The previous selection set will automaticallybe restored.

25.5 Select All

This command as its name suggests, will select all the visible elements in your current design.

Activate the command from the Edit menu or by clicking with the right hand mouse buttonwithin the drawing area and picking it from the pop up menu. All the drawing elements will nowbe displayed in the selection colour and the selection box with resize handles will appear.

25.6 Select None

This command as its name suggests, will deselect all the previously selected elements in yourcurrent design.

Activate the command. All the drawing elements will now be displayed in their original colourand the selection box with resize handles removed.

25.7 Select Entities Sub-MenuThere are two methods for selecting entities so a command exists for each method:-

25.7.1 By Type

This command allows you to select a specific type of element or elements in your current design.Entities are selected based on their type from a check list of available element types.

Command Select All

Menu Edit > Select > Select All

Shortcuts Ctrl + A


Command Select None

Menu Edit >Select >Select None

Shortcuts Ctrl + E

Mouse Button Not available

Command By Type

Menu Edit > Select > Select Entities > By Type

Shortcuts None available



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. A Select Entities dialog will now be displayed:-

There are two lists of element types. The first list labelled Available, displays the element typeswhich can be identified by the By Type command. The second list, labelled Selected, showswhich element types are currently chosen to be identified by the Select Entities command. Tomove elements from one list to the other, simply click on the element and use the appropriatearrow button. The element type will move to the other list.

Once all the required element types have been moved to the Selected list, click on OK. Allelements within the current design which correspond to the element types chosen will now behighlighted in the selection colour and the selection box which contains them will be drawn.These elements become the new selection set ready for interaction with other commands.

25.7.2 By Length

The By Length command provides an alternative method for identifying entities to be selected.Entities are selected based on their length / radius which must meet a specified criterion.

Activate this command. The following dialog is displayed:-.

Determine whether you wish to include lines and text by setting or clearing the Length check box.Now specify the criterion to apply to determine which lines and text are selected.

Command By Length

Menu Edit > Select > Select Entities > By Length

Shortcuts None available



Select Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Set the appropriate condition by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the drop down list.Choose from:-

• = - Equal to• < - Less than• > - Greater than• <> - Not equal toNow set the length to combine with this condition. Type the length directly or use the arrows toscroll.

Determine whether you wish to include arcs, circles and ellipses by setting or clearing the Radiuscheck box. Now specify the criterion to use to determine which circular elements are selected.

Set the appropriate condition as before. Now determine the radius to combine with thiscondition. Type a suitable value or use the arrows to scroll.

Finally click on OK. KASEMAKE will now determine which entities to add to the selection set byapplying the given criteria. The elements which meet the criteria are displayed in the currentselection colour. A bounding box is drawn around the selected items, confirming that theycomprise the current selection set.

25.8 Select Ground

Select Ground allows you to choose all the elements which are associated with a given ground.

Activate Select Ground. A Select Ground dialog will now appear. Set the ground to the requiredvalue by clicking on the arrow of the ground combo box. Scroll with the arrows to the requiredground. Click on the value to set it. Finally, choose OK to continue or Cancel to abandon thecommand.

If you choose OK, all the elements drawn in the requested ground will now become the currentselection set.

25.9 Select Polygon

The Select Polygon commmand is a variation of the Select command used to identify elements toadd to the selection set. It allows greater flexibility when picking elements as you can define therubber band shape used to identify the elements, rather than being restricted to a rectangularbox.

Activate this command. Check the Options. You are prompted Mark Start. KASEMAKE requiresyou to pick a starting point from which to generate the rubber band selection shape. Identify asuitable point using a single mouse click.

As you begin to move the cursor, KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from the point youpicked following the path of the cursor. You will now be prompted, Mark next point (Double Click

Command Select Ground

Menu Edit > Select Ground


Command Select Polygon

Menu Edit > Select Polygon

Shortcuts Right Hand Mouse Button



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

to end). Identify a second point again using a single mouse click. You have now determined thefirst side of the Selection Polygon.

Again you will be prompted Mark next point (Double Click to end). In addition, KASEMAKE willdraw a rubber band line from the last point you picked following the path of the cursor. This isthe to help you to identify the next side of the polygon. Pick a point to fix this side. Repeat thisprocess identifying further sides as required.

For the final side, you should use a double mouse click to enter the end point. This will not onlyfinalise the position of the side you are identifying but will also complete the Selection Polygon.

KASEMAKE will now determine which elements to add to the selection set taking into accountthe current options. The elements which are identified are displayed in the current selectioncolour as confirmation. Also, a bounding box is drawn around the selected items, confirming thatthey comprise the current selection set.

This command is self-repeating.

25.9.1 Select Polygon OptionsOptions are available for the Select Polygon command to help to determine which elements areselected.

Activate the Options command, Draw->Options from the menu, or click on the Optionsbutton in the Standard Tool Bar. The Select Polygon tool options should now be displayed. Theyare in fact the same as those used for the Select command. They can be set as follows:-

25.9.1.1 Selection MethodChoose the selection method to be used to identify which elements to include in the selection setby clicking on one of the following:-

• Inside - Only elements entirely contained within the selection box will be included • Part Inside - Any elements either partly or wholly contained within the selection box

will be included• Outside - Only elements completely outside the selection box will be included



Select Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

25.9.1.2 Graphics TypeIf a .TIF image has been loaded in to your design, the graphics type option will appear. This isused to determine whether the image, or the design or both should be selected. Click on therequired setting as follows:-

• Image - Only the image part will be selected• Vectors - Only the design elements will be selected• Both - The image and design elements will be selected

25.9.1.3 Show Elements when DraggingSet this option if you wish to rubber band any selected items when moving the selection set.

Clear this option if you just want to move the selection box. Moving the elements only when itis given a final positon.

Finally, click OK to save the new settings, or Cancel to abandon any changes.

25.10 Select Construct Lines

The Select Construct Lines commmand is a variation of the Select command, but allows you toidentify construct lines rather than design elements.

Activate this command. Check the current options. You can either select individual construct linesusing a single mouse click or alternatively, you can select multiple construct lines by defining arubber band box. In either case, KASEMAKE now prompts Mark Start. You should proceed inone of the following ways:-

25.10.1 Individual Construct LinesTo identify individual construct lines move the mouse near to the required construct line and clickwith the mouse. KASEMAKE will identify the nearest construct line to the point you identifiedand will highlight it in the current selection colour as confirmation.

To identify additional constuct lines, hold down the SHIFT key whilst picking a point near to thenext required construct line.

Note: Picking a construct line twice will cause it to be deselected.

25.10.2 Multiple Construct LinesYou can select multiple construct lines by defining a rubber band box. The position of the rubberband box in conjunction with the current options determines which construct lines you wish toidentify. KASEMAKE defines a box from the start and end point of its diagonal so you will needto identify two points.

Command Select Construct Lines

Menu Edit > Select Construct Lines

Shortcuts Guidelines Toolbar



3 - Edit Commands

KASEMAKE

Identify a start point for the diagonal by holding down the left mouse button. Without releasingthe button, move the cursor. The prompt changes to Mark End. At the same time, KASEMAKEwill begin to rubber band a box from the given start point following the path of the cursor.

Once the construct lines you wish to select are adequately identified by the box (depending uponthe options), release the mouse button. This sets the final position of the diagonal end point andthus finalises the position of the rubber band box.

KASEMAKE will now determine which construct lines have been selected. The chosen constructlines will be drawn in the current selection colour as confirmation.

25.10.3 Delete Construct LinesThe Delete command (or delete key shortcut) will remove one or more selected construct lines.

Before activating the command, select the construct line(s) you wish to remove using the Edit->Select Construct Line command. See “Select Construct Lines” on page 33.

Activate the Delete command. All selected construct lines will instantly be removed withoutfurther confirmation.



KASEMAKE

4 - Draw Commands

1 Lines Sub-MenuSelect the Lines option from the Draw Menu to access the Lines Sub-menu with the followingcommands:-

1.1 Line

The line command allows you to draw a line between two given points.

Activate the command. You will be prompted for the start point. Any of the available drawingmodes can be used. Set the drawing mode to use. Identify the start point according to themode being used. A rubber band line starting at the given point will now be drawn followingthe cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the end point. Identify the end point using anappropriate drawing mode.

It is possible to set the increments in which the angle and or the length of the line increase.This is achieved through the File->Preferences... command. Once they are set, they can beapplied by holding down the CTRL key whilst moving the cursor.

This command is self repeating. You can continue to draw lines in this way until anothercommand is activated.

To draw orthogonal lines, choose the Orthogonal mode. You will only be able to drawhorizontal and vertical lines whilst this mode is selected.

To draw a continuous sequence of individual lines select the Joined mode. You will now beprompted for the initial start point and end point as before. However, once the first line isidentified each subsequent line will assume the previous lines end point as its start point. Youwill now only need to identify the end point of each additional line. To complete a linesequence, click with the right mouse button in the drawing area and choose Reset from thepop-up menu that now appears. The line command will now be reset ready to accept a newstart point for a further line sequence or for a discrete line if the Joined mode is switched off.

1.2 Angle

The Angle Line command allows you to draw lines by specifying a start point and an angleand length.

Activate this command. Identify the start point using any of the available drawing modes. TheAngle Line dialog will now appear.

Enter the required angle in one of the following ways:-

•Click on one of the buttons corresponding to the predefined angles

Command Line

Menu Draw > Lines->Line

Toolbar Button: Draw Toolbar

Command Angle Line

Menu Draw > Lines->Angle



Release 8.0Page 4-1

4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

•Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value

•Type the angle directly into the angle field

The length can be specified in one of three ways. Click on the corresponding radio button tochoose the method to use as follows :-

Radial - to specify the actual length of the line

X Distance - to specify the horizontal distance of the line

Y Distance - to specify the vertical distance of the line

Enter the required length in one of the following ways:-


•Type the value directly into the length field

Click on OK to close the Angle Line dialog and draw the specified line. Click on Cancel to closethe dialog without drawing a line.

This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw angle lines in this way untilanother command is selected.

The Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of linesat given angles and lengths. A start point will be required for the first line in the sequence only.All subsequent lines will assume the end of the previous line as their start point. Therefore, afteridentifying the initial start point, you will only need to identify the angle and length using theAngle Line dialog. Each click on OK will draw the given line and adopt its end point for the startof the next line. After drawing the last line in the sequence, click on Cancel to finish the currentline sequence and restart the command.

1.3 Angle Relative

The Angle Relative Line command allows you to draw lines at a given angle from another line. Inaddition to identifying the existing line from which to measure the angle, you need to specify astart point and an angle and length.

Activate this command. Identify the line from which you wish to measure the new line in the usualway. The Angle Relative dialog will now appear.

Enter the required angle in one of the following ways:-

•Click on one of the buttons corresponding to the predefined angles


•Type the angle directly into the angle field

Set the fixed length option if you wish to type in the final length, otherwise clear this option ifyou wish to determine the length from the cursor position.

If you have chosen fixed length, enter the required length in one of the following ways:-



Command Angle Relative

Menu Draw > Lines->Angle Relative


Release 8.0Page 4-2


Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Click on OK to close the Angle Relative dialog.

Next identify the start point for the new line using any of the available drawing modes.

If you have set the fixed length option KASEMAKE will now draw a rubber band line of givenlength. The orientation of the line changes as you move the cursor. Click to identify which solutionyou require. The line will now be drawn in the current ground.

If you have not set the fixed length option, you will now be required to mark the end of the line.A rubber band line will be drawn from the start point at the given angle from the chosen line.Identify the end point using any of the drawing modes. The line will now be drawn in the currentground.

Click on Cancel to close the dialog without drawing a line.

This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw angle relative lines in this wayuntil another command is picked.

The Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines.An existing line to measure the angle from and a start point will be required for the first line inthe sequence only. All subsequent lines will assume the end of the previous line as their start pointand will measure the angle from the previous line in the sequence. Therefore, after identifying theinitial line and initial start point, you will only need to identify the angle and length or angle andend point. After drawing the last line in the sequence, click on Cancel to finish the current linesequence and restart the command.

1.4 Angle Super

The Angle Super Line command allows you to draw lines at an angle of a multiple of 45 degreesfrom the given start. You need to specify the start point, a point to determine the angle and therequired length.

Activate this command. Identify the start point of the line using any of the available drawingmodes.

Next you need to identify a point which will be used to measure the required angle. Move thecursor. KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from the given start point at 45 degree intervalsfollowing the path of the cursor. Mark a point which approximately defines the angle you require.A line will now be drawn in the current ground from the start point at the given angle and adefault length.

The Line Length dialog will now appear allowing you to determine the actual length required.Enter the length in one of the following ways:-



Click on OK to close the Line Length dialog.


This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw angle super lines in this wayuntil another command is picked.

Command Angle Super

Menu Draw > Lines->Angle Super



Release 8.0Page 4-3

4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines. Astart point will be required for the first line in the sequence only. All subsequent lines will assumethe end of the previous line as their start point. Therefore, you will only need to identify a pointto determine the correct angle and the length of the line. After drawing the last line in thesequence, choose Reset from the right hand pop up menu to finish the current line sequence andrestart the command.

1.5 Relative

The Relative Line command allows you to draw lines relative to a given start point. You need tospecify the start point, the direction and the offset from the start. There are two ways to specifythe direction, either by marking an approximate end point or by selecting a predefined direction.The method used is determined by the current options.

Activate this command. Check the options. Identify the start point of the line using any of theavailable drawing modes. KASEMAKE now requires you to determine the direction from thestart in one of the following ways:-

1.5.1 Specifying Direction by Cursor PositionKASEMAKE will prompt you to Mark End. You need to identify a point which will be used todetermine the direction. Move the cursor. KASEMAKE will draw a rubber band line from thegiven start point at 45 degree intervals following the path of the cursor. Mark a point whichapproximately defines the direction you require.

The Relative Line dialog will now be displayed. The direction button is automatically set accordingto where you marked in the design relative to the given start. The offset field(s) enabled dependupon the chosen direction.

You can change the direction if required. Simply click on the corresponding button. The offsetfield(s) will update accordingly.

1.5.2 Specifying a Pre-Defined DirectionKASEMAKE will display the Relative Line dialog. You need to determine the actual direction andthe horizontal and / or vertical offset required.

The direction button is set to its previous value. The offset field(s) are displayed according to thedirection selected. To change the direction simply click on the corresponding button. The offsetfield(s) will update accordingly.

1.5.3 Specifying the OffsetFor both methods, the final requirement is to specify the offset from the given start. Enter theoffset(s) in one of the following ways:-



Click on OK to close the Relative Line dialog.


Command Relative

Menu Draw > Lines->Relative


Release 8.0Page 4-4


Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

This command is self repeating allowing you to continue to draw relative lines in this way untilanother command is picked.

Joined mode may be used in conjunction with this command, to produce a sequence of lines. Astart point will be required for the first line in the sequence only. All subsequent lines will assumethe end of the previous line as their start point. Therefore, you will only need to determine thecorrect direction and any offsets for the line. Again, the method of setting the direction willdepend upon the current options. Either by specifying further points or through the predefinedbuttons of the Relative Line dialog.

For both methods, after drawing the last line in the sequence, choose Reset from the right handpop up menu to finish the current line sequence and restart the command.

1.5.4 OptionsActivate the options by clicking in the Standard tool bar or through the Draw->Optionscommand. The following dialog will be displayed:-

Set this option if you wish to indicate the direction to draw in by specifying a point. Clear thisoption if you want to set the direction using the predefined settings in the Relative Line dialog.

Finally click on OK to save the new setting or Cancel to abandon any changes.

1.6 Box

The Box command allows you to draw a rectangle by specifying two diagonally opposite cornerpoints. You can also define the rectangle by giving a corner point and a fixed size.

Activate the command. The options icon now appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating thatoptions are available for this command. It is advisable to check the options are correct beforecarrying out the command. An explanation of the options is given at the end of this section.

Once the options are known to be correct. Identify the first corner of the rectangle. Any of theavailable drawing modes can be used.

Note: The given point might not be the corner of the box, depending upon the optionsset and whether additional keys are used. See below for further details.

If the fixed size option was chosen, the specified rectangle will now be drawn in the colour of thecurrent ground and the command will restart.

If the fixed option has not been chosen, a rubber band rectangle will now follow the cursor,helping you to identify the other corner of the rectangle. Pick the point using any of the availabledrawing modes. The resulting rectangle will now be drawn and the command will restart. If youwish to restart the command without drawing the rectangle, click with the right hand mousebutton and choose Reset from the pop-up menu.

Command Box

Menu Draw > Lines->Box



Release 8.0Page 4-5

4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Key Overrides

The box can be drawn in conjunction with special keys to change the resulting rectangle. Severalkey overrides are possible as follows :-

• CTRL - holding the CTRL key whilst moving the cursor causes the box to be square

• SHIFT - holding the SHIFT key whilst moving the cursor offsets the rectangle treating the first given point as the centre of the required rectangle rather than the start of the diagonal.

• CTRL + SHIFT - both keys can be used together to provide a combination of effects as described above.

1.6.1 Box Command Options Activate the options by clicking on the options icon in the Standard toolbar, or by picking theDraw->Options command from the menu. The Rectangle Options dialog now appears:-

Fixed Size

If you wish to draw rectangles by specifying the width and height, set the Fixed Size option,otherwise make sure it is cleared.

If you have chosen the Fixed Size option, enter the required width and height in one of thefollowing ways:-

• Use the spin control to increase or decrease the current value

• Type the value directly into the corresponding field

Group Lines

If you wish the resulting four lines of the rectangle to be grouped, set the Group Lines option.To treat the resulting four lines as discrete lines, clear this option.

Fixed Start

If you wish to draw a rectangle by specifying a midpoint or alternative corner point ratherthan the default bottom left corner point, choose the Fixed Start option, otherwise makesure it is cleared.

If you have chosen the Fixed Start option, a grid of possible settings to use for the first cornerpoint are now displayed.

The points correspond to the four corners, the four midpoints of each side of the rectangleand the centre point of the rectangle. Click on the position corresponding to the point youwish to use to define your rectangle.

Note: This may restrict the display of the rubber band rectangle. For example, if youchoose one of the top row settings, the rubber band box will be constrained tobelow the given first corner.

Drag

The Drag option is available when a fixed size rectangle is chosen and allows the rectangle to berubber banded . First ensure the Fixed Size option is set to make the Drag check box accessible.

Set the drag option if you wish the fixed size rectangle to be displayed with the cursor whilst youposition it. Clear it if you wish to locate the rectangle with the cursor only.

Release 8.0Page 4-6


Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

1.7 Polyline

The polyline command allows you to draw a sequence of connected lines. The lines are groupedand therefore treated as a single entity by other commands.

Activate the command. You will now be prompted for a start point. Identify the start point usingany of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted for an end point. A rubber bandline will appear as you move the cursor to assist you in picking the end point. Identify the endpoint, again using any of the available drawing modes. The line segment will now be drawn.Again, orthogonal mode can be used to force the line segments to be orthogonal rather thanpoint to point.

You will now be repeatedly prompted for end points, since each line segment will assume the endpoint of the previous line segment as its start point. To complete a polyline sequence, chooseReset from the pop-up menu accessible from the right mouse button. This will complete thecurrent polyline, drawing it in its final colour and restart the command.

1.8 Point

The point command provides a means of entering reference points into your design.

Activate the command. Mark a point for the reference point using any of the available drawingmodes.

1.9 Sketch

The sketch command provides a means of drawing a freehand line sequence e.g. whichapproximately follows an outline.

Activate the command. Mark a point for the start of the line sequence, keeping the mouse buttonpressed in. A marker will appear at the given start. Move the cursor and a sequence of lines willnow appear tracking the cursor movement. Release the mouse button and the line sequence willappear in the final colour.

Note: freehand mode will be assumed when using this command.

Command Polyline

Menu Draw > Lines->Polyline


Command Point

Menu Draw > Lines->Point


Command Sketch

Menu Draw > Lines->Sketch



Release 8.0Page 4-7

4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

1.10 Arrow

The arrow command allows you to draw an arrow by specifying two points at either end of thearrow.

Activate the command. Check and reset the options if necessary. Mark the start of the arrow. Arubber band line will now follow the cursor. Mark an end point. The line complete with arrowhead will now be drawn in the final colour.

1.10.1 Arrow Options

1.10.1.1 Arrow Head SizeThe size of the arrow head can be set using the spin control or typing directly. The size shouldbe set relative to the current window size.

1.10.1.2 Arrow Head TypeThe arrow head can be set by clicking on the button which represents the required arrowhead.

1.11 Chamfer

The chamfer command provides a means of placing a chamfer at the intersection of two lineswithin your design.

Activate the command. The options button becomes accessible indicating that there are optionsfor this command. Check and set the options as appropriate. A description of the options isincluded at the end of this command description.

Identify the first line by picking a point close to the required line, approximately where thechamfer should start. The element which is nearest to this point will now be drawn in theselection colour.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two or more elements have been drawnclose together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mousebutton. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another line close to the given point andselect it if the search is successful.

If the selected line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset fromthe pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

Once the line is correctly identified, you will be prompted to mark the second line, where thechamfer will end. Mark the second line in the same way approximately where the chamfer willend.

Once the second line is selected, the chamfer will be drawn in accordance with the options. Thelines will also be trimmed back to the chamfer end points.

Command Arrow

Menu Draw > Lines->Arrow


Command Chamfer

Menu Draw > Lines->Chamfer


Release 8.0Page 4-8


Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

1.11.1 Chamfer Options

1.11.1.1 Chamfer DefinitionSpecify the method for defining the chamfer by clicking on the appropriate radio button.

•By Offset - the chamfer is offset from the end points of the two chosen lines which are nearest to the points used to identify them.

•Relative to Line 1 - the chamfer is defined at an angle from and the start at a set distance along the first line identified.

•Relative to Line 2 - the chamfer is defined at an angle from and the start at a set distance along the second line identified.

According to the definition method selected two of the following options will be displayedand should be completed as follows:-

•Angle - angle that the chamfer is away from the selected line

•Offset 1 - the distance along line 1 that the start of the chamfer lies.

•Offset 2 - the distance along line 2 that the start of the chamfer lies.

1.12 Line of Known Length

The line of known length command draws a line of given length between a point and an existingelement. The position of the point and the given element, together with the required length,determine the angle of the new line.

Activate the command. Check or set the current options if appropriate. Identify the start point forthe new line using any of the available drawing modes.

Identify the element on which the end point of the required line is to lie by clicking near to it.KASEMAKE automatically changes to a snap to object mode and displays a snap cursor to helpyou to identify the correct element.

Once the element is identified, KASEMAKE attempts to determine a line of given length whichwill fit to the chosen element. If there is a solution, the line will now be drawn in the colour ofthe current ground.

Where there is no solution, a message box will be displayed informing you that no line can bedetermined for the given settings.

1.12.1 Line of Known Length Options

1.12.1.1 Line LengthSpecify the length for the line. Use the spin control to adjust the current setting, or type anew value directly.

Command Line of Known Lengthl

Menu Draw > Lines->Line of Known Length



Release 8.0Page 4-9

4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

1.13 Parallel

The parallel command will add one or more lines parallel to the line between any two points ata given offset. The two points do not need to lie on an existing line.

Activate the command. Check or set the current options if appropriate. Identify the first pointusing any of the available drawing modes. Identify the other point, again using any of theavailable drawing modes. One or more parallel lines will now appear as you move the cursor, tohelp you to identify which side of the line between the given two points to place the parallel lines.Mark the point. The parallel lines will now be drawn in the colour of the current ground.

1.13.1 Parallel Options

1.13.1.1 Perpendicular GapThe gap between the parallel lines can be set. Use the spin control to change the current valueor type a new value directly.

1.13.1.2 Number Of LinesThe number of lines required can be set. Use the spin control to change the current value ortype a new value directly.

1.13.1.3 Start OffsetThe offset from the first point can be set. This can be negative to extend the line or positive toshorten the line. The offset is applied to each resulting line giving a stepped effect. Use thespin control to change the current value or type a new value directly.

1.13.1.4 End OffsetThe offset from the second point can be set. This can be negative to shorten the line or positiveto extend the line. The offset is applied to each resulting line giving a stepped effect. Use thespin control to change the current value or type a new value directly.

1.14 Multi Line

The multi-line command allows you to draw two or more parallel lines at specifiable offsets fromeach other.

Activate the command. Check and set the options as appropriate. The system will prompt for thestart of the first line. Pick the start point using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber bandline will now appear to assist you with marking the end point of this line. Pick the end point ofthe first line. The line will be drawn in the current ground colour and the additional parallel lineswill be drawn in black as you move the cursor. The positioning of the lines will change as youmove the cursor either side of the original line. Mark a point to determine which side of the lineto place the parallel lines. The additional lines will now be drawn in their final colour.

Command Parallel

Menu Draw > Lines->Parallel


Command Multi Line

Menu Draw > Lines-> Multi Line




Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

If you are using joined mode, you will now only need to mark the end point of the next linesegment as the start point will be set from the previous end point. Each additional line segmentis trimmed back to the previous segment to stop any overlapping.

Orthogonal mode can also be used with the multiline command to force the line segments to beorthogonal.

1.14.1 Multi-Line Options

1.14.1.1 No. of Additional LinesSet the number of parallel lines required using the spin control or typing the value directly.

1.14.1.2 OffsetSet the offset between each line. Different offsets can be applied to each individual line, orthey can all use the same offset.

Click on the All Equal check box to set it to use the same offset for all the lines or to clear itto use different offsets for each line.

You should now set the offset, or offsets if you have requested different ones. To do this usethe spin control of the corresponding Offset field to change the current setting or type thenew value directly.

1.15 Point Tangent

The Point Tangent command draws a tangent from an arc to a given point.

Activate the command. If you wish the resulting tangent to be orthogonal set the Ortho optionin the Mode toolbar.

Identify the arc by moving near to it and clicking the left mouse button. Be sure to pick a pointwithin the sector of the arc where you wish the tangent to start. The chosen arc will be drawn inthe selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose Select Nextfrom the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE systemwill now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful.

If the selected arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from thepop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

Once the arc is correctly identified, you will be prompted to specify the end point of the tangent.Mark the end point using any of the available drawing modes.

For orthogonal tangents, the angle between the point used to define the arc and the pointgiven as the end point will be used to determine whether a horizontal or vertical tangent isproduced. The end point will be adjusted accordingly.

In both cases, a tangent will now be drawn from the selected arc to the end point. The arc willbe deselected and the command will start again.

Command Point Tangent

Menu Draw > Lines->Point Tangent




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

1.16 Arc Tangent

The arc tangent command allows you to generate a tangent between two given arcs. Theresulting tangent depends on the point used to identify the arc.

Activate the command. Identify the first arc by choosing a point close to where you wish thetangent to start. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.



Once the arc is correctly identified, identify the second arc in the same way. The point chosen toidentify the arc should be close to the end point of the required tangent. The chosen arc will bedrawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected arcis incorrect.

Finally, you need to confirm that both arcs are correct and you wish to complete the command.Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area as confirmation. The resulting tangent will now bedrawn in the current ground colour.

1.17 Create Panel

The Create Panel command allows you to construct a panel from a previously drawn line througha given point.

Activate this command. Check the current options. You will first be prompted Mark Line. Identifythe line from which you want to construct the panel by moving close to the required line andmarking a point. KASEMAKE will now display the chosen line in the current selection colour asconfirmation of which line was chosen.

Next you will be prompted Mark Parallel Side. Move the cursor. KASMAKE will begin to rubberband a new panel in the same direction as the cursor as per the current options. Mark a suitablepoint to confirm the final position of the panel.

KASEMAKE will now drawn the new panel in the current ground colour.

Command Arc Tangent

Menu Draw > Lines->Arc Tangent


Command Create Panel

Menu Draw > Lines->Create Panel




Polygon Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

1.17.1 Options

1.17.1.1 Height of panelYou can determine the height of the panel by typing in the required value directly or by using thearrow keys to scroll to it. Alternatively, you can set the panel height to zero. The height will thenbe determined by the distance from the given line to the point specified for the direction of thepanel.

1.17.1.2 Taper SidesSet this value if you require the sides of the panel to be tapered. Clear it if you want perpendicularsides.

If you choose tapered sides, the following options will also become available:-

Angle

You can choose to specify the angle of the taper measured from the given line. If you chooseangle, the corresponding angle field becomes available allowing you to type the required angledirectly or to scroll to it using the arrows.

Chamfer

You can choose to specify the taper as a chamfer. If you choose chamfer, the corresponding length field becomes available allowing you to type the required offset directly or to scroll to it using the arrows.

Click on OK to update the current values or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

2 Polygon Sub-MenuSelect the Polygon option from the Draw Menu to access the Polygon Sub-menu with thefollowing commands:



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

2.1 Polygon Centre Pt

The Polygon Centre Pt command allows you to draw a polygon with a specifiable number of sidescentred on a given point.

Activate this command. The options icon appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that thiscommand has options. Check or set the options before drawing the polygon.

First you will need to identify the centre point for the polygon using any of the available drawingmodes.

For the single point only option, the polygon will now be drawn unrotated with respect to thegiven point.

For all other options, a rubber band polygon will appear as you move the cursor to assist you withpositioning the edge of the polygon. If, a fixed radius or side length have been defined, thesecond point provides the correct orientation of the polygon.

To complete the polygon, pick a point using any of the drawing modes. The polygon will now bedrawn in its final colour and the command will restart.

Note: Orthogonal mode can be used to force the edges to be orthogonal if the edge def-inition method is chosen, or the line between the centre and the given vertex isforced orthogonal if definition by vertex is the chosen method.

2.1.1 Polygon Options

2.1.1.1 Polygon SidesSet the number of sides required using the spin control or typing the value directly.

Command Polygon Centre Pt

Menu Draw > Polygon->Polygon Centre Pt




Polygon Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

2.1.1.2 Point DefinitionThe n-sided polygon can be defined in a combination of ways. Set the method to use for definingthe polygon edge as follows:-

• Vertex - the point specified for the edge should define one of the polygon’s corners

• Edge - the point specified for the edge should lie at the mid point of one of the polygon’s sides

2.1.1.3 Radius DefinitionThe radius of the polygon can be defined in one of the following ways:-

• Free - the size of the polygon will be the distance between the centre point and the position specified for the second point

• Fixed Radius - the radius of the polygon can be specified if it is known. Choosing this set-ting enables the Fixed Radius edit box. Set the required radius using the arrow keys to scroll the current value, or type in the required value

• Side Length - the length of a side can be specified. Choosing this option enables the Side Length edit box. Set the required length using the arrow keys to scroll the current value, or type in the required value

Single Point Only

Where either the fixed radius or side length option is chosen for defining the polygon radius, thesingle point only option is enabled.

If this option is set, the polygon can be specified by placing the centre point only. The specifiedradius or side length will then be used to generate an unrotated polygon around the given centre.

Clear this option if you require a rotated polygon. A second confirmation point will be promptedfor to determine the correct orientation of the polygon.

2.2 Polygon Edge Pt

The Polygon Edge Pt command allows you to define a polygon by specifying a point on one ofthe polygon’s edges. The point specified will lie at the mid point of one of the polygon’s sides orbe a vertex depending upon the current options.

Activate this command. The options icon appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that thiscommand has options. Check or set the options as per the Polygon Centre Pt command.

First you will need to identify the point on the edge of the polygon using any of the availabledrawing modes.

For the single point only option, the polygon will now be drawn unrotated with respect to thegiven point.

For all other options, a rubber band polygon will appear as you move the cursor to assist you withsizing and positioning of the polygon. If, a fixed radius or side length have been defined, thesecond point provides the correct orientation of the polygon.


Command Polygon Edge Pt

Menu Draw > Polygon->Polygon Edge Pt




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE


2.2.1 Polygon OptionsThe options are identical to those used by the Polygon Centre Pt command apart from the effectof the Single Point Only option. If the Single Point Only option is set the polygon can be specifiedby placing the edge point only. The specified radius or side length will then be used to generatean unrotated polygon whose edge passes through the given point

See “Polygon Options” on page 14.

2.3 Polygon Start / End Pt

The Polygon Start / End Pt command allows you to draw a polygon, with a specifiable number ofsides, defining the start and end point of one of the polygon’s sides.

Activate this command. The options icon appears in the Standard Toolbar, indicating that thiscommand has options. Check or set the options before drawing the polygon.

First you will need to identify the start point of one of the sides of the polygon using any of theavailable drawing modes.

You will then be required to identify the end point of the polygon’s side. A rubber band polygonwill appear as you move the cursor to assist you with positioning the end point. This end pointalso determines the size and orientation of the polygon.



Command Polygon Start / End Pt

Menu Draw > Polygon->Polygon Start / End Pt




Circle Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

2.3.1 Polygon Options

2.3.1.1 Polygon SidesSet the number of sides required using the spin control or typing the value directly.

3 Circle Sub-MenuSelect the Circle option from the Draw Menu to access the Circle Sub-menu with the followingcommands:-

3.1 Radius Circle

The Radius Circle command produces a circle given a point together with a radius value or givena centre point and a point on the circumference.

Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are nowprompted to mark the centre of the circle. Pick a point for the centre using any of the availabledrawing modes.

If you have set the Fixed Radius option, the circle will now be drawn. If not, you will be promptedfor a point to define the extent of the circle. A rubber banded circle centered on the given pointwill follow the cursor. Identify a point on the circumference using any of the available drawingmodes. The completed circle will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

Orthogonal mode can be used with this command where the fixed radius option is not used. Inthis case, the radius between the centre and the given point is adjusted to be orthogonal.

3.1.1 Radius Circle OptionsActivate the options by clicking on the options icon in the Standard toolbar, or by picking theDraw->Options command from the menu. The Circle Options dialog now appears.

Command Radius Circle

Menu Draw > Circle->Radius Circle




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

3.1.1.1 Fixed RadiusSet this option to fix the radius of the circle. Clear it if you want to mark a point on the circle’scircumference to define the radius.

3.1.1.2 RadiusSpecify the radius using the spin control or by typing the value directly.

The remaining options complement the fixed radius method. Ensure the Fixed radius option isset for these ptions to be accessible.

3.1.1.3 DragSet the drag option if you wish the fixed radius circle to be displayed with the cursor whilst youposition it. Clear it if you wish to locate the circle with the cursor only

3.1.1.4 Start PointDetermine which point is used to locate the fixed radius circle by clicking on the correspondingradio button. Choose from the centre as before or one of the four quadrant points.

3.2 2 Point Circle

The 2 Point Circle command allows you to define a circle by specifying two points that the circlemust pass through.

Activate the command. Identify the first point that the circle must pass through using any of theavailable drawing modes. A rubber band circle will now be drawn following the cursor. Pick thesecond point that the circle must pass through, again any of the drawing modes can be used.The completed circle will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

Orthogonal mode can be used with this command the second point is adjusted so that the linebetween the two given points is orthogonal.

Command 2 Point Circle

Menu Draw > Circle->2 Point Circle




Arc Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

3.3 3 Point Circle

The 3 Point Circle command allows you to define a circle by specifying three points that the circlemust pass through.

Activate the command. Identify the first point that the circle must pass through using any of theavailable drawing modes. Identify the second point that the circle must pass through. A rubberband circle will now be drawn following the cursor. Pick the third point that the circle must passthrough, again any of the drawing modes can be used. The completed circle will now be drawnin the current ground colour.

4 Arc Sub-MenuSelect the Arc option from the Draw Menu to access the Arc Sub-menu containing the followingcommands:-

4.1 Radius

The Radius Arc command defines an arc given a start point, end point and an approximate centrepoint. The distance from the start point to the approximate centre and the end point to theapproximate centre is averaged to determine the radius. The centre point is then adjustedaccordingly. A fixed radius option is also available where the start and end point are given and anumerical value is specified for the radius.

Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are nowprompted to mark the start of the arc. Pick a point for the start using any of the available drawingmodes. Next, pick a point for the end of the arc. If you have set the Fixed Radius option, the arcwill now be drawn.

If you have not set the Fixed Radius option, you will be prompted for an approximate centre forthe arc. A rubber banded arc will be drawn between the given start and end points, following thepath of the cursor. Identify the approximate centre using any of the available drawing modes. Thegiven point will now be used to determine the radius for the arc and the centre will be adjustedwhere necessary. The completed arc will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

The command will now restart.

4.1.1 Radius Arc Options

4.1.1.1 Fixed RadiusSet this option to fix the radius of the arc. Clear it if you want to mark an approximate centrepoint to define the radius.

Command 3 Point Circle

Menu Draw > Circle->3 Point Circle


Command Radius Arc

Menu Draw > Arc->Radius




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

4.1.1.2 RadiusSpecify the radius using the spin control or by typing the value directly.

4.2 Centre

The Centre Arc command defines an arc given a start point, end point and centre point. Thecommand will use the given start and centre points to determine the radius of the arc then adjustthe end point to lie on the arc with this radius.

Activate the command. You will be prompted for the start point. Identify the start point usingany of the available drawing modes. Identify an approximate end point for the arc. A rubber bandarc will now be drawn from the start point towards the end point, following the cursor. Identifythe centre point. The end point will be adjusted where appropriate and the arc will be drawn inthe current ground colour.

4.3 3 Point

The 3 Point Arc command allows you to draw an arc by specifying its start point, end point anda third point on the circumference of the arc. Since arcs are drawn anti-clockwise from the startpoint to the end point, the resulting arc may not pass through the third point.

Activate this command. You must first identify the start and end points of the arc using any ofthe available drawing modes. A rubber band arc will then be drawn between the given start andend point, following the cursor to help you to determine the third point. Identify the third point.The completed arc will be drawn in the current ground colour. The command will now startagain.

4.4 Angle

The Angle Arc command allows you to define an arc by specifying its start, centre and the sweepangle.

Activate the command. The system prompts for a start point. Identify the start point using any ofthe available drawing modes. Next, pick a point for the centre of the arc. The Arc Angle dialogwill now appear. Set the angle using the spin control to change the current value or type the newangle directly. Only positive values are accepted as arcs are always drawn anti-clockwise.

Click OK to set the angle and the arc will be drawn in the current ground colour. Click Cancelto close the dialog and cancel the arc command. The command will now restart.

Orthogonal mode can be used with this command. The centre point is adjusted so that the linebetween the given start and the centre is orthogonal.

Command Centre Arc

Menu Draw > Centre>Arc


Command 3 Point Arc

Menu Draw > Arc->3 Point


Command Angle Arc

Menu Draw > Arc->Angle




Arc Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

4.5 Fillet

The fillet command allows you to fit a blending radius between any two lines, two arcs or a lineand an arc. The resulting fillet will be drawn anti-clockwise, starting on the first element andending on the second element. Therefore, the order in which the elements are identified isimportant. Also, where more than one fillet is possible, the fillet nearest to the points used toidentify the elements, will be produced.

Activate the command. The options button becomes accessible indicating that there are optionsfor this command. Check and set the options as appropriate. A description of the options isincluded at the end of this command description.

Identify the first element by picking a point close to the required element, approximately wherethe fillet should start. The element which is nearest to this point will now be drawn in the selectioncolour.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two or more elements have been drawnclose together, choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mousebutton. The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given pointand select it if the search is successful.

If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Resetfrom the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

Once the element is correctly identified, you will be prompted to mark the second element, wherethe fillet will end. Mark the second element in the same way.

Once the second element is selected, a final confirmation point is required before the fillet isdrawn. Mark any point. The fillet will now be drawn as per the options. If both of the elementschosen to be filleted are lines, the lines will also be trimmed back to the fillet end points.

4.5.1 Fillet Options

4.5.1.1 RadiusSpecify the radius for the fillet using the spin control to change the current value, or type thenew value directly.

4.5.1.2 Trim ElementsWhere two lines are to be filleted, you can determine whether to trim the lines back to thefillet.

Check this option if you wish to trim the lines back

Clear this option if you wish to leave the lines unchanged.

4.5.1.3 Fit Fillet between 2 LinesWhere two lines are to be filleted, you can set this option rather than specify a radius. Theshorter of the two lines will be used to calculate the radius for a fillet which will completelyreplace the shortest line.

Check this option if you wish to ignore the given radius and calculate it from the shortest line.

Clear this option to use the radius value.

Command Fillet

Menu Draw > Arc->Fillet




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

4.5.1.4 Anticlockwise OnlyCheck this option if you wish to force all fillets to be drawn anticlockwise from the first elementto the second element

Clear this option to always draw the smallest section of the fillet.

4.6 2 Entity Fillet

The 2 Entity Fillet command will put a blending radius around or between two entities. Theentities can be two lines, two arcs or a line and an arc.

Activate the command. You will be prompted to identify the first element. Identify the elementby choosing a point close to where you wish the fillet to start. The chosen element will be drawnin the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, chooseSelect Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. TheKASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it ifsuccessful.


Once the first element is correctly identified, identify the second element in the same way. Thepoint chosen to identify the element should be close to where the fillet will end. The chosenelement will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used ifthe selected element is incorrect.

Finally, you need to confirm that both elements are correct and you wish to complete thecommand. Mark a point near to the centre of the required fillet as the confirmation point. Thispoint will be used to determine which fillet is required where more than one fillet is possible.

A fillet will now be drawn in black. A dialog will also appear for you to confirm that this is thecorrect sector of the fillet. If you require the other sector or the entire circle, choose No. Thesystem will continue to cycle through the possible fillets until such time as you choose Yes toaccept a solution, whereby the fillet will be drawn in the current ground colour. Alternatively, youcan choose Cancel to cancel the current fillet command. In either case the command will nowrestart.

4.6.1 2 Entity Fillet Options

4.6.1.1 RadiusThe radius to use for the fillet can be specified using the spin control to alter the current value,or by typing the value directly.

4.6.1.2 First ArcThis option applies to arcs only. In the case of two arcs being chosen for the fillet, this optionwill be applied to the first arc identified. Set the option as follows:-

Inside - where you wish the fillet to lie between the arc and the second entity

Outside - where you wish the resulting fillet to surround the arc

Command 2 Entity Fillet

Menu Draw > Arc-> 2 Entity Fillet




Arc Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

4.6.1.3 Second ArcThis option applies to arcs only, where two arcs are to be used for the fillet. This option willbe applied to the second arc identified. Set the option as follows:-

Inside - where you wish the fillet to touch the arc


4.7 3 Entity Fillet

The 3 Entity Fillet command will put a blending radius around or between three entities. Theentities can be any combination of lines and arcs. The radius of the fillet will be determined fromthe three entities.

• Activate the command. You will be prompted to identify the first element. Identify the ele-ment by choosing a point close to where you wish the fillet to start. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together,choose Select Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.The KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point andselect it if successful.

If the selected element is not correct and you wish to start the command again, chooseReset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

• Once the first element is correctly identified, identify the second element in the same way. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect.

• Next identify the third element. The point chosen to identify the element should be close to where the fillet will end. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour. Use the right hand pop-up menu if the selected element is incorrect.

• Finally, you need to confirm that the three elements are correct and you wish to complete the command. Mark a point near to the centre of the required fillet as the confirmation point. This point will be used to determine which fillet is required where more than one fillet is pos-sible.

A fillet will now be drawn in black. A dialog will also appear for you to confirm that this is thecorrect sector of the fillet. If you require the other sector or the entire circle, choose No. Thesystem will continue to cycle through the possible fillets until such time as you choose Yes toaccept a solution, whereby the fillet will be drawn in the current ground colour. Alternatively, youcan choose Cancel to cancel the current fillet command. In either case the command will nowrestart.

4.7.1 3 Entity Fillet Options

4.7.1.1 First ArcThis option applies to arcs only. In the case of two arcs being chosen for the fillet, this optionwill be applied to the first arc identified. Set the option as follows:-


Command 3 Entity Fillet

Menu Draw > Arc->3 Entity Fillet




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE


4.7.1.2 Second ArcThis option applies to arcs only, where two arcs are to be used for the fillet. This option willbe applied to the second arc identified. Set the option as follows:-



4.7.1.3 Third ArcThis option applies to arcs only, where three arcs are to be used for the fillet. This option willbe applied to the third arc identified. Set the option as follows:-



4.8 Envelope

The envelope command constructs two lines with a fillet of given radius between them, giventhree points. The result resembles the flap of an envelope, hence the name.

Activate the command. You will now be prompted for the first point. Identify the point at thebase of the first line using any of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted for thesecond point. Identify the point at the base of the second line using any of the available drawingmodes. You will now be prompted for another point. Thinking of the shape you are defining asa triangle, you are being asked to mark the apex point. The calculated fillet will pass through thispoint. Mark the point using any of the drawing modes. The envelope shape will now be drawn.

4.8.1 Envelope Options

4.8.1.1 Fillet RadiusThe radius to use for the fillet can be set using the spin control to change the current value,or by typing the value directly.

5 Ellipse Sub-MenuSelect the Ellipse option from the Draw Menu to access the Ellipse Sub-menu containing thefollowing commands:-

5.1 Ellipse

The Ellipse command defines a whole ellipse given a point, the length of the semi-major andsemi-minor axes and the angle of rotation.

Command Envelope

Menu Draw > Arc->Envelope


Command Ellipse

Menu Draw > Ellipse->Ellipse




Ellipse Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are nowprompted to mark the centre of the ellipse. Pick a point for the centre using any of the availabledrawing modes. The ellipse will now be drawn.

5.1.1 Ellipse OptionsActivate the options by clicking on the options icon in the Standard toolbar, or by picking theDraw->Options command from the menu. The Ellipse Options dialog now appears.

5.1.1.1 Semi Major AxisThe length of the semi-major axis, or x axis can be set. Use the spin control to alter the currentvalue, or select the current value and type the new value.

5.1.1.2 Semi Minor AxisThe length of the semi-minor axis, or y axis can be set. Use the spin control to alter the currentvalue, or select the current value and type the new value.

5.1.1.3 AngleThe angle of rotation of the ellipse, angle of the semi-major axis, can be set. Use the spincontrol to alter the current value, or select the current value and type the new value.

5.1.1.4 DragSet the drag option if you wish the ellipse to be displayed with the cursor whilst you position it.Clear it if you wish to locate the ellipse with the cursor only.

5.1.1.5 Start PointDetermine which point is used to locate the ellipse by clicking on the corresponding radio button.Choose from the centre or one of the four quadrant points.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

5.2 Elliptical Arc

The elliptical arc command allows you to define an elliptical arc by giving the start, centre andend of the arc and specifying a reduction factor. The start and centre points will define the lengthof the semi-major axis and the angle of rotation of the elliptical arc. The reduction factor will beapplied to this semi-major axis to determine the semi-minor axis.

Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are nowprompted to mark the start of the elliptical arc. Pick a point for the start using any of the availabledrawing modes. Next, pick a point for the centre of the elliptical arc. Finally, you will be promptedfor an approximate end point for the elliptical arc. A rubber banded elliptical arc will be drawnusing the given points, following the path of the cursor. Identify the approximate end point usingany of the available drawing modes. The given point will now be adjusted where necessary to lieon the elliptical arc. The completed elliptical arc will now be drawn in the current ground colour.

The command will now restart.

5.2.1 Elliptical Arc Options

5.2.1.1 ReductionThe reduction factor is the percentage to reduce the length of the semi-major axis by to givethe length of the semi-minor axis. Set the value using the spin control, or type the new valuedirectly.

5.3 3 Point Elliptical Arc

The 3 Point Elliptical Arc command allows you to draw a semi elliptical arc by specifying its startpoint, end point and a third point which determines the extent of the elliptical arc. Only a semi-elliptical arc is possible as the start and end points are assumed to lie at each end of one of theaxes. The third point determines the length of the other axis so as a result the semi elliptical arcmay not pass through this point.

Activate this command. You must first identify the start and end points of the elliptical arc usingany of the available drawing modes. A rubber band semi elliptical arc will then be drawn betweenthe given start and end point, following the cursor to help you to determine the third point.Identify the third point. The completed semi elliptical arc will be drawn in the current groundcolour. This command is self-repeating.

6 Curve Sub-MenuSelect the Curve option from the Draw Menu to access the Curve Sub-menu containing thefollowing commands:-

Command Elliptical Arc

Menu Draw > Ellipse->Elliptical Arc


Command 3 Point Elliptical Arc

Menu Draw > Ellipse->3 Point Elliptical Arc




Curve Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

6.1 Cubic Spline

This command generates a cubic spline or best fit curve through a given set of points. It is asmooth curve through the points with constantly shifting radii. An approximation of the curveusing short line segments is generated.

Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are nowprompted to mark the points or nodes through which the generated curve will pass. Mark thepoints in the usual way. To complete the marking points sequence use the right hand mousebutton to access the pop-up menu. Choose from:-

• Draw - to generate the curve. • Draw & Close - to generate a closed curve. • Reset - to abandon the current set of points.The command will automatically restart.

6.1.1 Cubic Spline Options

6.1.1.1 Starting ConditionsThe slope or gradient at the start of the first polynomial in the cubic spline curve can be set.Set the starting condition as follows:-

Fixed - to specify the slope

Relaxed - to leave the slope to be determined when the curve is generated

If you choose Fixed the following options appear:-

Command Cubic Spline

Menu Draw > Curve->Cubic Spline




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

• Start Slope X

The distance in X to use to define the slope at the start of the first polynomial can be setusing this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current valueand type the new value.

• Start Slope Y

The distance in Y to use to define the slope at the start of the first polynomial can be setusing this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current valueand type the new value.

6.1.1.2 Final ConditionsThe slope or gradient at the end of the final polynomial in the cubic spline curve can also beset. Set the condition as follows:-

Fixed - to specify the slope

Relaxed - to leave the slope to be determined when the curve is generated

If you choose Fixed the following options appear:-

• End Slope X

The distance in X to use to define the slope at the end of the final polynomial can be setusing this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current valueand type the new value.

• End Slope Y

The distance in Y to use to define the slope at the end of the last polynomial can be setusing this control. Use the spin control to alter the current value, or select the current valueand type the new value.

6.1.1.3 Curve GenerationThis section applies to the handling of the cubic spline when it is exploded You can choose forthe cubic spline to be exploded into short line segments or arcs. Click on the corresponding radiobutton to select it.

• Arcs

Where the arcs option is chosen, you can determine the smoothness. The smoother theapproximation, the more processing involved so there is a performance cost. Drag theslider to vary the smoothing factor as required.

Finally click on OK to accept any new changes or Cancel to abandon them.

6.2 Bezier Curve

This command generates a bezier curve through a given set of points. There are at least threepoints used to define the curve. The two end points of the curve are referred to as anchor points.The other points which define the curve are referred to as nodes. An approximation of the curveusing short line and arc segments is generated.

Command Bezier Curve

Menu Draw > Curve->Bezier Curve




Text

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. Check or set the options available for this command. You are nowprompted to mark the points or nodes through which the generated curve will pass. Mark thepoints in the usual way. To complete the marking points sequence use the right hand mousebutton to access the pop-up menu. Choose from:-

• Accept - to generate the curve.• Close - to generate a closed curve.• Reset - to abandon the current set of points.The command will restart.

6.2.1 Bezier Curve OptionsThe options are also accessible from the right hand pop up menu as shown:-

These options apply to the handling of a bezier curve when it is exploded. You can choose for thebezier curve to be exploded into short line segments or arcs. Click on the corresponding radiobutton to select it.

Arcs

Where the arcs option is chosen, you can determine the smoothness. The smoother theapproximation to the original curve, the more processing involved so there is a performance cost.Drag the slider to vary the smoothing factor as required.


7 Text

The text command allows you to annotate your design.

Activate the command. Check or set the text options. The system now prompts for the text origin.Identify the origin using any of the drawing modes. The text cursor will now appear at the givenorigin. Enter the text directly. The text will be displayed in black while you are typing it.

To complete the text string use the carriage return or enter key. The text will now appear in thecurrent ground colour. When entering paragraphs of text the carriage return completes the

Command Text

Menu Draw > Text

Toolbar Button: Main Toolbar



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

current text string and signals the start of a new line of text. When entering Variable styleparagraphs the tab key can also be used to complete the current text string and signal the startof the next column of text. Refer to “Text Options” for further details.

To cancel the text string choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right handmouse button.

The command automatically restarts.

7.1 Text OptionsOptions are divided into Text Style and Paragraph Style as follows:-

7.1.1 Text Style

7.1.1.1 FontThe font to display the text in can be set using the font combo box. Click on the arrow to viewthe available fonts. Scroll through the list and click on the required font name to select it.

7.1.1.2 JustificationThe justification of the text string can be set by clicking on the required setting from thefollowing:-

Left - the text origin will be to the left of the text string

Right - the text origin will be to the right of the text string

Centre - the text origin will be at the centre of the text string

7.1.1.3 SizeThe text size can be set. This is the height of the text in drawing units. Set the size using thespin control to alter the current value or select the current value and type the new valuedirectly.

7.1.1.4 RotationThe text can be drawn at an angle. Set the angle of rotation using the spin control to alter thecurrent value or select the current value and type the new value directly.

7.1.2 Paragraph Style

7.1.2.1 Block TextBlocks of text or paragraphs can also be entered. To enter a paragraph check this option.Further options will then be displayed as follows:-

Standard - check this option to build a single column of text with standard spacingbetween lines of text

Variable - check this version to build multiple columns of text with variable spacingbetween lines and columns

If you select Variable text the following options appear:-

• Column Width

The distance in drawing units between columns can be defined. Columns of text can thenbe built up by using the tab key to move to the start of the next column of text.

Set the column width using the spin control to change the current value, or click on thecurrent value to select it and type the new value.



TrueType

KASEMAKE

• Line Spacing

The spacing in drawing units between lines of text can be defined. The carriage returnmoves to the start of the next line of text.

Set the line spacing using the spin control to change the current value, or click on thecurrent value to select it and type the new value.

8 TrueType

The truetype text command allows you to annotate your design with truetype text.

Activate the command. The system now prompts for the text origin. Identify the origin using anyof the drawing modes. The text input dialog will now appear for you to enter the text string andset any attributes to apply to the text string. A full explanation of the contents of this dialog canbe found in the next section, Text Input Dialog.

To complete the truetype text string, click on OK. The text will now appear in the current groundcolour with the attributes you have set in the text input dialog. Cancel will ignore any changesand cancel the truetype command.

The command automatically restarts.

8.1 Text Input DialogThe text input dialog contains a section headed Sample, where the contents of the text field aredisplayed (or a sample of text, where this is currently empty) with the currently selected attributesapplied.

Various attributes can be set for the text string as follows:-

8.1.1 FontThe font to display the text in can be set. The currently selected font is displayed. Below this is ascrolling list of available fonts. Scroll through the list to the required font, then click on therequired font name to select it. The sample field will be redisplayed to reflect any change of font.

8.1.2 Font StyleAdditional characteristics to apply to the font, e.g. bold, italic, can be set through the font style.Again, scroll to the required setting, then click on it to select it. The sample field will beredisplayed to reflect the new setting.

8.1.3 SizeThe text size can be set. This is the height of the text in drawing units. Set the size using the spincontrol to alter the current value or select the current value and type the new value directly. Thesample text will be redisplayed to reflect the new size.

Command TrueType

Menu Draw > TrueType




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

8.1.4 AngleThe text can be drawn at an angle. Set the angle of rotation using the spin control to alter thecurrent value or select the current value and type the new value directly. The angle is not reflectedin the sample field, but will be applied when the text input dialog is closed.

8.1.5 EffectsChoose from strikeout where a line is drawn through the middle of the text and underline, byclicking on the corresponding checkbox, to set or clear them as required. The sample field will beupdated to reflect any changes.

8.1.6 SpacingStandard - check this option to use standard spacing between lines of text

Variable - check this option to specify the spacing in drawing units between lines of text

If you select Variable spacing, a spin control will be displayed for you to determine the spacingto use. Set the line spacing using the spin control to change the current value, or click on thecurrent value to select it and type the new value.

8.1.7 Text EntryThe contents of the text string are entered in this field. Type the required string in the normal way.

Paragraphs of text can be built up by using the carriage return key to complete the current lineof text and start a new line of text.

9 Dimensions Sub-MenuSelect the Dimensions option from the Draw Menu to access the Dimensions Sub-Menu givingaccess to the dimension commands.

It is advisable to open the Dimension Toolbar before beginning to dimension your design, sincedimension modes which determine the way individual dimension commands operate, exist onlyin the Dimension Toolbar.

9.1 Dimension Toolbar - Modes of OperationAfter selecting the appropriate dimension command you should set the mode of operation, thiswill depend upon which dimension command is being used. The modes are only accessiblethrough the Dimension Toolbar and are as follows:-

9.1.1 Report DimensionThis mode is available with all the dimension commands and allows you simply to measure adistance rather than place a dimension entity within your design. If this mode is activated, thedimension command will only require you to identify the elements or points to dimension. Thedimension will then be calculated and displayed in a window towards the centre of the status bar.

9.1.2 Linear Dimension ModesLinear dimension modes can be used in conjunction with the linear dimensions, perpendicular,horizontal and vertical. The available options are:-



Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

• Single - each dimension is a discrete item

• Chained - a sequence of dimensions can be built up, each subsequent dimension adopting the end of the previous dimension as its start and also maintaining the same text position so that the dimensions line up

• Datum - a sequence of stepped dimensions all starting from the same datum point can be built up with this mode

9.1.3 Diameter Dimension ModesDiameter dimension modes can be used in conjunction with the diameter dimension. They affectthe appearance of the dimension as follows:-

• Radius - the dimension will be displayed as an arrow pointing to the arc in the same way as radial dimension works

• Linear - the dimension will be displayed as leader lines from the extents of the circle with a dimension line between them

9.2 Dimensions GeneralThere are several dimension commands available for creating, line, angle and arc dimensions. Thedimension commands are all self repeating allowing you to enter multiple dimensions. To cancela dimension command simply select Reset from the right hand pop-up menu to restart thecommand, or choose a different command. Several modes of operation are available for use withindividual dimension commands as discussed above. See “Dimension Toolbar - Modes ofOperation” on page 4-32 for further details.

Various settings also exist which affect the appearance of the dimension. They control appearanceof leader lines, dimension text, positioning of text etc. Refer to “Dimension Options” on page 4-40 for full details.

Once created a dimension is treated as a single entity.

The dimension commands available through the Dimensions Sub-Menu are as follows:-

9.3 Perpendicular

The perpendicular command allows you to dimension between any two points in your design.

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark the first point. Identify the point where you wish the dimension to start from. You will nowbe prompted for the second point.

If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, a rubber band dimension starting at the given pointwill now be drawn following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the second point.Identify the second point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawnin the current ground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, identify the second point using an appropriatedrawing mode. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber banddimension between the two given points will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assist

Command Perpendicular

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Perpendicular

Toolbar Button: Dimension Toolbar



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode.The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

The command will now automatically restart. If you have chosen Chain Mode or DatumMode, you will be prompted for the second point as the previous dimension’s end point or startpoint respectively, will be used as the new dimensions start point.

9.4 Horizontal

The horizontal command allows you to dimension the horizontal distance between any twopoints in your design. The points may lie on different elements within the design.



If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, identify the second point using an appropriatedrawing mode. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber banddimension between the two given points will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assistyou in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode.The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.


9.4.1 Overall Horizontal Dimension for Selected ElementsIt is now possible to dimension selected elements. This can be useful if you have an awkwardshape and you want to show its overall dimensions.

First select the elements for which you require an overall dimension using the Select tool. Referto “Select Sub-Menu” on page 3-21 and “Select” on page 3-26 for further details.

Activate the Draw->Dimensions->Horizontal command. A dimension will now be drawnrepresenting the overall horizontal dimension for the selected items. You can now drag thedimension to identify the text position. Identify the required point using an appropriate drawingmode. The horizontal dimension will now be added to the drawing in the current ground.

Command Horizontal

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Horizontal




Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

9.5 Vertical

The vertical command allows you to dimension the vertical distance between any two points inyour design. The points do not have to lie on the same two elements within the design.



If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, identify the second point using an appropriatedrawing mode. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin. A rubber banddimension between the two given points will now be drawn, following the cursor. This is to assistyou in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode.The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.


9.5.1 Overall Vertical Dimension for Selected ElementsAs with horizontal dimension, an overall vertical dimension can be made for a group of selectedelements. Refer to “Overall Horizontal Dimension for Selected Elements” on page 34 for a fullexplanation.

9.6 Angle

The angle command allows you to dimension the angle between any two lines in your design.

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark the first line. The order in which you identify the lines determines which angle isdimensioned, as the angle is measured anti-clockwise from the first line identified to the secondline.

Identify the first line that you wish the dimension to be measured from, by choosing a point closeto the line. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose SelectNext from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKEsystem will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful.


Command Vertical

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Vertical


Command Angle

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Angle




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Once the line is correctly identified, identify the second line in the same way. The chosen line willbe drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selectedline is incorrect.

If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the angle dimension will now be drawn in the currentground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two lines will now be drawn, following thecursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text point using anappropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current ground colour usingthe current settings.

9.7 Radial

The radial command allows you to dimension the radius of any arc or circle in your design.

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark the arc. Identify the arc or circle, by choosing a point close to where you wish the dimensionto start from. The chosen arc will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected arc is not the correct one because two arcs are close together choose SelectNext from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKEsystem will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful.


If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the radial dimension will now be drawn in the currentground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the arc will now be drawn,following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text pointusing an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the current settings.

9.8 Diameter

The diameter command allows you to dimension the diameter of any arc or circle in your design.There are two modes of operation for this command. Select the one you require from theDimension Toolbar. See “Dimension Toolbar - Modes of Operation” on page 4-32 for furtherdetails.


Command Radial

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Radial


Command Diameter

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Diameter




Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE



If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the diameter dimension will now be drawn in thecurrent ground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the arc will now be drawn,following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text pointusing an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the current settings. The way the dimension is displayed will also depend upon thediameter dimension mode set.

9.9 Ellipse

The ellipse command is similar to the radius command. It allows you to dimension both radii andthe inclined angle of any ellipse or elliptical arc in your design.

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark the elliptical arc. Identify the elliptical arc or ellipse, by choosing a point close to where youwish the dimension to start from. The chosen elliptical arc will be drawn in the selection colouras confirmation.

If the selected elliptical arc is not the correct one because two elements are close together chooseSelect Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. TheKASEMAKE system will now search for another elliptical arc close to the given point and selectit if successful.

If the selected elliptical arc is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Resetfrom the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the ellipse dimension will now be drawn in thecurrent ground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the elliptical arc will now be drawn,following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text pointusing an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the current settings.

9.10 Arc Length

The arc length command allows you to dimension the length of any arc or circle in your design.

Command Ellipse

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Ellipse


Command Arc Length

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Arc Length




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE




If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the arc length dimension will now be drawn in thecurrent ground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension from the given point on the arc will now be drawn,following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text pointusing an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the current settings.

9.11 Linear

The linear command allows you to dimension any line in your design.

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark the line. Identify the line, by choosing a point close to the line. The chosen line will be drawnin the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Nextfrom the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE systemwill now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful.


If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the linear dimension will now be drawn in the currentground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension from either end point of the given line will now be drawn,following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text pointusing an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the current settings.

9.12 Parallel

The parallel command allows you to dimension the perpendicular distance between any twoparallel lines in your design.

Command Linear

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Linear


Command Parallel

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Parallel




Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark the first line. Identify the first parallel line by choosing a point close to the line. The chosenline will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose Select Nextfrom the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKE systemwill now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful.

Once the first line is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second line. Identify thesecond line, which must be parallel to the currently selected line, by choosing a point close to theline. The chosen line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

Again, if the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose SelectNext from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKEsystem will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful.

If you have opted for Fixed Text positioning, the dimension will now be drawn in the currentground colour using the current settings.

If you have not opted for Fixed Text positioning, the KASEMAKE system will now prompt for theText Origin. A rubber band dimension between the two given parallel lines will now be drawn,following the cursor. This is to assist you in positioning the dimension text. Identify the text pointusing an appropriate drawing mode. The dimension will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the current settings.

The command will automatically restart.

Note: If at any stage you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

9.13 Crease To Crease

The crease to crease command allows you to automatically insert key dimensions in to yourdesign. The dimensions are drawn between crease lines as identified by a given line.

Activate the command. Check and set the options for this command. You will be prompted tomark a line which will be used to determine which dimensions you require. Identify the start pointof the line, by choosing a point using any of the available modes. A rubber band line will nowappear to assist you in defining the required line. Enter the end point of the line, again using anyof the available drawing modes. All lines which intersect with the given line will now behighlighted to show that they will be dimensioned between.

If the line is not correct and you wish to start the command again, choose Reset from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button.

The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for the Text Origin to use to position the dimensiontext. Identify the text point using an appropriate drawing mode. The dimensions will now bedrawn in the current ground colour using the current settings.

Command Crease To Crease

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Crease To Crease




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

9.14 Dimension OptionsThe Dimension Options are used to tailor the appearance of the dimension and are available withany of the previously described dimension commands.

Activate the Options and a tabbed dialog appears. The options are divided into four categories,each category corresponding to a tabbed page. Simply click on the corresponding tab to activatethe options for that category.

9.14.1 Dimension LineThe options relating to the dimension line are as follows:-

9.14.1.1 Arrow HeadThe type of arrow to use. Choose from the drop down list of available arrow types. Click onthe combo box’s arrow to open up the list. Scroll to the required type. Click to select it.

9.14.1.2 Arrow Size % Text

Set the size of the arrows as a percentage of the text height. Click on the current value to selectit and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

9.14.1.3 Vary Arrow Head to Text GapYou can opt to set a minimum gap between the arrow and the beginning / end of the textstring. Click on this option to set or clear it as required.

If this option is set the following setting will appear:-

9.14.1.4 Gap % Text

This is the minimum size for the gap defined as a percentage of the text height. Click on thecurrent value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current value usingthe spin control.

9.14.1.5 Use GroundThe ground for the dimension is normally set to the current ground. This option can be usedto specify a specific ground for the dimension. Set or clear the Use Ground check box asappropriate.

If you set the Use Ground option, the ground combo box will appear. Select the ground to beused in the normal way.

9.14.2 Leader LineThe options relating to the appearance of the leader lines are as follows:-

9.14.2.1 Show Leader LinesYou can choose whether to display any leader lines or not. Click on this option to set or clearit as required.

If this option is set corresponding to display leader lines the following further settings willappear:-

9.14.2.2 Leader Line GapThis is the gap to be left between the dimensioned point and the start of the leader line.

Choose from one of the following:-

• Gap as % of Text Height - the given gap is defined as a percentage of the text height

• Gap as Absolute Value - the given gap is the actual size of the gap



Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

• Gap by Leader Length - the given value is used to define the length of the leader line. The gap is therefore the difference between the length of leader line and the distance of the given text point from the dimension point.

In either case, you need to set the size of the gap according to the method you have chosento define it. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scrollthe current value using the spin control.

9.14.2.3 Auto AdjustThis option if set, will automatically trim back the leader lines so that they do not overlap anyexisting design elements.

Clear this option for the leader lines to run from the dimension point.

9.14.3 Dimension Text StyleThe options relating to the text style are as follows:-

9.14.3.1 FontSelect the font to draw the dimension string in. Truetype fonts are now available. Choose fromthe list of fonts, by clicking on the combo box’s arrow to display the available fonts. Movingthe cursor to the required font and clicking to select it

Note: When displaying drawings on other machines, Truetype fonts will not be visibleon dimensions if the font is not installed.

9.14.3.2 Font StyleWhere a true type font is selected you can vary the font style. Choose from the list of availablestyles, by clicking on the combo box’s arrow to display them. Move the cursor to the requiredstyle and click on it to select it.

9.14.3.3 SizeDecide whether you want the system to set the size automatically, or whether you wish todefine your own size i.e. the height of the dimension string. Set or clear the auto size checkbox accordingly.

If you clear this option, the size spin control will be displayed for you to enter the value to use.Click on the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the currentvalue using the spin control.

9.14.3.4 FormatSelect the format to use to display any fractional part of the dimension value. Choose onefrom:-

Decimal

Choose this option to display any fractional part as a decimal. Set the number of decimalplaces to display the value to by clicking on the current value to select it and typing the newvalue. Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

Rounded Decimal

Choose this option to display any fractional part as a decimal rounded to the nearest multipleof a given fraction. Set the fraction to use as the basis of the rounding from the available list.

Fractional

Choose this option to display the fractional part as a fraction rounded to the nearest multipleof a given fraction. Set the fraction from the available list.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

9.14.4 Dimension Text PositioningThe options relating to the text positioning are as follows:-

9.14.4.1 Fixed TextChoose to fix the position of the text rather than defining the text position with the cursor asthe dimension is entered. Set this option to choose fixed text. Clear it to specify the textposition with the cursor.

9.14.4.2 Offset If you choose Fixed Text, you need to set the offset. This is the distance from the dimensionline to place the text. Click on the current value to select it and type the new value.Alternatively, scroll the current value using the spin control.

If you do not choose Fixed Text, this option will be greyed out as it is inapplicable.

9.14.4.3 PlacementSet the position of the text string with regard to the dimension line. This can be to the left ofthe dimension line, to the right of the dimension line or centred along the dimension line. Theposition can also be set to automatic, where the text string will be centred along thedimension line if there is enough room for it taking into account any current settings, orplaced outside the dimension line if this is not the case.

Choose the corresponding option from the drop down list by moving to the option andclicking to select it.

9.14.4.4 Horizontal OrientationSet this option to force the text to always be drawn horizontally, breaking the dimension linewhere necessary.

Clear this option to choose for the text to be oriented with the dimension line. If you chooseto draw the text at the same angle as the dimension line, you will also be required to choosehow to display the text with respect to the dimension line.

Choose from:-

• Above Line - the text is drawn above the dimension line

• In Line - the text is drawn centred within the dimension line, the dimension line is broken accordingly

• Below Line - the text is drawn beneath the dimension line

9.14.5 Text StringThe options affecting the contents of the text string are as follows:-

9.14.5.1 Blank DimensionSet this option if you wish to type a value for the dimension string, clear it if you wish to displaythe calculated value.

If you do not set the Blank Dimension option you will also have access to the remainingoptions.

9.14.5.2 Additional TextAdditional can be any text string that you wish to append to the calculated dimension value.Simply type the required text.



Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

9.14.5.3 Display UnitsSet this option to include units in the dimension string, clear it if you do not require units.

If you have chosen to display units, select the units from the units combo box. Click on thearrow to display the available units. Move the cursor to the required value and click to select it.

9.14.5.4 Show Trailing ZeroesSet this option to display trailing zeroes up to the requested number of decimal places.

Clear this option so that zeroes are not used to fill up the requested number of decimal places.

9.14.5.5 Display ToleranceSet this option to display a tolerance with the calculated string. Clear this option if you do notwish to display a tolerance.

If you have selected to display a tolerance, set the tolerance values. For each tolerance, clickon the current value to select it and type the new value. Alternatively, scroll the current valueusing the spin control.

Finally, click on OK to save the dimension options, or Cancel to revert to the previous settings.

9.15 Selected

The Dimension->Selected command allows you to add an overall horizontal and verticaldimension for a given part of your design. The section of design to be dimensioned should beselected before this command is activated.

Activate the command. You are now required to identify the position for the dimensions withrespect to the selected design elements. Move the cursor to the corner corresponding to thecorrect position i.e.:-

• Left/Bottom• Right/Bottom• Left/Top • Right/Top If you have not set the option for Fixed Offsets, the cursor position also determines how far fromthe selected elements the dimensions should be placed.

Click to identify the correct position. The dimensions will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the given settings.

9.15.1 OptionsThe Dimension Selected Options determine whether the dimensions are a given distance from theselected elements or not. Set or clear the Fixed Offset option as appropriate.

If you have set the Fixed Offset option, you now need to determine the positioning of both thehorizontal and vertical dimension as a distance from the horizontal / vertical extents of theselected elements respectively. Set the values by typing directly in the box, or use the arrows toscroll to the required value.

Finally click on OK to accept the settings.

Command Selected

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Selected




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

9.16 Overall

The overall command allows you to calculate the overall size of the current design. Only visibleelements will be used to calculate the size, so ensure that you have switched on the requiredgrounds before activating this command. Similarly, ensure that you have switched off anydimensions as they will be included in the calculation giving a misleading result. Refer to “GroundTable...” on page 10-8 in the Views Menu chapter for further details of making elements visible.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will carry out the size calculation and the resultwill be displayed in a dialog. Choose OK to close the dialog.

9.17 Automatic Overall

The Automatic Overall command displays the overall horizontal and vertical dimensions of thecurrent design. Only visible elements drawn in the currently defined Cut Ground will be used tocalculate the dimensions.

Activate the command. You are now required to identify the position for the dimensions withrespect to the overall design. Move the cursor to the corner corresponding to the correct positioni.e.:-

• Left/Bottom• Right/Bottom• Left/Top • Right/Top If you have not set the option for Fixed Offsets, the cursor position also determines how far fromthe outermost elements the dimensions should be placed.

Click to identify the correct position. The dimensions will now be drawn in the current groundcolour using the given settings.

9.17.1 OptionsPlease refer to “Options” on page 43 for an explanation of the options available for thiscommand.

9.18 Perimeter

The perimeter command allows you to calculate the perimeter of a path made up of a continuoussequence of drawing elements. The path that the elements make can be either closed where the

Command Overall

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Overall


Command Automatic Overall

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Automatic Overall


Command Perimeter

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Perimeter




Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

first element in the path joins with the last element in the path or open where the first and lastelements do not meet.

The command is ground specific. This means that all the elements in a path must be drawn in thesame ground. They must also be continuous without gaps.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will prompt for the start of the boundary. Markan element at the start of the path by picking a point close to the required element. The chosenelement will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together chooseSelect Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. TheKASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it ifsuccessful.


You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. Confirm that the selected element is thecorrect one and that you wish the calculation to proceed, by marking a point within the visibleextents of the selected element.

Upon confirmation the calculation will be carried out and the result displayed in a dialog. ChooseOK to close the dialog.

9.19 Area

The area command allows you to calculate the area of an enclosed boundary, made up of acontinuous sequence of drawing elements. The path that the elements must be closed i.e. thefirst element in the path joins with the last element in the path.

The command is ground specific. This means that all the elements in a path must be drawn in thesame ground. They must also be continuous without gaps.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will prompt for the start of the boundary. Markan element at the start of the path by picking a point close to the required element. The chosenelement will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.



You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. Confirm that the selected element is thecorrect one and that you wish the area calculation to proceed, by marking a point within thevisible extents of the selected element.

Upon confirmation the area calculation will be carried out and the result displayed in a dialog.Choose OK to close the dialog.

Command Area

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Area




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

9.20 Nett Area

The nett area command allows you to calculate a cumulative area of one or more enclosedboundaries, taking into account any islands. The command identifies individual panelsautomatically by considering where creases lie.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will display a Nett Area Options dialog for youto provide information about which crease grounds have been used in the design. You will needto set the following :-

No of Creases

Set the total number of grounds used for creases up to a maximum of 5. Type the valuedirectly or scroll with the arrows to the required value.

Grounds for Creases

Now you need to identify each ground used. The number of ground combo boxes displayedhere is determined by the number of creases specified by the previous setting. Set each groundby clicking on the arrow and selecting from the drop down list.

Click on OK to close the Nett Area Options dialog and accept the given settings.

The nett area calculation will now be carried out and the result displayed in a dialog. Choose OKto close this dialog.

9.21 Wastage

The wastage command calculates the amount of wastage involved in cutting out the currentdesign from a given material. The command is ground specific. This means that all the elementsin a path must be drawn in the same ground. They must also be continuous without gaps.

Activate the command. The Wastage Options dialog appears. This is a tabbed dialog of settingsto be applied in the wastage calculation. Refer to “Wastage Options” later in this section for a fullexplanation of the settings.

Once the Wastage Options are correct choose OK to set the new options and close the dialog,choose Cancel to abandon any changes to the options and close the dialog.

The Wastage command now continues. You are prompted to mark the first boundary. Mark anelement at the start of the path by picking a point close to the required element. The chosenelement will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.



Command Nett Area

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Nett Area


Command Wastage

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Wastage




Dimensions Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. Confirm that the selected element is thecorrect one, by marking a point within the visible extents of the selected element.

Upon confirmation, the KASEMAKE system will attempt to trace the boundary, selectingelements as they are identified.

If the boundary is incorrect, choose Reset from the right hand pop-up menu to restart thecommand.

Once the boundary has been traced, the system will open a dialog asking if you wish to identifyInternal Cutouts. If you have cutouts in the design that you wish to consider in the calculationclick on Yes. You will then be required to identify the cutout in the same way as you did theboundary. If you do not have any cutouts click on No.

Next you will be prompted for the number of copies of the identified design. Set the appropriatevalue using the spin control or by typing directly.

You will now be asked if you wish to identify other External Shapes. If you have other shapes inthe design that you wish to consider in the calculation click on Yes. You will then be required toidentify the next shape in the same way as you did the first boundary. If you do not have any othershapes to consider click on No.

The KASEMAKE system will now calculate the wastage. The details will be displayed in aWastage Report dialog. The Wastage Report dialog provides options to Save the Wastage Reportand to Print the Wastage Report. These options work as per File->Save As and File->Print. Seeon page 2-7 and on page 2-18 respectively, for further details.

Finally, click on OK to close the Wastage Report.

9.21.1 Wastage OptionsThe Wastage Options are displayed in a tabbed dialog containing three tabbed pages of options.Click on the corresponding tab to access the underlying options. Each page of options is nowdescribed in turn.

9.21.1.1 Wastage InformationSelect the Board Type to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

Select the Units that the design is drawn with by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

The Blank Length and Blank Width fields are filled in automatically with the blank size for thecurrent visible design. These fields can be adjusted to build in an allowance, by scrolling thecurrent value, or by typing a new value directly.

An allowance for trim can also be set for each edge of the board. Scroll the current value ortype a new value directly.

Select the material from the drop down list of available materials. For details of defining yourown material refer to the “Corrugated Case” section that follows.

In addition, there are two commands accessible from this page of options:-

•Load WST File

The calculated wastage report can be saved in a WST file. This command allows you to callup a previously save wastage report. Specify the filename in the normal way. The wastagereport dialog will then appear with the details of the requested report.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

•Load VLS File

A VLS file contains all the predefined grammages for the different materials. These can beset up for different suppliers and the values saved for future use. A VLS file can only becreated currently using a word processor.

This command allows you to load a different set of presaved grammages. Specify thefilename of the VLS file in the usual way. The grammage values will now be loaded readyfor you to tailor your material.

9.21.1.2 Corrugated CaseThe grammages and sheet types for the various layers making up the corrugated board canbe set up through this page of options.

Select the board type to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Several sets ofoptions for the different layers now appear, depending upon which board type is selected.

For each layer set the sheet type by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Also, set thegrammage for this sheet from the predefined list of values.

The Take-Up factors for the flute are currently hard coded and cannot be changed.

•Save Material Details...

Once you have set up the board details, you can save them as a named material for futureuse. Click on the Save Material Details... button. You will now be asked to supply a namefor the material definition. Type a suitable name. Click on OK to save this materialdefinition. Click on Cancel to abandon the command.

The saved material type will now be accessible through the Wastage Information page’sSelect Material option for use with future jobs using this particular specification of board.

•Delete Current Material

This command removes the material definition for the material currently set as the SelectMaterial option of the Wastage Information page. Make sure this option is set to thematerial you wish to delete before using this command as no confirmation is required.

Click on the Delete Current Material button and the definition for the current material willbe removed. Note: the DefaultTestMaterial definition cannot be removed.

9.21.1.3 Solid BoardThe grammage to apply when using solid board can be set through this page. Select therequired value from the list of predefined grammages.

9.22 Report Only

The Report Only command is used in conjunction with another dimension command, so is onlyaccessible when a dimension command is picked.

It sets the current dimension command into report mode so that the dimension is only reportedon the status bar; the dimension entities are not drawn.

Command Report Dimension

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Report




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

9.23 Info

The Dimension->Info command allows you to view temporary information about any elementwithin the current design including information about the pen or tool assigned to the element.

Activate the command. You are now required to identify the design element for whichinformation is to be displayed. Move the cursor close to the required element. An informationwindow will popup detailing information about the chosen element. The information displayedwill depend upon the type of element chosen.

This command is self-repeating. Simply move near to another element and the informationpopup will be updated accordingly.

Note: The popup window is only temporary and will be removed when an alternativecommand is activated.

10 Build Sub-MenuSelect the Build option from the Draw Menu to access the Build Sub-menu with the followingcommands:-

10.1 Intersect

The intersect command allows you to project, or cut back elements to their point of intersection.The command works with two lines, a line and an arc or two arcs. The first element identified isthe one that will be changed.

Activate the command. You will be prompted for the first element. Mark the element by pickinga point close to the required element. Where more than one solution is possible the part of theelement that is marked in the identification process will be the part of the element that is retained.



Once the element is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second element. Identifythe second element in the same way. The chosen element will be drawn in the selection colour.Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect.

Finally, you need to confirm that both elements are correct and you wish to complete thecommand. In the case of a line and an arc or two arcs, where more than one solution is possible,the different solutions will now be shown as you move the cursor. Mark a confirmation point

Command Info

Menu Draw > Dimensions->Info


Command Intersect

Menu Draw > Build->Intersect

Toolbar Button: Build Toolbar



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

close to the desired intersection. The chosen intersection will now be carried out and the initialelement adjusted appropriately.

This command is self repeating.

10.2 Point Intersect

The Point Intersect command works by placing a point at the intersection of two elements. Thiscan be two lines, a line and an arc or two arcs.

Activate the command. You will be prompted for the first element. Mark the element by pickinga point close to the required element



Once the element is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second element. Identifythe second element in the same way. If you have chosen two lines, a point will now be drawn attheir intersection point and the command is complete.

However, if there is more than one solution, the chosen element will be drawn in the selectioncolour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selected element is incorrect.

Finally, where there is more than one solution, you will need to confirm that both elements arecorrect and you wish to complete the command. The confirmation point will be used todetermine which point of intersection is intended. Mark a confirmation point close to therequired intersection. A point will now be drawn at the intersection of the two chosen elements.


10.3 Multi Intersect

The multi intersect command allows you to project, or cut back one or more elements to theirpoint of intersection with a given element. The element being intersected to remains unchanged.

Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark the start of the first element. Mark theelement by picking a point close to the start of the required element. The chosen element will bedrawn in the selection colour. Where more than one solution is possible the start point willidentify the part of the element that is retained.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together chooseSelect Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The

Command Point Intersect

Menu Draw > Build->Point Intersect


Command Multi Intersect

Menu Draw > Build->Multi Intersect




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it ifsuccessful.


Once the element is correctly identified, you can identify further elements by holding down theShift key. You will again be prompted to mark the start of the element. Identify the next elementby picking a point close to its start. Repeat for each element required.

Once all the elements are identified, release the Shift key if appropriate and you will be promptedfor the element to intersect to. Identify this element in the same way. The chosen element will bedrawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selectedelement is incorrect.

The chosen intersection(s) will now be carried out and the initial element(s) adjustedappropriately.


10.4 Quick Trim

The Quick Trim command allows you to project, or cut back two lines to their point ofintersection. Unlike the Intersect command, both lines will be adjusted.

Activate the command. You will be prompted for the first line. Mark the line by picking a pointclose to the required line. Where more than one solution is possible the part of the line that ismarked in the identification process will be the part of the line that is retained.

If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose SelectNext from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKEsystem will now search for another line close to the given point and select it if successful.


Once the line is correctly identified, you will be prompted for the second line. Identify the secondline in the same way. The intersection will now be carried out and the two lines adjustedappropriately.


10.5 Auto Cut

Auto Cut is a very useful tool for removing sections from lines or arcs. KASEMAKE willautomatically cut a section from a given element up to its two nearest intersections with otherdrawing elements. If there are no intersections the entire element will be removed. If there is only

Command Quick Trim

Menu Draw > Build->Quick Trim


Command Auto Cut

Menu Draw > Build->Auto Cut




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

one intersection with another element, the section nearest to the identification point, will beremoved.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element.Choose the element to be cut, positioning your cursor within the section you want to be removedand marking it.

The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and compare it with theother drawing elements to identify the nearest intersection point, if any. The section nearest thecursor will be removed depending upon the number of intersections.


Example:

Figure 1Figure 2

In Figure 1 the small crosses indicate where the cursor was positioned to identify each element.Figure 2 displays the end result.

10.6 Auto Trim

Auto Trim is a very useful tool for trimming lines or arcs. KASEMAKE will automatically trim orextend a given element to its two nearest intersection points with other drawing elementskeeping the section marked. If there are no intersections the element will be unchanged. If thereis only one intersection with another element, the section nearest to the identification point, willbe extended / trimmed.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element.Choose the element to be teimmed, positioning your cursor within the section you want to keepand marking it.

The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point and compare it with theother drawing elements to identify the nearest intersection point, if any. The section nearest thecursor will be altered depending upon the number of intersections.


Command Auto Trim

Menu Draw > Build->Auto Trim




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

10.7 Bisect Element

The Bisect Element command allows you to divide an element into a specified number of equalsized sections. A point is drawn to show the end of one section and the beginning of another.

Activate the command. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt you to identify the element.First check or set the command’s options. Next, choose an element by picking a point close to therequired element. The system will now search for the nearest element to the given point andselect it.



Once the element is correctly identified, you will need to confirm that it is the correct one andyou wish to complete the command. Mark a confirmation point. The element will now be markedoff with points depending upon the number of sections requested.


10.7.1 Bisect Element OptionsThe options allow you to specify the number of sections to divide the element into. A point willbe placed evenly spaced between sections. Points are not placed at the start or end of lines orarcs, so for these elements the number of points displayed is always one less than the number ofsections.

Set the number of sections required by using the spin control to alter the current value, orselecting the current value and typing the new value.

10.8 Divide

The Divide command allows you to split an element into a specified number of equal sizedsections. It works in the same way as the Bisect Element command, but physically breaks theelement into small sections, rather than just marking off the element with points.


If the selected element is not the correct one because two elements are close together, chooseSelect Next from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The

Command Bisect Element

Menu Draw > Build->Bisect Element


Command Divide

Menu Draw > Build->Divide




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

KASEMAKE system will now search for another element close to the given point and select it ifsuccessful.


Once the element is correctly identified, you will need to confirm that it is the correct one andyou wish to complete the command. Mark a confirmation point. The element will now be splitup into the requested number of sections.


10.8.1 Divide OptionsThe options allow you to specify the number of sections to split the element into. The elementwill be divided into equal sized elements.

Set the number of sections required by using the spin control to alter the current value, orselecting the current value and typing the new value.

10.9 Break

The Break command allows you to split an item at a given point. You can also opt to remove partof the chosen item.




Once the element is correctly identified, you will need to confirm that it is the correct one andyou wish to complete the command. Mark the point where you wish the element to be split. Ifyou have requested to remove a section, you will now be prompted to mark the other end of thesection to be removed. Mark the required point.

The element will now be split at the first point and the section between this point and the secondpoint removed if this option has been chosen. This command will now start again.

10.9.1 Break OptionsYou can opt to remove part of the chosen element between two given points, or simply to splitit at the given point.

Click on the Remove Section check box to set it and opt to remove the section. Clear the checkbox to opt to simply split the chosen element.

Command Break

Menu Draw > Build->Break




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

10.10 Project

The project command allows you to drop a point perpendicularly on to a given element.

Activate the command. The system prompts for the element. Identify the element by picking apoint close to the required element. The system will now search for the nearest element to thegiven point and select it.

If the selected element is not the correct one because two or more elements are close togetherand you wish to search again, choose Reset from the right hand pop-up menu. The system willsearch again and select an alternative element if the search is successful.

If the selected element is incorrect and you wish to start the command again, simply choose Resetfrom the right hand pop up menu.

Once the correct element is selected, you will be prompted to mark a point. This point is the pointyou wish to project perpendicularly onto the selected element. Choose the point using any of theavailable drawing modes. A point will now be drawn on the chosen element. If the point isprojected beyond the visible part of the element, the point will be adjusted to the end point ofthe element.

10.11 Bisect Angle

The Bisect Angle command draws a line which bisects the angle between two given lines.

Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark the first line. Identify the line by choosinga point close to it. The nearest line will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation that ithas been found.

If the selected line is not the intended line, because two lines are close together choose SelectNext from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKEsystem will now search for another arc close to the given point and select it if successful.


Once the line is correctly identified, identify the second line in the same way. The chosen line willbe drawn in the selection colour. Again, the right hand pop-up menu can be used if the selectedline is incorrect.

Finally, you need to confirm that both lines are correct and you wish to complete the command.Mark a point within the sector you wish to bisect as confirmation. The resulting bisecting line willnow be drawn in the current ground colour.

Command Project

Menu Draw > Build->Project


Command Bisect Angle

Menu Draw > Build->Bisect Angle




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

10.12 Thicken

The Thicken command allows you to enhance the thickness of an element, by drawing parallelelements either side of the chosen element.

Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will be prompted to identify the element.Identify the element by picking a point close it. The chosen element will be drawn in the selectioncolour as confirmation.



Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that it is the correct one and youwish to complete the command. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area as confirmation. Theparallel elements will now be drawn in the current ground colour dependent upon thecommands options.

The command will now start again.

10.12.1 Thicken OptionsThe options available for the thicken command are as follows:-

10.12.1.1 Perpendicular GapThe distance between the parallel elements can be set.

Click on the current value and scroll it using the spin control. Alternatively, click on the valueto select it and type the new value.

10.12.1.2 Number of CopiesThe number of copies can be set. This corresponds to the total number of parallel elements.Half are placed one side and half are placed the other side.


10.13 Point On Line

The Point On Line command as its name suggests places a point on a given line at a specifieddistance from the chosen end of the line.

Activate the command. Check or set the command options. You will now be prompted to identifythe required line. Identify the line by choosing a point close to it. The nearest line to the givenpoint will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

Command Thicken

Menu Draw > Build->Thicken


Command Point On Line

Menu Draw > Build->Point On Line




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

If the selected line is not the correct one because two lines are close together choose SelectNext from the pop-up menu accessible with the right hand mouse button. The KASEMAKEsystem will now search for another element close to the given point and select it if successful.


Once the line is correctly identified, you need to determine which end of the line to offset thepoint from. The KASEMAKE system will automatically adopt the snap to endpoint mode anddisplay a snap cursor to help you to identify the correct point. Mark a point close to the requiredend. A point will now be drawn on the line, the specified distance from the chosen end point.

10.13.1 Point On Line OptionsSet the distance from the given end point to place the point. Alter the current value by clickingon it to select it, then typing the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the currentvalue.

10.14 Adjust

The Adjust command enables you to adjust the length of a selected element. Elements that youcan extend or shorten include lines, arcs and elliptical arcs.

Activate the command. Check and adjust the options as appropriate. You will now be promptedto identify the element to adjust. Click near to the required element to identify it.

If you have opted to adjust by a given distance and apply to both ends, or you have opted toadjust to size, with the towards centre option, the KASEMAKE system requires no furtherinformation. The identified element will now be adjusted to the given size as per the options.

If you have opted to adjust the element by a given distance from one end or to adjust the elementby size but not centred, you must now identify the end to use to make the adjustment. TheKASEMAKE system automatically adopts the snap to endpoint mode and displays a snap cursorto help you to identify the end point. Click near to the required point to pick it. The identifiedelement will now be adjusted as per the options.


Command Adjust

Menu Draw > Build->Adjust




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

10.14.1 Adjust Options

10.14.1.1 Adjust by distanceChoose this option to adjust the chosen element by a specified distance at either or bothend(s).

The next three settings are used by this method, so will now become enabled.

Distance From End

Set the distance to adjust the chosen element by from either or both end(s). Scroll the currentvalue or type a new value directly.

Shorten

Set this option if you want to shorten the chosen element by the given distance.

Clear this option if you want to lengthen the chosen element.

Apply to Both Ends

Set this optionto apply the adjustment to both ends of the chosen element.

Clear this option if you wish to specify which end to adjust.

10.14.1.2 Adjust To SizeChoose this option to adjust the chosen element to a specific size, extending or shortening itas appropriate.

The next two settings are used by this method, so will now become enabled.

Size

Set the size to make the chosen element. Scroll the current value or type a new value directly.

Towards Centre

Set this optionto apply the adjustment about the centre of the chosen element.

Clear this option if you wish to specify which end to resize.



Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

10.14.1.3 Move attached elementsFor both methods you can opt to move attached elements. This means that when an element isadjusted and its end moved to its new position any other adjoining end points will also move ifthis option is set.

To leave adjoining elements unchanged, clear this option.

10.15 Hatch

The Hatch command allows you to shade part of your design. The boundary of the area to beshaded is identified. This should be a sequence of connected elements. Further areas whichoverlap or are contained within the boundary and are to be left unhatched, can also be identified.These are referred to as islands and should also be a sequence of connected elements.

Activate the command. Check or set the Hatch Options. The command will now prompt you forthe first element in the boundary. Identify any element in the required boundary by choosing apoint close to the element. The nearest element to the given point will be drawn in the selectioncolour as confirmation.



Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that the element is correct and youwish to trace the boundary. Mark a point in the drawing area as confirmation. The point will beused to determine which direction the path should take if the Automatic option has been set.Choose a point outside the boundary to force the path to take an external route.

The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around anyconnected elements according to the Hatch Options.

Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the boundary has been traced, theHatch Tool dialog appears offering the following options:-

10.15.1 IslandChoose the Island option if you are happy with the boundary and wish to identify an area whichoverlaps or is contained within the selected boundary and should not be hatched. Many Island’smay be identified by repeatedly choosing this option from the Hatch Tool dialog.

Choose the Island option. You are now prompted to mark an element which is part of the island.Identify any element forming part of the required island in the same way as you identified theexternal boundary.

Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that the element is correct and youwish to trace the path making up the island. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area asconfirmation. The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected elementaround any connected elements according to the hatch options.

Command Hatch

Menu Draw > Build->Hatch




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the island has been traced, the HatchTool dialog will appear again. You can opt to choose further islands by choosing the Island optionagain, or choose one of the other options.

10.15.2 AmendThe Amend option is provided to allow you to correct an incorrect boundary or island boundary.If the Automatic option is set in Hatch Options, choosing Amend will simply restart the Hatchcommand.

If you have chosen the Manual option, you will now be given the chance to amend the incorrectpath.

• Identify the first element where the path has gone the wrong way. The element and all fol-lowing elements will now be deselected and removed from the path.

• Identify the correct element. This will now be selected and the KASEMAKE system will attempt to trace a new path, selecting each new element as it is added to the path.

10.15.3 Hatch

Once the external boundary and any islands have been correctly identified, choose this option tohatch the selected area using the current Hatch Options.

10.15.4 Cancel

Choose Cancel to restart the Hatch command.

10.15.5 Hatch OptionsSelect the Options command from the Main Toolbar to view the Hatch Options.

10.15.5.1 Angle Of Hatch LinesSet the angle at which the hatch lines will be drawn. Click on the current value to select it andtype the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.15.5.2 Gap Between LinesSet the perpendicular distance between the hatch lines. Click on the current value to select itand type the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.15.5.3 Selection MethodChoose the method for selecting the boundary, or island boundary by clicking on one of thefollowing:-

• Manual - a path will be traced from the start element. If the path is incorrect you will get the chance to amend it by manually selecting where the path has followed the wrong route and identify an element on the correct route. The system will then attempt to retrace the boundary from the identified element.

• Automatic - the system will automatically trace the boundary from the start element. No manual intervention is possible to amend an incorrect boundary. The position of the confirmation point is used to determine which path to follow

If the Automatic selection method is chosen, the following options are also available.



Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Close Unbound Area

• Yes - choose this option to automatically close the boundary by placing an additional line between the start point of the first element in the boundary and the end point of the final element in the boundary

• No - choose this option to leave the boundary open

Ground Selection

• Specific - choose this option to force the system to only choose elements in the same ground as the identified first element

• Independent - pick this option to choose elements from any ground

Finally, choose OK to save the new Hatch Options, or Cancel to revert to the previous settings.

10.16 Hatch Holes

The Hatch Holes command allows you to select part of your design and shade any closed areaswithin the selected area.

Activate the command. Check or set the Hatch Holes Options. The command will now promptyou to select the items to hatch. You now need to select the area by dragging a rubber bandselection box. Click and hold the left mouse button at a suitable start point for the box. Now asyou move the mouse the selection box will open out and follow the path of the cursor. Once youhave surrounded the area you wish to identify, click with the left hand mouse button to completethe selection box. The KASEMAKE system will now search for any enclosed areas within theselection box and shade them according to the Hatch Options.

10.16.1 Hatch Holes OptionsSelect the Options command from the Main Toolbar to view the Hatch Options.

10.16.1.1 Angle Of Hatch LinesSet the angle at which the hatch lines will be drawn. Click on the current value to select it andtype the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

10.16.1.2 Gap Between LinesSet the perpendicular distance between the hatch lines. Click on the current value to select itand type the new value. Alternatively, use the spin control to scroll the current value.

Finally, choose OK to save the new Hatch Holes Options, or Cancel to revert to the previoussettings.

10.17 Enlarge Detail

Enlarge Detail allows you to take an area of your design and show it enlarged at a given positionwithin the design.

Command Hatch Holes

Menu Draw > Build->Hatch Holes


Command Enlarge Detail

Menu Draw > Build->Enlarge Detail




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. You will now be asked to identify the centre of the area to enlarge. Markthe centre point using any of the available drawing modes.

You will now be prompted to mark the extent of the area to enlarge. As you move the cursor acircle will rubber band to help you to identify the extent correctly.Mark a point using any of theavailable drawing modes to identify the area for enlargement.

A circle will now be drawn to illustrate where the detailed area is positioned within the entiredesign. The elements contained within the circle, together with the circle will now be copied anddrawn in the selection colour. You can now position them by identifying a new position for thecentre. The elements and circle rubber band to help you to position them. In addition, a line isdrawn from the extent of the newly identified circle to the extent of the circle being positionedto show how the detail relates to the original design.

Position the new centre using any of the available modes. The copied elements are now placedat their new position in the selection colour. Finally you are prompted to Mark Extent. Move theedge of the circle and the elements within it will enlarge as the circle does. Identify the positionof the circle extent using any of the drawing modes. The enlarged view of the chosen elementswill now be drawn surrounded by a circle in the relevant ground. The circle identifying the areathat was enlarged and the line linking them is also added.

10.18 Straighten Arc

The Straighten Arc command allows you to take an arc and flatten it so that it becomes a line.

Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will now be asked to identify the arc tostraighten. Select the arc using any of the available drawing modes. A line will now be drawn inplace of or in addition to the chosen arc according to the current options.

10.18.1 Straighten Arc OptionsIdentify the options for the straighten arc command as follows:-

Keep Original Element

Set this option if you wish to retain the arc as well as adding its straight line representation.Clear this option if you wish the original arc to be removed and just its straight linerepresentation to be drawn.

10.19 Bulge

The Bulge command allows you to take a line and create an arc by adding a bulge a set distancefrom the line.

Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will now be asked to identify the line tocreate the bulge from. Select the line using any of the available drawing modes.

Command Straighten Arc

Menu Draw > Build->Straighten Arc


Command Bulge

Menu Draw > Build->Bulge

Toolbar Button: Not available



Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

The line will now be drawn in the selection colour. A rubber band arc with the same start andend points as the line and the given distance away from it will now appear. Move the cursor toidentify which side of the line the bulge is to be drawn on. Identify the position using any of theavailable drawing modes. The arc will now be drawn in place of or in addition to the chosen lineaccording to the current options.

10.19.1 Bulge OptionsIdentify the options for the bulge command as follows:-

Distance

Define the distance away from the line to position the highest point of the arc, i.e. the size ofbulge. Set the value by typing directly or using the scroll buttons.


Set this option if you wish to retain the line as well as adding the arc representation. Clear thisoption if you wish the original line to be removed and just the new arc representation to bedrawn.

10.20 Radius Bulge

The Radius Bulge command allows you to take a line and create an arc by adding a bulge with agiven radius. You can also take an arc and change its bulge to the given radius.

Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will now be asked to identify the line / arcto create the bulge from. Select the line / arc using any of the available drawing modes.

The line / arc will now be drawn in the selection colour. A rubber band arc with the same startand end points as the given line / arc will now appear. Move the cursor to identify the radius forthe bulge. Identify the position using any of the available drawing modes. The arc will now bedrawn in place of or in addition to the chosen line / arc according to the current options.

10.20.1 Bulge OptionsIdentify the options for the bulge command as follows:-

Fixed Radius

Set this option if you wish to specify a value for the radius of the bulge. Clear this option ifyou wish to identify the radius from your design.

If you opt for a fixed radius you will also need to set the radius option :-

Radius

Define the radius of the bulge. Set the value by typing directly or using the scroll buttons.


Set this option if you wish to retain the line / arc as well as adding the new arc representation.Clear this option if you wish the original line / arc to be removed and just the new arcrepresentation to be drawn.

Command Radius Bulge

Menu Draw > Build->Radius Bulge




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

10.21 Lead In Arc

Lead In Arc allows you to define an arc which blends with an existing circle / ellipse.

Activate this command. You will now be prompted to identify the circle / ellipse you wish to blendwith. Mark the circle / ellipse by choosing a point close to it. The chosen circle / ellipse will bedrawn in the selection colour as confirmation.



Once the circle / ellipse is correctly identified, you need to determine the direction and size of theblending arc by specifying its start point.

Move the cursor. The KASEMAKE system will now begin to draw a blending arc following thepath of the cursor. When the direction and size of the arc are correct, mark the point. Theblending arc will now be drawn in the current ground.

This command is self-repeating allowing you to identify further blending arcs. Simply choose analternative command when no further blending arcs are required.

10.22 Element Path

Element Path allows you to trace a continuous boundary splitting items where appropriate andstores a copy of the boundary elements in a specified ground for future use.

Activate the command. The command will now prompt you for the first element in the boundary.Identify any element in the required boundary by choosing a point close to the element. Thenearest element to the given point will be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.



Once the element is correctly identified, you need to confirm that the element is correct and youwish to trace the boundary. Mark a point in the drawing area as confirmation. The point will beused to determine which direction the path should take. Choose a point outside the boundary toforce the path to take an external route. Choose a point within the boundary to direct the pathinside the boundary.

Command Lead In Arc

Menu Draw > Build->Lead In Arc


Command Element Path

Menu Draw > Build->Element Path




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

The KASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around anyconnected elements.

Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the boundary has been traced, theSave Path dialog appears offering the following options:-

10.22.1 ExternalA path can be saved as an external path.

First set the ground to save the external path in using the corresponding ground combo box. Clickon the arrow to display the list of grounds. Scroll to the required ground. Click to select it.

Now click on the External button. A copy of the selected path elements will now be placed in thechosen ground.

10.22.2 InternalA path can be saved as an internal path.

First set the ground to save the internal path in using the corresponding ground combo box. Clickon the arrow to display the list of grounds. Scroll to the required ground. Click to select it.

Now click on the Internal button. A copy of the selected path elements will now be placed in thechosen ground.

10.22.3 CancelChoose Cancel to close the Save Path dialog and restart the Element Path command.

10.22.4 Element Path OptionsSelect the Options command from the Main Toolbar to view the Element Path Options.

10.22.4.1 Selection MethodChoose the method for selecting the boundary by clicking on one of the following:-

• Manual - a path will be traced from the start element. If the path is incorrect you will get the chance to amend it by manually selecting where the path has followed the wrong route and identify an element on the correct route. The system will then attempt to retrace the boundary from the identified element.

• Automatic - the system will automatically trace the boundary from the start element. No manual intervention is possible to amend an incorrect boundary. The position of the confirmation point is used to determine which path to follow

10.22.4.2 Close Unbound AreaYes - choose this option to automatically close the boundary by placing an additional linebetween the start point of the first element in the boundary and the end point of the finalelement in the boundary

No - choose this option to leave the boundary open

10.22.4.3 Ground SelectionSpecific - choose this option to force the system to only choose elements in the same groundas the identified first element

Independent - pick this option to choose elements from any ground



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

10.22.4.4 DiagnosticsDebug - choose this option to display details of any dead ends found when tracing theboundary. The coordinate of the dead end is displayed in a dialog.

Show Steps - choose this option to trace the path an element at a time, displaying detailsof each node as it is traced. The coordinate of each node is displayed in a dialog. This helpsto identify any potential problem areas for tracing the path.

Finally, choose OK to save the new Element Path Options, or Cancel to revert to the previoussettings.

10.23 Inflate / Deflate Path

This command will trace a path and produce a parallel path offset from the original. The resultingpath can be optionally internal or external to the original path.

Activate this command. Set the options as appropriate. KASEMAKE now prompts you to marka boundary element. Pick a point near to one of the elements in the path you wish to trace.KASEMAKE draws the chosen element in the selection colour and requests confirmation that itis the intended element.



Once the element is correctly identified, mark a point in the drawing area as confirmation. TheKASEMAKE system will now attempt to trace from the selected element around any connectedelements to identify the chosen path.

Each element found is drawn in the selection colour. Once the boundary has been traced,KASEMAKE will calculate the new path, offseting it from the original path as defined by theoptions. The new path is then drawn in the current ground.

10.23.1 Inflate / Deflate Path Options

10.23.1.1 Ground SelectionSpecific - choose this option to force the system to only choose elements in the same groundas the identified first element

Independent - pick this option to choose elements from any ground

10.23.1.2 Generate PathInternal - Choose this option if you wish to deflate the path

External - Choose this option to inflate the given path

Command Inflate / Deflate Path

Menu Draw > Build->Inflate / Deflate Path




Build Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Offset Distance

Set the distance to offset the new path from the original. Scroll the existing setting or type anew value directly.

Store in Ground

Choose the ground to store the resulting path in. Click on the combo and select from the dropdown list.

10.23.1.3 FilletFillet Corners

Set this option if you wish to fillet the corners of the new path

Radius

The fillet radius to use where fillet corners are required. Scroll the current value using the arrowkeys or type a new value directly

10.24 Offset Element

The Offset Element command allows you to produce parallel element(s) offset from a chosenelement.

Activate the command. Check or set the options. You will be prompted to identify the element.Identify the element by picking a point close it. The chosen element will be drawn in the selectioncolour as confirmation.



Once the element is correctly identified, the parallel element(s) will be drawn, according to theoptions and will move with the cursor. You will now be prompted to confirm which side of thechosen element to place the offset elements. Mark a point anywhere in the drawing area asconfirmation. The offset elements will now be drawn in the current ground colour dependentupon the commands options.

The command will now start again.

10.24.1 Offset Element OptionsThe options available for the offset element command are as follows:-

10.24.1.1 Perpendicular GapThe distance between each element can be set.


Command Offset Element

Menu Draw > Build->Offset Element




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

10.24.1.2 Number of ElementsThe number of parallel elements required.


10.25 Convert To Contour

The convert to contour command takes a sequence of lines and produces a smooth curverepresentation for them.

Activate the command. Set the options if appropriate. You will now be prompted to mark anelement. Pick a point close to one of the line segments in the sequence you wish to produce acontour for. KASEMAKE now traces from the given line to identify the complete sequence, thenproduces the contour using the endpoints and the smoothing factor specified in the options. Thecontour is drawn in the current ground colour and is treated as a single element.

10.25.1 Convert to Contour OptionsThe Convert to Contour options are displayed as follows:-

These options apply to the handling of the contour when it is exploded. You can choose for thecontour to be exploded into short line segments or arcs. Click on the corresponding radio buttonto select it.

Arcs

Where the arcs option is chosen, you can determine the smoothness. The smoother theapproximation to the original contour, the more processing involved so there is a performancecost. Drag the slider to vary the smoothing factor as required.


Command Convert To Contour

Menu Draw > Build->Convert To Contour




Image

KASEMAKE

11 Image

This command allows you to load an image e.g. bitmap or tif file etc. as part of your design ratherthan just as a background image.

You will need to define a box to hold the bitmap and specify the name of the file containing theimage.

Activate the command. You are prompted for the first corner of the box. Mark a point within thedrawing area using any of the available drawing modes. A rubber band box will now be drawnas you move the cursor. Mark the second corner using any of the available drawing modes. Theload image file dialog will now appear prompting for the name of the file containing the imageto be loaded. Enter the filename in the usual way. Refer to “Open” on page 2-5.

The image will now be loaded and scaled accordingly to fit the given box.

12 Image Proportional

This command allows you to load one or more images e.g. bitmap or tif file etc. as part of yourdesign at a 1 : 1 scale. You will need to specify the name of the file(s) containing the image.

In addition, you can load EPS artwork file(s) with a Tiff preview again at a 1 : 1 scale using thiscommand.

Activate the command. The Load Image file dialog will now appear prompting for the name ofthe file containing the image to be loaded and its location.

Set the Files of Type field to correspond to the type of image you wish to load. Now identify thefirst image to be loaded by clicking on its filename to select it. For multiple selections you holddown the CTRL key to pick out individual image files, or the SHIFT key if the files are listed insuccession, whilst you click on the image filename.

Click on Open to close the dialog. You will now be prompted for an origin for each image file inturn. A rubber band box, representing an approximate border for the image will also be displayedto help you to locate the image more easily. Pick a suitable origin using any of the availabledrawing modes. For most of the formats, the image will now be loaded at 1:1 scale, at the givenposition. Some of the formats do not contain DPI information. For these formats the followingdialog is displayed before the image can be loaded:-

Command Image

Menu Draw > Image


Command Image Proportional

Menu Draw > Image Proportional




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

This gives a default value for the DPI (dots per inch) and displays the dimensions of the loadedimage if this value where used.

Set the correct image DPI by scrolling with the arrows or typing the value directly. Thecorresponding dimensions will automatically update.

Click on OK to set the DPI and continue to load the image.

You will be repeatedly prompted for an origin and where necessary the DPI value for each of theselected image files in turn.

EPS Image Resolution

Where an EPS image is loaded, this will be automatically regenerated at increased resolutions tomaintain visibility as the image is zoomed. Up to three resolutions of the image are used. Theoriginal 1:1 resolution that it is loaded with. A medium and a high resolution. The point at whichthe alternative resolutions are used depends upon the bitmap zoom factors set with File->Preferences. See “Bitmap Zoom Factors” on page 2-51 The medium zoom factor determineshow far to zoom before the medium resolution image is loaded. The high zoom factor determineshow far to zoom before the high resolution image is loaded.

13 Options

This command allows you to access the options for the currently active command. If the currentcommand does not have options this option will be greyed out. If the current command doeshave options, the appropriate Options Dialog will be displayed for you to view and change theoption settings as required.

For details on using any of the Options Dialogs, refer to the Options section for the currentcommand.

14 Freehand Construct Lines Sub-MenuThis is a new menu providing access to commands for creating and manipulating freehandconstruct lines. Freehand construct lines are lines which assist in the creation of a design.

Command Options...

Menu Draw > Options...

Toolbar Button: Standard Toolbar



Freehand Construct Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

14.1 Draw Freehand Construct Lines

This command allows you to place construct lines or guide lines anywhere within the drawingarea. They are of infinite length so are available at any window size.

Activate this command. Check the current options. You will be prompted Mark First Point.KASEMAKE requires you to enter a point through which you wish the construct line to pass.Mark a point using any of the available drawing modes.

Move the cursor. A construct line will now appear through the given point and the current cursorposition. You are now prompted Mark Second Point. Mark a point to confirm the other point thatthe construct line should pass through and finalise its position.

Multiple Construct Lines

If you have set the options to create additional construct lines, you will now be prompted MarkParallel Side. KASEMAKE requires you to identify which side of the new construct line you wishto place the additional construct lines. The construct lines will be drawn as you move the cursorto help you position them correctly. Mark a point to identify the final position.

Construct Lines At A Specific Angle

If you hold down the CTRL key whilst identifying the two points through which the construct linepasses, you can constrain the angle they are drawn at. Moving the cursor after the initial point isgiven will produce a horizontal construct line. Releasing the CTRL key and reapplying it will causethe construct line to switch from horizontal to vertical.

Moving the cursor will result in the construct line rotating through multiples of the currentincrement (determined by the options) measured from the horizontal (or vertical). Mark a pointto identify the final position.

In all cases, KASEMAKE will draw the construct line(s) in the current construct line colour. Referto File->Preferences for defining this colour.

Command Draw Freehand Construct Lines

Menu Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Draw Freehand Construct Lines

Toolbar Button: Construct Lines Toolbar



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

14.1.1 Construct Line Options

No. Of Additional Lines

This is the number of additional construct lines that you require. Set the value by typing directlyor use the arrow keys to scroll.

Offset

The offset to leave between each construct line is specified here. Set the All Equal check box ifyou wish to set an equal offset to apply to all the construct lines. Clear the All Equal check box ifyou wish to set individual offsets for each construct line.

One or more offset fields will be displayed depending upon the No. of Additional Lines and AllEqual settings.

Set each offset by typing the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll to it.

Angle Increment

This is the increment to use when rotating the construct line(s). Set the angle by typing therequired value directly or use the arrows to scroll to it.

Note: This setting is only applied when the CTRL key is used. Please see “Construct LinesAt A Specific Angle” on page 71 for further details.

Finally click on OK to update the settings or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

14.2 Offset Construct Line

This command allows you to add one or more construct lines at a specified offset from a givenconstruct line.

Command Offset Construct Line

Menu Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Offset Construct Line




Freehand Construct Lines Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate the Offset Construct Line command. Check the options. You will be prompted MarkConstruct Line. KASEMAKE requires you to identify the construct line which you want to offsetthe new construct line(s) from. Mark a point near to the required construct line. The nearestconstruct line to the given point will now be redrawn in the current selection colour asconfirmation.

Move the cursor and the additional construct line(s) will now appear offset as per the options.KASEMAKE now prompts you to Mark Parallel Side. Mark a point to identify which side of thechosen construct line you wish to place the additional construct lines.

The new construct lines will now be drawn in the current construct line colour as per the currentoptions.

14.2.1 Offset Construct Line Options

No. Of Additional Lines

This is the number of additional construct lines that you require. Set the value by typing directlyor use the arrow keys to scroll.

Offset

The offset to leave between each construct line is specified here. Set the All Equal check box ifyou wish to set an equal offset to apply to all the construct lines. Clear the All Equal check box ifyou wish to set individual offsets for each construct line.

One or more offset fields will be displayed depending upon the No. of Additional Lines and AllEqual settings.

Set each offset by typing the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll to it.

Finally click on OK to accept the new settings or Cancel to ignore them.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

14.3 Perpendicular Construct Line

This command allows you to add one or more construct lines at a specified offset perpendicularto a given construct line.

Activate the Perpendicular Construct Line command. Check the options. You will be promptedMark Construct Line. KASEMAKE requires you to identify the construct line which you want tooffset the new construct line(s) from. Mark a point near to the required construct line. The nearestconstruct line to the given point will now be redrawn in the current selection colour asconfirmation.

Move the cursor. A new construct line perpendicular to the chosen construct line will be drawnin the selection colour which follows the path of the cursor. You will now be prompted MarkConstruct Line Position. Mark a point to confirm the final position for the new perpendicularconstruct line.

KASEMAKE now prompts you to Mark Parallel Side. Move the cursor. The additional constructline(s) will now appear offset as per the options. Mark a point to identify which side of the newperpendicular construct line you wish to place the additional construct lines.

The new construct lines will now be drawn in the current construct line colour as per the currentoptions.

14.3.1 Perpendicular Construct Line Options Please refer to “Offset Construct Line Options” on page 73 for details.

14.4 Bisect Angle Between Elements

The Bisect Angle Between Elements command enables you to add construct lines at an angledetermined as the bisecting angle of two given design elements.

Activate this command. KASEMAKE will prompt Mark Line. Identify the first line by moving closeto it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes. The chosen line will now bedrawn in the current selection colour as confirmation.

You will now be prompted Mark Second Line. Again, identify the required line by moving closeto it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes.

The new construct line will now be drawn in the current ground colour, passing through theintersection point of the two lines at the angle which bisects the angle between them.

Command Perpendicular Construct Line

Menu Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Perpendicular Construct Line


Command Bisect Angle Between Elements

Menu Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Bisect Angle Between Elements




Folding

KASEMAKE

14.5 Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines

The Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines command enables you to add construct lines at anangle determined as the bisecting angle of two given construct lines.

Activate this command. KASEMAKE will prompt Mark Line. Identify the first construct line bymoving close to it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes. The chosenconstruct line will now be drawn in the current selection colour as confirmation.

You will now be prompted Mark Second Line. Again, identify the required construct line bymoving close to it and marking a point using any of the available drawing modes.

The new construct line will now be drawn in the current ground colour, passing through theintersection point of the two chosen construct lines at the angle which bisects the angle betweenthem.

14.6 Show / Hide Freehand Construct Lines

This command toggles the display of the freehand construct lines.

To remove construct lines on display, simply activate the command and the construct lines will beremoved. The menu item will also be updated to Show Freehand Construct Lines.

To display construct lines, simply activate the command again and the construct lines will bedisplayed. The menu item will also be updated to Hide Freehand Construct Lines.

15 FoldingKASEMAKE can fold and display any suitable drawing in a three dimensional view, includingany images applied to the drawing. The 3D view can be saved as a ‘scene’ (*.ksn) file, which caninclude objects, panoramas, environment maps, cameras, etc.

The 3D facility is intended for use in illustrating the construction of cases, trays, point of saleitems etc, and to aid in sales presentations.

The 3D view is entered using one of the two following ways :-

• choose the Draw->Fold Box menu item. • open an existing scene file (.ksn) using the File->Open command

Command Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines

Menu Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Bisect Angle Between Construct Lines


Command Show/Hide Freehand Construct Lines

Menu Draw > Freehand Construct Lines > Show/Hide Freehand Construct Lines




4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

15.1 Fold Box…

The Fold Box… command allows you to create a 3D view of a drawing. To achieve this, theindividual panels of the design must be identified. Once a 3D view is created, the object canthen be folded as required.

Load the required drawing, and select the Draw->Fold Box… command. The Folding Optionsdialog is now displayed. An explanation of the settings available for the Folding Options dialog isexplained in the next section. Once the settings are correct, click on OK to close the dialog.

You will now be required to identify the panels making up each component of your design. Youonly need to identify the base panel as KASEMAKE will automatically identify any furtherconnected panels.

You will be prompted to identify a base panel for each component of the design. Move the cursorwithin the required panel and click the left mouse button to select it. KASEMAKE will nowautomatically identify any further connected panels within the component, highlighting eachpanel as it is identified. Repeat for any other components of your design.

KASEMAKE provides context menus to assist with the creation of the 3D view. Click with theright hand mouse button to display the menu. Two commands are available as follows :-

ResetChoose this command if you make a mistake whilst identifying a panel. It will allow you to re-identify each component.

Create 3D ViewChoose this option when all panels are correctly identified to create the 3D view. The 2D copyof your design will now be replaced and a 3D view displayed with a different set of menus andtool bars to the 2D version.

15.2 Folding Options The Folding Options dialog provides the following settings:-

Command Fold Box…

Menu Draw > Fold Box…




Folding

KASEMAKE

15.2.1 Selection

15.2.1.1 ToleranceWhen tracing panel outlines this is the tolerance used to determine whether two elements arethe same or not. Set using the arrows or type directly.

15.2.1.2 Identification of PanelsThere are two methods available for identifying panels:-

•Method 1 - the original method

•Method 2 - this method provides better use of the tolerance in the handling of minor errors in panels, resulting in more panels which can be folded. Dangling nodes are also handled. However, the improved handling of small errors does not guarantee that a design is problem free. Use of the Check Integrity command is still recommended for identifying any potential problems in a design. Please refer to “Check Integrity” on page 8-62

15.2.2 Arc Splitting RequirementsThe 3D view converts arcs into short line segments, and this setting determines the accuracy ofthe conversion. Normally this can be set to 'fine' in order to get the best result. Click on therequired option to set it.

15.2.3 Crease Grounds

15.2.3.1 Number of GroundsThis should be set to the number of grounds to be considered when defining creases to foldyour design. Some designs have standard crease, cut/crease, perforation etc. The maximumallowed is 5.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

15.2.3.2 Crease Grounds One or more drop down boxes will be displayed depending upon the number of grounds thatyou specified in the previous option. Define the ground for each crease in the design by clickingon the arrow and moving the cursor to the appropriate ground. Click on the ground to select it.Repeat for each crease ground used by your design.

15.2.4 Artwork

15.2.4.1 QualityThis setting specifies the size of the textures used to apply artwork to your object in the 3Dwindow. This setting is provided solely to enable KASEMAKE to make best use of a varietyof graphics cards having varying amounts of memory. If you have a lower specificationcomputer with, for example, a 4MB graphics card, you will only be able to use the lowersettings. If however, you have a 32MB graphics card or better you will be able to use anysetting without experiencing performance problems.

Note: This setting is independent of the artwork you have actually drawn inyour 2D drawing. Larger images are scaled down to the setting youspecify, smaller ones are scaled up. This setting is always in pixels. If youhave a multipart design e.g. point of sale, this setting applies across thewhole drawing, not just to individual parts.

To work out how much video memory you will need, take the following as a rough guide:

•128 x 128 - requires 64K video memory

•256 x 256 - requires 256K video memory

•512 x 512 - requires 1MB video memory



In fact, two bitmaps are used: one on the inside of your drawing, the other on the outside.So you can see that you will need 16MB straight away in order to use the highest setting,without an image in the background, or textured floor, or more advanced requirements fortextures.

If you are working on a lower specification computer, you might want to choose a lowerartwork quality initially and only change this when you are ready to print or export yourfinished 3D scene.

15.2.5 Default Artwork Colours...These settings specify the colours to apply to your 3D model in the absense of artwork. If onlyparts of your drawing contain artwork, the other areas are filled with these colours. You can addartwork both inside and outside your drawing. The settings can be changed after the 3D view iscreated. Additionally, you can still add artwork while working in 3D.

Outside ColourTo define the colour to use for the outside of your design, click on the arrow next to thecurrent colour. A colour dialog is now displayed as follows:-



Folding

KASEMAKE

You can now define the colour in one of three ways:-

•Automatic - choose this option for KASEMAKE to determine the most approprtiate colour to use.

•Colour - click on one of the predefined colours displayed to select it.

•More colours - click on this to define your own colour. A choose colour dialog will now be displayed as follows:-

You can now define your own colour by specifying the amount of red, green and blue to usebetween. Set themto a value between 0 and 255. You can also define the hue, and a percentagefor the saturation and luminosity values. Once you have the required colour click on OK to selectit.

Inside ColourThe inside colour can also be determined. Set it as for the Outside Colour.

15.2.6 Material Colours (blended with artwork) These are more advanced settings, you may never need to change. They allow you to specifyadditional colours which are blended with your artwork. You ordinarly leave the inside and out-side white, and the edge brown, for example. These colours are combined with your artworkwhile your 3D model is rendered: To give your whole carton or point of sale a red tint you canchange the outside material colour to red.

Set all three value as you did the default artwork settings. See “Outside Colour” on page 78.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

15.2.7 ThicknessYou can specify the thickness of material. Folding is applied according to thickess: i.e. about thenotional centre of the material which is determined according to the inner and outer thick-nesses. This can be changed later.

Wall TypeClick on the drop down arrow to display the available options. Move the cursor over therequired setting and click on it to select it. Choose from the following options:-

•No Thickness - thickness will not be considered

•Single Wall - one thickness value will be required

•Double Wall - two thickness values will be required

ThicknessFor Single Wall and Double Wall you must specify the thicknesses. Use the arrows to scroll toa suitable value, or type the value directly.

15.2.8 3D DriverThis option is an advanced user command allowing you to configure your display and the displaydriver used by 3D. It can also be accessed through Windows Control Panel command.

Activating this option produces the Kasemake Options dialog. This is split into two sectionslabelled Image Compression Options and Display Driver Options. Each set of options are fullyexplained for the New command in the Files chapter. See “Image Compression Options” on page2-2 or refer to “Display Driver Options” on page 2-2 for a full explanation.

15.3 Folding Requirements There are several common problems in drawings which cause the panel identification to fail:-

• gaps in lines/joins• dangling nodes

15.3.1 Gaps in Lines / JoinsThe lines making up each panel must form a closed path. Gaps in the lines may not be visiblewhen viewing the whole drawing, it may be necessary to zoom into the suspected area. Figure1.1 shows a zoomed view of a crease not connected to the cut line. You should use the Intersectcommand (Draw/Build/Intersect) to intersect the two lines.



Folding

KASEMAKE

Figure 1.1

15.3.2 .Dangling NodesDangling nodes (or dead ends) will also mean the panel does not form a closed path. Figure 1.2shows a zoomed view of a dangling node that will cause the panel identification to fail. Youshould use the Intersect command (Draw/Build/Intersect) to intersect the cut lines correctly.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Figure 1.2

15.4 3D ViewThe 3D view is displayed in a similar way to the 2D view, but uses a different set of menus as ithas commands applicable to 3D drawings. Toolbars will also vary.

The drawing area of the 3D view displays the design in a blue 3D pane in full 3D. Unlike for a 2Ddesign, there are five views for each scene displayed in the drawing area. They are overlayed in atabbed format, simply click on a tab to display the corresponding view:-

• Perspective - this is the normal, 3D view used to print and view a scene• Front )• Top )--- three orthogonal views which are useful for moving and aligning objects• Side ) • Folding - always shows the scene flat in order to make panel selection easier. Even where a

box or point of sale has already been folded it will be displayed flat in this view.

Moving the scene is done with the right mouse button; object selection and object manipulationis done with the left mouse button.

Any changes made to toolbars whilst using the 3D view, e.g. switching on all of the 3D toolbars,will be remembered when you return to the 2D view.

15.4.1 PanesIt is possible to have more than one pane or window for displaying / manipulating a scene. The



Folding

KASEMAKE

Cameras menu provides alternative layouts for up to four concurrent panes. If you choose 'hori-zontal split - 5' for instance, you can have a perspective view in the large pane,then front, top,and side views in the other three panes. You can resize each pane individually to get the screenlayout exactly how you want it. All of the panes update at the same time. If you select or movean object in any pane the view will update in all panes.

15.4.2 Moving AboutYou can imagine each pane to be a seperate viewpoint or camera, which you can move to lookat a particular detail of your drawing independently. You can move the viewpoint using a combi-nation of the mouse and keyboard. All movement of the camera is done with the right mousebutton.

The way you manipulate a scene differs according to the view. Before trying any manipulation,make sure nothing is selected by clicking with the left mouse button in a blank area of the viewto deselect any highlighted objects. Now place KASEMAKE in to 'examine' mode using Edit->Scene Mode->Examine from the Edit menu'.

15.4.2.1 Perspective View

Rotating The ViewTo rotate the current viewpoint, hold down the right mouse button, drag the cursor to rotate,then release. The cursor changes while you are rotating the view. The view is updated to reflectthe camera movement.

Moving The ViewTo move the current viewpoint, hold down the shift key and the right mouse button. Thecursor changes to a move cursor and you can now move the view. Release the mouse buttonfor the view to stay at its new position.

Zooming In/OutTo zoom the current viewpoint, hold down the control key and the right mouse button. Thecursor changes to a zoom cursor. Drag the cursor to zoom the view. Dragging up the screenzooms in, dragging down the screen zooms out.

15.4.2.2 Orthogonal Views (Front, Top, Side, Folding)

Rotating The ViewBy design, you cannot rotate orthogonal views.

Moving The ViewTo move the current viewpoint, hold down the right mouse button. The cursor changes to amove cursor. Drag the cursor to move the view. Release the mouse button to permanentlyupdate the view.

Zooming In/OutTo zoom the current viewpoint, hold the control key and the right mouse buttonsimultaneously. The cursor changes to a zoom cursor. Move the cursor to zoom the view.Dragging up the screen zooms in, dragging down the screen zooms out. Release the mousebutton to keep the zoomed view.

15.5 CamerasCameras can be added to or removed from a scene. They can be looked through or movedaround to change the current view. The camera mechanism is entirely general: you can lookthrough the same camera in more than one pane; you can select the camera and manipulate itwhile looking through the camera in another pane.

There are two ways to move any camera. While you are looking through the camera by moving,zooming, rotating etc. Alternatively, while you are not looking through the camera you can



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

select the camera and move it as you would any other object.

The real benefits of cameras will only become apparent when you start working with animation(more about animation later.)

You will notice that scene movement operates slightly differently while looking through a cam-era. This is because the camera viewpoint is initially in 'fly' mode. For further details see next sec-tion.

15.6 Navigation ModesThere are various navigation modes which reflect how the scene moves:-

• Examine• Fly• Walk• Static

Normally you will work in the default examine mode. However, when you create a new camera,looking through that camera puts you in to fly mode.

15.7 Selecting and Moving ObjectsThe left mouse button is used for selection in two ways:-

• Click with the left mouse button to select the foremost object at that point• Press the left mouse button at a point drag out a selection rectangle, then release the button.

Every object which overlaps the selection rectangle (regardless of whether it is obscured by other objects) is selected.

It can be quite tricky to select objects which are end-on in orthogonal views and have no thick-ness. To make life easier, it is suggested that you ordinarily use thickness and use zooming tomake thin, end-on objects bigger.) You can change the thickness of an object at any point byselecting the object then modifying the wall type and thickness properties. To view the proper-ties of an object, make sure the properties window is displayed using View->Properties.

15.7.1 Multiple SelectionIf you hold down the shift key while selecting, subsequent objects will be added to the selection,so that you can choose more than one object at a time.

15.7.2 Movement AxesNotionally, there are always three axes, located at the origin which never move. X is to the right,Z is into the screen and Y is up. Upon selecting an object you will see a grid appear. The purposeof this grid (particularly in a perspective view) is to show the two (or one) axes through which anobject will move when you drag it. There is no intuitive way to move an object through threeaxes simultaneously using one mouse, hence you are limited to at most two axes at any time.

You can also use the arrow keys to move a selected object about the currently selected plane.

Depending on your current viewpoint there are up to six options available to you to specifymovement. Refer to the Edit->Plane / Axis sub-menu for full details.

15.8 FoldingFolding an object is done entirely within the 3D window. Fold angles are absolute: it is very easyto say that a given panel should be folded to a given angle (indeed when you come to the sec-tion on animation, it is very easy to also say at which point in time.)

Various mechanisms for folding exist: you can type in an absolute angle, press a button to fold



Folding

KASEMAKE

to a given angle, or drag a slider to change a fold angle dynamically.

If you select more than one panel at a time, each panel is folded at the same time.

Before starting a discussion on the mechanics of performing folds, it is necessary for you to havesome understanding of the way the system models folding:

Each component of your drawing has a notional base panel (which will probably lie on theground) - which is the panel you clicked on to select the component while entering the 3D.

This panel has various panels attached to it, which the system deems to be 'children' of the basepanel. It you select any of these 'child' panels and perform a fold then the crease you are actuallyfolding is the crease between the 'child' panel and the base, 'parent', panel. Going further, the'child' panel may have 'children' of its own. When you select any panel, folding is always betweenthe 'panel' and the panels 'parent'. While the description is particularly abstruse, you will find thismechanism is quite straightforward when you try it.

Folding commands are available through the 3D Folding toolbar or the Fold menu which aredetailed in the Fold Commands section on page 17-1.

It is also possible to specify a fold angle through the properties window. Select an object, showthe properties window View->Properties, then type the angle into the Fold Angle field.

Folding Slider

There is also a slider which permits values in the range 0 to 359 degrees. Simply drag the sliderto set the fold angle of any selected panels.

15.9 Object PropertiesEvery object in a 3D scene has properties which you can examine by selecting the object thenlooking in the properties window. If this window is not open, open it by choosing View->Prop-erties.

To change a property simply edit the property in the properties window. In particular, you canmodify the material and opacity of an object.

If you select more than one object, the window will display all properties which are commonbetween the objects. However, since the property window can only show one value, if the valueis ambiguous (i.e. if the objects have different values for a particular property) then the propertywill be blank.

If you modify a property with more than one object selected, then the property will be changedfor all objects.

15.10 NotesYou can annotate a scene by adding notes to it. The notes are saved along with your scene, sothat you can discuss the scene with a colleague etc. at various stages of generating your finishedpresentation.

The Notes window is displayed using the View->Notes command. The Notes window is avail-able for both a 3D and a 2D drawing so that you can have threaded discussions. You can alsoattach notes to objects within the scene which are visible within the scene.

15.11 Worked Example of Folding Fefco Style 0422On your system you will have an 0422.CMF, or parameterised FEFCO 0422 tray.

Select Parametrics->Run

Select file Fefco\0422.Cmf



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

On screen you will now have the generic 0422 complete with dimensions.

You are now ready to begin the folding process. Select Fold Box... from the Draw menu andset the values in the dialog box to be as shown.

We have set the colours to correspond with those in the original. Now select OK.

Place the cursor in the middle of the tray base and press the left mouse button. The crease linessurrounding this panel will now highlight. All the remaining panels will also highlight to showthat each panel has been identified.

To begin the fold process, click the right mouse button within the drawing area and selectCreate 3D view from the resulting popup.

Now the screen changes to show the 3D menus and view. The perspective view of the box isdisplayed by default. The design can be folded and manipulated using the 3D View commands.Try rotating by different angles in different axes.

16 Extrude

Extruding is the process of transforming the cross section of an object into a solid 3D object, byperforming a parallel projection and joining all of the sides. The resulting solid object can bedisplayed and manipulated in the 3D View and exported as an object for insertion into other 3Dscenes.

Command Extrude

Menu Draw > Extrude




Extrude

KASEMAKE

You can define single or multiple profiles to be extruded into solid 3D objects.

Before activating the command, draw the 2D cross section of each of the object(s). Use the cutground to draw the perimeter of each cross section. An example is given below.

To extrude a shape, activate this command. The Extrusion Options dialog now appears:-

Extrusion Distance

This is the depth of the extruded shape. Scroll the existing value or type a new value directly.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Colour

Define the colour to use for the extruded shape. Click on the arrow to display the palette ofpredefined colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 78.

Click on OK to confirm the settings and continue.

You will now be prompted to identify the first profile. Click near to an element which forms partof the profile. The profile will now be traced automatically. Each identified element is redrawn inthe selection colour to illustrate the identified profile.

You will now be prompted (EXTRUDE) RB options to proceed. There are now several alternativeways to proceed, some of which involve the commands available through the right hand mousebutton. To access these commands, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within thedrawing area to display a pop up menu.

Proceed in one of the following ways :-

•If you wish to identify further profiles using the current options, simply mark a point to identify the next profile. Repeat until all the required profiles have been identified.

•If you wish to identify further profiles, with different settings, click the right hand mouse button to reveal the pop up menu and choose Options. The Extrusion Options dialog will now be displayed again. Set the alternative options and identify the next profile. Repeat until all the required profiles have been identified.

•If a profile is identified incorrectly, you can use Reset from the right hand pop up menu to deselect the incorrect profile and allow you to identify a new one.

Finally, choose Create 3D View from the right hand pop up menu, to display the resulting solidobject(s). The 3D View window is now displayed, showing the extruded object(s).



Extrude

KASEMAKE

For the given example, you should get a result like the image below.

Save the object so that you can re-import it later. Full 3D functionality is available for you tomanipulate the extruded object as required.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

17 Extrude Multi

This command follows the same principles as the Extrude command but allows you to definemultiple cross sections to be incorporated into the final solid 3D object. The depth of each sectionof the extruded shape is determined by marking positions along a vertical line to determine whereeach cross section starts.

Before activating the command, draw the 2D cross section of each of the objects. Use the cutground to draw the perimeter of each cross section. Also draw the vertical line from which toidentify the positioning and extruded depth of each cross section.

To extrude multiple shapes, activate this command. The Extrusion Options dialog now appears:-

Extrusion Distance

This is the depth of the extruded shape and is determined by the combination of individuallyextruded cross sections so cannot be set here.

Colour

Define the colour to use for the extruded shape. Click on the arrow to display the palette ofpredefined colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 78.

Click on OK to confirm the settings and continue.

You will now be prompted to Mark Cross-section Position on line. This is the point from wherethe next cross section will be extruded. Mark the position using any of the available drawingmodes.

You are now asked to Identify Cross-section. Click near to an element which forms part of thecross section. The cross section will now be traced automatically. Each identified element isredrawn in the selection colour to illustrate the identified profile.

Repeat the above steps of marking a position and marking a cross section until all the requiredcross sections have been identified.

Next, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within the drawing area to display a pop upmenu of available options.

If a profile has been identified incorrectly, you can use Reset to deselect the incorrect profile andallow you to identify a new one.

If the profile is correct, choose Create 3D View to display the resulting solid object. The 3D Viewwindow is now displayed, showing the extruded object.

18 Lathe

Lathing is the process of transforming one half of a 2D cross section into a solid 3D object byturning (in the woodwork sense) around an axis.

Command Extrude Multi

Menu Draw > Extrude Multi...


Command Lathe

Menu Draw > Lathe




Lathe

KASEMAKE

The resulting solid object can then be displayed and manipulated in the 3D View and exported asan object for insertion into other 3D scenes.

Multiple cross sections can also be identified to be turned around an axis, resulting in solid 3Dobjects.

Before activating the command, draw the 2D cross section of each of the objects. For each crosssection, first draw a crease line to indicate the axis of revolution of the lathed shape. The creasedoes not have to be vertical. Then draw the cross section of the object, using a cut ground toeither side of the crease line.

An example is now shown:-.

Activate this command. The Lathe Options dialog now appears with the following options :-



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

Rotation Angle

This is the angle through which to turn the 2D cross section around its crease line to producethe 3D object. Scroll the existing value or type a new value directly.

Subdivisions

Set the number of subdivisions. This determines how many copies of the profile are to bemade within the given rotation angle and controls how smooth the result is. Scroll the existingvalue or type a new value directly.

Rotation Axis Ground

Set the ground that the crease line which is to be used as the rotation axis, is drawn in. Clickon the ground combo and select the ground from the drop down list.

Outside Colour

Define the colour to use for the 3D object. Click on the arrow to display the palette ofpredefined colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 78.

Once the options are correct, click on OK to confirm the settings and continue or choose Cancelto abort the command.

You will now be prompted to identify the first cross section. Click near to an element which formspart of the cross section. The cross section profile will now be traced automatically. Eachidentified element is redrawn in the selection colour to illustrate the identified profile.

You will now be prompted (LATHE) RB options to proceed. There are now several alternative waysto proceed, some of which involve the commands available through the right hand mousebutton. To access these commands, click the right hand mouse button anywhere within thedrawing area to display a pop up menu.

Proceed in one of the following ways :-

•If you wish to identify further cross sections using the current options, simply mark a point to identify the next cross section. Repeat until all the required cross sections have been identified.

•If you wish to identify further cross sections, with different settings, click the right hand mouse button to reveal the pop up menu and choose Options. The Lathe Options dialog will now be displayed again. Set the alternative options and identify the next cross section. Repeat until all the required cross sections have been identified.

•If a cross section is identified incorrectly, you can use Reset from the right hand pop up menu to deselect the incorrect cross section and allow you to identify a new one.

Finally, choose Create 3D View from the right hand pop up menu, to display the resulting solidobject(s). The 3D View window is now displayed, showing the lathed object(s).

You can duplicate the object, put textures on it, and use it like any folded object.

For the example object, the result would look like the image below.



Lathe

KASEMAKE

.

Save the object so that you can re-import it into a scene later.

Full 3D functionality is available for you to manipulate the resulting object as required.



4 - Draw Commands

KASEMAKE

19 Fill Element

The Fill Element command will fill a closed path. The closed path can be made up of arcs orlines. Before activating this command you need to select the elements to fill using any of theavailable selection methods.

Choose Fill Element from the Draw menu. The Color dialog will now be displayed. You needto pick the colour to use to fill the selected boundary. Simply click on one of the available colours.

Alternatively, you can customise your own colour. Click on Define Custom Colours>> to openup the customise section of the dialog. By varying the values for colour and hue, you candetermine your own colour.

Finally click on OK to select the chosen colour. KASEMAKE will now automatically fill the givenshape with this colour. The elements which define the fill boundary will also be placed into agroup.

20 Remove Fill From Element

The Remove Fill From Element command will remove any fill applied to a selected group.

Before activating this command you need to select the group of filled elements using any of theavailable selection methods.

Choose Remove Fill From Element from the Draw menu. KASEMAKE will now remove anyfilled colour from the selected group of elements.

Command Fill Element

Menu Draw > Fill Element

Toolbar Not available

Command Remove Fill From Element

Menu Draw > Remove Fill From Element

Toolbar Not available



KASEMAKE

5 - Drawing ModesKASEMAKE incorporates Drawing Modes to make the task of designing items faster andmore accurate. The Drawing Modes enhance the way the cursor performs on screen. TheDrawing Modes are accessed in the following ways:-

• Through the Mode Menu located in the Menu Bar at the head of the screen.

• From the keyboard by typing the shortcut characters which activate commands in the drop down menus

• By selecting from the Mode Tool Bar which is brought to the screen by pressing the Mode button in the Standard Tool Bar or by selecting it from the list of Toolbars displayed for the View->Customise->Toolbars command.

By using different Modes the placing of items on screen becomes easier and the result totallypredictable. The items being placed may be a drawing element, line or arc, or a previouslystored component like a lock or hand hold.

To remove the Mode Tool Bar from the screen either click on the Mode button in the MainTool Bar to deactivate it or switch it off using the Views->Customise->Toolbarscommand and clear the Mode option.

Henceforth when discussing selecting a mode, we will assume that the selection is madefrom either the Mode Tool Bar or from the Mode drop down menu, entirely at the discretionof you, the user.

1 Freehand Drawing Mode

Freehand is the name we have given to the most basic drawing mode. Items are drawn orplaced with visual accuracy only. When using Freehand, where you place the cursor onscreen is where you draw to or from.

Freehand is the default drawing mode when KASEMAKE is first started up. It is alsoinvoked as a default by many of the system commands as they are activated. E.g. when Eraseis selected the system always selects Freehand. Similarly, when a New command is giventhe system will always select Freehand.

2 Lock To End Point Drawing Mode

Lock mode finds existing endpoints, therefore it is only available when there are items in thedrawing list to which other items can be locked.

Command Freehand Drawing Mode

Menu Mode->Freehand (Alt M F)

Toolbar Button: Mode Toolbar

Keys F9

Command Lock To End Point

Menu Mode->Lock To End Point (Alt M L)


Keys F10


Release 8.0Page 5-1

5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

All drawing items have endpoints, lines, arcs etc. Frequently, when designing an item you willwant to draw from the end of an item already on the screen. To do this with ease and completeaccuracy Lock Mode should be engaged.

Lock will lock to the nearest end point on the screen. When using it you should ensure that noother point is closer to the cursor on screen than the one to which you want to draw. To helpyou to locate the point correctly a snap cursor is displayed which moves to the nearest end pointto the cursor as the cursor moves.

As an example of the use of Lock mode we will create a flap for a box by drawing three cutlines. We now want to attach a crease line to the ends of two of the cut lines already drawn. Inboth of the following examples the outline of the flap is already drawn.

In the first example, the cursor is placed at points A and B and a line is drawn in Freehand. Inthe second example the cursor is placed in exactly the same place but the line is now drawn withLock engaged.

In the first example the line is left suspended in mid air.

In the second, Lock has overridden the cursor position and found points P1 and P4 andadopted these as the start and end points of the line.

2.1 Lock Drawing Mode in a Command FileIf Lock is used for drawing when a Command File is set to Record then not only will the itemadopt the same position as the item it is locked to it will also adopt the Parametric Pointgenerated within the Command File. In the preceding examples, the last line would be definedParametrically as being drawn between newly defined points P5 and P6. In the second example,because Lock was used the line would be defined as being drawn between existing points P1and P4.

Release 8.0Page 5-2


Snap To Midpoint Drawing Mode

KASEMAKE

As well as simply drawing with Lock, files can be loaded with Lock mode overriding foraccuracy of positioning. Similarly, Command Files can be placed using Call and Entity withLock mode.

Lock in a Command File is only available when there are items in the drawing list to which otheritems can be Locked.

3 Snap To Midpoint Drawing Mode

Snap To Midpoint is a drawing mode used to locate a point at the midpoint of an existingelement. It is engaged by either selecting from the Modes drop down menu or from the Snap ToMidpoint button within the Modes Tool Bar.

If you are drawing between two lines and use Snap To Midpoint the procedure is as follows:

Select Line and engage Snap To Midpoint. A snap cursor appears to help you to locate thecorrect point. This moves to the nearest mid point to the cursor as the cursor moves.

Move the cursor near to the first line from which you want to draw and mark a point by pressingthe left mouse button. As you move the cursor away from the marked line the line that you arecurrently creating will have its start point adjusted to the midpoint of the chosen line and will beseen to grow.

Now identify the endpoint of the new line by moving the cursor near to the line that you wantto draw to and pressing the left mouse button. The new line will be drawn in the current groundcolour with its end point adjusted to the midpoint of the chosen line.

If you now Zoom In on either end point of the newly defined line, you will see that it lies exactlyat the midpoint of the line which was “snapped to” and that there is no break between thelines.

Snap To Midpoint should snap equally well to any drawing object on screen, be it line or arcetc.

4 Snap Along Drawing Mode

Snap Along is a drawing mode used to locate a point anywhere along an existing element. Itis engaged by either selecting from the Modes drop down menu or from the Snap Along buttonincorporated in the Modes Tool Bar.

To draw a line between two lines using Snap Along the procedure is as follows:

Select Line and engage Snap Along. A snap cursor is displayed alongside the existing cursor .The snap cursor moves along the nearest element to the cursor, as the cursor is moved, toillustrate its snap points.

Command Snap To Midpoint

Menu Mode->Snap To Midpoint (Alt M M)


Keys F12

Command Snap Along

Menu Mode->Snap Along (Alt M S)

Toolbar Button Mode Toolbar

Keys F11


Release 8.0Page 5-3

5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

Move the cursor to the point on the first line from which you want to draw and mark that pointby pressing the left mouse button. The cursor position will be adjusted to the nearest point onthe chosen line to provide the start point for the new line. As you move the cursor away fromthe marked line the line that you are currently creating will be seen to grow from the adjustedpoint.

Move the cursor on screen to the second line to which you want to draw. Place the cursor closeto the point on this line to which you want to draw and press the left mouse button. The newline will now appear on screen with its end point adjusted to the nearest point on the chosenline to the given cursor position.

If you now Zoom In to either of the new lines end points, you will see that they join perfectly tothe chosen lines, there is no break between them.

Snap Along should snap equally well to any drawing object on screen, be it line or arc etc.

5 Snap To Grid Drawing Mode

Within the KASEMAKE system, on screen construction can be assisted by the use of Grids, i.e.rectangular patterns of lines and dots.

Snap to Grid can only be engaged when a grid is defined and on display.

When Snap to Grid is invoked all other drawing modes are overridden and you can only drawto and from the on screen grid points or grid intersections. A snap cursor is displayed alongsidethe drawing cursor to illustrate the nearest grid point available to draw to.

6 Snap To Arc Centre Drawing Mode

Snap to Arc Centre mode adjusts the cursor position to that of the nearest arc centre point.

On the KASEMAKE system arc centres are invisible but do exist as reference points in thedrawing. To find them when drawing a line or other drawing element simply select Snap toArc Centre as your drawing mode. A snap cursor will now appear to illustrate the nearest arccentre to the cursor at any given cursor position.

Move the cursor to the approximate position of the arc centre and press the left mouse button.The cursor position will automatically be adjusted to that of the arc centre and the line will beginto rubber band from the adjusted point.

Command Snap To Grid

Menu Mode->Snap To Grid (Alt M G)


Command Snap To Arc Centre

Menu Mode->Snap To Grid (Alt M A)


Release 8.0Page 5-4


Snap To Intersection Drawing Mode

KASEMAKE

7 Snap To Intersection Drawing Mode

Snap to Intersection mode adjusts the cursor position to that of the nearest intersectionpoint. This can be the intersection of two lines, a line and an arc, or two arcs. A snap cursor isprovided to illustrate the nearest intersection point to the cursor, as the cursor moves.

Move the cursor to the approximate position of the required intersection and press the leftmouse button. The cursor position will automatically be adjusted to that of the nearestintersection point and the line will begin to rubber band from the adjusted point.

8 Snap Quad Point Drawing Mode

Snap Quad Point mode adjusts the cursor position to that of the nearest arc quadrant point. i.e.the points corresponding to the 0, 90, 180 and 270 degree positions of a circle.

Upon activating this mode, a snap cursor will appear to illustrate the nearest quad point to thecursor for any given cursor position.

Move the cursor to the approximate position of the quad point required and press the leftmouse button. The cursor position will automatically be adjusted to that of the quad point.

9 Auto Snap Mode

Auto Snap mode allows the user to engage a chosen combination of snap modessimultaneously. Before Auto Snap Mode can be activated, you need to ensure that at least oneAuto Snap Mode has been selected. Refer to “Auto Snap Properties...” on page 13 for a fullexplanation of defining Auto Snap mode.

Engage the Auto Snap mode. A snap cursor will now appear in conjunction with the standardcursor. The snap cursor illustrates which snap points are available as the cursor moves aroundthe drawing. The snap points available are dependent upon the Auto Snap Modes selected withthe “Auto Snap Properties...” command, details of which are on page 13.

To select a point, move the cursor near to it and click with the left mouse button. The cursorposition is automatically adjusted to the nearest snap point and the current drawing element,command, etc., adopts the adjusted point.

Command Snap To Intersection

Menu Mode->Snap To Intersection (Alt M I)


Command Snap Quad Point

Menu Mode->Snap Quad Point (Alt M Q)


Command Auto Snap Drawing Mode

Menu Mode->Auto Snap Drawing Mode



Release 8.0Page 5-5

5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

10 Coordinate Drawing Mode

Coordinate is a drawing mode used to locate a drawing item by specifying the exactcoordinate to draw to. It is engaged by either selecting from the Modes drop down menu orfrom the Modes Tool bar.

All items stored in the KASEMAKE drawing list are stored as coordinates. Each coordinate hasan X and a Y component. The coordinates are stored to an accuracy of 3 decimal places.

At the centre of the computer’s world is the coordinate 0,0 (X=0, Y=0). This is illustrated onscreen by Red Cross Hairs.

Above is a diagram which shows the KASEMAKE screen set to be 100 units across with theCoordinate (0, 0) at the centre of the screen. You can achieve this by starting a New drawing,maximising it and then selecting the Window command from the Views drop down menu.There are 3 radio buttons which allow the centre of the window to be defined in different ways.Select Centre Point and set the size of the window to be 100. Now select OK.

Command Coordinate Drawing Mode

Menu Mode->Coordinate Drawing Mode(Alt M C)


Release 8.0Page 5-6


Relative 1 Drawing Mode

KASEMAKE

You will now be prompted for the window centre. At this stage you should select CoordinateMode. The Coordinates Dialog Bar now appears.

If you have selected Coordinates from the Mode tool bar you will notice that FreehandMode has also remained highlighted. This indicates that Coordinates and Freehand aretotally interchangeable. If the cursor is in the Drawing area and you press the mouse button theitem will be placed or drawn on screen at the position marked. However, if you place the cursorin the co-ordinate dialog bar and type in first the X, then the Y coordinates followed by OK thepoint will be entered at the given coordinate.

To illustrate this try the following. With the window set as above:

• Select the Line command and Coordinate Mode.

The system prompts you to start the line.

• Place the cursor in the coordinate dialog bar and set the coordinate to 0 for both X and Y. Now select OK.

• The system now prompts you to end the line. Move the cursor, on screen, to the approximate position A on the diagram and press the left mouse button. A line is drawn from (0, 0) to the Freehand point A.

Now repeat this exercise to the points B, C and D. Transpose the start and end Mode. Nowtry the same exercise but begin and end lines in coordinate Mode, starting at (0,0) andending at (10,10).

Coordinate Mode is most often used for placing items held on file at known co-ordinates inthe computer’s world.

Coordinate Mode can be used to draw to and from points that are off screen and isinterchangeable with other drawing modes. You can start an item in Coords and end it inLock to End Point mode etc.

11 Relative 1 Drawing Mode

KASEMAKE has three relative coordinate drawing modes. The first of these is Relative 1.Using this command you can place the beginning or end of an element at a screen positionrelative to any other point already contained in the drawing and displayed on screen.

The command is called either from the Mode drop down menu or from the Relative 1 buttonin the Mode Tool Bar.

On selecting this command, the on screen cursor changes. Instead of being a simple cross haircursor, the cross hairs are still present but the characters REF 1 are also displayed as a reminderthat you are drawing in a relative mode.

RELATIVE 1 SCREEN CURSOR

Command Relative To Another Point

Menu Mode->Relative 1 (Alt M 1)


REF 1


Release 8.0Page 5-7

5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

As Relative mode means exactly what it says, that you are going to work relative to anotherpoint on the drawing, the system is waiting for you to identify the point relative to which youwant to begin. Having moved the cursor next to the point and pressed the left mouse buttonthe Relative 1 dialog box is presented, as shown below.

At the head of the dialog box are 9 buttons, arranged like a compass. On each button is anarrow which indicates the approximate direction from the existing point on screen that youwant to move in to place the relative point.

• If you want to define a point as being simply Above, Below, Left or Right of another point then select the appropriate arrow and one edit field will be displayed beneath the but-tons. This is where you type the distance at which the point will be placed. Choose the Up arrow and the field headed ABOVE B BY will be shown. Select the right arrow and the field RIGHT OF B BY is shown etc.

The letter B is shown in the dialog to differentiate between the point being placed and thepoint being used as the reference. A is the new point and B is the reference point, the pointalready on the screen.

• Now, simply enter the Relative distance followed by OK and the point will be positioned.

• In the case of drawing a line, the system will then ask you to mark the end of the line. Using the Relative 1 cursor identify the point Relative to which you want the end to be placed, put the cursor next to it and press the right mouse button. Again the dialog box appears. Select the direction, fill in the distance and follow up with OK. You will now have a line on the screen, the ends of which were defined Relative to other points on the drawing.

Relative will only engage when there are points in the drawing that can be drawn Relativeto.

A more complex relationship is where you want to place a new point approximately North Eastor South West of a point on the screen. This is achieved by telling the point that it is both rightof and above another point or left and below etc..

When defining a point relative to another using two directions the system always defines thehorizontal relationship first, Left of or Right of, and the vertical relationship second, Above orBelow.

• By selecting the diagonal arrow that most closely resembles the direction of travel then the two fields beneath will be headed accordingly, RIGHT OF B BY and ABOVE B BY etc.

• Fill in the offsets then press OK. The point will be positioned accordingly.

Release 8.0Page 5-8


Relative 2 Drawing Mode

KASEMAKE

The simplest relationship is the ABS definition. This is an abbreviation for ABSOLUTE and meansthat the new point will take the same definition or position as the point which you are workingrelative to.

If you wish to define more than one point relative to the given reference point, you can set thechained option, the dialog box will then remain displayed between each point definition as theoriginal reference point will automatically be chosen.

11.1 Relative 1 In A Command FileWhen the Relative 1 command is used as a command file is recorded, the relative definitionsare incorporated directly into the command file. Each point drawn using relative will bedescribed in the command file as being above, below, left of or right of another point alreadydefined in the file.

Relative 1 can also accept the direct input of Variables from a Variable Table. When drawing,the point can be described as being left of another point by the distance L, or above anotherpoint by the distance W. To achieve this a variable table must be active at the time of drawing.

When the command file which incorporates items drawn using Relative 1 with Variables isexamined the point definitions can be seen to incorporate the Variable values:-

e.g. P4 is [left of P3 by L, above P3 by W]

12 Relative 2 Drawing Mode

The Relative 2 mode is provided for drawing relative to two existing points. In other words,Relative 2 mode enables you to define point ‘A’, relative to two other points,’B’ and ‘C’.

When drawing using Relative 2 mode you can position any drawing point, beginning or endof a line or arc etc., relative to two other points already in the drawing and currently displayedon the screen. The first relative point establishes the point’s horizontal position, or its Xcoordinate within the drawing area. The second relative point establishes the vertical position ofthe point, or its Y coordinate within the drawing area.

In the following example we will use Relative 2 to draw the line from P3 to P4.

• First we will assume that the first 3 points are correctly drawn and that we want to complete a rectangular flap by drawing a line to P4.

Command Relative To 2 Other Points

Menu Mode->Relative To 2 Other Points (Alt M 2)



Release 8.0Page 5-9

5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

We begin the line by selecting the Line command and engaging Lock To Endpointmode. We use Lock To EndPoint to begin the line at P3. Now engage Relative 2mode.

The system will now allow you to mark the end point of the line in 2 steps. The first stepis to identify reference point B which gives left to right positioning of the new point. Thesecond step is to identify reference point C which gives up and down positioning of thenew point.

• First place the cursor near to the first reference point, P3 and press the left mouse button. Next place the cursor near to the second reference point P1 and press the left mouse button. The following dialog box will appear.

Within this dialog are 5 buttons each of which describe the positioning of point A relativeto points B and C. In the chosen example, we want the new point P4 to be directly aboveP3 and directly right of P1. The first button on the dialog caters for this definition. Selectit and the end of the line will appear in the required place.

When designing, it is equally likely that you will wish to draw to a point that is relative totwo others but not square to them. For example, if you want to work 5 mm above onepoint and 30 mm to the right of another, select the button from the dialog which mostclosely represents the intended direction. Once selected the corresponding edit fields willappear for you to enter the relative distances.

• To define P4 in a different way, select point 3 and point 1 as the references but when the dia-log appears, select the third direction button located on the top line. Both arrows point diag-



Relative Endpoint

KASEMAKE

onally up and right. This means that you want point A to be right of B and above C. Apply the numbers in the example below and you will get the following result:-

As with Relative 1, Relative 2 will accept variables providing a variable file is open anda command file is currently recording. The relative definitions will be saved in thecommand file as part of the point definitions.

e.g. P4 is [right of P3, above P1]

P4 is [right of P3 by L, above P1 by W]

13 Relative Endpoint

Relative Endpoint is the third relative coordinate drawing mode. With this mode you identifyan end point of a line to work relative to, then a distance along this line to move.

Engage the Relative Endpoint drawing mode. The cursor changes to a reference cursor,labelled REFP. A snap cursor is also displayed to illustrate the nearest available endpoint to thecursor.

First you need to identify the line whose end point you wish to work relative to. Ensure that thesnap cursor is at the correct end of the required line before marking a point near to it.KASEMAKE will now draw the identified line in the selection colour to confirm your choice.The end point you are working relative to is also labelled, P.

The Relative Point dialog is now displayed as shown:-

Command Relative Endpoint Drawing Mode

Menu Mode->Relative Endpoint




5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

Set the distance to move along the line using the arrow keys to scroll the current value or typinga new value. A negative number can be specified to move the given distance away from theelement.

Click on OK to continue. The cursor will now move to the calculated point and this will beadopted as the current position.

14 Between 2 Points

Between 2 Points mode allows the user to choose a point midway between any 2 pointswithin the current design.

Select the Between 2 Points mode. The standard cursor is displayed with the label BET2 toshow this mode is engaged. In addition a snap cursor is displayed, as this mode automaticallyidentifies the nearest End, Mid or Arc Centre snap point to the current cursor position.

Choose the first snap point. Move the cursor near to the required point and click with the leftmouse button. A marker is now drawn at the chosen snap point and it is labelled 1 to show thatit is the first point.

Now select a second snap point. Again, move the cursor near to the required snap point andclick with the left mouse button to choose it.

The cursor position is now automatically adjusted to the point midway between the two givensnap points and the current drawing element, command, etc., adopts the calculated midpoint.

15 Snap To Construct Line Intersect

Snap To Construct Line Intersect mode allows the user to draw between intersections ofconstruct lines.

Select the Snap To Construct Line Intersect mode. In addition to the standard drawingcursor, a snap cursor is displayed. This automatically identifies the nearest construct lineintersection snap point to the current cursor position.

Choose an appropriate snap point by moving the cursor near to the required construct lineintersection point and clicking with the left mouse button to choose it.

The cursor position is now automatically adjusted to the construct line intersection point and thecurrent drawing element, command, etc., adopts this intersection point.

Command Between 2 Points Drawing Mode

Menu Mode->Between 2 Points Drawing Mode


Command Snap To Construct Line Intersect Drawing Mode

Menu Mode->Snap To Construct Line Intersect Drawing Mode




Orthogonal

KASEMAKE

16 Orthogonal

Orthogonal mode is used in conjunction with some of the drawing commands to produceorthogonal i.e. horizontal or vertical elements.

If this mode is engaged, the cursor position will be adjusted as follows:-

• if the distance between the previous point and the cursor position is nearer to an horizontal line than a vertical line, the cursor position is adjusted to the same Y coordinate as the previ-ous point resulting in an horizontal line

• if the distance between the previous point and the cursor position is nearer to a vertical line than an horizontal line, the cursor position is adjusted to the same X coordinate as the previ-ous point to give a vertical line

Refer to individual command definitions to see if a command works in conjunction withOrthogonal mode. Examples are lines, polygons, angle arcs.

17 Joined

Joined mode is used in conjunction with line commands. It enables you to build up a sequenceof connected lines. When this mode is engaged, the system automatically adopts the end pointof the previously defined line as the start point of the next line, so after defining the initial startpoint of the line sequence, only end points are required.

18 Auto Snap Properties...

Auto Snap Properties... is used to define the modes which the Auto Snap mode utilises. See“Auto Snap Mode” on page 5.

Activate this mode. The Auto Snap Modes dialog is now displayed as shown:-

Command Orthogonal

Menu Mode->Orthogonal(Alt M O)


Command Joined

Menu Mode->Joined(Alt M J)


Command Auto Snap Properties...

Menu Mode->Auto Snap Properties...(Alt M O)




5 - Drawing Modes

KASEMAKE

The dialog contains two lists. On the left is a list of available modes which can be added to AutoSnap’s list of modes. On the right is a list of Selected modes, i.e. those modes which Auto Snapis currently using.

To move between the lists, first click on the mode you wish to move. This will now be selected asconfirmation. Now click on the appropriate button to move it. Choose the >> key to movefrom the Available list to the Selected list . Choose the << key to move from the Selected list tothe Available list .

The chosen mode will now be moved. Click on OK to make the changes to the Auto Snap’s listof modes. Choose Cancel to abandon any changes made.



KASEMAKE

6 - Arrange Commands

1 Group

The Group command as its name suggests, allows you to take a set of elements and makethem into a group. The group will then be treated as a single element.

Before activating this command, you should first identify the elements to group using one ofthe available selection methods.

Activating this command converts any selected elements into a single group.

2 Ungroup

The Ungroup command allows you to take a group and convert it back into individualelements.

Before activating this command, you should first identify the group using one of the availableselection methods.

Activating this command converts the selected group into the individual elements which it ismade up from.

3 Ungroup All

The ungroup all command allows you to ungroup all groups within the drawing, convertingthem back into individual elements.

There is no need to use the Select command before you activate this command as the wholedrawing is automatically converted.

4 Unclone

The Unclone command allows you to take a clone and convert it back into agroup.

Command Group

Menu Arrange > Group


Command Ungroup

Menu Arrange > Ungroup


Command Ungroup All

Menu Arrange > UngroupAll


Command Unclone

Menu Arrange > Unclone



Release 8.0Page 6-1


KASEMAKE

Before activating this command, you should first identify the clone using one of the availableselection methods.

Activating this command converts the selected clone into the group which it was made up from.

5 Unclone All

The Unclone All command allows you to convert all clones within the drawing, back into thegroups they were derived from.

There is no need to use the Select command before you activate this command as the wholedrawing is automatically converted.

6 Explode

The Arrange->Explode command allows you to take a complex element such as a bezier curveor truetype text and break it down into simpler elements i.e. individual lines or arcs. Where arcsare chosen, you can also control how smooth the resulting arcs are.

For the majority of elements e.g. bezier curves, cubic splines, how they are exploded isdetermined by the options applied when they were created. Simply select the element, thenactivate this command. The chosen element will be exploded into lines or arcs as previously set.

Please refer to “Curve Generation” on page 4-28 for details of how to set these options.

Truetype Text OnlyFor truetype text, you can determine whether to use lines or arcs through the Explodecommand.

First select the truetype text element(s) using any of the select commands. Activate the Explodecommand. The following dialog is now displayed:-

Determine whether you want the selected element(s) to be exploded into lines or arcs by clickingon the corresponding radio button.

Command Unclone All

Menu Arrange > Unclone All


Command Explode

Menu Arrange > Explode


Release 8.0Page 6-2


Set Inside/Outside View

KASEMAKE

Where arcs are chosen, drag the slider to determine how smooth the resulting outline is.

Finally click on OK. The selected truetype text elements will now be replaced by a representationof their outline.

7 Set Inside/Outside View

The Set Inside/Outside View command allows you to toggle the view of the design as youare looking at it.

This command effectively resets the view setting of the current design. If the system is displayingthe inside view of the current design i.e. Inside is displayed in the status bar, activating thiscommand will toggle this value to Outside and the design will then be considered to be viewedfrom the outside. No change is made to the design itself.

If the system is displaying the Outside view currently then activating this command will informthe system that you now wish to consider this view as the inside of the design.

A shortcut to this command is now available through the appropriate indicator in the status bar.Simply double click on the indicator to confirm the change of view. See “Inside / Outside” onpage 1-4.

8 Align Elements

The Align Elements command will attempt to align the selected elements at the requestededge(s) or centre coordinate. The edges of the last element selected are used to reposition theother selected elements, so it does not move.

Before activating this command, ensure that the elements are selected using any of the availableselection methods. Ensure that the element you wish to align with is the final one selected.

Activate this command. The Align dialog is displayed as follows:-

Command Inside / Outside View

Menu Arrange->Inside / Outside View

Shortcuts Status Bar

Command Align Elements

Menu Arrange > Align Elements



Release 8.0Page 6-3


KASEMAKE

This consists of a list of choices for alignment each with a corresponding check box to enablethem to be switched on and off as required. In addition there is a preview area, labelled Effectwhich is used to illustrate the effect of enabling / disabling the individual alignment positions.

The alignments affecting the horizontal positioning of the selected elements are displayed alongthe top of the effect area. Those corresponding to the vertical positioning of the selectedelements are displayed down the left hand side of the effect area.

Click in a check box to enable / disable the corresponding alignment. The effect area is updatedeach time you change one of the alignment settings to show the resulting effect.

Once you have identified the alignments to apply, you have three choices:-

• OK - accept the settings and reposition the elements accordingly.• Cancel - abandon the command without changing anything• Preview - preview the effect of the chosen settings on the selected elements. This causes the

design to update but is only temporary.

9 Align To Grid

The Align To Grid command will attempt to align any selected elements with the current grid.If no grid is set, this command will not be accessible. However, the grid does not have to bevisible for this command to be used.

Before activating this command you should ensure that you have selected the elements you wishto align enclosing them with a selection box using any of the available selection methods.

Activate this command. The bottom left corner of the selection box is adjusted to the nearestgrid point. The selected elements are then adjusted relative to this corner point.

Command Align To Grid

Menu Arrange > Align To Grid


Release 8.0Page 6-4


Align To Angle

KASEMAKE

10 Align To Angle

The Align To Angle command will attempt to align any selected elements at an anglespecified by two points.

Before activating this command you should ensure that you have selected the elements you wishto align enclosing them with a selection box using any of the available selection methods.

Activate this command. You will be prompted for the first point on the selected elements. Thedrawing mode automatically changes to Snap to Endpoint to enable you to choose an endpointof one of the selected elements. Click close to the endpoint you wish to use. This will be used toreposition the selected elements.

Next you will be prompted to mark a second point on the selected elements. Again, you will bein Snap to Endpoint mode. Click close to the endpoint you wish to use. This point together withthe first point will be used to align the selected elements.

Now you are prompted to mark the first point on the target item. This point will identify the newposition of the first point identified on the selected elements. The selected elements rubber bandas you move the cursor to help you to determine the correct position. Again, Snap to Endpoint isautomatically enabled. Choose the new position for the selected elements by clicking close tothe required point.

The selected elements will now move to this new position. The first point will now be fixed andthe selected elements will be drawn rubber banded rotating about this point to enable you todetermine the angle to align to.

You are prompted to mark the second point on the target items. Mark a point which will beused to align the second point given on the selected items and will dictate the angle of theselected elements. Once the point is identified the elements are drawn in their original ground atthe new position and angle.

Command Align To Angle

Menu Arrange > Align To Angle



Release 8.0Page 6-5

KASEMAKE


Release 8.0Page 6-6


KASEMAKE

7 - Parametrics Commands

1 Run

The Run command is used to open parametric command files or .CMF files.

Activating this command displays the Run dialog box which is similar to the Open dialog boxused for File->Open.

• Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the required command file directly into the filename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now appear. Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of defining the file name with this dialog box.

• Next, set the parametric options as follows:-

• Show Points - Click on this check box if you require all points in the parametric design to be labelled

• Auto Zoom - Click on this check box if you wish the parametric design to be zoomed to fit the drawing area once it has been run in

• Interactive - Click on this check box if you wish to run the design interactively, allowing you to step through the command file one command at a time, making changes if required

• Finally, click on Run to open the named parametric file and any associated variable file. One of two views will now be displayed:-

• The entire command file is shown, with its associated geometry generated using the current variable settings

• One or more preview(s) of the chosen command file and a subset of variables associated with this command file is shown

Where the preview and variables view is displayed, you can alter the given variables beforerunning in the design. In addition to altering these variables, you are provided withcommands to:-

• Save any changes to the variables• View the complete variable table with full set of associated commands• Cancel the command file by choosing Close. For full details of Save refer to Variables on page 7-9.

To run in the command file from this preview screen, make any adjustments to the mainvariables as appropriate, then press Run to run the command file at the displayed settings.Any geometry associated with this command file will now be generated with thecorresponding variable settings applied.

In either case, a new window will automatically be opened to display the requested design, ifthis is the first time that this design has been run in.

Command Run

Menu Parametrics > Run

Toolbar Button: Parametrics Toolbar

Keys Ctrl + R


Release 8.0Page 7-1


KASEMAKE

If you do not require this preview screen you should clear any prompts associated with thevariables for this command files.

Refer to Commands Available With The Variable Table - Show Prompts on page 7-12 forfurther details.

1.1 Running a Parametric Design Non-InteractivelyIf you have left the interactive option in the Run dialog unset, the entire design will be run inautomatically when you click on Run and no further user interaction is required.

The variable table will be opened automatically, when the design is run in. You may now resizeyour design by altering variables within the variable table then choosing Run again to view theeffect.

1.2 Running a Parametric Design InteractivelyIf you have set the interactive option in the Run dialog, the design can be run in one commandat a time under your control. Running in this mode allows you to edit the contents of thecommand file.

After clicking on Run, a new window will be opened ready to display the design and theinteractive dialog will appear.

The interactive dialog consists of a scrollable viewing area, where the contents of the parametriccommand file are displayed and a row of buttons giving access to the interactive commandswhich can be applied to the command file.

When the interactive dialog is opened the first command in the command file is processed anddisplayed at the top of the viewing area. This is the current command. The results of running thiscommand are displayed in the selection colour where appropriate, indicating that this is thecommand currently being processed. If the option to show labels has been set, any labelsrelating to the current command are also displayed in the selection colour.

The dialog can be moved and resized as per any window to allow more of the command file tobe displayed.

You can scroll forwards or backwards through the command file to view the commanddefinitions. However, you cannot scroll backwards past the current command to view anycommands which are defined earlier in the command file.

The commands can be edited directly. Click on the row of text to be changed. A box will appearto show that this is now the active row. Click again to display the text cursor. You can now usethe arrow keys to move about the text string retyping or deleting characters as required.Alternatively, you can click on the text string and holding down the left mouse button, drag thecursor to select the text to be changed. On releasing the mouse button, the selected text can bereplaced by typing the new text.

You can also double click within the text string to display a scrolling list of variables availablewhich can be entered into the text string directly or by double clicking on the name of thevariable within the scrolling list.

The interactive commands can be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button. Theirfunction will now be described:-

Release 8.0Page 7-2


Run

KASEMAKE

1.2.1 Redo

The redo command will rerun the current command i.e. the first command displayed in theinteractive window. This is useful when you have made an alteration to the current command asit allows you to view the effect of the change. Redo can be used as many times as required toget the desired result. The resulting elements and labels where appropriate, will always beshown in the selection colour, indicating that the command is still being worked on.

1.2.2 Prev

Prev is used to reverse the effect of the last command removing any resulting elements andlabels. The previous command in the file is displayed, if any, and any resulting elements andlabels for this command are displayed in the selection colour to indicate that this is now thecurrent command.

1.2.3 Next

Next is used to finalise the current command by processing it for the last time and displayingthe resulting elements and labels in their final colour to show that the command has beencompleted. Next will then run in the next command in the file, if any, displaying its resultingelements and labels in the selection colour to indicate that this is the new current command.

1.2.4 Def Point

Def Point allows you to remove a point definition where a new definition is required. Thepoint definition comprises the string between square brackets.

Def Point is only accessible when the active row of the command file contains a pointdefinition. First, click on the row containing the incorrect point definition. A box will appeararound the row to show that it is now the active row. Click on Def Point. The point definitionwill be removed from between the square brackets. Click between the brackets to get the textcursor. Now type the new point definition. Finally, use Redo to view the effect of the newdefinition.

If you remove a point definition in error, use Next or Fast to skip over the current command.The point definition will be restored to its former value.

1.2.5 Fast

The Fast command terminates interaction between the user and the command file. Theremaining commands in the command file are processed non-interactively, starting with thecurrent command.

1.2.6 Delete

The Delete command removes the current command from the command file. If the currentcommand contains point definitions, these can not be removed completely since subsequentgeometry may depend upon these points. Instead, one point definition command for each pointdefinition contained in the deleted command, is inserted into the command file in its place.

1.2.7 Reverse

The Reverse command applies to lines only and allows you to swap the start and enddefinitions for the line. It works as a toggle, so selecting Reverse twice reverts to the originaldefinitions.


Release 8.0Page 7-3


KASEMAKE

2 Run Insert...

The Run Insert... command allows one or more parametric command files or .CMF files to beinserted into the current design. The geometry resulting from each inserted parametric fileremains live and can be resized independently. Multiple versions of the same parametric file canbe inserted.

Activating this command displays the Run dialog box as used by the Parametrics->Runcommand but it does not have any options available.

First set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click onthe name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field.Alternatively, type the name of the required command file directly into the filename entry field.Any description and preview which exist for this design will now appear. Refer to “File OpenDialog” on page 2-8 for further details of defining the file name with this dialog box.

Finally, click on Run to close the dialog and accept the given name.

You will now be prompted to identify an origin for the command file. This will be the first pointin the command file from which all the geometry will be generated. Specify a suitable originusing any of the available drawing modes.

The named parametric file will now be executed a command at a time and any associatedvariable file will be opened. The resulting geometry is generated using the current variablesettings and placed into a single group.

You may now resize your design by first selecting the group containing the resulting geometrythen altering variables with the Variables command which will automatically display the variabletable associated with the selected parametric group. Finally, choose Run again to view theeffect of any changes on the selected group.

3 Record

The Record command allows you to create parametric command files or .CMF files.

Activate this command to begin recording a parametric design. The Record dialog box which issimilar to the Save As dialog box used for File->Save As, now appears.

Set the drive and directory to save the new design in. A list of existing command files will appear.Enter a name for the new command file in the filename entry field. Any description required forthis design should be entered into the command file description field. Refer to “File Save AsDialog” on page 2-8 for further details of specifying the command file name using this dialog.

If you require all points in the parametric design to be labelled as they are entered, click on theshow points check box.

If you are recording to an existing file and wish the existing part of the design to be zoomed tofit the drawing area once it has been run in, click on the auto zoom check box.

Finally, click on Record to open a new window ready to create the new design. The windowtitle will indicate that you are recording to the newly named file.

Command Run Insert...

Menu Parametrics > Run Insert...


Command Record

Menu Parametrics > Record


Release 8.0Page 7-4


Record To Copy

KASEMAKE

If the command file already exists you will now be prompted to this effect. If you wish to appendto the existing file click on Yes. The contents of the command file will then be run in anddisplayed in the new window. Click on No if you have given the filename in error. The Recorddialog will then appear for you to re-enter the parametric file name to use.

You may now create your parametric design by drawing in the normal way. Any points will belabelled as you draw, if you have selected this option. Commands which reflect the drawingsequence you are using to build up the design, will automatically be added to the newly openedcommand file. These commands will be built up using absolute world values. Any parametricrelationship can be defined after the design is completed using the Parametrics->Set Pointand Parametrics->Set Element commands. These commands automatically update existingcommands in the current command file to reflect any parametric relationship set whilst usingthem.

If you wish to define the parametric relationship between elements as you draw them, you mayneed to define some variables first using the Parametrics->Variables command. Refer to“Variables” on page 7-8 for further details. The variables can then be used directly in commandssuch as angle line, parallel etc. as you build up the design. Alternatively, you can draw using oneof the relative modes in conjunction with any variables to define the parametric relationshipbetween points as you build up the design.

Other command files can be loaded as parts into the new command file using theParametrics->Call and Parametrics->Entity command. Refer to “Call” on page 7-20 and“Entity” on page 7-21 for further details.

Once you have completed your design, you should use the Parametrics->Close command tostop recording to the command file and save its contents. See “Close” on page 7-6.

4 Record To Copy

The Record To Copy command allows you to take a copy of a parametric command file andopen the copy ready for recording.

Activate this command. The Open dialog box will appear.

Set the drive and directory to search. A list of available command files will appear. Click on thename of the command file that you wish to take a copy of. The name will be copied to thefilename entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the command file to copy directly into thefilename entry field. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now appear.Refer to “File Save As Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of defining the file name with thisdialog box.

Click on Open to accept the filename. The Record dialog box which is similar to the Save Asdialog box used for File->Save As, now appears.

Set the drive and directory to save the copy to. A list of existing command files will appear. Entera name for the new command file in the filename entry field. Any description required for thisdesign should be entered into the command file description field. Refer to “File Save AsDialog” on page 2-8 for further details of specifying the command file name using this dialog.

If you require all points in the parametric design to be labelled as they are entered, click on theshow points check box.

If you wish the copied command file to be zoomed to fit the drawing area once it has been runin, click on the auto zoom check box.

Command Record To Copy

Menu Parametrics > Record To Copy



Release 8.0Page 7-5


KASEMAKE

Finally, click on Record to open a new window and run in the command file which you aretaking a copy of. The window title will indicate that you are recording to the newly named file.

If the command file already exists you will be prompted for another filename. The Recorddialog will reappear for you to enter an alternative file name to use.

Once the command file being copied has been run in, it will automatically zoom to fill thedrawing area if you have set this option. You may now add to the parametric design by drawingin the normal way without affecting the original. Refer to “Record” on page 7-4 for furtherdetails of adding to the command file.

Any points will be labelled as you draw, if you have selected this option.

Once you have completed your design, you should use the Parametrics->Close command tostop recording to the new command file and to save its contents. See “Close” which follows.

5 Close

The Close command is only accessible when you are recording a parametric command file. Itallows you to complete the recording of a parametric design.

Activating this command causes the KASEMAKE system to finish recording the currentparametric command file and save its contents. Henceforth, any drawn elements will appear inthe drawing only. The window title will change to show that the system is no longer recordingthe drawing sequence.

6 Variables

The variables command is only accessible when either a command file has been run in, in whichcase the variable table is opened simultaneously, or when a new command file is beingrecorded, in which case a new blank variable table is opened.

Activating this command opens a new window which displays one of two views:-

• a partial view - consisting of the main variables associated with the current design, together with any preview(s) of the current command file. If multiple previews are available they are overlaid and displayed as tabbed pages typically comprising a standard 2D view, a 3D view and a fully dimensioned detail view. Only a limited set of command buttons is available when the partial variable table is on display.

• the entire variable table with a complete set of command buttons

The view which appears depends upon whether a prompt has been associated with any of thevariables for the current design. Where this is the case the partial view will be displayed. If noprompts are associated the entire table will be displayed.

In either case, the variables window can be moved and resized in the normal way. Also, the titleof the window displays the filename of the current variable table.

Command Close

Menu Parametrics > Close


Command Variables

Menu Parametrics > Variables


Release 8.0Page 7-6


Variables

KASEMAKE

The variables are divided into up to five parts, variable, expression, value, database field andprompt. Only the prompt and value fields are displayed for the partial view. To access the entirevariable table toggle the Show all variables command button. The view will then changeshowing all the existing variables and their definitions as follows:-

• variable - the name by which the variable will be accessed. It can contain any of the stand-ard characters

• expression - the formula to use to evaluate the variable’s value. Refer to “Defining Variable Expressions” on page 7-7 for an explanation of how to derive a valid expression

• value - the variable’s value which is automatically calculated from the expression

• database field – which field in the database to retrieve the variables value from where the command file is run from the database. Also, which field in the database to update where a command file is saved as a completed design and a border is associated with it

• prompt – the prompt to display for the variable when the partial view is displayed. The par-tial view will only be displayed where one or more prompts has been defined

• choice - alternative values which the variable can take. They are available when the partial view is used as a drop down so are only applicable to variables which have prompts defined.

The variable and expression fields are editable. Click in the cell to be edited. If you click withinthe current text string, the text cursor will appear ready for you to insert and delete characters asrequired. If you click beyond the text string or in an empty cell a box will appear around the cellto show that it is the active cell, you can now type and the current cell contents will be removedand replaced with the new characters. Pressing enter after altering an expression field will causethe variable’s value to be recalculated and redisplayed as appropriate.

The value field displays the variables current value, the result of evaluating its associatedexpression. A value which is highlighted in red, normally indicates an invalid expression.

The Tab key can be used to move between fields, as can the arrow keys.

6.1 Defining Variable ExpressionsA variable expression can be one of the following:-

• a numerical value • a variable - which is already defined or which will subsequently be defined• a mathematical formula - comprising a combination of numbers or variables with math-

ematical operators and functions• a condition statement - comprising a condition part and two expression parts

6.1.1 Defining Mathematical Formulae

The formulae acceptable for variable expressions follow basic mathematical rules. Expressionsare evaluated from left to right. Any expressions contained within brackets are evaluated first.

Integer and real numbers and variables can be used within the formula.

Operators available are:-

• ( ) - brackets to simplify expressions and give their contents highest precedence within the calculation

• +,-,*,/ - the basic mathematical operators, where * and / have higher precedence than + and -

• MOD - gives the integer remainder resulting from dividing any two expressions


Release 8.0Page 7-7


KASEMAKE

• DIV - forces an integer division, truncating the result where necessary to give an integer result

Functions available are:-

• SIN - gives the SINE of any angle given in degrees• COS - gives the COSINE of any angle given in degrees• TAN - gives the TANGENT of any angle given in degrees• ABS - ignores the sign of the given expression• SQR - calculates the SQUARE of the given expression• SQRT - calculates the SQUARE ROOT of the given expression• TRUNC - truncates the given expression ignoring any decimal part• ROUND - rounds up the given expression to the nearest integer where the decimal part is

0.5 or greater. Rounds down the given expression to the nearest integer where the decimal part is less than 0.5

• ARCSIN - gives the ARCSINE of the given value in degrees• ARCCOS - gives the ARCCOSINE of the given value in degrees• ARCTAN - gives the ARCTANGENT of the given value in degrees.

After brackets these functions are given highest precedence.

6.1.2 Condition Statements

Condition statements are complex expressions consisting of a condition part and twoexpressions. They take the form:-

IF (condition part) THEN (expression1) ELSE (expression2)

Only one of the expressions will be used to determine the variables final value. If the conditionpart evaluates to TRUE the first expression following THEN will be used. If the condition partevaluates to FALSE the second expression following ELSE will be used.

The condition part should make use of comparison operators to combine expressions giving aTRUE or FALSE result.

Available comparison operators are:-

• < less than• > greater than• = equal to• <= less than or equal to• >= greater than or equal to• <> not equal to

Example conditional expressions are:-

• (L < 100) Evaluates to TRUE if L is less than 100, otherwise evaluates to FALSE

• (W >= (L/2))Evaluates to TRUE if W is greater than or equal to L/2, otherwise evaluates to FALSE

• (D <> 3) Evaluates to TRUE if D is not equal to 3, otherwise evaluates to FALSE

Expressions are evaluated from left to right as before, highest precedence first. Brackets shouldbe used to increase precedence and ensure the correct result.

Logical operators can be used to combine conditional expressions, where multiple conditions arerequired. The logical operators available are:-

Release 8.0Page 7-8


Variables

KASEMAKE

• AND - both conditional expressions must evaluate to TRUE for the combined condition to evaluate to TRUE. If either or both conditional expressions evaluate to FALSE, the overall result will be FALSE

• OR - If either or both conditional expressions evaluate to TRUE, the overall result will evaluate to TRUE. If both conditional expressions evaluate to FALSE the combined condition will eval-uate to FALSE.

Expressions are evaluated from left to right as before. The AND operator has higher precedencethan the OR operator. Brackets can be used to alter precedence.

Examples of combined condition statements are:-

• L < 100) AND (W >= L/2) - Evaluates to TRUE if both expressions evaluate to TRUE, otherwise evaluates to FALSE

• (L >= 90) AND ((A = 3) OR (A = 5)) -The OR expression will be evaluated first because of the brackets. The result will then be used in the AND expression to give the final value.

Example condition statements would be :-

IF (A > 2) THEN W1 ELSE W2

IF ((L >= 90) AND ((A = 3) OR (A = 5))) THEN (W-A)/2 ELSE W/2

6.2 Commands Available With The Variable TableA row of buttons above the variable table display area provide access to the set of commandsavailable for manipulation of the variable table. Their function will now be described.

6.2.1 Append

Append allows you to add the contents of another variable table to the end of the currentvariable table. This is useful when you are working with similar parametric designs.

Click on Append. The Open dialog will appear. Set the drive and directory to search. A list ofavailable variable files will appear.

Click on the name of the required file. The name will be copied to the filename entry field.Alternatively, type the name of the required file directly into the filename entry field. Refer to“File Open Dialog” on page 2-8 for further details of specifying a filename with this dialog.

Click on Open. The contents of the file will now be merged with the current variable table. Ifthe file contains variables which are already defined in the current variable table, thesevariables will be ignored, leaving the current table intact. Any previously undefined variableswill be added at the end of the current variable table.

6.2.2 Save

This function allows you to save any changes made to the current variable table. The changeswill be saved to the file whose name is displayed in the window title. Variable tables normallytake the name of the design to which they apply, but use a .VAR extension.

Click on Save. The contents of the variable table will be saved using the filename displayedin the window title.


Release 8.0Page 7-9


KASEMAKE

6.2.3 Save As

This function allows you to save the contents of the variable table to a named file. Thiscommand is useful for making a copy of a variable table for use with a similar design.Alternatively, this command can be used as a way of renaming the variable table.

Click on Save As. The file Save As dialog will now appear.

Set the drive and directory to save the new variable table in. A list of existing variable table fileswill appear.

Enter a name for the new variable table in the filename entry field. See also “File OpenDialog” on page 2-8 for details of specifying a filename with this dialog.

Finally, click on Save As to save the variable table. The window title will change to indicatethat you are working with the newly created variable table.

6.2.4 Clear

The Clear command allows you to remove all the variables from the current variable table.

Click on Clear. You will now be required to confirm that you wish to remove all the variables.

Click on Yes. The variables will be removed leaving a blank table.

Click on No to leave the variable table unchanged.

6.2.5 Delete Field

Delete Field removes the contents of the current field, either variable field or expression field.

Click in the field to be deleted, to make it the current field. A box will appear around the fieldto show that it is now current.

Click on Delete Field to remove its contents.

6.2.6 Delete Variable

Delete Variable is similar to Delete Field, but will remove the current variable entry from thevariable table, shuffling up any following entries where necessary. This command will not beaccessible if no variable is current.

First ensure that the variable to be deleted is the current one.

Click in either the variable field or the expression field of the required variable, to make it thecurrent variable entry. A box will appear around the field, or the text cursor will appear toshow that it is now current.

Click on Delete Variable to remove the entire variable and shuffle up any following entries.

6.2.7 Insert Variable

This command allows you to insert a new variable entry into the current variable table. It usesthe current variable to determine the correct insertion position, so may not be accessible if novariable is current.



Variables

KASEMAKE

Before you can choose this command you need to set the current variable to where you wish tomake the insertion.

Click on the row where you wish to insert your new variable entry. You can click in either thevariable or the expression field. A box will appear around the field where you click, or the textcursor will appear, indicating it is now the current variable.

Click on Insert Variable. The current variable entry and any entries which follow it, will nowbe shuffled down to make room for the new variable. The text cursor will automatically bepositioned in the variable field ready for you to type the new variables details.

6.2.8 Cut

Cut will copy the contents of the current field, or any selected text to the clipboard, removingthem from the variable table. The clipboard contents can subsequently be pasted back into thevariable table if required.

Click in the required field to make it current. Alternatively, click on the entry number in the leftmost column to select an entire variable entry. Clicking on the column headings will select theentire column. Once you have selected the items to cut, activate this command. The selecteditems will be removed from the variable table and placed in the Windows clipboard.

6.2.9 Copy

Copy will copy the contents of the current field, or any selected text to the clipboard, as perCut. However, copy does not remove the selected items from the variable table. The clipboardcontents can subsequently be pasted back into the variable table if a further copy is required.This is useful for copying complicated expressions such as condition statements which aresimilar.

Select the items to copy as per Cut above.

Activate the Copy command. The selected items will be copied to the Windows clipboard.

6.2.10 Paste

Paste will copy the contents of the clipboard to the current field.

Click in the field where you wish the clipboard items to be pasted. A box will appear to confirmthat this is the current field. Activate this command. The clipboard items will be copied to thecurrent field.

6.2.11 Recalc

The Recalc command forces all the variables in the table to be recalculated. This ensures thatthe values displayed in the value field are correct. Where forward references have been used, orlots of changes have been made, the value displayed may not have been updated to the finalvalue.

Click on Recalc. The value fields will now be updated to show their correct value.




KASEMAKE

6.2.12 Run

This command is a shortcut to the Parametrics->Run command. Activating this commandcauses the current parametric design to be regenerated using the latest variable values. Thevariable window is closed automatically, when this command is issued.

6.2.13 Run Zoom

This command is similar to the Run command. However, the resulting parametric design will bezoomed to fill the drawing area after the geometry is regenerated.

6.2.14 Show Associated Database Fields

This command toggles display of the database field column of the variable table. The databasefield is used to show which field in the database corresponds to this variable if any. When thisparametric is run from any database record the settings for any associated variables will beretrieved from the database.

6.2.15 Show Prompts

This command toggles the display of the prompts column for the variable table. Prompts areused to determine which variables, if any, appear in the partial view of the variable table. Wherea prompt exists, this variable will appear in the partial view together with the current value ofthe corresponding variable. If you always want to view the entire variable table, ensure theprompts field is clear.

6.2.16 Show All Variables

This command toggles display of the partial view of a variable table with the entire table. Ifprompts are associated with the variables for the current command file, a partial view of thevariable table will always be displayed both when the command file is run and when theVariable command is issued. The Show All Variables command allows you to access theentire table where prompts have been associated with one or more variables.

6.2.17 Close

This command closes the current variable table.

On activating this command, if you have made changes to the variable table, but have not savedthem, you will be prompted to this effect. Click on Yes to save the changes. Click on No toabandon any changes. The window displaying the variable table will close upon your response,or upon activating this command if their are no changes to save.

6.2.18 Print

This command allows you to print the contents of the current variable table.

On activating this command, the Print dialog appears showing the current printer details. Youcan now change the printer details and optionally print to file or direct to the printer. Click onOK to print the variable details.

See “Print dialog box” on page 2-19 for further details.



Variables

KASEMAKE

6.2.19 Print Preview

This command allows you to preview the contents of the variable table as it will appear ifprinted.

See also, “Print Preview” on page 2-19.

6.2.20 Choices

This command toggles the display of the choices column for the variable table. Choices arealternative values which a variable can take but are only applicable to variables which haveprompts defined.

If there are any choices defined for a variable they appear in the partial view of the variable tableas a drop down list for that variable. Simply select from the drop down list to substitute analternative value before running the parameteric to see the effect of the alternative setting.

6.2.21 Comments

A comment can be added to help to identify the variable. The comment is displayed like atooltip when the cursor is moved over the variable name field to help to clarify its use. Click inthe comments field for a particular variable and type a suitable comment for it. Toggle thedisplay of the comments column with this command.

6.2.22 Trigonometry Calculator

The trigonometry calculator is provided to help simplify the defining of variables which requiretrigonometric expressions.

First click in a variables expression field for the command to become available. Click on theTrigonometry Calculator command button. The Trigonometry dialog will now be displayed asshown:-




KASEMAKE

You can either enter an expression for one angle and one length or two lengths. Click on a checkbox corresponding to the angle / length you wish to specify. The expression field now becomesaccessible. Type in a suitable expression or value for this angle / length. Repeat for the secondexpression.

Once two expressions have been defined, click on Calculate. The remaining expression fields andall the value fields will now be automatically completed.

You can now choose any of the expressions to enter into your variable table. Click on the Selectbutton corresponding to the expression you wish to use. A Choose Field dialog is now displayedcontaining the expression and value for the chosen angle / length..

Click on Use Expr. if you wish to use the expression associated with this angle / length. ChooseUse Result if you wish to use the value associated with the angle / length. In both cases, thedialog will close and the expression / value will be copied to the current variables expression fieldin the variable table. The value field is updated to display the variables current value, the result ofevaluating its associated expression.



Variables

KASEMAKE

6.3 Additional Commands for Working With Different MaterialsThe remaining commands provided by the variable table relate to defining alternative sets ofvalues to allow for different materials. This removes the need for lots of condition statements todetermine the correct values to use with each material.

There are four steps to enable working with alternative values :-

1 Use the Add New Values command to identify a material for which al-ternative values are to be defined. This adds a new column for the as-sociated values.

2 Define the alternative values for each material added, by typing themin the new column for appropriate variables.

3 Set the link variable i.e. the variable whose value will determine whichset of values to choose with the Specify Values Link command.

4 Activate the link, by blanking out any current definition for the varia-ble(s) you wish to apply the linked values to. (Expression field).

The commands available are as follows:-

6.3.1 View Defined Values

This command toggles the display of the additional values column(s) on and off. Simply click onit and the variable table will update to show / remove any additional column(s).

6.3.2 Add New Values

This command adds an empty column for you to define values for the given material. Click onthis command. The New Value dialog is now displayed. Type the name of the variable for whichyou want to define alternative values. The variable chosen must already be defined. If not itshould be added. Click on OK to add an empty column, labelled with the given variable name.

This command is self-repeating allowing you to add more columns if required. Click on Cancel ifyou do not wish to add any further columns.

6.3.3 Delete Value

This command deletes a column of values. Click on this command. The Delete Value dialog isnow displayed. Set the name of the material for which you wish to remove the alternativevalues, by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the list of materials defined. Click on OK todelete the associated column. Confirmation is required as this command will remove valuespermanently.

Click on Cancel if you do not wish to delete any further columns.

6.3.4 Edit Value

This command reassigns the material associated with a given column of values. Click on thiscommand. The Change Value dialog is now displayed. Set the name of the material which youwish to change, by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the list of materials defined. Clickon Change to display the New Value dialog. Type the name of the material you wish to associatewith the former materials column of values. Click on OK to update the column, labelled with thenewly assigned variable name.




KASEMAKE

Click on Cancel if you do not wish to reassign the column.

6.3.5 Link Variable

This command identifies the variable which links the new values to the current variables. Click onthis command. The Set New Link Variable dialog is now displayed. Type the name of the variable,the value of which will control the column of values to use. Click on OK to make the link.

The chosen variable will be displayed in green to show that it is a link variable and the columncorresponding to the current value of this variable will also be displayed in green to show thatthis is the active column of values.

6.3.6 Show Active Value

This command toggles the display of columns of values for given materials if any. Simply click onit to toggle its effect.

If selected, it will remove any columns apart from the active column where applicable.

If deselected, all additional columns will be displayed.

6.3.7 Example of Working with Different Materials

In the following example, alternative values for length L are defined at L1, L2, and L3 usingcondition statements. These will result in four different solutions depending upon the value of Athe material used. Possible values for A are defined as E, B, C and BC:-

This can be simplified by following the four steps outlined above :-

Add values E, B, C and BC with the Add New Values command to produce the correspondingcolumns.

Type the corresponding values of L3 to use for each material value.



Set Point1

KASEMAKE

Specify the link variable as A, the material currently used. In the example shown this has thevalue BC. The variable A and the column of values applicable to BC appears in green to showthe link is made.

Activate the link, by blanking out the current definition of L3 its value will automatically beupdated to that defined for BC as this is the active link.

7 Set Point1

The Set Point1 command allows you to define a point in terms of another point, in the sameway as the relative 1 drawing mode. It is useful for establishing parametric relationships. It canbe used to define relationships for new points or to edit relationships currently defined forexisting points.

Set Point1 automatically updates the current command file with any new point definition so it isnot necessary to be recording a command file when you activate Set Point1.

Activating the Parametrics->Set Point1 command causes the word SET to appear with the crosshair cursor. Click near to the point you wish to set. The identified point will be marked with an Aand the Set Point definition dialog will appear displaying the definition of the chosen point,point A.

There are four buttons displayed with the Set Point definition dialog:-

• Reset Point - Click on this if the correct point has been identified and you wish to change its definition

• Find Next - This button is accessible where one or more points coincide with the identified point. Click on this to retrieve the definition of the next coincident point

• Cancel - Click on this if you have identified the wrong point and wish to restart the Set Point command

• Edit - Choose Edit if you wish to change an existing definition by retyping the definition directly

7.1 Resetting the Chosen PointAfter choosing the Reset Point option from the Set Point definition dialog, the word REF1 willappear with the cross hair cursor indicating that you must identify the point you wish to workrelative to. You can only work relative to points with a lower index than the point you aredefining. This is because points are defined in numerical order in the command file, so youcannot define a point in terms of a point that has not yet been defined.

Command Set Point1

Menu Parametrics > Set Point1





KASEMAKE

Click near to the point that you wish to work relative to. If this is a valid point, the point willbe labelled as point B to show that you are working relative to it and the Set Point dialog willappear. If the point you identify is invalid because its index is higher than the point you aredefining the KASEMAKE system will beep and you can identify a different point.

The index of the point you are setting is displayed in the Set Point Dialog title bar asconfirmation. The Set Point dialog contains nine direction buttons and two edit fieldswhere the offset is entered. The direction button which best describes the currentrelationship between point A, the point being set and point B, the point you are workingrelative to, will be shown pressed in. According to which direction applies, one or both ofthe edit fields will appear with a text description of how point A relates to point B. Theedit field(s) will contain the current offset if the point has been set before.

Click on the required direction button. The text descriptions of the edit fields will changeappropriately. Click in the edit field or fields and type the required offset. This can be numericalor a variable or a combination of both. Double clicking in the offset field will display a scrollinglist of variables to help you to identify the offset in terms of given variables. Refer to “Relative1 Drawing Mode” on page 5-7 for further details on setting the direction and offset.

Finally, click on OK to set the new definition. The dialog will now close. The command file willbe updated with the new definition and the point will be redisplayed at its new position.

Click on Cancel to abandon any changes and leave the command file and point unchanged.

The command can be restarted whilst you are identifying the reference point, point B, byclicking in the drawing area with the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu.Drag the cursor to Reset and click again to restart the Set Point1 command.

7.2 EditChoose this option to make any changes to the current definition within the Set Point dialog.After choosing this option from the Set Point definition dialog, the blue highlight will beremoved. You can now edit the definition by first clicking on the current definition and thenretyping it as required.

Once it is correct, press the enter key to update the current definition. The point will be adjustedon screen and the definition of the next point will now be displayed.

If you wish to leave the definition unchanged simply click on Cancel to close the dialog andrestart the Set Point command.

8 Set Point2

The Set Point2 command is similar to Set Point1, but allows you to define a point in terms oftwo other points, in the same way as the relative 2 drawing mode.

Activating the Set Point2 command causes the word SET to appear with the cross hair cursor.Click near to the point you wish to set. The identified point will be marked with an A and the SetPoint definition dialog will appear displaying the definition of the chosen point, point A.

As for Set Point 1, there are four buttons displayed with the Set Point definition dialog.

Refer to “Set Point 1” on page 7-17 for an explanation of the commands associated with thesebuttons.

Command Set Point2

Menu Parametrics > Set Point2




Set Point2

KASEMAKE

8.1 Resetting the Chosen PointAfter choosing the Reset Point option from the Set Point definition dialog, the word REF1 willappear with the cross hair cursor indicating that you must identify the first point that you wishto work relative to. This point will be used to define the direction for the X value of point A. Asbefore, you can only work relative to points with a lower index than the point you are defining.

Click near to the point that you wish to work relative to. If this is a valid point, the point willbe labelled as point B to show that you are working relative to it.

If you identify an invalid point, because its index is higher than the point you are defining,the KASEMAKE system will beep and you can identify a different point.

Next you must identify the second point that you wish to work relative to. This point will beused to define the direction for the Y value of point A. As before, you can only work relativeto points with a lower index than the point you are defining. Click near to the point that youwish to work relative to. If this is a valid point, the point will be labelled as point C to showthat you are working relative to it.

If you have correctly defined points B and C, the Set Point dialog will now appear.

The index of the point you are setting is displayed in the Set Point Dialog title bar asconfirmation. The Set Point dialog contains five direction buttons and two edit fields where theoffset is entered. The direction button which best describes the current relationship betweenpoint A, the point being set and points B and C, the points you are working relative to, will beshown pressed in. According to which direction applies, the edit fields will appear with a textdescription of how point A relates to points B and C. The edit field(s) will contain the currentoffset if the point has been set before.

Click on the required direction button. The text descriptions of the edit fields will changeappropriately. Click in the edit fields in turn and type the required offset. This can be numericalor a variable or a combination of both. Refer to “Relative 2 Drawing Mode” on page 5-9 forfurther details on setting the direction and offsets.

Finally, click on OK to set the new definition. The dialog will now close. The command file willbe updated with the new definition and the point will be redisplayed at its new position.

Click on Cancel to abandon any changes and leave the command file and point unchanged.

The command can be restarted whilst you are identifying the reference points, points B and C,by clicking in the drawing area with the right hand mouse button to display the pop up menu.Drag the cursor to Reset and click again to restart the Set Point2 command.

8.2 EditChoose this option to make any changes to the current definition within the Set Point dialog.After choosing this option from the Set Point definition dialog, the blue highlight will beremoved. You can now edit the definition by first clicking on the current definition and thenretyping it as required.

Once it is correct, press the enter key to update the current definition. The point will be adjustedon screen and the definition of the next point will now be displayed.

If you wish to leave the definition unchanged simply click on Cancel to close the dialog andrestart the Set Point command.




KASEMAKE

9 Set Element

The Set Element command allows you to define a parametric relationship for an elementrather than for a point. It is normally used for setting variables onto existing elements.

Activate the Set Element command.

Click near to the element you wish to set. The identified element will be displayed in theselection colour.

Confirm that the selected element is the correct one, by clicking again within the drawingarea. The interactive dialog will now appear displaying the command definition for the chosenelement.

The KASEMAKE system automatically switches to run interactive mode when an element isidentified to be set. This results in the command file being opened and its contents being run in,up to and including the chosen elements command definition. You can now set the element bytyping in the new values and use Redo to see the effect. The command file will be updatedautomatically.

You have complete access to all the interactive commands as though you had activated Run ininteractive mode. Step through the command file one command at a time using the Nextcommand, making further changes if required. You can also rewind the command file a step ata time using the Prev command. Alternatively, use the Fast command to finish running in thedesign non-interactively, if their are no further changes to make. See “Running a ParametricDesign Interactively” on page 7-2 for further details.

Note: Where a command contains parametric point definitions, they will be given priority overparameters set with Set Element.

10 Call

The Call command allows you to create a reference to another command file from within thecurrent command file. This is useful for loading in predefined parts. Access to the part isrestricted, only the reference point is live and can be redefined.

The Call command is only available when you are recording a command file.

Activate the Call command. The Call dialog box will be displayed. This is similar to the FileOpen dialog but has extra options.

You need to select which part you want to use. Set the drive and directory to search. A listof available command files will be displayed. Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-6 forfurther details of specifying a filename with this dialog.

Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entryfield. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now be displayed.Alternatively, type the name of the required design directly into the filename entry field.

Next, set the parametric options as follows:-

Command Set Element

Menu Parametrics > Set Element


Command Call

Menu Parametrics > Call




Entity

KASEMAKE

• X Scale - the scale to apply to all x values within the part

• Y Scale - the scale to apply to all y values within the part

• Rotation - the rotation to apply to the part

• File Suffix - the suffix to append to the part name. Refer to “File Suffixing” on page 7-22 for details of using file suffices

Click on OK to set the options. The KASEMAKE system now requires you to identify thereference point to use to insert the named part. Identify the reference point using any of theavailable drawing modes.

The named part will now be displayed using the x and y scales and rotation requested. Acorresponding call command will be written to the current command file. Any variable tableused by the named part will be merged with the current variable table as the part is loaded.Where a variable has already been defined for the current design, its value will remainunchanged. Any variables required by the part and not already defined for the current design,will be added at the end of the current variable table.

11 Entity

The Entity command allows you to load an existing command file into the current commandfile. This is useful for loading in predefined parts. Unlike for Call, all the geometry for the part islive as the contents of the parts command file are copied into the current command file.

The Entity command is only available when you are recording a command file.

Activate the Entity command. The Entity dialog box will be displayed. This is similar to theFile Open dialog but has extra options.

You need to select which part you want to use. Set the drive and directory to search. A listof available command files will appear.

Click on the name of the required command file. The name will be copied to the filename entryfield. Any description and preview which exist for this design will now be displayed.Alternatively, type the name of the required design directly into the filename entry field.Referto “File Open Dialog” on page 2-6 for further details of specifying a filename with this dialog.

Next, set the parametric options as follows:-

• X Scale - the scale to apply to all x values within the part

• Y Scale - the scale to apply to all y values within the part

• File Suffix - the suffix to append to the part name. Refer to“File Suffixing” on page 7-22 for details of using file suffices.

Click on OK to set the options. The KASEMAKE system now requires you to identify thereference point to use to insert the named part. Identify the reference point using any of theavailable drawing modes.

The named part will now be displayed using the x any y scales requested. The correspondingcommand definitions will be written to the current command file. Any variable table used by thenamed part will be merged with the current variable table as the part is loaded. Where a variablehas already been defined for the current design, its value will remain unchanged. Any variablesrequired by the part and not already defined for the current design, will be added at the end ofthe current variable table.

Command Entity

Menu Parametrics > Entity





KASEMAKE

11.1 File SuffixingFile suffixing provides a means of choosing a specific part to be loaded from a family of similarparts. The family of parts should all share the same name but are differentiated between byappending a numerical suffix.

The file suffix to use to identify which part to use is then determined at the time of loading thepart. The number to use for the file suffix can be entered directly into the file suffix field.However, for a more flexible way to specify the file suffix you can use a variable. This variable canthen be defined using a condition statement, allowing you a great deal of flexibility over whichparts are to be used for any instance of the design.

11.1.1 Example

A box is to be designed which uses locking tabs. The main design comprises the main panels ofthe box. Whilst the width of the box is less than 100 mm, the flap with a single locking tabshould be used. Once the width is 100 mm or greater the flap with a double locking tab isrequired.

Two parts have been defined as:-

• END1.CMF - which represents the end constructed with a single locking tab

• END2.CMF - which represents the end constructed with a double locking tab

To create a command file which is capable of determining which part to use dependent uponthe width you will need to define a variable SUFFIX for the file suffix which is dependent uponthe box width, W, as follows:-

W 100

SUFFIXIF (W < 100) THEN 1 ELSE 2

In the main design you should add a call to the part END.CMF and set the file suffix field tovariable SUFFIX.

Running the design with the above instance of variables will result in END2.CMF, the part withdouble locking tabs being used.

12 Create Preview

The Create Preview command allows you to capture a preview of a parametric design. Thepreview will then be displayed when a filename is selected in the Run dialog, Call dialog or Entitydialog.

Run the design in and display it on screen as you require. Then activate the Create Previewcommand. A preview file with the same name as the command file but using a .CFP extensionwill now be created.

Command Create Preview

Menu Parametrics > Create Preview




Set Units...

KASEMAKE

13 Set Units...

The Set Units... command is used to convert the units a parametric is defined in. It scales theparametric appropriately taking into account the current units you are working with.

Activate this command. The Parametric Units dialog is now displayed. Select the units you wishto convert the parametrics to by clicking on the corresponding button. Choose OK to close thedialog and set the units.

The $Units variable is automatically updated in the current variable table if applicable. However,in order to apply the change of units to a parametric which has already been loaded, you willneed to run it again.

14 Top Lock Point

The Top Lock Point command is used to identify locking points on panels for designs which areto be used by the Mix and Match command.

The lock points identified with this command will be used to locate the various top panels whenthe final design is constructed. The top left hand point of each panel working from left to right,should be identified as a lock point. The first point given should be the top left hand point forthe left most panel. The last point given should be the top right hand point of the right mostpanel.

This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current commandfile in the same way as the Set Point command. Therefore, it is not available during a Record orRecord To Copy command.

Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark a point and the Set Point cursor will bedisplayed. Move near to the top left hand lock point of the left most panel and mark this point.KASEMAKE will automatically lock to the nearest point and label it ‘1’.

Repeat for each panel finishing with the top right point of the right most panel. Each point willbe labelled sequentially.

15 Bottom Lock Point

The Bottom Lock Point command is similar to the Top Lock Point command but is used toidentify locking points for bottom flaps to be located on panels used by the Mix and Matchcommand when a final design is constructed.

The bottom left hand point of each panel working from left to right, should be identified as alock point. The first point given should be the bottom left hand point for the left most panel.The last point given should be the bottom right hand point of the right most panel.

Command Set Units...

Menu Parametrics > Set Units...


Command Top Lock Point

Menu Parametrics > Top Lock Point


Command Bottom Lock Point

Menu Parametrics > Bottom Lock Point





KASEMAKE

This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current commandfile.

16 Mix And Match Sub-MenuSelect the Mix and Match option from the Parametrics Menu to access the Mix and Match Sub-Menu giving access to the different catergories of Mix and Match. All Mix And Matchcommands follow a similar method of operation but incorporate panels and flaps specific to thetype of design.

16.1 Folding Carton...

Mix and Match involves combining panels and top and bottom flaps to construct a parametricdesign. The Folding Carton... command uses the Mix & Match concept tailored specifically for acarton design. The finished parametric can be saved as a macro to be rerun and altered asappropriate.

Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish tobe available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described asMix and Match (Carton) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page2-46.

Guidelines for producing the panels and flaps can be found in the next section entitled “DefiningPanels & Flaps to use with Mix & Match” on page 7-25.

Activate this command. The Mix & Match Box Generator dialog is displayed which guides youstep by step through selecting panels and flaps to construct a final parametric design.

The information displayed for each step consists of a drawing of the currently selected panel orflap. A representation of the design so far, highlighting the panel or flap currently being workedon. A list of the variables available for the current flap or panel which can be adjustedaccordingly. A scrolling list of available panel(s) or flap(s) with the currently selected one beinghighlighted to distinguish it.

Clicking on an alternative panel or flap in the scrolling list of available panel(s) or flap(s) willcause this to be displayed as the current choice with its corresponding variables.

According to the type of box and flaps being used the number of steps taken to produce thefinal design will vary. As a guide the steps will be as follows:-

•Select the middle panels to use.

•Select the top style

•Decide whether you wish to mirror the dust flaps or not

•Decide whether you want a locking closure or not

•Select each panel to make up this top style including slit and tongue tab styles if required

•Select the bottom style

•Decide whether you wish to mirror the dust flaps or not

•Decide whether you want a locking closure or not

Command Folding Carton

Menu Parametrics > Mix & Match > Folding Carton...




Mix And Match Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

•Select each panel to make up this bottom style including slit and tongue tab styles if required

Finally, set the Save Macro File check box if you wish to save the macro you have just assembledso that it can be replayed and altered. Clear it if you do not wish to save the macro. Click onFinish to close the Mix & Match Box Generator.

If you have chosen to save the macro, a Save As dialog will be displayed allowing you to select asuitable name and location for your design. Click on Save to store the new macro .AGM file forat the chosen location for later use.

16.2 Corrugated...

Mix and Match involves combining panels and top and bottom flaps to construct a parametricdesign. The Corrugated... command uses the Mix & Match concept tailored specifically for acorrugated design. The finished parametric can be saved as a macro to be rerun and altered asappropriate.

The command works as per “Folding Carton...” on page 24but the number of steps taken toproduce the final design will vary.

Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish tobe available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described asMix and Match (Corrugated) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” onpage 2-46.

16.3 Pallet...

Mix and Match involves combining panels and top and bottom flaps to construct a parametricdesign. The Pallet... command uses the Mix & Match concept tailored specifically for acorrugated design. The finished parametric can be saved as a macro to be rerun and altered asappropriate.

The command works as per “Folding Carton...” on page 24but the number of steps taken toproduce the final design will vary.

Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish tobe available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described asMix and Match (Pallet) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page2-46.

16.4 Defining Panels & Flaps to use with Mix & Match The first step to be able to use Mix & Match is to define MAIN panels:

• Create a new PARAMETRIC called MAINn (where n is a number)

• Draw the appropriate cut and crease lines as normal.

Command Corrugated

Menu Parametrics > Mix & Match > Corrugated...


Command Pallet

Menu Parametrics > Mix & Match > Pallet...





KASEMAKE

• Variables must be defined for each panel width in the design and must follow the same nam-ing convention. i.e. the first panel width must be defined as PW1, second as PW2, and so on.

• Any variables that are to be entered when choosing the panel style must be given PROMPTS with meaningful names.

Once the design is complete, the PARAMETRIC command TOP LOCK POINT must be used. Thisshould be used when the file is closed (i.e. not RECORDING) similar to the SET POINT tool. Withthis tool selected, the top lefthand point of each panel must be clicked in order, left to right.Also lastly, the rightmost panel must have its top right panel point clicked as well. This processadds a series of definitions in the CMF file:

TOP-LOCK-POINT{

TYPE = 1,

CENTRE = P1

}

TOP-LOCK-POINT{

TYPE = 2,

CENTRE = P3

}

Similarly the PARAMETRIC command, BOTTOM LOCK POINT must be used to define the bottomleft point on all of the panels and also the rightmost panel bottom right point.

BOTTOM-LOCK-POINT{

TYPE = 1,

CENTRE = P2

}

BOTTOM-LOCK-POINT{

TYPE = 2,

CENTRE = P4

}

This is now a working PARAMETRIC that will form one of the centre panels for Mix & Match




KASEMAKE

To make a preview of this set of panels, a drawing file with the same name as the CMF file mustbe saved. Ideally this will have the main variables labelled as dimensions. e.g.:

These files (.CMF, .VAR and .AGD) must be stored in a directory called MAIN beneath theappropriate folder as specified in the file locations section of preferences. Please see “FileLocations” on page 2-46.

16.4.1 File Locations

The directory structure for Mix & Match is quite important. The folders used to access the filesneeded for each category of design should be as specified in File Locations under Preferences.For each category of design there should be a Main sub folder beneath which further folderscontaining information for flaps and panels are stored.

For each main panel PARAMETRIC that is designed there must be an equivalent folder under theMain folder, e.g. Main1, Main2, etc.

Within each of these folders there must be another two folders called TopStyle and BottomStyle.

Within the TopStyle folder there must be at least 2 files: TopStyle#1.DSC and TopStyle#1.AGD.There can be additional files of the format TopStyle#n.DSC and TopStyle#n.AGD (where n canbe any number).

Similarly within the BottomStyle folder there must be at least 2 files: BottomStyle#n.DSC andBottomStyle#n.AGD.

The purpose of these files is to identify the general style of the top or bottom flaps (e.g. A Tuck-end Top) and also which flaps make up that style (e.g. A Tuck-end Top would be made up of 2Dust Flaps and a Tuck Flap).

The Dust Flaps, Tuck Tops, etc. that each style is made up of must also be defined and must bestored under the PARTS folder in folders with sensible names, e.g. FLAPS, TUCKEND, etc. It doesnot matter what these folder names are called as long as they are referenced correctly in the.DSC files.




KASEMAKE

A typical example of the directory structure for Folding Carton designs might be:-




KASEMAKE

A typical example of the directory structure for Corrugated designs might be:-




KASEMAKE

A typical example of the directory structure for Pallet designs might be:-

16.4.2 Defining the .DSC Style Files

Conditional? [<string>]

then

<statements>

else

<statements>

end

The optional <string> is displayed in a message box, with a yes / no choice. If ‘no’ is selectedthen the first <statements> are used, otherwise the <statements> after ‘else’ are used.

When no string is specified, the question defaults to “Mirror Flaps?”

Note: The ‘?’ can be nested as follows:-

? [<string>]

then

<statements>

? [<string>]

then

statements>




KASEMAKE

else

<statements>

end

else

<statements>

end

Statements<part-prefix> [,1..9] [,X] [,Y] [,P] [,P,R]

look for all files prefixed with <part-prefix>

Examples:flap - looks for flap1, flap2... etc.

tucktop - looks for tucktop1, tucktop2... etc.

Optional Parameters1..9 - Panel number

X - mirror in X

Y - mirror in Y

P - use previously selected part, with the same variables

P,R - use previously selected part, but with different variables

U - undefine global variables

Example File:? Ask User “Mirror flaps?”

then User replied yes to “Mirror flaps?”

Ttops Choose a style from Ttops

Flaps Choose a flap

Misc Choose from Misc

Flaps, X Mirror the chosen flap

else User replied no to “Mirror flaps?”

Ttops Choose from Ttops

Flaps Choose a flap

Misc Choose from Misc

Flaps,P,R Use same flap as before, but with different variable table.

end End of ? then else statements

16.4.3 Defining the Parts to be called

The Parts are defined as per normal parametrics, but the first point defined in the part is critical.It is this point that will be attached to the appropriate Panel Point in the MAIN parametric.

The first point defined in the part will normally be the left-hand point. (This point will be insertedon the next panel point to the right if the part is mirrored horizontally).




KASEMAKE

Allowing mirroring of parts saves left and right-hand flaps (as well as top and bottom) beingdefined separately.

Each part will have its own set of variables. As with the MAIN parametrics, any variables that areto be entered when choosing the part must be given PROMPTS with meaningful names, e.g.

For each part that will need to be sized to fit to the appropriate panel in the MAIN style, theremust be a variable defined called PW. The actual variable used to control the horizontal size ofthe part must be set as PW. (e.g. in the above example, FL_PANELW is the controlling variableand is set equal to PW).

t is important to give variables unique names within each part. Variables with the same name asvariables defined in the MAIN parametric will take their value from the MAIN variable table.

16.4.4 Global Variables

Global variables have an underscore (‘_’) as the first character of the variable name. E.g._GLOBAL. Any part called which contains global variables will automaticallly have its globalvariables added to the MAIN panels variable table. The variables will then be available to allsubsequently loaded parts.

17 Run Mix Match Macro

This command allows you to run in a previously created mix & match design file. Alteringvariables as required.

Activate the command. You will now be prompted for the .AGM filename. Click on a filename topreview the macro. Choose Open to select the current macro and display the Run Mix AndMatch Macro dialog.

The main panels for the chosen macro will now be displayed together with the associatedvariables.

You can now step through each stage of the macro altering variables as you go using OK to takeyou to the next stage.

Alternatively, you can use the Run Thru command to load the macro with its current settings.

Command Run Mix & Match

Menu Parametrics > Run Mix Match Macro




MixMatch Lock Point

KASEMAKE

18 MixMatch Lock Point

The Mix Match Lock Point command is used to identify locking points on panels for designswhich are to be used by the Mix and Match command.

The lock points identified with this command will be used to locate the various top panels whenthe final design is constructed. The top left hand point of each panel working from left to right,should be identified as a lock point. The first point given should be the top left hand point forthe left most panel. The last point given should be the top right hand point of the right mostpanel.

This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current commandfile in the same way as the Set Point command. Therefore, it is not available during a Record orRecord To Copy command.

Activate the command. You will be prompted to mark a point and the Set Point cursor will bedisplayed. Move near to the top left hand lock point of the left most panel and mark this point.KASEMAKE will automatically lock to the nearest point and label it ‘1’.

Repeat for each panel finishing with the top right point of the right most panel. Each point willbe labelled sequentially.

19 Symbol Lock Point

The Symbol Lock Point command is similar to the Top Lock Point command but is used toidentify locking points for parametrics intended to be used as smart symbols. See “Symbols...”on page 10-4 for information about creating and using smart symbols.

Working from left to right, two lock points should be identified, these mark the extents of thedesign and are used to locate it when used as as a symbol. The first point given should be theleft most point of the design. The second point given should be the right most point of thedesign.

This command works on closed command files adding point definitions to the current commandfile.

20 Quick Parametrics - GeneralThe remaining Parametrics commands relate to the creation and manipulation of quickparametric (.agq) designs. These are designs which have parametric functionality controlledthrough associative dimensioning.

Quick parametrics provides a simplified approach to converting an existing drawing, .agd file,into a parameterised design.

Before creating a quick parametric design, you should ensure that any essential dimensions areplaced within your design. It is also advisable to remove any overall dimensions as this makes thedesign overdimensioned and can cause problems when it is converted to a quick parametric.

Command MixMatch Lock Point

Menu Parametrics > Mix Match Lock Point


Command Symbol Lock Point

Menu Parametrics > Symbol Lock Point





KASEMAKE

There are two stages involved in converting a drawing to a quick parametric design. First of allonce the design is completely dimensioned, you should use the Generate Guide Lines commandto generate the guide lines which are needed to relate the design elements to each other.

Secondly you should edit the dimensions using the Edit Dimension and Copy Dim. Definitioncommands to apply parametric expressions to them.

The remaining commands affect the display of quick parametric designs or provide file handlingcapabilities as detailed next.

20.1 Generate Guide Lines

The Generate Guide Lines command produces the guide lines needed to convert a drawing to aquick parametric design. Activate this command. The system will now automatically generateguide lines based on the dimensions provided.

To view the guide lines, you should use the Parametrics->Show Guide Lines command whichtoggles the display of the guide lines.

20.2 Regenerate Drawing

The Regenerate Drawing command is similar to the Run command in that it is used toregenerate a drawing applying the latest amendments to variables or the parametric expressionassociated with a dimension.

Activate this command. The design will now be resized applying the current variable values.

20.3 Edit Dimension

The Edit Dimension command allows you to define a parametric relationship between designelements by applying variable expressions to the dimensions associated with them. Then, bychanging these variables or expressions the design can be resized.

You need to select the dimension you wish to edit before activating this command. Uponactivating this command, the Dimension dialog will be displayed. You can now enter aparametric expression to be assigned to the selected dimension. The given expression will beassociated with the panel which the dimension is connected to. Any combination of variables ornumbers can be used.

Click on OK to associate the given expression and display it within the design. If you use anyvariables which aren’t already defined, you will be prompted and given the choice to add themto the current variable table. These variables can then be initialised or changed using theVariables command. Please see “Variables” on page 6.

Command Generate Guide Lines

Menu Parametrics > Generate Guide Lines


Command Regenerate Drawing

Menu Parametrics > Regenerate Drawing


Command Edit Dimension

Menu Parametrics > Edit Dimension




Quick Parametrics - General

KASEMAKE

For further information about defining valid parametric expressions please refer to “DefiningVariable Expressions” on page 7.

To display the dimensions as the parametric expression assigned to them, you should use theParametrics->Show Dimensions command which toggles the display of the dimensionsbetween parametric expressions and their current numerical values.

20.4 Copy Dim. Definition

The Copy Dim. Definition command is useful where you have two or more dimensions to whichyou wish to assign the same parametric expression. First assign the parametric expression to oneof the dimensions using the Edit Dimension command.

Activate this command. First you will be prompted Mark Reference Dimension. Identify thedimension which has the parametric expression you wish to copy already assigned to it. Clicknear to the dimension to select it.

Next you are prompted Mark Target Dimension. Identify the dimension to which you wish tocopy the parametric expression associated with the chosen dimension.

Note: You will need to use the Regenerate Drawing command to display the drawing usingthe newly defined dimension values.

20.5 Show Guide Lines

The Show Guide Lines command toggles the display of the parametric guide lines generated forthe current design.

Activate this command. The parametric guide lines will now be displayed as dashed white linesacross the design.

Alternatively, where they were already visible the guide lines will now be removed from thedisplay.

20.6 Show Parametric Dims

The Show Parametric Dims command allows you to change the display of any dimensions in thedesign. The dimensions can either be displayed showing the parametric expression associatedwith the dimension or as the actual numerical value of any parametric expression.

Activate this command. The parametric dimensions will now display the parametric expressionsassociated with the dimension.

Command Copy Dim. Definition

Menu Parametrics > Copy Dim. Definition


Command Show Guide Lines

Menu Parametrics > Show Guide Lines


Command Show Parametric Dims

Menu Parametrics > Show Parametric Dims





KASEMAKE

Alternatively, where the parametric expressions were already visible the dimensions will nowdisplay their current numerical value.

20.7 Open Quick...

The Open Quick... command allows you to open a previously saved quick parametric design(.agq) type file.

Activate this command. The Open dialog is displayed. Set the folder and select the filename ofthe required file. Alternatively type the filename of the required file directly into the File name:field. Click on Open to load the specified file and display the quick parametric on screen.

20.8 Save Quick

The Save Quick command allows you to save any changes to the current quick parametricdesign.

Activating this command will cause one of the following responses:-

• If the quick parametric design has been generated using a previously saved .agd file, KASE-MAKE will automatically save the file to a file of the same name and location but with the .agq extension to denote quick parametric.

• If the quick parametric design has previously been saved as a .agq file, KASEMAKE will automatically update this file with any changes / amendments made.

• If the quick parametric design has not previously been saved, the Save As dialog will appear allowing you to specify a file name and location for the design. Proceed as for the Save As Quick... command described next.

20.9 Save As Quick...

The Save As Quick... command allows you to save a quick parametric to a .agq file. Activate thiscommand. The Save As dialog is displayed. Select the folder and type the filename of therequired file into the File name: field. Click on Save to save the quick parametric design to thespecified file.

Command Open Quick...

Menu Parametrics > Open Quick...


Command Save Quick

Menu Parametrics > Save Quick


Command Save As Quick...

Menu Parametrics > Save As Quick...




KASEMAKE

8 - Tools Commands

1 Layout MenuThe Layout commands are used to provide a layout of one or more designs. ActivatingLayout produces a sub-menu of commands as described in the following:-

1.1 Layout…

The Layout… command is used to produce a layout of the current design, by specifying thesize of sheet on which the layout is to be produced. The KASEMAKE system will thencalculate the number of designs that can be fitted horizontally and vertically.

Activate the command. The Layout rollup will appear with the Layout page activated.

1.1.1 Layout Options

1.1.1.1 HorizontalSet the extent of the sheet horizontally using the corresponding Extent field. Set the Guttervalue, this is the gap to leave between horizontal copies.

1.1.1.2 VerticalSet the extent of the sheet vertically using the corresponding Extent field. Set the Gutter value,this is the gap to leave between vertical copies.

1.1.1.3 MarginsYou can also specify margins to be left at the edges of the sheet. Set the margins individuallyfor top, bottom, left and right edges.

1.1.1.4 InterlockingDecide whether you want the design copies to interlock. Choose from the following settings:-

•No Interlocking

•Manual Interlocking

•Automatic Interlocking

Manual Interlocking

If you choose manual interlocking you should then decide whether you wish to perform astraightforward interlock where one design is dropped into the other e.g. 0211 or to applyoffset and or rotation settings.

Use Offset Settings

Some designs interlock with better sheet usage if they are offset so that you are lining upalternative panels. Set this option if you wish to apply an offset. The offset settings aredefined in the section “Interlocking Options (1)” on page 3.

Command Layout…

Menu Tools->Layout…

Toolbar button: Tools Toolbar


Release 8.0Page 8-1

8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

Rotation

Decide whether you wish to apply a rotation. Some designs interlock with better sheet usageif the copy is rotated before it is interlocked. Set the rotation required fromthe drop down listas follows :-

•No Rotation - choose this option if no rotation is required

•Use Rotation Settings - set this option if you wish to apply the rotation settings. See “Interlocking Options (1)” on page 3 for further details.

•Try All Rotations - set this option if you wish KASEMAKE to try all possible rotations, displaying available solutions to allow you to choose which layout to use.

Automatic Interlocking

Before you can perform automatic interlocking, you need to set the following values:-

Check All Panel Points

Set this option if you wish to consider all the panel points for the current design. Clear it if youonly wish to consider the main panel points.

Automatically Select Best

Set this option if you want KASEMAKE to automatically display the best solution. Clear thisoption if you wish to be presented with all the possible solutions to choose for yourself whichone to make use of.

Click on Apply. In most cases, the design will now be laid out according to the specified settings.For Manual Interlocking where Try All Rotations is set and Automatic Interlockingwhere Automatically Select Best is not chosen, you will be required to choose the layout touse before the design is laid out. Refer to “Choosing A Layout” on page 2 for futher details.

For all cases, the resulting layout is built up of clones of the existing design which also becomesa clone. Any changes made to the master clone are then automatically reflected throughout thelayout. Refer to “Clone Edit” on page 10-8.

Interlocking options to fine tune the resulting layout are provided. These allow you to take intoaccount a minimum knife distance as well as to specify a time limit to restrict the time used forcalculating more complicated layouts. Refer to “Interlocking Options (2)” on page 5.

Choosing A Layout

If you have opted to choose the final layout either by performing Manual Interlocking withTry All Rotations set, or by performing Automatic Interlocking but not usingAutomatically Select Best, the Choose Layout... dialog will now be displayed.

This consists of a scrolling window containing a sequence of layout solutions. The most efficientsolution is displayed first. Use the right most vertical scroll bar to move between the differentlayout solutions.

Release 8.0Page 8-2


Layout Menu

KASEMAKE

Each solution is displayed as in the diagram. The details of any rotation or offset applied are givenat the head of the view. A scrolling list of properties for the corresponding layout are then given,including dimensions of the overall layout and offsets and rotations applied. The actual layout isdisplayed to the right of the property list.

A Large Preview option is available for closer examination. If accessed, the layout will be placedin its own resizeable window.

Choose OK to select the layout currently in view. This solution will then be displayed in theKASEMAKE drawing area. Choose Cancel to abandon the Layout command.

1.1.2 Interlocking Options (1)The interlocking options (1) page of the layout tabbed dialog contains the rotation and offsetsettings to apply where the use offset settings and use rotation settings options have been setfrom the main Layout or Array command page.


Release 8.0Page 8-3

8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

The first two sections labelled Horizontal Offset and Vertical Offset, define the offset settings touse. The final section labelled Rotation, defines the rotation settings to apply.

1.1.2.1 Horizontal OffsetDefine any offset to apply horizontally in one of two ways :-

•Choose Offset by clicking on the corresponding button. Then set the offset field to the value to use.

•Choose Align Panels by clicking on the corresponding button. Panels are numbered from the left across the main section of the box. They are determined from the crease lines. You can select two panels to align and the condition for alignment. In each case, set the number of the panel to align and the condition for alignment. Either the left hand edge, the centre, or the right hand edge.

1.1.2.2 Vertical OffsetDefine any offset to apply vertically in one of two ways :-

•Choose Offset by clicking on the corresponding button. Then set the offset field to the value to use.

•Choose Align Panels by clicking on the corresponding button. Define two panels to align and the condition for alignment. For each, set the number of the panel to align and the condition for alignment. Either the left hand edge, the centre, or the right hand edge.

1.1.2.3 Rotation•Set the Rotate Alternate Rows option to rotate every other row of designs before

interlocking them

Release 8.0Page 8-4


Layout Menu

KASEMAKE

•Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second row than that specified on the Layout or Array page. Define the gutter to apply to the second row.

•Set the Rotate Alternate Columns option to rotate every other column of designs before interlocking them

•Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second column than that specified on the Layout or Array page. Define the gutter to apply to the second row.

1.1.3 Interlocking Options (2)The interlocking options (2) page of the layout tabbed dialog contains the refinements which canbe made to the resulting layout.

Time limits can be set for a layout to restrict the time taken to produce more complicated layouts.You can also set a minimum knife distance to be taken into account.

1.1.3.1 Minimum Knife Distance ConstraintSet the Check Minimum Knife Constraint option if you wish to define a minimum knifedistance to take into account when laying out the design. Set the corresponding Minimum KnifeDistance field to the distance to use.

If any problems occur whilst trying to enforce the minimum distance and use the current gutteroptions, you will be prompted accordingly and possible solutions will be offered. You can thenchoose to apply these suggestions or make adjustments to the options and reapply them togenerate an alternative layout.


Release 8.0Page 8-5

8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

1.1.3.2 Time Limit OptionsFor more complicated layouts, you can set a time limit for a speedier solution. The best layout(s)calculated within the time limit will be used. Set the time limit to use in seconds.

1.1.3.3 Panel SelectionIn order for the KASEMAKE system to identify panels for the Layout / Array command you needto identify the ground being used for creases within the design.

•Crease Ground - set to the ground being used for creases

1.2 Array…

The Array… command is used to produce a layout of the current design, by specifying thenumber across and number up.

Activate the command. The Layout rollup will appear with the Array page activated.

1.2.1 HorizontalSet the number of copies required horizontally using the corresponding Number field. Set theGutter value, this is the gap to leave between horizontal copies.

1.2.2 VerticalSet the number of copies required vertically using the corresponding Number field. Set the Guttervalue, this is the gap to leave between vertical copies.

1.2.3 Interlocking For details of interlocking methods and settings please refer to the Layout command. See“Interlocking” on page 1 for further details.

Click on Apply. The design will now be laid out according to the specified settings. The layout isbuilt up of clones of the existing design which also becomes a clone. Any changes made to themaster clone are then automatically reflected throughout the layout. Refer to “Clone Edit” onpage 10-8.

Interlocking options to fine tune the resulting layout are provided. These allow you to take intoaccount a minimum knife distance as well as to restrict time spent calculating solutions for morecomplicated designs. Refer to “Interlocking Options (2)” on page 5.

Command Array…

Menu Tools->Array…

Toolbar button: Not available

Release 8.0Page 8-6


Layout Menu

KASEMAKE

1.3 Layout Wizard...

The Layout Wizard… command provides a step by step guide to producing layouts for anychosen design(s). They can be tailored to your specific requirements as the Wizard guides youthrough the different steps necessary to define particular layouts.

Within the Wizard, you can define :-

• design or designs to use

• job size and overrun

•sheet size and trims

•constraints for knife distance

•gutters and offsets

•interlocking

•rotation

•llayout algorithm to use

Although the Layout Wizard... provides instructions as it guides you through the necessarysteps to produce the required layout, we will now attempt to explain the various settings andwhat action to take at each stage.

First, activate the Layout Wizard... This can be from an empty drawing as you can specifywithin the wizard which design(s) are to be laid out.

You will now be shown an introductory page detailing what the Wizard allows you to do. Fourbuttons are also displayed:-

•Back - allows you to go back one or more steps if you wish to redefine one of the previous settings

•Next - takes you to the next step accepting the current settings

•Finish - is activated after the available layouts have been calculated. It closes the Wizard and displays the Choose Layout dialog to allow you to examine the results and select the layout to use.

•Cancel - allows you to leave the Wizard at any stage.

1.3.1 Step 1 - Sheet SizeThe first step is to define the sheet size and any margins to be left at the edges of the sheet.

Set the dimensions of the sheet to be used.

Set the margins individually for grip, top, left and right edges..

At this stage, you can also define a minimum knife distance to take into account when laying outthe design. Set the Check Minimum Knife Constraint option and the correspondingDistance field.

Command Layout Wizard…

Menu Tools->Layout Wizard…



Release 8.0Page 8-7

8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

1.3.2 Step 2 - DesignsNow you need to specify how many designs, the filename for each design you wish to layout andany overrun.

First specify how many different designs are to be used. A form for each different design is nowdisplayed in a scrolling view.

For each design to be used, you need to specify the name of the design. This can be either afinished design, .agd file, or a parametric command file, .cmf file. Choose the ... button todisplay the File Open dialog to help you to select the required file, or type the name directly.

If a parametric file is selected, a preview of the file is displayed, if one exists and a list of the mainvariables used is also displayed.

Next define how many of this design you require in the final layout.

Finally, set any overrun factor as a percentage.

Scroll to the next form and repeat the above to specify the details for each additional design inturn

1.3.3 Step 3 - Layout AlgorithmNext you need to specify which layout algorithm to use. Choose from :-

•Automatic Regular Layout - to layout 1 design specifying gutters only, all alignment and orientation permutations are considered automatically.

•Regular Layout - to layout 1 design specifying gutters, orientation and alignment as per the Layout / Array Rollup.

•Multipart Layout - to layout more than one design

Depending upon which algorithm you have selected, you will now be presented with a page ofoptions.

1.3.3.1 Automatic Regular Layout OptionsThe options for automatic regular algorithm layouts are displayed as three overlaid pages click ona tab to display the corresponding page of options as follows :-

Gutters

•Set the X Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between horizontal copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and

every alternate row.

•Define the value for the alternate x gutter.

•Set the Y Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between vertical copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and

every alternate column.

•Define the value for the alternate y gutter.

Alignment

Set the Align option if you wish to choose which points to consider to determine possiblealignment for the laid out designs.

Set the points to consider from:-

Release 8.0Page 8-8


Layout Menu

KASEMAKE

•Panel Centres Only - only the centre point of each panel will be considered

•All Panel Points - all points will be considered

•Discrete Points - discrete points a given distance apart will be considered. Set the distance to leave between points in millimetres.

Rotation

Set the Rotate option if you wish to choose a specific method of rotation to use to determinepossible layouts. Choose from:-

•Try Alternate Rows - to rotate alternate rows

•Try Alternate Columns - to rotate alternate columns

•Try Both - to rotate rows or columns

1.3.3.2 Regular Layout OptionsThe options for regular algorithm layouts are presented as four overlaid pages. Four tabs at thetop of the page, Gutters, Horizontal Offset, Vertical Offset and Rotation are used todetermine which page is displayed. Click on a tab to display its corresponding settings.

The settings behave in the same way as the Layout / Array Rollup and are described in thefollowing:-

Gutters

•Set the X Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between horizontal copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and

every alternate row.

•Define the value for the alternate x gutter.

•Set the Y Gutter field. This is the gap to leave between vertical copies •Set the Alternate Gutter option if you wish to define a different gutter for the second and

every alternate column.

•Define the value for the alternate y gutter.

Horizontal / Vertical Offset

There are two methods for defining both the horizontal and vertical offsets. Choose from :-

•By Absolute Value - choose the Offset button, then set the offset field to the value to use.

•By Alignment - choose the Align Panels button. Panels are numbered from the left across the main section of the box. They are determined from the crease lines. You can select two panels to align and the condition for alignment. In each case, set the number of the panel to align and the condition for alignment. Either the left hand edge, the centre, or the right hand edge.

Rotation

•Set the Rotate Alternate Rows option to rotate every other row of designs by 180 degrees

•Set the Rotate Alternate Columns option to rotate every other column of designs by 180 degrees


Release 8.0Page 8-9

8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

1.3.3.3 Multipart Layout OptionsThe options for multiple design layouts are described in the following:-

Trim

Set the trim.

Trim Control

Set the trim control option. Choose from:-

•No trim control

•Cut trim

•Remove trim

1.3.4 Step 4 - Perform LayoutNow decide whether you wish KASEMAKE to automatically select the best solution or you wishto select a layout manually.

- Set the automatically select best layout option, for a solution to be chosen automatically. Finally, click on Finish to begin generating possible layouts. Once all layouts are generated, the wizard dialog will be closed and the best layout will be selected automatically and dis-played in the drawing area. This is the final step and the command is complete.

- Alternatively, set the choose the best layout from a number of alternatives option to view the different layouts and allow you to select the one to use manually. Currently, the five best solutions are retained for you to choose from. Click on Next>> to begin generating the possible layouts. Once all layouts are generated, proceed to step 5.

1.3.5 Step 5 - Choosing A LayoutThe Choose Layout... dialog consists of a scrolling window containing a sequence of layoutsolutions. The most efficient solution is displayed first. Use the right most vertical scroll bar tomove between the different layout solutions.



Optimise Menu

KASEMAKE

Each solution is displayed as in the diagram. The details of any rotation or offset applied are givenat the head of the view. A scrolling list of properties for the corresponding layout are then given,including dimensions of the overall layout and offsets and rotations applied. The actual layout isdisplayed to the right of the property list.

A Large Preview option is available for closer examination. If accessed, the layout will be placedin its own resizeable window.

Choose Finish to select the layout currently in view. This solution will then be displayed in theKASEMAKE drawing area. Choose Cancel to throw away all the layouts and abandon thecommand.

2 Optimise MenuThe Optimise commands are used to order elements prior to plotting/cutting to achieve anoptimum path. This has the effect of radically reducing the time taken, for example, to cut andcrease a sample as it minimises the number of wasted movements the cutting head makesmoving between elements.

Activating Optimise produces a sub-menu of commands as described in the following:-

2.1 Automatic

Select this command with a drawing on screen. The system will pause and then the screen willredraw. The system has drawn the design in a new order giving an optimum path for the tool tofollow. This is carried out ground by ground starting with ground 0.

The reason for sorting items by ground/layer is that KASEMAKE drives plotters, sample tablesetc. by allocating pens and tools to individual grounds. On a sample table the first two groundsdrive the pen whilst the next ground drives the creasing wheel. By sorting the grounds we achieveoptimal performance for each individual tool.

For each ground in turn, the system sweeps the contents of the design and identifies all elementsdrawn in the ground being processed. Using this set of elements it takes a starting point, say aline, moves along the line until it finds its end and then looks for the nearest element to this endpoint, reversing the identified element if necessary so that its start point is the nearest point tothe previous element’s end point. This process continues until all the items in that ground havebeen ordered. The system then considers the next ground until the entire drawing has beenordered.

As soon as each ground is ordered, the ordered elements are stored so that at the end of theprocess the system has two versions of the design in memory, the original and the new sortedversion. The original is now abandoned in favour of the new optimised version.

Command Optimise Automatic

Menu Tools->Optimise->Automatic (ALT T O A)




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

2.2 Manual

The manual command works in one of two ways, in conjunction with the Shift key where a startelement is identified then a path is traced manually, or automatically. Each element beingreversed automatically to form a continuous path.

Alternatively this command can be used with the Ctrl key where each element is identifiedindividually and the direction reversed manually by selecting an element again.

2.2.1 Operation with the Shift KeyThis option allows you to trace a path manually or automatically and have the elements reversedirection automatically to form a continuous path.

You are prompted to Mark an Element. Choose an element at the start of the path you wish totrace. Ensure that you hold down the Shift key whilst you pick a point near to the requiredelement using the left mouse button.

The chosen element will now be highlighted, direction arrows will be displayed for the entiredesign and you will be asked whether you wish to confirm each element in the path. Respond asfollows:-

• Yes - If you wish the system to trace the path an element at a time, allowing you to confirm each element is the required one as the system identifies it

• No - If you wish the system to trace the path automatically

• Cancel - If you wish to restart the Optimise command

If you choose Yes the system will identify an element at a time requesting confirmation for eachelement before it is added to the path. Choosing No causes the system to search for an alternativeelement.

Elements are automatically reversed to form a continuous path.

2.2.2 Operation with the Ctrl KeyThis option allows you to trace a path one item at a time, reversing each element manually ifrequired.

You are prompted to Mark an Element. Choose an element at the start of the path you wish totrace. Ensure that you hold down the Ctrl key whilst you pick a point near to the required elementusing the left mouse button.

The chosen element will now be highlighted, direction arrows will be displayed for the entiredesign and you will be prompted to mark the next element in the path. Continue to hold the Ctrlkey and click on each element in turn to trace the desired path. The first Ctrl click identifies theelement as it is stored. If you wish to reverse the direction of an element simply click near it asecond time whilst holding down the Ctrl key. The element will reverse its direction with eachsubsequent click.

Command Optimise Manual

Menu Tools->Optimise->Manual (ALT T O M)




Optimise Menu

KASEMAKE

2.2.3 Completing Manual OptimisationOnce you have identified a path click anywhere within the drawing area away from the selectedelements. The Optimise dialog will now appear. In addition to reordering the selected elementsas they have been identified, you are given the choice to move their position within the drawinglist. Choose from:-

• Move to start of drawing - the ordered elements will be placed at the beginning of the drawing

• Leave in place within drawing - the ordered elements will retain their original position within the drawing

• Move to end of drawing - the ordered elements will be placed last in the drawing

To close the dialog choose OK to reorder the elements and reposition them according to theabove setting. Choose Cancel to stop the reordering. Choose Select More if you have broughtup this dialog by mistake and wish to add to the current path.

The command is self repeating you can identify further paths in the same way.

2.3 Slot Optimise

The Slot Optimise command is provided to optimise slots within the design. The Optimisecommand will produce a path which cuts into one side of the slot and out of the other side ofthe slot. However, when the design is cut, the tool will cut into the slot as required but as it startsto cut the other side coming out of the slot, the material will drag and tear. To avoid this, wehave provided the Slot Optimise command, which will override the main optimisation for slots ina specific ground within certain constraints.

Activate the command. A table is displayed containing a list of visible grounds used by the currentdesign and corresponding actions to take for each ground.

- First set the parameters which determine if two lines form a slot or in fact are just part of an angled flap or some other part of the design.

• Maximum Slot Width – This is the maximum distance between two lines to consider. If the distance between the two lines exceeds this value, the lines will be assumed to be part of the design rather than a slot

• Tolerance Angle – This is the maximum angle between two lines to consider. If the two lines are at an angle greater than this value, they will not be regarded as a slot

- Alongside the ground name is a column labelled action. Each action field is actually a combo box containing the possible actions to take for the corresponding ground. Click in the field to activate the combo control. The available actions are displayed as follows:-

• None – No action is required for this ground

• Optimise – optimise the ground in the normal way

• Slot Optimise – search the ground for possible slots as per the given criteria and optimise as described above.

Command Slot Optimise

Menu Tools->Optimise->Slot Optimise (ALT T O S)




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

- Set the action fields appropriately.

Finally click on OK to carry out any optimisation as defined by the action fields. The result of thiscommand can be seen by switching the indication arrows on. Refer to Tools->Direction->Indicate on page 8-18 for further details.

- Click on Cancel to abandon this command.

2.4 Optimise and Order

The Optimise And Order command is used to define different optimisation methods forindividual grounds and to set the order in which one or more grounds are to be handled.

Without optimisation all elements in the design are processed ground by ground in order.Specifying a method of optimisation allows grounds to be processed in any given order. Groundscan also be processed in a non-specific order. E.g. to optimise laser cutting, instead of burningall 2 pt first and then all 3 pt, both pointages can be burnt at the same time, swapping from oneto the other, whichever line is closest.

Activate the Optimise And Order command. The Optimise and Re-Order dialog is dis-played:-

Command Optimise and Order

Menu Tools->Optimise->Optimise and Order (ALT T O O)




Optimise Menu

KASEMAKE

Select the table of settings to be changed from the filename drop down. The Standard andNone tables of settings cannot be changed, so you may need to choose the Add New... optionto define a new table of settings. The use of this option is described on page 15.

The optimised grounds can be put in to one of two lists:-

• grounds plotted by order - where you specify the order in which the grounds are plotted• grounds plotted in any order - where the plot order is not important..In order to change the contents of the ground lists, you must first engage the Allow Editcommand. Once this is engaged, the Add>>, All>>, <<Remove and <<All, buttons areenabled.

To change the order within a list, select a ground, then click and drag it to the correct positionand release to reorder.

To move from one list to the other select the ground(s) to move. Choose Add>>to moveselected grounds to the grounds plotted in any order list. Choose All>>, to move allgrounds to the grounds plotted in any order list.. Choose <<Remove to move theselected grounds to the top of the grounds plotted by order list. Use <<All to move allgrounds to the top of the grounds plotted by order list.

As well as reordering the grounds lists, you can alter the optimise method for individualgrounds. Simply click in the Optimise column and select from the drop down list of methods.

The Lock All option allows changes made to the optimise mode for any given ground to beapplied to all grounds at once.

Where Slot Optimise is chosen as the optimisation method, the width of slot and angle can bealtered by setting the max slot width and tolerance angle fields respectively.

Maximum Slot Width This is the maximum distance between two lines to consider. If the distance between the twolines exceeds this value, the lines will be assumed to be part of the design rather than a slot

Tolerance AngleThis is the maximum angle between two lines to consider. If the two lines are at an anglegreater than this value, they will not be regarded as a slot

The Avoid Overcut column is used to enable or disable the overcut option for individualgrounds. The over cut option is provided to help compensate for the fact that plotters drive aknife using the back of the knife to locate it. This means that in the case of a 20 mm cut, theback of the knife will be moved 20 mm but the cut will be slightly larger as it will include theextra distance travelled by the front of the knife. Set or clear this option for the individualgrounds as appropriate.

Where the overcut option is enabled you can identify the position of the cutback and whereapplicable the amount of cutback to apply.

First set the over cut position. Choose from :-

• At End - the cutback will be applied at the end of the element, shortening the cut by the specified overcut cutback amount.

• Centre - the element will be cut as two halves, from its beginning to centre point, then from its end point back to its centre point.

Where, At End is chosen you should now set the overcut cutback amount by typing the valuedirectly or scrolling using the arrows.

Add New...Click on this option to create a new table of optimisation settings. You will be asked to specify aname for the optimise table. Type the name then press OK to create a new table with the given



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

name using the current values. Choose Cancel to abandon the Add New... option.

Save As...Click on this option to save the current optimisation settings to a new table. You should specifythe name for the new table. On clicking OK the current settings are copied and the Filenamefield is updated to show that you are now working with the newly saved optimise table.

Delete...Click on this option to delete the current table of settings. Make sure that the filename field isdisplaying the name of the table of settings you wish to remove before activating this command.Confirmation is required as this command cannot be undone!

OptimiseClick on this option to apply the current optimisation settings and close the dialog.

Choose Cancel to disregard any changes.

3 Common Lines…

In a conventional drawing it is quite often the case that one drawing line overlays another. It isoften a requirement of the drawing if geometric construction techniques are used as in the caseof some Parametric styles.

One line overlaying another only becomes a problem when the drawing is to be used for diemaking, sample making or cost calculation.

Common Line Removal removes all occurrences of lines overlaying other lines. It will also replacemultiple lines joined to each other with a single straight line wherever possible.

For clones, it will detach lines that are common to two clones and keep them separate, but therest of the elements will still remain as a clone.

On selecting the command the following dialog box is displayed.

Merge Touching Lines

If you answer Yes all lines in the same direction with a common start or end point will bejoined into one as part of the sorting process.

If you answer No then this joining process will not take place.

Command Common Line Removal

Menu Tools->Common Lines... (Alt T L)

Toolbar Button: Tools Toolbar



Remove Zero Length

KASEMAKE

Explode Groups

If you answer Yes any grouping information for your current design will be removed and onlysingle elements will remain.

If you answer No the grouping information will be retained.

Remove Zero Length Items

It is possible for a drawing to contain elements of zero length as a result of a particularsequence of commands. This option allows you to tidy up these unnecessary elements.

If you answer Yes any zero length items will automatically be removed if found.

If you answer No zero length items will be ignored.

When the command is activated a progress bar will appear. The rectangle contained in the boxrepresents the drawing, the complete width being 100%. A bar moves across the rectangle fromleft to right. When this has progressed 1/4 of the way across this indicates that the drawing hasbeen 25% processed. When the processing is complete the bar momentarily fills the rectangle.The progress bar is then removed from the screen.

All common lines will have been removed.

Common lines should always be removed prior to laser cutting a die. Failure to do so would resultin the laser burning into a previously cut slot and either damaging the laser bed or burning thedie board. This command should also be performed before any bridging is carried out.

4 Remove Zero Length

Occasionally it is possible for a design to contain elements which are of zero length. For example,designs imported as DXF may cause this problem. The fact that they are zero length means thatthey never appear on the screen but they can interfere with some of the KASEMAKEcommands.

Remove Zero Length has been provided to remove these surplus elements and tidy up the currentdesign.

Activate the command. Any zero length elements are now removed without further interactionand no visible change is detected.

5 Convert To Arcs

This command searches the entire design for a sequence of joined short line segments. It thenattempts to combine them into a single arc using the options defined in File->Preferences.

Command Remove Zero Length

Menu Tools->Remove Zero Length


Command Convert To Arcs

Menu Tools->Convert To Arcs




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

Before activating this command you should check the Settings page of the Preferences dialog toensure they are correct. See “Settings” on page 2-43.

Activate the Convert to Arcs command. The entire design will now be scanned for connected linesegments. Where a conversion is possible using the current settings, an arc will be inserted intothe design in place of the identified line sequence.

6 Direction Sub-MenuWithin KASEMAKE we can control the direction of each drawn item. This can be of criticalimportance when sample making as there are certain cutting operations that require manualintervention to produce the best possible samples. An example of this would be when a case withlong slots is cut. The slots themselves must be cut into the box, i.e. towards the main panels. Toachieve this we have included two commands, the first to display the direction of the lines andthe second to reverse them.

In addtion, there is a command to indicate the side to be bevelled where appropriate.

6.1 Indicate

On selecting the Indicate command an arrow head is placed at the mid point of each element inthe design. The arrow head points from the start of the line / arc towards its end point, thusidentifying the direction that it was drawn in.

To remove the arrows from the screen simply select Indicate again. The screen will redraw but thistime without the arrow heads.

6.2 Indicate Bevels

The Indicate Bevels command is provided to give visual confirmation of where any bevellingwill be positioned. On selecting the Indicate Bevels command small strokes appear along theedge of any elements in the design indicating which side of the element will be bevelled.

To remove these strokes from the screen simply select Indicate Bevels again. The screen willredraw but this time without the strokes.

The design should be optimised to give the best results for bevelling. Any conflicts can then beresolved using the Reverse command described in the next section.

An example of the results of Indicate Bevels on an optimised design is shown. There are threeareas of conflict labelled A, B and C.

Command Indicate

Menu Tools >Direction->Indicate (Alt T T I)


Command Indicate Bevels

Menu Tools >Direction->Indicate Bevels (Alt T T B)




Direction Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Each area of conflict A, B and C can now be resolved by selecting the elements which are wrongand using the Reverse command to correct them. The results are as follows:-



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

6.3 Reverse

To use this command you should first have a drawing on screen with direction arrows switchedon.

Command Reverse

Menu Tools->Direction->Reverse (Alt T T R)




End Markers Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

Before activating the command, select an item or items whose direction you wish to reverse, usingthe standard selection techniques. Activate the Reverse command. All selected lines and arcs willimmediately reverse direction. For visual confirmation you will notice that all arrow heads nowpoint in the opposite direction.

7 End Markers Sub MenuActivate the End Markers Sub-Menu to access the commands relating to End Markers:-

7.1 Show End Markers

This command will display a small marker at the start and end of every element in your design.This enables you to establish whether a Line or Arc is a single element or made up of smallelements. It can also be useful if you are unsure where one element ends and another elementbegins and can help you find lock points on an awkward shape. It also places a marker at thecentre of any arcs in the design.

Activate this command, the markers will now be illustrated as small circles. To switch off the endmarkers, simply select the command again.

7.2 Setup Display End Markers

This command works in conjunction with the Show End Markers command. It allows you tocontrol which end markers are identified when the Show End Markers command is used.

Activate the Setup Display End Markers command. The following dialog will now be displayed:-.

Determine whether you want to include line end points, arc end points and arc centre points bysetting or clearing the corresponding check box.

Finally click on OK to save the new settings or Cancel to abandon any changes.

Command Show / Hide End Markers

Menu Tools >End Markers->Show/Hide End Markers


Command Setup Display End Markers

Menu Tools->End Markers->Setup Display End Markers




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

8 Manipulate Sub-MenuManipulate is a group of commands included to make certain basic movements of the design veryeasy. On selecting Manipulate the following 3 commands appear.

8.1 Flip

It is common for someone who has just drawn a corrugated case to want to produce a diagramof the job with the print face up. This command has been included to provide the easiest way toeffect such a change as it mirrors the current drawing about its vertical axis.

To execute the command first have a drawing on screen. Now activate the command. With nofurther intervention the whole design is mirrored in the vertical plane.

This command will also work with the current selection set.

8.2 Rotate 90

When selected this command rotates all elements on display through 90 degrees anti clockwise.All elements are rotated about the centre of the design.

The command is intended for use in conjunction with sample making when the design on screenis not correctly orientated for the flute of the material on the table. Instead of turning the materialit is simpler to turn the design.

This command will work on the current selection set, if one exists.

8.3 Rotate -90

Rotate -90 works exactly as Rotate 90 but rotates the elements 90 degrees clockwise.

8.4 Rotate 45

Rotate 45 works exactly as Rotate 90 but rotates the elements 45 degrees anti-clockwise.

Command Flip

Menu Tools->Manipulate->Flip (Alt T P F)


Command Rotate 90

Menu Tools->Manipulate->Rotate 90 (Alt T P R)


Command Rotate -90

Menu Tools->Manipulate->Rotate -90 (Alt T P O)


Command Rotate 45

Menu Tools->Manipulate->Rotate 45




Tool Passes Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

8.5 Rotate -45

Rotate -45 works exactly as Rotate 45 but rotates the elements 45 degrees clockwise.

9 Tool Passes Sub-MenuOn selecting this menu two commands are available. The first to set or Edit the number of toolpasses and the second to show graphically how many times the tool is set to pass over eachelement in the design.

9.1 Edit (Tool Passes)

KASEMAKE allows you to control the number of times an individual item is cut by a knife orcreased by a creasing wheel. Its most common use is in creasing heavier grade boards where asingle pass would not be sufficient to create a good crease. The system is also able to distinguishbetween elements that are basically horizontal or vertical, as the creasing requirement ofmaterials with the board grain or flute is radically different from that across the board grain orflute.

- Before setting the number of passes, first have a design on screen. Now using any of the selection methods select part or all of the design. The most common method is to use the Pick Ground command, identify a single crease and thus select all of the creases.

- Now select Tool Passes Edit. The following dialog box is displayed.

From this dialog you can set the number of passes, whether to multipass only horizontal orvertical lines or both, and you can set the angle up to which the system decides whether the lineis vertical or horizontal.

- When you have set all the options click on OK and the multi passes will be imposed on the design. Their effect will only be seen when plotting or cutting, at which time the tools will pass over the chosen items the requested number of times.

Command Rotate -45

Menu Tools->Manipulate->Rotate -45


Command Edit Number of Tool Passes

Menu Tools >Tool Passes->Edit... (Alt T S E)




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

9.2 Display (Tool Passes)

Having set the system to pass several times over a range of items it will often be necessary tochange the number of passes for some elements. To do this you must first be able to see howmany passes are being made.

Activate this command. The system draws an arrow head at the mid point of each element toindicate one pass. The number of arrow heads displayed for an element corresponds to howmany times the tool will pass over it. If there is one arrow head then the tool passes once only, ifthree then the tool passes three times and so on.

On selecting the command the following dialog box appears.

You must first tell the system which part of the design to illustrate with the pass arrow heads andthen tell it how many passes to display.

First set the scope option. Click on the required setting as follows:-

• All - display the tool passes which fit the specified criteria taking into account all elements in the design

• Selection - display the tool passes which fit the specified criteria taking into account only the selected elements

• None - remove any tool pass arrow heads which are currently displayed

Now determine the number of passes to illustrate. Set the number of elements passed option tothe required value either by typing directly, or by scrolling with the arrows.

Finally determine the criteria for displaying tool passes. Choose from:-

• Exactly - only elements with exactly the requested number of tool passes will have their arrow heads displayed

• More - only elements with at least the requested number of tool passes will have their arrow heads displayed

• Less - only elements with less than the requested number of tool passes will have their arrow heads displayed

E.g. The system can show all lines with 2 passes, or all lines with less than 2 passes or all lineswith more than 2.

Command Display the Number of Tool Passes

Menu Tools->Tool Passes->Display... (Alt T S D)




Mount Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

Having set the parameters select OK and the arrow heads will appear on those elements whichsatisfy the chosen criteria.

10 Mount Sub MenuThe Mount Sub-Menu provides access to commands relating to bevelling. These include beveldefinition formerly located through the Plotting Setup dialog and additional commands forgenerating offset paths where a vgroove effect is required and a command for reversing the pathof the bevel tool.

10.1 Bevel

This command allows you to define bevelling profiles and optimise the order of design elementsground by ground in preparation for bevelling. Elements in a given ground can also be reversedwhere necessary.

Activate the Bevel command. The following Bevel Definition Table dialog will now be displayed:-

Bevel ProfileDetermine which profile to use by choosing from the drop down list.

To create a new profile first click on the Add button you will then be prompted for a name forthe profile. Enter a suitable name then click on OK. Any changes you make will affect your newlycreated profile.

Command Bevel

Menu Tools->Mount->Bevel




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

To delete a profile, ensure it is the current profile by selecting from the drop down list if necessary.Click on Delete. You will be prompted for confirmation that you wish to delete this profile as onceconfirmed the profile will be permanently removed.

Front/Back Surface PlottingDetermine whether you wish to plot on the front or back surface of the board by clicking on thecorresponding radio button.

Tool SettingsAccess the tool settings if you wish to define the charactersitics / behaviour of the bevel tool:-

Bevel Knife AngleSet the angle of the knife blade by typing directly or scrolling with the arrows.

Max Angle before liftingSet the maximum angle to allow the blade to move through before it should be lifted. Againtype the value directly or scroll with the arrows.

Overrun Angle on CirclesFor a smooth finish on circles / ellipses it is advisable to let the bevel tool overrun as sometimes astepped effect can arise where the tool enters and leaves at the same position. It also ensures thatthe entire circle / ellipse is cut completely where a slow in pen is used.

This setting controls the additional angle to rotate through for any overrun. Type a suitable angledirectly or scroll to it with the arrows.

Bevel OvercutTo compensate for mechanical wear and tear it is sometimes necessary to overcut to ensure allcuts on the top surface meet correctly. This setting controls the distance to overcut. Type asuitable value or scroll with the arrows.

Bevel UndercutIt is sometimes necessary to undercut i.e. start to cut before the start of an element to ensure allcuts meet correctly. This setting controls the distance to undercut. Type a suitable value or scrollwith the arrows.



Mount Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

Slow-In PenA Slow In pen where available is one which gradually cuts into the material rather than startingto cut from maximum depth. This can be useful for getting a smoother cut particularly on circles.

Use Slow-In Pen

This setting determines whether the Slow In pen is to be used or not (where available). Set orclear the check box as appropriate.

Use Slow-In Pen on VGrooves

This setting determines whether the Slow In pen is to be used when cutting a vgroove path.Set or clear this option as required.

Slow-In Pen

This setting is used to determine which pen has slow in capability.

Bevel / Reverse / V GrooveClick in the appropriate column to select either a Bevel or a V Groove cut for each individualground. Each element in this ground will now be reordered and bevels will be placed on itaccording to its direction.

Click in the Reverse column to reverse the direction of any lines drawn in the correspondingground. Consequently, the side of the line where any bevelling is placed will change.

Finally click on OK to close the Bevel Definition Table dialog and keep the elements in the neworder. Choose Cancel to abandon any changes made to the ordering of the elements.

10.2 VGroove

This command allows you to generate one or more paths offset from a given path which are tobe cut with a V Groove effect. It enables a v groove effect to be achieved for complicated outlineswith intricate parts which the bevel tool cannot access.

Activate this command. Set the options as appropriate. You will now be prompted to mark aboundary element. Identify an element in the boundary you wish to offset the new path(s) fromby clicking near to it. The nearest element will now be drawn in the current selection colour toconfirm that it has been identified.

Next you will be prompted to confirm that the correct element has been identified. If the elementis the correct one, click near to the element again to confirm that it is correct. KASEMAKE willnow automatically identify a path starting from the given element and will create the new path(s)offset from this path using the current options.

If the selected element is incorrect, simply choose Select Next from the right hand popup menu.Alternatively choose Reset from this popup menu or from the Edit menu to start the commandagain.

Command V Groove

Menu Tools->Mount->V Groove




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

10.2.1 OptionsThe following options are available with the VGroove command:-

Number of V-GroovesFirst determine how many paths you wish to generate. Type in the number directly or use thearrows to scroll.

OffsetOffset determines the distance to position the newly generated path from the chosen path if it isthe first offset or from the previously generated path for all subsequent offsets. Type the offsetdirectly or use the arrow keys to scroll. A negative value can be used if the generated path isrequired internal to the given path rather than external to it.

Ground This value determines which ground to place the generated path in. Choose from the drop downlist by clicking on the arrow and dragging the cursor over the required ground.

Finally click on OK to accept the new settings or Cancel to abandon any changes made.

10.3 Reverse Bevel Path

The Reverse Bevel Path command allows you to reverse the direction of a path which is to bebevelled. It also swaps the bevelling from the outside to the inside or vice versa.

Activate this command. You will now be prompted to mark a boundary element. Identify anelement in the bevel path by clicking near to it. The nearest element will now be drawn in thecurrent selection colour to confirm that it has been identified.

Next you will be prompted to confirm that the correct element has been identified. If the elementis the correct one, click near to the element again to confirm that it is correct. KASEMAKE will

Command Reverse Bevel Path

Menu Tools->Mount->Reverse Bevel Path




Cut & Crease Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

now automatically identify the complete bevel path starting from the given element and willreverse its direction. In addition the bevelling side will flip.

If the selected element is incorrect, simply choose Select Next from the right hand popup menu.Alternatively choose Reset from this popup menu or from the Edit menu to start the commandagain.

11 Cut & Crease Sub MenuCut & Crease is a combination of cuts and creases used to make cardboard easier to bend. It isespecially difficult with thicker grades of board to create a clean, sharp crease without burstingthrough the material. This task is greatly eased by adding to the crease a partial cut or perforation.The Cut/Crease commands allow this to be done with ease.

Activate the Cut & Crease Sub-Menu to access the commands relating to Cut & Crease:-

11.1 Specify

Before choosing this command, load the design that requires combined cuts and creases.

Cut & Crease can be applied to either single elements or alternatively, in line with standard designphilosophy that all creases are generally contained in a designated ground, it can be applied to agroup of elements contained within a particular ground or layer, simultaneously. Thus, thestarting point for both methods is a line or lines designated as being creases, which is normallyGround 2 on the KASEMAKE system.

Decide whether you are working with individual lines and arcs or all elements within a specificground and select these elements using an appropriate Select command.

Activate the Specify command. The Cut & Crease / Perforate dialog is displayed:-

Command Specify

Menu Tools->Cut & Crease->Specify




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

Decide whether you require Cut/Crease where cuts are superimposed on to the crease orPerforate where the cuts replace the crease and click on the corresponding radio button to setit.

Cut Ground

Next select the Ground that will contain the generated Cuts from the drop down list. Youshould choose a ground normally associated with cutting. Do not choose the same groundthat contains the cut which releases the design from the surrounding board. Select a groundthat precedes the final cut, say Ground 4.

Cut Offset

The next decision to make is how long to make the Run In. When any creased item has cutsimposed on it, it is normal that the cut is not allowed to extend to the extremes of the line.To ensure that this does not happen both ends of the crease are left free of cuts. The free areais known as the Run In. The length of the Run In is the same at both ends of the crease. Thisdistance may typically be set at 5 mm. In the case of thicker boards this value may beincreased. Set the Run In or Cut Offset by typing the required offset directly or using thearrows to scroll to the required value.

In addition the following settings are available for Cut/Crease only:-

Crease Ground

Select the Ground that will contain the generated Creases from the drop down list. Youshould choose a ground normally associated with creases.

Full Crease

Determine whether you wish to have one crease line for the entire length of the line orindividual lines representing each crease. Set or clear this option as appropriate.

11.1.1 Cut TypeNow choose the principle for defining the resulting Cut / Crease. Three methods are available:-




KASEMAKE

• Cut by Length - where you determine the resulting cuts by specifying the length of each cut taking into account any overcut adjustments

• Cut by Number - where you determine the number of cuts for each element.

• Even spacing - where you determine the number of cuts and whether you wish to have cuts or creases at either end. The cut and crease lengths will then be calculated to ensure that they are equally spaced throughout the selected line.

Click on the corresponding radio button to set the required method.

11.1.1.1 Cut by LengthIf you elect to define the length of the cut you should now define the following values:-

Cut

Specify the length of each cut by typing the appropriate values directly, or by using the arrowsto scroll to the required value.

Overcut Adjust

Set the adjustment to apply to each cut to compensate for any overcut. Type the value directlyor use the arrow keys to scroll.

Uncut

Specify the length to leave uncut between each cut i.e. the length of crease between cuts. Setthese values by typing the appropriate values directly, or by using the arrows to scroll to therequired value.

Overcut

Set the adjustment to apply to each uncut section to compensate for any adjustments madeto the cut lengths. Type the value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

11.1.1.2 Cut by NumberIf you elect to define the number of cuts you should define the following values:-

No of Cuts

Specify the number of cuts to use. Set the required value by typing directly, or by using thearrows to scroll.

Cut/Uncut Ratio

You must also fix the ratio of cut to crease. The ratio determines how many times longer thecut is than the crease. Set these values by typing the appropriate values directly, or by usingthe arrows to scroll to the required value.

11.1.1.3 Even SpacingIf you choose even spacing, you should define the following values:-

No of Cuts

Specify the number of cuts to use. Set the required value by typing directly, or by using thearrows to scroll.

Cut At End

You must also determine whether to start and end with a cut or a crease line. Set this optionif you wish to start with a cut line, clear it if you wish to start with a crease line.

Note:The Cut Offset field mentioned above and Variable Parameter sectionoutlined next, are not applicable to this method.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

11.1.2 Variable ParameterSince Cut/Crease and Perforate are applied to elements of varying length it is not possible to applythe cut offset and cut and crease values exactly. It is necessary to adjust one of these values toapply the cut and crease correctly to an individual element.

The variable parameter option allows you to determine which of the three values to adjust.

Click on the corresponding radio button to choose whether you wish to automatically adjust :-

•Offset - the end sections will be adjusted

•Cut - the cut lengths will be adjusted

•Uncut - the crease lengths will be adjusted

Click on OK to accept the settings and apply the Cut & Crease. The selected elements will havecuts superimposed or will be replaced by a sequence of cuts according to whether Cut/Crease orPerforate has been chosen.

11.1.3 Examples

11.1.3.1 Example 1 - Cut by Length MethodThis example illustrates the Cut by Length method where you define the length of each Cut andeach Crease.

- Draw a line on the screen 95 mm long. Now set the Cut Offset to 5 mm and the Cut to 10 mm and the Uncut to 5 mm.

The system now knows that you want an offset at each end of the line of 5 mm, a cut lengthof 10 mm and a crease distance of 5 mm. It also knows that the length of the line to whichyou are applying Cut / Crease is 95 mm. From this information the system will calculate thatsix cuts are possible, with 5 creases between them, taking into account the offset of 5 mm ateach end:

(6 x 10 (cut)) + (5 x 5 (crease)) + (2 x 5 (offset)) = Total line length 60+25+10=95 mm

On screen you will see the offset and creases shown in the Crease layer (Ground 2) and thecuts overlaid in the Counter layer (Ground 4).

This example works on values that conveniently divide into the overall length. Let us now lookat applying the values to a line not exactly divisible. We can achieve this by applying exactlythe same parameters to a line 55 mm long.

- Now the system knows that this line of 55 mm does not divide so easily. However, it carries out the following calculation:

Length of line = 55 mmOffset = 5 mmLess 2 x offset = 10 mmLine to be Cut / Creased 45 mmCut Length = 10 mmCrease Length = 5 mmMax. no of cuts = 3 = 30 mmMax. no of creases = 2 = 10 mmRemainder 5 mm




KASEMAKE

The remainder is then apportioned to either the offset, cut lines or crease length dependingon what was identified as the variable parameter.

The basis for variable cut is:

((SPECIFIED CUT LENGTH / TOTAL CUT/CREASE ACHIEVED)x REMAINDER) + SPECIFIED CUTLENGTH

Therefore,(10/40 x 5) + 10(1/4 x 5) + 101.25 + 10

Therefore, actual cut length = 11.25 mm. For variable crease it is:

((SPECIFIED CREASE LENGTH / TOTAL CUT/CREASE ACHIEVED)x REMAINDER)+ SPECIFIED CREASE LENGTH

Therefore,

(5/40 x 5) + 5(1/8 x 5) + 50.625+ 5

Therefore, actual crease length = 5.625 mm.

11.1.3.2 Example 2 - Cut by Number MethodThe second method of defining Cut / Crease is to specify the number of cuts to be imposed onthe crease line, irrespective of the length of line involved and the resultant length of cut as a ratioto the crease length.

Using this method, you first set the Run In distance, as previously described. Then set the numberof Cuts and finally the ratio of Cut length to Crease length. This ratio simply states that each cutis to be twice as long as each crease or each crease three times as long as each cut etc.

- How many cuts do you want to place on the line?

Type 8 in the appropriate field.

- Next decide in what proportion you want the cuts to be to the creases?

If the proportion is CUT = 2 x CREASE then type 2 in the appropriate field. If CUT = 3 x CREASEthen type 3_ and so on. For this example Type 2.

The system will now generate 8 cut lines which are each twice as long as the 7 crease lines,all running between the fixed 5 mm offset at each end. The calculation is:

Line length = 95 mmOffset = 5 mm 2 x Offset = 10 mmCut Crease Total 85 mmTotal No. Cuts = 8Total No. Creases = 7Apply Ratio Of Cuts To CreasesCuts x 8 x 2 = 16Creases x 7 x 1 = 7Total Units 23



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

To establish unit length calculateTotal Cut/Crease Length = 85

Total No. of Units 23

Therefore,

Unit Value = 3.69565 mmCrease Length =3.69565 mmCut Length = 7.39130 mmOffset = 5 mm

Cut and Crease can be applied to arcs in exactly the same manner.

11.2 Display

This command toggles the display of cut/crease information for all the elements within thecurrent design.

Simply activate this command to switch the cut/crease information on and off.

11.3 Display Labels

This command toggles the display of any labels associated with cut/crease information for all theelements within the current design.

Simply activate this command to switch the cut/crease labels on and off.

11.4 Label Options

This command allows you to define the way labels associated with cut/crease information aredisplayed.

Simply activate this command to display the Cut & Crease label options dialog as follows:-

Command Display

Menu Tools->Cut & Crease->Display


Command Display Labels

Menu Tools->Cut & Crease->Display Labels


Command Label Options

Menu Tools->Cut & Crease->Label Options




Zipper Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

Cut & crease text

Type the string to be used to label any Cut & Crease information within the design if labelsare displayed.

Perforation text

Type the string to be used to label any Perforation information within the design if labels aredisplayed.

Text Size

Set the size of text to use for the cut/crease or perforation label. Type the value directly or usethe arrows to scroll.

12 Zipper Sub MenuThe Zipper commands allow the application of a pattern defining zipper or tear edge rule.Activatethe Zipper Sub-Menu to access the commands relating to zipper rule:-

12.1 Specify Zipper Rule

Zipper rule can be applied to one or more lines simultaneously. Decide whether you are workingwith individual lines or all lines within a specific ground and select these elements using anappropriate Select command prior to activating this command.

Command Specify Zipper Rule

Menu Tools->Zipper->Specify Zipper Rule




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

Activate the Specify Zipper Rule command. The Zipper Rule dialog is displayed:-

The Zipper Rule dialog is divided into three areas. The left side of the dialog is subdivided into apreview area at the top displaying the currently selected zipper style. Beneath the preview area isa command area. The right hand section is a style selection area.

12.1.1 Zipper StyleFirst identify the zipper style you wish to use. This can be done in one of two ways:-

• Zipper Style Combo - Select the style by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the drop down list of available styles.

• Style Selection Area - Scroll through the list of available styles then clicking on it to select it.

Whichever method is used, the chosen style will be displayed in the preview area and the variablesection will be updated to display any variables applicable to the chosen style.

In addition the zipper style combo or style selection area will be updated to reflect the chosenstyle depending which method was used.

12.1.2 VariablesScroll through the variable list and make any adjustments to the variables as necessary. Simplyclick on a value to change it and type the new value directly.

Finally click on OK to close the dialog and accept the new style.



Zipper Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

You will now be prompted to identify the origin for the zipper rule. This is a start point for thezipper rule to be generated from. Mark a point close to where you would like the rule to begenerated from.

KASEMAKE will now apply the chosen zipper style to any selected line(s).

12.1.3 Alterations to Zipper RuleLine(s) which have already had zipper rule applied can be adjusted by first selecting the applicableline(s) then activating this command again. Fine adjustments can then be made to the variables.On completion of the command as described above, the zipper rule will be regenerated takinginto account any adjustments made.

12.2 Display Zipper Rule

This command toggles the display of zipper rule for all the lines within the current design.

Simply activate this command to switch the zipper rule on and off.

Note: A tick is displayed next to the command name in the menu to confirm that zipperrule is currently set to be displayed. If zipper rule display is switched off, the tickis removed from the command name in the menu.

Before using this command, it is important to construct any panels and flaps which you wish tobe available to the Mix & Match Box Generator. These should be saved in the path described asMix and Match (Pallet) folder in File Locations under Preferences. See “File Locations” on page2-46.

12.3 Defining Zipper Rule The first step to be able to specify Zipper Rule is to define the zipper pattern.

The zipper pattern is based on a standard parametric design, but the first point defined for thepattern is critical. It is this point that will be used to determine the position of each repeat for thezipper style. The first point defined for the pattern will normally be the left-hand point.

The parameterised design needs to include two points. The first will be used as the origin pointor starting point from where the pattern will be generated. The second point determines theextent of the pattern.

Each pattern will have a set of variables. Any major variables which will require adjustment toredefine the zipper style should be given prompts with meaningful names, e.g. Vertical spacing.

For each pattern there must be a variable defined called PW. This is the pattern width and shouldbe set to the horizontal size of the pattern. e.g. in the above example, FULLZIPPERLENGTH is thecontrolling variable for the horizontal width.

Steps involved in creating a Zipper Pattern File can be summarised as:-

• Create a new PARAMETRIC file which contains the elements which make up the pattern.

Command Display Zipper Rule

Menu Tools->Zipper->Display Zipper Rule




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

• Define variables. Any variables used when defining the pattern should be given prompts with meaningful names. A variable must be included for pattern width, named PW, it should be the overall width of the pattern.

• Define the parametric relationship between elements.

• Define two control points. The first will be used as the origin point or starting point from where the pattern will be generated. The second point determines the extent of the pattern.

Once the design is complete, the PARAMETRIC command TOP LOCK POINT must be used. Thisshould be used when the file is closed (i.e. not RECORDING) similar to the SET POINT tool. Withthis tool selected, the origin point of the pattern must be identified. Similarly, the right mostpoint defining the extent of the pattern must also be identified. This process adds a series ofdefinitions in the CMF file:

TOP-LOCK-POINT{

TYPE = 1,

CENTRE = P7

}

TOP-LOCK-POINT{

TYPE = 2,

CENTRE = P8

}

This is now a working PARAMETRIC that will form the basis of the zipper rule.

To make a preview of the zipper pattern, a drawing file with the same name as the CMF file mustbe saved. Ideally this will have the main variables labelled as dimensions. e.g.



Zipper Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

:

These files (.CMF, .VAR and .AGD) should be stored in an appropriate folder as specified in thefile locations section of preferences. Please see “File Locations” on page 2-46.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

13 Counters Sub-MenuThe counters sub menu gives access to commands which assist in the production of counter dies.The commands available are as follows:-

13.1 Sample Counter

The Sample Counter... command generates counter channels for any crease lines in the design.Separate channel widths can be used for horizontal and vertical creases in recognition that alarger channel width is required when working against the grain of the board than with the grain.

The channels can then be cut out to produce a sample counter which can be positioned betweenthe table cutting bed and the board being used to make the sample. This ensures that when thesample is manufactured, the counters enable quality creases to be produced.

Activate the command. The Counter dialog is displayed. This contains all the options whichgovern the production of the counter creasing cutouts.:-

13.1.1 Crease GroundSet the ground that contains the creases which require counter cutouts. Normally ground 2 orCrease, select from the drop down list.

13.1.2 Counter GroundSet the ground to contain the generated cut outs this should be a cut ground i.e. one assignedto the cutting tool.

Command Sample Counter

Menu Tools->Counters->Sample Counter




Counters Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

13.1.3 Horizontal WidthThis determines how wide to make any horizontal channel. The value to use should take accountof the width of the creasing tool being used, the width of the material and whether you arecreasing with or against the grain of the board.

Set the horizontal width by typing the value directly or scrolling with the arrows to the requiredvalue.

13.1.4 Vertical WidthThis determines how wide to make any vertical channel. Again, the value to use should takeaccount of the width of the creasing tool being used, the width of the material and whether youare creasing with or against the grain of the board.

Set the vertical width by typing the value directly or scrolling with the arrows to the requiredvalue.

13.1.5 Channel OffsetHow far to offset the cut out from either end of the crease line to avoid overlap.

Click on OK and the counter channels or cut outs will be displayed according to the settings.

13.2 Chamfer Guide

Use this command to produce an outline for the chamfer tool to follow when producing a matrixor counter die.

Activate the Chamfer Guide command. Check or set the options. The chamfer guide shouldbe positioned using the creases and ensure that the matrix when produced is within the externalprofile of the design so does not interfere with the cutting tool.

The system will automatically select the Snap to Endpoint mode and you will be prompted forthe end of the first crease line. A snap cursor will also appear which will follow the cursorindication the nearest endpoint to any given cursor position.

Mark the end of a crease line around which you wish to generate a chamfer guide by clicking withthe mouse close to the desired end. The system will automatically adjust the given point.

You will now be prompted for the second point. This can either be the other end of the creaseline previously identified, or the end of a different crease line. Mark the point as before. Again,the Snap to Endpoint mode will be automatically set and the point adjusted accordingly.

Finally you will be prompted for a point to determine which side of the crease line to generatethe chamfer guide. Mark a point away from the crease line.

The chamfer guide will now appear in Ground 8 as per the options.

13.2.1 Chamfer Guide OptionsThe options determining the appearance of the chamfer guide can be set as follows:-

Command Chamfer Guide

Menu Tools->Counters->Chamfer Guide




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

13.2.1.1 RadiusThis is the radius of the filleted corners of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directlyor use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

13.2.1.2 DistanceThis is the height of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directly or use the arrows toscroll to the required value.

13.2.1.3 AngleThis is the angle of the chamfer sides. Type the required value directly or use the arrows toscroll to the required value.

13.3 Die board/counter locating holes

This command provides a way of placing locating holes for the counter and die board manuallyon the design. The locating hole is stored as a system symbol the design of which can be changedvia the tool options.

Activate the Die board/counter locating holes command. You will now be prompted forthe origin of the locating hole. The symbol currently being used to define a locating hole will bedisplayed as part of the cursor.

Identify the origin point using any of the available drawing modes. The symbol currentlyrepresenting locating holes will now be drawn at the given point.

13.3.1 Die board/counter locating holes OptionsChoose options to define the symbol to use for the locating hole. A picture of the symbol currentlyselected is displayed and the name of the part file containing the symbol.

Choose a new symbol by clicking on the combo box and scrolling through the list of availableparts. As you move through the list the corresponding symbol will be displayed to help you toselect the correct one. Click on the name of the required symbol to select it.

Choose OK to close the options dialog and select the new symbol. Cancel will abandon anychanges.

13.4 Auto Counter Plate

This command generates the tool paths which make up the counter die or matrix needed tomanufacture the current design.

Command Die board/counter locating holes

Menu Tools->Counters->Die board/counter locating holes


Command Auto Counter Plate

Menu Tools->Counters->Auto Counter Plate




Counters Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate this command and the Matrix Options dialog is displayed. This contains the optionswhich control the production of the counter die or matrix as follows:-

13.4.1 ChamfersA chamfer path will automatically be generated. The options determining the appearance of thechamfer guide can be set as follows:-

13.4.1.1 OffsetThis is the height of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directly or use the arrows toscroll to the required value.

13.4.1.2 RadiusThis is the radius of the filleted corners of the chamfer guide. Type the required value directlyor use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

13.4.1.3 Angle from creasesThis setting is used to determine the angle of the chamfer sides as far as possible. It is alwaysapplied where the chamfer is positioned between the ends of two creases and is measuredfrom the crease.

Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

13.4.1.4 Angle from cutsThis setting defines a minimum angle that the chamfer must be away from a cut. It is usedwhere a chamfer is required along a crease. An attempt is made to place the chamfer at theangle specified by the angle from creases setting. If however the resulting angled chamfer isless than the angle from cuts value away from a cut line, the angle of the chamfer side isdetermined by the bisecting angle instead.

Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

Example: Angle from cuts and Angle from creases settings in practice

In scenario 2 where the chamfer is positioned from the ends of 2 creases the angle from creasevalue of 55 degrees is applied.

In scenario 1 where the chamfer is positioned along a crease, the total angle is only 63.4degrees so using an angle of 55 degrees would take the chamfer to within 8.4 degrees of acut and as the angle from cuts value restricts this to within 30 degrees of a cut, the bisectingangle is used instead.

13.4.2 MaterialSet the material being used for the board, to new or recycled material from the drop downlist. The channel widths and matrix thickness will automatically be set as these depend uponthe strength of the material.

13.4.3 Crease Rule PointageSet the thickness of crease rule to be used for this job from the drop down list of availablevalues.

13.4.4 Board Thickness Set the thickness of board to be used for this job from the drop down list.



Counters Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

13.4.5 Matrix Thickness mmThis value is determined automatically as it depends on the type of material, board thicknessand thickness of rule.

13.4.6 Grain DirectionSet this to with the grain or against the grain by clicking on the corresponding radio button.Depending which value you choose, the channel widths will be adjusted since the verticalchannel should be deeper when working with the grain of the board and the horizontalchannel should be deeper when working against the grain of the board.

13.4.7 Horizontal Crease• Current Ground - Select the ground which is used for crease lines in the current

design. This is normally ground 2 or Crease.

• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the creasing information to generate the horizontal creasing channels within the matrix.

• Tool Diameter - Set this to the diameter of the creasing tool being used to produce the job.

• Channel Width - The channel width will be set automatically taking into account material, board thickness, rule thickness and whether you are working with the grain of the board or against.

13.4.8 Vertical Crease• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the creasing information

to generate the vertical creasing channels within the matrix.

• Tool Diameter - Set this to the diameter of the creasing tool being used to produce the job.

• Channel Width - The channel width will be set automatically taking into account material, board thickness, rule thickness and whether you are working with the grain of the board or against it.

13.4.9 Extended Chamfer• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the path generated for

the chamfer outline of the matrix.

• Tool Diameter - Set this to the diameter of the chamfer tool being used to produce the job.

• Clearance - The minimum distance between the crease channel and the chamfer outline.

13.4.10 Extended Profile• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the path for the

generated profile of the matrix. This should be a cut ground and should be done after the extended chamfer path has been processed. Since the KASEMAKE system processes information a ground at a time starting with ground 0, using a higher ground than that used for the extended chamfer path will ensure correct results.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

13.4.11 Internal Chamfer• Proposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the chamfer path for

internal cutouts to generate the horizontal creasing channels within the matrix.

• Cut Angle -

• Cut Offset -

13.4.12 Internal ProfileProposed Ground - Select the ground which should contain the path to generate theprofile for any internal cutouts for the matrix. This should be a cut ground and should be doneafter the internal chamfer path has been processed. As before, using a higher ground thanthat used for the internal chamfer path will ensure correct results.

•Internal Offset - Set the distance between the internal cut and the profile path.

13.4.13 Simulation

13.4.13.1 Generate SimulationSet the Generate Simulation option, if you wish to simulate the production of the matrix onscreen so that you can check clearances. This means you can avoid problems such asoverlapping, making corrections before manufacturing the matrix.

Clear this setting if you do not wish to simulate production of the matrix.

13.4.13.2 Simulation GroundSelect the ground to place the simulated paths in from the drop down list.

Click on Apply... to generate the paths required to make the matrix which will enable theproduction of the design according to the given settings.

13.5 Simulate Matrix

The Simulate Matrix command is useful where a twin V crease is required when making a sample.It allows you to identify a channel for each crease. This command assumes a single tipped tool isto be used and generates parallel tool paths to simulate the twin V channel. By allowing thechannel width to be specified, twin V creases of varying widths can be catered for with a singletool tip.

Command Simulate Matrix

Menu Tools->Counters->Simulate Matrix




Counters Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate this command. The Simulate Matrix dialog is displayed:-

The settings are defined as follows:-

13.5.1 Crease GroundSet this to correspond to the ground used in your design to represent crease lines. Click on thearrow to display a drop down list of available grounds. Scroll through the list to the requiredground. Finally, click on it to select it.

13.5.2 Counter GroundSet this to correspond to the ground in which to place the tool path for the resulting creasechannels. Click on the arrow to display a drop down list of available grounds. Scroll through thelist to the required ground. Finally, click on it to select it.

13.5.3 Horizontal WidthThis is the width of channel to use for any horizontal crease lines. Type the required value directlyor use the arrow keys to scroll to the required value.

13.5.4 Vertical WidthThis is the width of channel to use for any vertical crease lines. Type the required value directly oruse the arrow keys to scroll to the required value.

13.5.5 OffsetThis is the the offset to apply to each channel to prevent any overlap. Overlap will not normallycause any problems, so this is normally set to zero. Type the required value directly or use thearrow keys to scroll to the required value.

Finally, click on OK to display the resulting tool path or Cancel to abandon the command.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

14 Compression

The compression command is used to calculate certain properties and strengths of a basiccorrugated case. It produces estimated values, using theoretical calculations which assume idealconditions for storage of paper used.

In order to perform its calculations the compression command requires a .VLS file containing theweights in grams of the different paper used for making corrugated board. The fileMATERIAL.VLS is supplied as a default file. Alternative files can be built up since the weights ofpaper will vary with the supplier.

Activate this command. The Compression Options dialog will now appear. This is a tabbed dialogcontaining two pages of settings as follows:-

14.1 Compression InformationThe following set of options is available:-

• Safety Factor - this is related to the storage conditions the box will encounter. Choose from good, average and poor, clicking on the corresponding radio button to select it.

• Case Length - the length of the case for which the information is to be calculated. Enter the value by typing directly or scroll with the arrows to the required value.

• Case Width - the width of the case for which the information is to be calculated. Enter the value as before.

• Select Required Material - Tables of values can be built up and saved for specific materi-als. A default material is supplied. Choose the required material from the drop down list of available materials.

14.1.1 Load CMP FileThe calculated compression values can be saved to a suitably named CMP file. These can then beviewed using this command.

Click on the command button and the standard File Open dialog will appear requesting the nameof the file to load. Enter the filename in the usual way. Then click OK.

The previously saved table of compression values will now be displayed.

14.1.2 Load VLS FileUse this command to load a different set of board weights for an alternative supplier.

Activate the command button. The standard File Open dialog will appear requesting the name ofthe file to load. Enter the filename in the usual way. Then click OK.

The previously saved weights will now be loaded ready to use to define the material requirementsof the job.

Note: You can create alternative.VLS files for different suppliers using a text editor andfollowing the format of the default MATERIAL.VLS file.

Command Compression

Menu Tools->Compression




Compression

KASEMAKE

14.2 Material SettingsClick on the Material Settings tab to define the weights and type of paper to be used to make thecorrugated board. The following options will appear:-

14.2.1 Board TypeAre you using Single Wall, Double Wall or Triple Wall board? Click on the corresponding radiobutton to select the required board type. According to the board type some combination of thefollowing settings will now become accessible.

14.2.2 Liner Type for Double BackerSet the liner paper to use for the double backer from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on thecorresponding radio button.

Set the grammage for this liner from the drop down list of values. Alternative grammages can beloaded from the Compression Information page using the Load VLS option.

14.2.3 Liner Type for Single FacerSet the liner paper to use for the single facer from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on thecorresponding radio button.

Set the grammage for this liner from the drop down list of values.

14.2.4 Flute Media GrammageOnly CAA media is available for the flute currently.

Set the grammage for this media from the drop down list of values.

14.2.5 Liner Type for Centre LinerWhere double or triple wall board is to be used, a centre liner is required. Set the liner paper touse for the centre liner from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on the corresponding radio button.


14.2.6 Liner Type for Second CentreWhere triple wall board is to be used, a second centre liner is required. Set the liner paper to usefor the second centre liner from Kraft, Test or Chip by clicking on the corresponding radio button.


14.2.7 Save Material DetailsThe newly defined material settings can be saved for future use with this type of material.

Click on this command button. The name to use to identify this material is now requested. Typean appropriate name and click OK. This material will now be added to the list of materialsavailable and can be accessed for use in future calculations using this material type via theCompression Information tab.

14.2.8 Delete Current Material



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

This command removes the current material from the list of available materials. It should beused with care as no confirmation is required before the material and its definition areremoved.

However, you are not allowed to remove the DefaultTestMaterial which is the default materialdefinition.

Once you have defined the case to be used and the corrugated board composition andgrammages, click on OK. The compression calculations will now be carried out based on thegiven values. The compression details will then be displayed.

14.2.9 Compression DetailsDimensions of the case and details of the board type and composition with correspondinggrammages are displayed. These are visual confirmation of the compression options previouslyset.

A set of calculated values relating to the strength of the specified case are then displayed. Afurther explanation of some of these values now follows :-

• Maximum Case Compression Load - This is the maximum weight in Kg that the case will support on top of it.

• Safe Case Load - This is the maximum weight in Kg that each box should safely hold.

• Minimum Burst and Minimum E.C.T. (Edge Crush Test) - industry standard terms relating to the strength of a given box to withstand damage

Once you have examined the values you have four commands available as follows:-

14.3 Save...Use this option to save the current set of values to a CMP file for future use.

Activate the command. The File Save As dialog will now appear. Enter a filename for the CMP filein the usual way.

14.4 Print...The values can be printed using this command.

Activate the command. The standard Print dialog is now displayed. Set up the printer in the usualway. You can also opt to print the values to file.

14.5 EndActivate this command when you have finished examining the compression values and wish toterminate the Compression command.

14.6 Proceed...This command returns you to the Compression Options dialog ready to define another set ofdetails for a different case or material and carry out the corresponding compression calculations.



Stora Compression

KASEMAKE

15 Stora Compression

The Stora compression command is used to calculate certain properties and strengths of a basiccorrugated case. It produces estimated values, using theoretical calculations which assume idealconditions for storage of paper used.

16 Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu

16.1 Add Frames...

The Add Frames... command enables the current design to be divided up into a series ofmanageable frames in preparation for plotting to a KM Series conveyor plotter.

Registration marks are also positioned with this command to enable each section of the designto be located relative to the previous one for a continuous plot.

Activate this command. The Conveyor Registration dialog is now displayed:-

Command Stora Compression

Menu Tools->Stora Compression


Command Add Frames...

Menu Tools->Conveyor Plot->Add Frames...




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

16.1.1 Registration MarksStyle

The style to use to represent the registration marks is defined here. To change the style first clickon the button representing the current style. The Registration Mark Type dialog now appears. Setthe type of registration mark required from :-

Disabled

Choose this option if you do not require a registration mark. This is represented by a cross inthe Converyor Registration dialog.

Diameter

Choose this option to display the registration mark as a circle with a cross hair centred on thecircle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle.

You will need to set the diameter to use to define the registration mark by clicking on the valueand typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

Finally you need to determine the ground to place the registration marks in by selecting fromthe drop down list.

A circle with a cross hair is displayed in the Conveyor Registration dialog to show that this typeof registration mark is to be used.

Symbol

Choose this option to display the registration mark as a predefined symbol.

Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayedto help you to identify the appropriate one. The chosen symbol will be displayed in theConveyor Registration dialog.

Click on OK to return to the Conveyor Registration dialog. The newly chosen registration markstyle will be shown.

NumberDetermine the number of registration marks you wish to position for each frame. Choose from:-

•2 - to display registration marks at the bottom left and bottom right of each frame

•3 - as 2 but display an additional registration mark at the top left of each frame

•4 - as 2 but display additional registration marks at the top left and top right of each frame

Click on the corresponding radio button to set a value.

Add to first frame onlySet this option if you wish to only include registration marks in the first frame. Clear this optionif you wish to include registration marks in all the frames.

Frame SizeThe frame size is used to determine how to divide up the current design. Set the length to use.This represents the distance that the plotter advances for each plot. Enter a suitable value directlyor scroll with the arrows.

The height field is automatically calculated taking into account the height of the design and anymargins and offsets which are to be applied.



Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Cut OffsetThe cut offset determines the distance between the extents of the design and the centre of theregistration marks.

•Front edge - determines the horizontal placement of the first registration mark in the inital (left most) frame. It is the offset from the left hand edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark.

•Base edge - determines the vertical placement of the bottom row of registration marks. It is the offset from the bottom edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark.

•Rear edge - determines the horizontal placement of the registration marks in the final frame. It is the offset from the right hand edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark.

•Top edge - determines the vertical placement of the top row of registration marks. It is the offset from the top edge of the design to the centre of each registration mark.

For each offset type a value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

Frame OffsetThe frame offset determines the horizontal position of all but the first and final registration marks.

•Left - is the distance between the left hand edge of the frame and the left hand registration mark.

•Right - is the distance between the right hand edge of the frame and the right hand registration mark.


MarginMargins determine the distance between the extents of the frame and the centre of theregistration marks.

•Left- determines the horizontal distance between the left hand extent of the first frame and the centre of the first registration mark.

•Bottom - determines the vertical distance between the bottom extent of each frame and the bottom row of registration marks.

•Top - determines the vertical distance between the top extent of each frame and the top row of registration marks.


Finally click on OK to save the settings and add the frames and registration marks as per the newsettings. If frames and registration marks have previously been positioned on the design you willbe asked for confirmation to apply the new settings as the previous frames and registration markswill be removed.

Click on Cancel to abandon any changes.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

16.2 Adjust Frames

The Adjust Frames command enables any frames which have already been positioned to beresized. Registration marks are also repositioned as the frames are resized to maintain any givenoffsets and margins as far as possible. If necessary additional frames will also be added.

Activate this command. You will be prompted to mark a line. Identify one of the vertical framedivisions by clicking with the left hand mouse button near to it. The chosen frame division willnow be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation. Move the cursor over the selected framedivision and the cursor will change to a double ended arrow indicating that it can be dragged.Resize the frame by clicking and holding the left mouse button over the selected frame divisionthen move the cursor to drag it. All attached frames and registration marks will also move withthe selected frame division and if necessary an additional frame and registration marks willappear. Release the left hand mouse button to reposition the frames.

17 Border Sub-MenuA border is positioned around a design and is normally specific to a particular Company. Itcontains text items which are normally details about the enclosed design. In addition it cancontain drawn information e.g. Company Logo.

Some of the text items can be input as masks and changed as applicable to the current design.In addition, some or all of the masks can be linked to the database. Masks can also be linked toa variable table.

The border menu gives access to the Load Border, Edit Border and Create Border commandswhich are described in the following section.

17.1 Load

The load border command allows you to specify a border to position around your current design.

- Activate the command. The File Open dialog will now appear requesting a filename for the border to be loaded. Both borders created with KASEMAKE, .AGB files by default and designs created with previous versions, .BRD files by default, can be loaded.

Set the filename in the usual way.

- Set the Database option if you want to substitute any masks linked to a database field with the information from the current database record. The database will open automatically if you set this option and you have not previously opened it.

Clear the Database option if you do not wish to update the border with database information.

Command Adjust Frames

Menu Tools->Conveyor Plot->Adjust Frames


Command Load

Menu Tools->Border->Load




Border Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

- Finally, click OK. The requested border will now be loaded and positioned around your cur-rent design.

The whole design inclusive of border will now automatically zoom to fill the screen. Initially themask fields will contain *’s, unless the Database option has been set, in which case any maskslinked to a database field will be updated to the corresponding values in the current databaserecord. Use the Border Edit command to set the masks to their appropriate values.

17.2 Edit

The Border Edit command is used to modify the contents of the mask fields for the currentlyloaded border. This command is therefore only available if a border is present.

- Activate this command. The Border Edit Window is now displayed. This comprises a row of command buttons and a scrollable list of prompts and their corresponding masks for the cur-rent border.

- Click in the mask field to edit its contents. This will select the current text ready for you to type in its place. Alternatively, use the arrow keys and backspace and delete to move about the mask fields, then retype. There is a limit on the number of characters that can be entered for each individual mask. This is normally illustrated by the number of *’s in the mask field when the border is first loaded.

- Use the tab key and arrow keys to move between mask fields. Any auto number fields need not be edited as they are generated automatically.

17.2.1 Command Buttons

17.2.1.1 Delete MaskThe Delete Mask command removes the contents of the mask where the cursor is. It isparticularly useful for clearing a field which contains its maximum number of characters as nochanges can be made to full fields.

17.2.1.2 CloseThis command closes the Edit Border window and returns you to the drawing screen. Anychanges are saved and the corresponding masks updated in the border.

17.3 Create

The Create Border command allows you to produce border files or drawing surrounds. Thesecan be borders with links to the database or simple borders to annotate your designs e.g. jobsheets.

Command Edit

Menu Tools->Border->Edit


Command Create

Menu Tools->Border->Create




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

Borders are made up of three different categories of element:-

• Drawn items - including the lines that make up the border sheet and text which is purely for annotation

• Prompts - the text that labels a field or set of fields

• Masks - responses associated with each prompt, the contents of which will vary with each design. At least one mask is associated with each prompt. Multiple masks per prompt are permitted.

Before creating your border you need to design a border template. A sample border templateborderTemplate.AGD can be found in the Samples directory.

To design your own template you need to produce a standard design for the border with thefollowing considerations:-

• Leave an area blank for the design to occupy when the border is loaded

• The prompt and masks should be represented by ordinary text. It is normal to type *’s for the mask field, the number of *’s determining the maximum length of the mask. If a mask is to be linked to the database it should be represented by the name of the database field enclosed by square brackets, then padded out with *’s to the maximum length of that database field. e.g. [Customer]********** would link the mask to the customer field of the database with a maximum of 20 characters.

• If you wish to take advantage of the KASEMAKE’s autoscale function for plotting, you should try to design the outline of your border in the same ratio as that of the plottable area of your output device. This ensures maximum paper usage in both dimensions when the drawing is adjusted to fill the paper in its largest dimension.

Once you have designed your border template you should save it as a standard .AGD file. Youare now ready to convert it to a border or .AGB file.

Before activating the Create Border command, clear the drawing area. Activate the CreateBorder command. This will guide you through several steps which will convert your bordertemplate into a border as follows:-

17.3.1 Loading the border templateThe first stage of the conversion is to load the border template. The File Open dialog appears.Enter the name of the border template in the usual way.

The border template will now be loaded into the empty drawing area and zoomed to fill thescreen.

17.3.2 Identifying the Drawing AreaThe next stage is to identify the area of the border that the design will occupy when a borderis loaded. This is referred to as the screen area and defined as a rectangle.

The system prompts for the first corner of the screen area. Identify a point on the diagonal ofthe box which is to be used for the screen area using any of the drawing modes.

As you move the cursor a rubber band box will appear defining the proposed screen area.Identify the opposite end of the diagonal which defines the required screen area. Again, anyof the drawing modes can be used.

17.3.3 Identifying the Prompt and Mask Fields



Registration

KASEMAKE

Now you need to identify each prompt and associated mask or masks. First identify theprompt by clicking near to the text string which represents it. The identified prompt will beselected and you will be prompted to identify a mask.

Identify the mask in the same way. You will then be prompted for the next prompt. If however,you wish to identify multiple masks, hold down the Shift key whilst you identify the secondand subsequent text strings to convert to masks. The KASEMAKE system will continue toselect them increasing the selection box to show that they are linked.

Releasing the Shift key returns the system to identifying a prompt field. Mark the next promptfield and its corresponding mask(s) as before. Repeat until all the prompts and correspondingmasks have been identified.

As a prompt or set of masks is identified, it is removed from the screen this is to make it easierto ascertain which prompts and masks are still to be defined.

If you make a mistake during the prompt and mask identification click with the right handmouse button within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. If two prompts /masks are close together and you simply want to retrieve the next nearest text element chooseNext. If you want to start the identification process again, choose Reset. Any removedprompt and mask fields will be redisplayed and you can start the identification process again.

17.3.4 Saving the Border FileWhen you have finished identifying the prompts and masks click with the right hand mousebutton within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. Choose Save. The CreateBorder dialog will now appear for you to specify a filename for your newly defined border.Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK to save the border file.

The border is now ready to use. Try it out using the Load Border and Edit Border commands.

18 Registration

The Registration command as the name suggests places registration marks on the design. Thisenables the design to be located relative to printed artwork. The Registration command works onthe visible part of the design only.

Activate the command. The Registration dialog now appears. This shows a thumbnail sketch ofthe current design. Registration marks can be placed at any of nine pre-defined positions. Thesepositions are shown with respect to the thumbnail sketch.

Command Registration

Menu Tools->Registration




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

18.1 ProfilesIt is possible to define profiles detailing specific characteristics for the nine registration marks.These profiles can then be stored and used again.

Currently loaded profile

The name of the profile currently being used is displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list ofavailable profiles. Scroll to the required profile and click on it to select it.

Any changes made to date will be saved with the previous profile. The newly selected profile willthen be loaded. The registration marks and the margins displayed in the dialog will be updatedto reflect any newly loaded characteristics.

Add New...

The Add New... command allows you to define a new profile. Activate this command to displaythe Add New Registration Profile dialog. Type the name of the new profile then click on OK toclose the dialog. Any changes you now make to the registration mark settings will be saved asthe newly named profile.

Delete Profile

The Delete Profile command allows you to delete a profile which is no longer needed. Activatethis command to delete the profile displayed as the current profile. You will first be prompted forconfirmation. Upon choosing Yes the profile will be deleted. Choose No to leave the profileunchanged.

18.2 Settings

18.2.1 Allow Edit



Registration

KASEMAKE

This option must be set before any changes can be made to the current registration settings andmargins. Click on Allow Edit to set the option, the button will appear pressed in if it is set.

The registration marks may now be accessed to make changes. In addition, the Remove ExistingRegistration Marks option and Apply to Selected Items option (where there are items selected)will be accessible.

18.2.2 Changing a Registration MarkClick on a registration mark button to change its settings, including whether you require aregistration mark at the corresponding position or not. The following dialog will be displayed:-

Set the type of registration mark required at this position. Choose from :-

Disabled

Choose this option if you do not require a registration mark at this position. This is representedby a cross in the Registration dialog.

Diameter

Choose this option to display the registration mark as a circle with a cross hair centred on thecircle‘s centre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle.

You will need to set the diameter to use to define the registration mark by clicking on the valueand typing the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

Finally you need to determine the ground to place the registration marks in by selecting fromthe drop down list.

A circle with a cross hair is displayed in the Registration dialog to show that this type ofregistration mark is selected for this position.

Symbol

Choose this option to display the registration mark as a predefined symbol.

Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayedto help you to identify the appropriate one. The chosen symbol will be displayed in theRegistration dialog.

Click on OK to return to the Registration dialog. Any amendments to the chosen button willbe shown.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

18.2.3 Remove Existing Registration MarksWhere you have activated Allow Edit, you can determine whether you wish to remove any existingregistration marks from your design. Set or clear this option as required.

18.2.4 Apply to Selected ItemsWhere you have selected items within your drawing and you have activated Allow Edit, thisoption will be displayed within the Registration Dialog. Determine whether you wish to applyregistration marks only to the selection set, or whether you wish to apply registration marks tothe entire design. Set or clear this option as required.

18.2.5 MarginsSpecify any margins to be left between the edge of the design and the centre of the registrationmark.

Set the left, right, top and bottom margins required by clicking on the value and typing the newvalue directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

Finally, click on OK to close the Registration dialog and position the registration marks on to yourdesign as per the given settings.

19 ImageThe Image sub-menu gives access to the following four commands for manipulating images.

19.1 Convert

The Convert command takes an image and produces a vector representation of the image. Theimage is processed a row at a time and each continuous set of pixels is replaced by a single line.

- Activate the command. A Converted Image Ground dialog will now appear. Set the ground to place the vectors in from the drop down list.

- Click on OK. The vectorised version of the Image will now be displayed in the chosen ground overlaying the scanned image. The vectors are placed in a group.

19.2 Invert

The Invert command takes an image and reverses its background and foreground pixels.

Command Convert

Menu Tools->Image->Convert


Command Invert

Menu Tools->Image->Invert




Image

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. The Image will now be redisplayed inverted. i.e. all the foreground willbe drawn in the background colour and vice versa.

19.3 Outline

The Outline command produces a vector representation of the outline of the loaded image,including outlining any islands.

Activate the command. The Tracing Options dialog appears containing the following settings:-

19.3.1 Tolerance This determines how many rows of pixels to connect for each line of the outline to create asmoother outline. A value of 1 is least smooth but follows the original most closely. A value of 10produces the smoothest result but follows the original image least closely.

Type the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll it.

19.3.2 Min Line Length This determines how long a line must be to be considered when generating the outline. Type therequired value directly or use the arrows to scroll it.

19.3.3 GroundSet the ground for the outline to be placed in from the drop down list.

Choose OK to accept the options. The Use Defaults button allows you to reset the currentsettings to their default values.

19.4 Centre Line

The Centre Line command is similar to the Outline command in that it produces a vectorrepresentation of the outline of the loaded image, including outlining any islands. Unlike theOutline Command it will replace two separate outlines with a centre line where they are within agiven distance of each other.

Activate the command. The Tracing Options dialog appears containing the same settings as theOutline command. Refer to “Outline” on page 61 for further details.

Command Outline

Menu Tools->Image->Outline


Command Centre Line

Menu Tools->Image->Centre Line




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

20 Reduction

The Reduction command is used on designs to be used for the manufacture of rotary dies. Itcompresses the design along one axis to compensate for the distortion created by its cylindricalpresentation. This command works on any design parameterised or non-parameterised butwithout text.

Activate the command. The Move / Copy rollup will appear with the reduction page activated.

Set the axis in which you require the reduction to take place by clicking on the correspondingradio button.

Next set the shrinkage factor this is the percentage of the overall size to reduce the design by.Type the new value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

Click on Apply. The design will now be shrunk accordingly. Any circular arcs will now be replacedby elliptical arcs.

21 Check Integrity

The Check Integrity command will search through all the elements in the design and check forany potential problem areas which might prevent some commands from being able to executesuccessfully. An example would be a break in a line which would prevent the Nett Area commandfrom working properly.

Activate the command. A search will now be made of the current design. Any problems will beindicated by a square marker.

22 Indicate Overlaps

The Indicate Overlaps command will search through all the elements in the design and check forany areas where one or more design elements overlap.

Activate the command. A search will now be made of the current design. Any overlappingelements will be indicated by a square marker.

Command Reduction

Menu Tools->Reduction


Command Check Integrity

Menu Tools->Check Integrity


Command Indicate Overlaps

Menu Tools->Indicate Overlaps




Remove Markers

KASEMAKE

23 Remove Markers

The Remove Markers command as its name suggest will remove any markers currently on displaye.g. markers produced to indicate overlaps.

Activate the command. The markers will now be removed from the display.

24 Symbols Sub-Menu

24.1 Create DB Symbol

The Create DB Symbol command allows you to create a symbol which consists of a prompt andmask as you would find in a border. As is the case with a border, the mask can be linked to a fieldin the database and its value substituted for the value in the current database record.

The symbol can be used repeatedly always substituting a linked mask with the correspondingvalue from the current database record.

Before you can create a DB symbol you need to draw it. As for borders the symbol can consist ofany of the following elements :-

• Drawn items - any design elements including text which is purely for annotation

• Prompts - the text that labels a field or set of fields

• Masks - responses associated with each prompt, the contents of which will vary. At least one mask is associated with each prompt. Multiple masks per prompt are permitted.

The prompt and masks should be represented by ordinary text.

E.g. A prompt "My Customer" could be followed by the mask "[Customer]" to link the mask to thecustomer field of the database. The text would be entered as contained in inverted commas usingthe text command.

To create a DB Symbol activate this command. You will be prompted to identify a prompt. Identifythe prompt by clicking near to the text string which represents it. The identified prompt will beselected and you will be prompted to identify a mask.

Identify the mask in the same way. You will then be prompted for the next prompt. If however,you wish to identify multiple masks, hold down the Shift key whilst you identify the second andsubsequent text strings to convert to masks. KASEMAKE will continue to select them increasingthe selection box to show that they are linked. Releasing the Shift key returns the system toidentifying a prompt field. Mark the next prompt field and its corresponding mask(s) as before.Repeat until all the prompts and corresponding masks have been identified. As a prompt or set

Command Remove Markers

Menu Tools->Remove Markers


Command Create DB Symbol

Menu Tools->Symbols->Create DB Symbol




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

of masks is identified, it is removed from the screen this is to make it easier to ascertain whichprompts and masks are still to be defined.

When you have finished identifying the prompts and masks click with the right hand mousebutton within the drawing area. A pop up menu will now appear. Choose Save. The Create DBSymbol dialog will now appear for you to specify a filename for your newly defined DB Symbol.The DB symbol should be saved in the symbols folder or in a sub-directory of the symbols folderspecified in the File->Preferences command. The default directory is Kasemake\Parts\<SymbolsFolder>.See “File Locations” on page 2-46.

Enter the filename in the usual way. Click on OK to save the file. The Symbol is now ready for useby the View->Symbols command. See “Symbols...” on page 10-4.

24.2 Modify DB Symbol

The Modify Symbol command is used to modify the contents of the mask fields for the currentlyselected DB symbol. You must therefore select a DB symbol before activating this command.

Activate the command. An edit dialog now appears which comprises a row of command buttonsand a scrollable list of prompts and their corresponding masks for the current DB Symbol.

Click in the mask field to edit its contents. This will select the current text ready for you to type inits place. Alternatively, use the arrow keys and backspace and delete to move about the maskfields, then retype. There is a limit on the number of characters that can be entered for anindividual mask determined by the length of the text string used to create it.

Delete Mask

The Delete Mask command removes the contents of the mask where the cursor is. It is particularlyuseful for clearing a field which contains its maximum number of characters as no changes canbe made to full fields.

Close

This command closes the edit dialog and returns you to the drawing screen. Any changes aresaved and the corresponding masks updated in the DB Symbol.

Command Modify DB Symbol

Menu Tools->Symbols->Modify DB Symb




Calculator...

KASEMAKE

25 Calculator...

The Calculator... command when activated displays a simple calculator providing basicfunction. These are add, subtract, multiply, divide, percent and shift left where the numberdisplayed is divided by 10 and any fractional part lost.

26 Fractional Keypad...

The Fractional Keypad... command when activated displays an adapted calculator enablingyou to input fractional values. Only a limited set of pre defined fractions can be used.

Display the calculator. Then enter the fractional value using the following 3 steps:-

• Enter any integer part by clicking on the numbers in the usual way

• Choose the base fraction or denominator by clicking on the appropriate predefined fraction key. One unit of the fraction is automatically entered in the numerical display area.

• Finally determine the numerator or how many of these base fractions you require.

Copy the value to the current dialog field by clicking on Enter.

The BS key can be used to revert back to the previous step. You can step right back to thebeginning ready to input the integer part again if you wish.

The effect depends upon the stage of entry you were at as follows:-

• Clicking on BS when you have just entered the numerator resets the numerator to 1 corre-sponding to the base fraction.

• Clicking on BS when you are about to define the numerator removes the base fraction for you to reenter it.

• Clicking on BS when you are about to define the base fraction removes the integer part for you to reenter it.

The Fractional Keypad can be rolled up using the arrow button. Conversely, the arrow button willexpand it when it is in its rolled up state.Choose the cross to close the Fractional Keypad.

27 Task Lists - GeneralA task list is a list of commands which are assembled in a specific order to be executed as a batch.The current task list is displayed in a combo box in the Tools toolbar. A new list can be selectedby accessing the combo box and choosing from the list of available task lists.

A task list is executed one command at a time using the Run Current Task command.

Command Calculator...

Menu Tools->Calculator...


Command Fractional Keypad...

Menu Tools->Fractional Keypad...




8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

A task list is assembled and manipulated using the task list editor accessed through the Edit TaskList... command.

27.1 Run Current Task

The Run Current Task command executes each command in the current task list in turn.

Before you can activate this command you need to set the current task list using the drop downlocated in the Tools toolbar.

To change the task list, first click on the arrow next to the current task list to display the availabletask lists. Scroll to the required task list and click on it to set it as the current task list.

Activate the Run Current Task command and each command in the current task list will beexecuted in turn.

27.2 Edit Task List...

The Edit Task List... command provides access to the task list editor so that task lists can be createdand manipulated. Commands are available to delete a task list, save different sets of task lists,load a previously saved task list and execute the task list.

To prevent accidental changes being made to task lists, an additional command button, labelledAllow Edit is also provided.

Activate this command. The Task List Editor dialog will now be displayed:-

Command Run Current Task

Menu Tools->Run Current Task


Command Edit Task List...

Menu Tools->Edit Task List...




Task Lists - General

KASEMAKE

Name

The name associated with the current set of tasks is displayed. A scrolling list of commands isdisplayed in the list labelled Available. A second list labelled Selected displays the tasks currentlychosen for the named task list.

To view a different task list simply click on the arrow and scroll to the name of the required tasklist.

Allow Edit

Before making changes to an existing task list, you need to choose Allow Edit. This enables theother command buttons making them accessible and allows you to move commands betweenthe Selected list, and the Available list. It protects against accidental changes

Add

To move commands into the Selected list, simply scroll through the Available list to the requiredcommand, click on the name of the command and choose Add>>. The selected command willnow be appended to the current task list.

Remove

To remove commands from the task list, click on the name of the command you wish to removeto select it, then choose <<Remove.

Move Up

The Move Up command allows you to reorder the task list. Click on the name of the commandyou wish to move up the task list, then choose Move Up to move the command one position upthe task list. Repeat as necessary.

Move Down

Similarly, the Move Down command is available to reorder the task list. Click on the name of thecommand you wish to move down the task list, then choose Move Down to move the commandone position down the task list. Repeat as necessary.



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

Options...

Where a command which uses options is placed in the task list, this command will allow anyoptions to be set / checked. Simply click on the name of a command. If options are available, theOptions... button will become available. To access the options for the currently selectedcommand simply click on the Options... button. The options applicable to the command will nowbe displayed and can be changed in the usual way.

Any amendments to the options will then apply for all executions of this task list until they arechanged again using the Options... command.

Delete

The Delete command will delete the current task list. It requires no confirmation so should beused with care.

New

The New command is available to start a new task list. Activate this command. You will now beprompted for a name for the new task list. Enter a suitable name then click on OK. The name fieldwill now be updated to show the new name. The Selected list will also be cleared ready for thenew task list to be assembled.

Save

The Save command enables a task list to be saved for future use. Simply click on Save. The tasklist will automatically be saved under the given name.

Execute

The Execute command executes each command in the current task list in turn. Simply click onExecute. The dialog will be closed and the effect of each command will be displayed in turn.

Close

The Close command closes the Task List Editor dialog.

28 Sheets Sub-MenuThe Sheets Sub-Menu contains commands for building up a list of stock sheets and enables youto determine whether a stock sheet or a sheet made to order is required in order to minimisewastage.

28.1 Sheet Settings...

The Sheet Settings... command enables a list of stock sheets to be defined. It also enables aspecific stock sheet to be placed around the current layout.

Command Sheet Settings...

Menu Tools->Sheets->Sheet Settings...




Sheets Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate this command and the Layout Sheet dialog is displayed:-

28.1.1 Adding A Stock Sheet DefinitionClick on Add New... to define a new stock sheet. You will be prompted for a name. Type a namethen click on OK to close the dialog. The currently loaded profile field will now be updated toshow the newly entered name. You can now define the new stock sheet as follows:-

Max SizeThe maximum dimensions for the sheet. Enter the width and height by typing each value directlyor using the arrow keys to scroll.

MarginsDefine a margin to be left between each edge of the layout and the actual sheet. For each marginenter the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

GroundThis is the ground to use to display the sheet when positioned around a layout. Click on the arrowto display a drop down list of available grounds. Move to the required ground then click to selectit.

External Cut GroundThis is the ground that contains the external cut elements of the design. It is needed to determinethe extents for positioning the design within the given sheet. Again, select from the drop downlist of grounds.

AlignmentThe alignment determines how the current layout is positioned within the given sheet. Click onthe appropriate radio button to select it. Choose from:-



8 - Tools Commands

KASEMAKE

• Freehand - to specify a position for the sheet with respect to the current layout. Once the dia-log is closed, you will be prompted to mark a position for the layout sheet. This point locates the bottom left corner of the given sheet.

• Bottom/Left - to position the current layout at the bottom left corner of the sheet.

• Centre X - to position the current layout at the bottom of the sheet but centred horizontally.

• Centre X and Y - to position the current layout centred horizontally and vertically within the sheet.

28.1.2 Deleting a Stock Sheet DefinitionTo remove a stock sheet definition, first ensure that it is the currently selected stock sheet bychanging the currently loaded profile field if necessary.

Now click on the Delete button. You will now be prompted for confirmation that you wish toremove this stock sheet definition. Click on OK to permanently remove the stock sheet definitionor click on Cancel to leave the definition unchanged.

28.1.3 Changing a Stock Sheet DefinitionBefore you can change a stock sheet definition, ensure that it is the currently selected stock sheetby changing the currently loaded profile field if necessary.

Now click on the Allow Edit button. All the fields will now be accessible, allowing you to makeany changes to the current stock sheet definition. Please refer to “Adding A Stock SheetDefinition” on page 69 for a full explanation of these settings.

Finally click on the Allow Edit button again, to complete the editing process and accept anyamendments.

Once changes have been made to the stock sheet definitions, cllick on OK to accept any changesand position the currently selected stock sheet within your design layout. Click on Cancel toremove the dialog and abandon any changes made.

28.1.4 Adjusting a Stock Sheet once placedThe Sheet Settings... command as well as assisting with the definition of new stock sheets is usedto place a specific stock sheet around the current layout or to adjust the position of a stock sheet.

• Once the Layout Sheet dialog is displayed, select a new stock sheet by changing the currently loaded profile field. Clicking OK will remove the existing stock sheet and load the newly selected one.

• To change the extents of the layout within the stock sheet you can change the external cut ground to take into account further design elements. Again click on OK to adjust the design within the stock sheet.

• To change the alignment of the stock sheet with respect to the current layout, simply select an alternative alignment option. Again click on OK to realign the stock sheet.



Sheets Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

28.2 Trim...

The Trim... command allows the current stock sheet to be trimmed to fit the current layout.Activate this command and the Trim Layout Sheet dialog is displayed:-

MarginsThe margins are automatically completed using the values specified for the current stock sheetusing the Sheet Settings... command. You can now, if required define an alternative margin tobe left between each edge of the layout and the area representing the maximum plottable areawithin the sheet. For each margin enter the required value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

Alternatively, leave the values unchanged to accept the default margins.

External Cut GroundThe External Cut Ground setting specifies the ground which contains the external cut elements ofthe design. It is needed to determine the extents of the design. Click on the arrow and select fromthe drop down list of grounds.

Finally click on OK to trim the sheet to contain the current design layout leaving the given marginsor click on Cancel to abandon this command.

28.3 Hide/Show

The Hide/Show command enables the display of the current stock sheet to be switched on andoff. Activate the command to toggle the display of the stock sheet on/off.

Command Trim...

Menu Tools->Sheets->Trim...


Command Hide/Show

Menu Tools->Sheets->Hide/Show




KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

9 - Diemaking Commands

1 Stripping Knives MenuStripping knives are added to the design to make the wastage produced when the designis die pressed from a larger sheet of board, more manageable. They have the effect ofbreaking up the waste material that is left into small pieces capable of automatic disposal.

Accessing Stripping Knives produces a drop down menu of commands available for placingstripping knives within the current design.

To use any of these commands you must first have on screen a design, minus dimensions,with the outer cutter path contained in a single ground.

There are tool settings common to all the stripping knife tools. These are presented in theoptions dialog for each of the tools and described in the Options section for each tool.

1.1 Manual Stripping Knives

This tool is used for placing stripping knives by hand. There are two modes of operation forthis tool:-

Normal This method is for positioning knives horizontally or vertically. If you have opted for normalplacement of stripping knives, you will be prompted to position the knife. Move the cursorclose to the position on the outside edge that you wish to place the knife. Identify theposition and the knife will be drawn. Holding down the shift key whilst moving the cursorwill result in the directly opposite knife being created as well.

You may then be prompted to mark the end of the knife depending upon the options youhave set. The knife will rubber band to help you to determine the correct end point.

You can also move within an island or cutout to place a horizontal stripping knife. Use theshift key whilst moving the cursor over a cutout or island and an internal vertical knife willbe drawn instead.

OrthogonalThis method is for placing angled knives that run at right angles to a cut edge thenhorizontally or vertically to the edge of the sheet.

IIf you have selected orthogonal placement of knives, you will be asked to mark a start pointfor the knife. You need to identify a line to draw orthogonally to. Move close to the line andmark a point. The nearest line will now be selected and an angled rule piece is drawn fromthe given point. By moving the cursor you can adjust the angled rule piece, until it has thedesired shape. Mark a point to define the end and give it its final position.

If drawing from an intersection point of two lines, there are two possibilities for the line todraw orthogonal to. Should the incorrect line be highlighted when you perform theselection, you can choose the other line by using ‘Select Next’ in the context menu (rightmouse button).

Command Manual Stripping Knives

Menu Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Manual

Toolbar Button: Diemaking Tool Bar


Release 8.0Page 9-1


KASEMAKE

1.1.1 Stripping Knives Options

You need to specify the ground or colour in which the outer cutter path of the design is drawn,usually ground 5, and the ground / colour into which the stripping knives should be drawn. Setthe corresponding combo boxes.

You need to specify the minimum length for the stripping knives i.e. how far they should extend.This can be determined by the sheet size where the knives will be sized to extend across theentire length of the sheet, leaving a given margin. Alternatively, you can opt to specify theminimum length of a stripping knife, setting the value field accordingly.

Set the width of the stripping knife i.e. the width of the rule to accomodate the knife.

Determine whether your want to leave a fixed distance from the front edge rule before placingthe first knife or not. If so, check the Specify Min Dist from Front Cut Rule check box and set thevalue field as required. If not ensure this option is cleared.

Next, you need to set the knife end type. Set the desired type by clicking on the correspondingradio button. Where L shaped or T shaped knife ends are chosen, the end dimension should alsobe set. This is the length of the L or T.

If angled knives are required, set the Orthogonal Knives option.You must then determine thelength of the angled part. This can be either variable length, where the length is determined byspecifying an end point, or a fixed length can be specified by setting the corresponding field.

Release 8.0Page 9-2


Stripping Knives Menu

KASEMAKE

1.2 Automatic Stripping Knives

This tool will place stripping knives throughout the drawing without any user intervention.

Activate this command. The Stripping Knives options dialog will now be displayed. This is a twopage tabbed dialog. The first page labelled Settings, is identical to the manual stripping knivesoptions. Please refer to “Stripping Knives Options” on page 9-2 for further details.

The second page of options labelled Auto Options, should be set up as follows:-

First define the Separation. In KASEMAKE, stripping knives are defined in a rectangular gridpattern and the separation value is the required distance between adjacent knives. The distancebetween horizontal and vertical knives can be defined independently. Set each value as required.

Determine whether you wish to place knives near to junctions of elements, or at a given distanceaway from the junction.

Decide whether you only want to place knives on horizontal and vertical cut line, or all cut lines.

Decide whether you wish to place stripping knives along the grip edge. Please note that the gripedge is always at the foot of the screen. If you choose not to place stripping knives along thegrip edge, you will need to set the offset from the sheet edge to begin placing the strippingknives.

Command Automatic Stripping Knives

Menu Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Automatic

Toolbar button Diemaking Tool Bar


Release 8.0Page 9-3


KASEMAKE

Choose whether you require internal knives to be positioned. These will be used for cutouts andislands within the design. If you have chosen to include internal knives, you should set theminimum length for the internal stripping knife.

Finally determine whether you wish to position the stripping knives about the centre line of thedesign or from the front edge rule. Set or clear this option as required.

Having specified the settings to use, simply select OK. The system will now produce a gridpattern of knives which do not encroach onto the design as illustrated below.

1.3 Grip Edge Stripping Knives

This command allows knife patterns to be placed along the grip edge of the die. A file can beused where a machine has its own predefined grip edge pattern. Alternatively, the knife patternscan be generated automatically as per the current settings.

Activating this command produces the Stripping Knives options dialog. This is identical to thatdescribed for Manual Stripping Knives but also asks for the method to use to define the gripedge knife pattern.

Command Grip Edge Stripping Knives

Menu Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Grip Edge


Release 8.0Page 9-4


Stripping Knives Menu

KASEMAKE

• Choose Automatic to place the stripping knives automatically according to the remaining settings.

• Choose Use file and specify a filename if you have a predefined knife pattern you wish to load. This will be inserted centred on the current design.

If you choose automatic, you need to set the Auto Options, or second page of settings.

First define the Separation, that is the distance between adjacent knives. The distance betweenhorizontal and vertical knives can be defined independently. Set each value as required.

Determine whether you wish to place knives near to junctions of elements, or at a given distanceaway from the junction.

Decide whether you only want to place knives on horizontal and vertical cut line, or all cut lines.

Finally determine whether you want the knives to be positioned about the centre line of thedesign or measured from the front edge rule.

Grip Edge Data FileThe grip edge knife pattern file is an .AGD drawing saved with the origin at 0,0 (Absolute). They-axis corresponds with the centre line of the drawing, so the first knife should be drawn as avertical line along this axis Vertical lines are drawn either side of this axis to mark the grip edgeknife pattern. The knives are inserted centred on the current design / layout.

1.4 Single Knife

Single knife gives complete control over positioning of knives and is particularly useful foraccessing awkward areas.

Activate the command. You will first be prompted Mark Start. Identify where you wish the knifeto start using the most suitable drawing mode. Next you will be prompted Mark End. Move thecursor and a knife will begin to rubber band following the path of the cursor. Mark the end todetermine its final length using the most appropriate drawing mode. The knife will now bedrawn in the chosen ground.

Note: The ground associated with the knife is determined by the options available with thiscommand. Please refer to “L-Shaped Knives Options” on page 6

1.5 L-Shaped Knives

L-shaped knives are used to enclose awkward areas which will cause problems when waste isstripped. The knives are represented by two lines at 90 degrees to each other, giving the L shape.

To use this tool, you must identify two elements to use to position the start and end of the l-shaped knife respectively. The knife will automatically snap on to the given elements.

The orientation of the knife is determined by the options available to this command.

Command Single Knife

Menu Diemaking->Stripping Knives->Single Knife

Toolbar button: Diemaking Toolbar

Command L-Shaped Knives

Menu Diemaking->Stripping Knives->L-Shaped Knives



Release 8.0Page 9-5


KASEMAKE

1.5.1 L-Shaped Knives Options

• Orthogonal Knives - this option when set, forces the lines produced to be always vertical or horizontal. If this option is cleared, the first line of the knife will be drawn at ninety degrees to the first element selected.

• Knife Ground - this option specifies the ground to place the L-shape knives into.

2 Stripper MenuThe Stripper tool suite provides facilities for producing the male and female stripper and frontedge stripper required to strip away any waste once the design has been die pressed. Struts canbe added to the back board and raised section. Pins and stripping rule can be placed on theInside Male Stripper.

There are a variety of tools provided for stripping.

2.1 Perimeter

This command allows you to identify any male or female stripper to remove waste from theoutside of the design after it is die pressed.

Before you can identify the male and female strippers, you need to position stripping knives atthe bottom left and bottom right of the design to determine the cut off point for the malestripper.

Activate the command. You will now be prompted to identify the start of the perimeter aroundwhich you wish to trace the male and female stripper. First set the options by clicking on theOptions button in the Standard Toolbar. The Stripper Options dialog will now be displayed.

Check and set the options for the male stripper, male raised section and female strippers asrequired, before proceeding with the perimeter command.

Identify the start of the perimeter to begin tracing from by marking the bottom left cutting knifeslightly to one side of the line to determine which side to place the male stripper.

Identify the end of the perimeter to trace to by marking the bottom right cutting knife slightly toone side of the line to determine which side to place the male stripper.

The male and or female strippers will now be generated and displayed as determined by theoptions.

Command Perimeter Stripper

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Perimeter


Release 8.0Page 9-6


Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

2.1.1 Stripper OptionsThe Perimeter Stripper Options dialog is a tabbed dialog containing three pages of settings tospecify the appearance of the male, the male raised section and the female stripper paths. Thereis one tabbed page of options for each of these three categories as follows:-

2.1.1.1 Male

•Enabled - check box to determine whether the male stripper is to be generated or not. Set or clear as required.

•Ground to place the board outline in. Select from the drop down list of available grounds.

•Side extension - set the distance to position the side edges of the male stripper path, measured from the horizontal extents of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value.

•Back extension - set the distance to position the back edge of the male stripper path, measured from the vertical extent of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value.

•Grip edge offset from external cut - the distance to leave between the bottom extent of the design and the grip edge of the perimeter path

•External cut ground - ground used for the outer cut path. Select from the drop down list of available grounds.

•Handhold - Check this option if you wish a hand hold to be placed automatically. The hand hold will be placed centred along the top edge of the board outline, slightly below the top edge. Select the type of handhold to use from the drop down list. Clear this setting if a handhold is not required.


Release 8.0Page 9-7


KASEMAKE

2.1.1.2 Male Raised Section

• Ground - the ground to place the male raised section in. This is usually the same as the female path.

• Offset distance from cut rule - the distance from the external cut path to offset the raised section path.

• Offset from Front stripper - the distance from the front stripping knife to position the male raised section path.

• Outer sections - this can be set using the dieboard sheet size or by specifying a width and height offset from the bounding rectangle of the external cut path.

• Length of strut guide to ignore - this value determines the minimum length of strut path required before a strut is placed. It is set to prevent overuse of struts where several junctions are close together.

• Multiple sections

Check this option if you wish the waste to be divided into multiple sections, where severalstripping knives are used. Clear it if not. The following offsets can be applied where there willbe multiple sections of waste:-

•Offset - set the distance from the stripping knife to position the raised section path.

Release 8.0Page 9-8


Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

•Offset from Rear stripper - set the distance from the rear stripping knife to position the last section of the male raised section path

• Use Supporting struts - set this option if the raised section needs struts. Otherwise clear it.

• Wood Block path only - set this option if waste is forced out using wooden blocks, otherwise clear it.

There are additional settings if you require support struts:

• Place struts at junctions - Set this option to place struts near corners.

• Space edge to edge - set this option to measure the spacing between struts as from the edge of one strut to the edge of another Clear this option to set the spacing from the centre of one strut to the centre of the next.

• Offset - offset of strut path from external cut path.

• Spacing - gap required between struts.

• Circle - set this option for each strut to be represented as a circle. Also set the radius to use for the circle.

• Symbol- set this option for each strut to be represented by a given symbol. Choose the symbol from the drop down list. It will be displayed adjacent to the list to confirm that it is correct.

The symbol to use for struts placed on the back board can also be either a circle or a symbol inthe same way


Release 8.0Page 9-9


KASEMAKE

2.1.1.3 Female

• Enabled - check box to determine whether the female stripper is to be generated or not. Set or clear as required.

• Ground - the ground to place the resulting strip path in. Select from the drop down list of available grounds.

• Offset distance - the offset from the external cut lines to position the female stripper. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value.

• Offset from front - the offset from the front stripping knife to position the female stripper. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value.

• Fillet corners - the corners of the female path where it follows the outline of the design can be optionally filleted. If you choose this option you should also define the radius to use.

• Side extension - this is the distance to extend the female stripper path sideways, measured from the horizontal extents of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value.



Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

• Grip edge offset from external cut - this is the distance to extend the female stripper path towards the grip edge of the die, measured from the vertical extent of the design. Use the arrows to scroll to the required value, or enter the new value directly by selecting the current value and typing the required value.

• External cut ground - the ground that the outline of the design is drawn in. This is common to the Male page of options.

2.2 Inside Stripper

This command allows you to create any internal male and female stripper paths, e.g forinternal cutouts. Conversely to the Perimeter command, the Inside command generates themale stripper on the inside of the cutout and the female stripper on the outside.

Check or set the male raised section and female stripping options before identifying the cutout.

Identify the cutout by marking a point inside it. The system will now trace the male and orfemale paths as per the options.

Repeat for all the internal cutouts as required.

2.2.1 Inside Stripper OptionsThe Inside Stripper Options are presented as a four page tabbed dialog. The first three pagesrelate to options for the male raised section. The final page of options relates to the femalestripper.

2.2.1.1 Male Raised Section 1Set or clear the raised wood sections option as appropriate. Where raised wood sections areto be used, the remaining settings become available. These settings are the same as theperimeter stripper male raised section. Refer to “Male Raised Section” on page 9-8 for furtherdetails.

Command Inside Stripper

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Inside

Toolbar Button: Diemaking Toolbar




KASEMAKE

2.2.1.2 Male Raised Section 2This page of options defines the constraints for pin positioning, where pins are to be usedrather than struts.

• Pins - set this option if pins are to be used

• Ground - the ground for the pin

• Head ground - the ground for the pin head

• Offset - offset from the external cut path for positioning of pins

• Pin To Pin Spacing - gap between pins, with a given tolerance.

• Path To Path Spacing - spacing between pin contour paths, with a given tolerance.

• Minimum Rule Length - the minimum length for a rule piece to be inserted

• Rule Length Cutback - the length of rule pieces

• Hatch Gap - grid spacing for calculating rule: the finer the spacing the more accurate the placement of rule, but the slower the calculation will be.

• Pin to Pin tolerance - for merging pins between pin paths. If two pins on different paths fall within this tolerance, they will be replaced with a single pin.



Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

2.2.1.3 Male Raised Section Pin Settings

There are three possible kinds of pin. The highest priority pins will be placed in favour to thosewith lower priority. This makes it possible to use many high priority large pins and fewer smallerpins, thus maximising utilisation of resources.

The options are repeated for each pin to be used as follows:-

•Available - Set this option if this level of pin is to be used.

•Circle - set this option for each pin to be represented as a circle. Also set the radius to use for the circle.

•Symbol- set this option for each pin to be represented by a given symbol. Choose the symbol from the drop down list. It will be displayed adjacent to the list to confirm that it is correct.

The symbol to use for pins placed on the back board can also be either a circle or a symbol inthe same way.




KASEMAKE

2.2.1.4 Female SettingsThe female settings are a subset of the perimeter stripper female settings. Refer to “Female”on page 9-10 for further details.

2.3 Front Edge Stripper

The Front Edge command produces the stripper required to remove the wastage producedwhen the grip edge is die pressed.

Activate this commmand and check the current options.

Identify the start of the perimeter for the front edge, by selecting the bottom left stripping knifeslightly to one side to identify which side the front edge is.

Identify the end of the perimeter where the front edge stripper should be generated to.

The front edge stripper will now be generated tracing the profile of the front edge of the design.

2.3.1 Front Edge Stripper Options The options available for the front edge stripper are divided into two sections:-

•Front Edge - settings for the actual stripper

•Magic Eye - settings for magic eye cutouts

These options are now explained.

Command Front Edge Stripper

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Front Edge




Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

2.3.1.1 Front Edge

• Ground - the ground to place the resulting strip path in.

• Offset distance - the offset from the external cut lines to use to position the front edge stripper.

• Side extension - this is the distance to extend the front edge stripper path sideways, measured from the horizontal extents of the design.

• Depth - this is the distance to extend the front edge stripper path, measured from the most vertical point towards the grip edge of the design.

• Mounting hole pattern - if selected, this allows a file to be brought in containing a template of the locating holes for the gripper.

• Tolerance - holes will not be placed if they interfere with drawing elements within the tolerance radius.

• Ground - the ground the holes willbe placed in




KASEMAKE

2.3.1.2 Magic Eyes Options

Magic Eye cutouts are used by the press to see if the sheet is still attached to the grip edge. Twodifferent cutouts are possible, referred to as magic eye 1 and magic eye 2. The settings for eachare identical as follows:-

Alignment or positioning of a cutout can be one of the following

•Left - from the left edge of the gripper

•Right from the right edge of the gripper

•Left of Centre

•Right of Centre

The Offset is the distance from the alignment position to the edge of the magic eye cutout.

Width and Height determine the size of the cutout.

2.4 Air Holes

This tool allows air holes to be placed on stripping units to allow air to flow freely and preventvacuum. The air holes can be represented as circles, rectangles, or rounded rectangles which areset to a fixed size or drawn freehand. They can be placed in both the male back board and themale raised sections as required.

Command Air Holes

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Air Holes




Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate the command. Check or set the options as required. Depending upon the currentoptions you will be prompted to mark the centre of a circular air hole or the bottom left handcorner of a rectangular air hole.

Where fixed size air holes are being used the air hole will now be drawn into the male boardground and or male raised ground as per the settings.

Where fixed size air holes are not being used, you will be prompted for the extent of a circularair hole or the top right corner of a rectangular air hole. The air holes will then be drawn into thechosen ground(s).

2.4.1 Stripper Air Holes Options

The options for air holes should be set as follows:-

• Male board ground - Check this option if you wish to place air holes on the male board. Ensure the correct ground is set in the corresponding combo box.

• Male raised ground - Check this option if you wish to place air holes on the male raised section. Ensure the correct ground is set in the corresponding combo box.

• Circle - Set this option for circular air holes.

Enable the fixed radius option and set the corresponding radius field if a predeterminedradius is to be used.

• Rectangle - Set this option for rectangular air holes.

Set the fixed size option if a predetermined size is required, then set the correspondingwidth and height fields.

Set the fillet corners option if rounded rectangles are required, then set the correspondingradius field.

Set the group lines option if you wish the rectangular air hole to be treated as a singledrawing element.




KASEMAKE

2.5 Carrot Holes

Carrots are fasteners placed in the Male and Females stripping boards to align the two boardswhen they are placed on a press. It is possible to specify carrot holes as circles or to define asymbol to use to represent them.

Activate this command. Check or set the options as required. Depending upon the currentoptions you will be prompted to mark the centre where circular holes are to be used or theorigin for the chosen symbol, where a symbol is to be used.

Where symbols or fixed size circular holes are being used the carrot holes will now be drawninto both the male and female ground as a grouped pair.

Where circular holes of variable size are used, you will be prompted for the extent of the circularhole. The carrot holes will then be drawn into the male and female grounds as a grouped pair.

2.5.1 Stripper Carrot Holes Options

The options for carrot holes should be set as follows:-

• Male ground - Set the ground that the male stripper is drawn in.

• Female ground - Set the ground that the female stripper is drawn in.

• Circle - Set this option for circular carrot holes.

Enable the fixed radius option and set the corresponding radius field if a predeterminedradius is to be used.

• Symbol - Set this option to use a symbol to represent carrot holes.

Choose from the drop down list of available symbols. Each symbol is previewed adjacentto the list to help you to identify the correct one to use.

Note: Symbols are stored as .agd files in the PARTS sub directory.

Command Carrot Holes

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Carrot Holes

Toolbar button Diemaking Toolbar



Stripper Menu

KASEMAKE

2.6 Repeat Copy

A layout drawing consisting of clones will contain multiple copies of internal areas. This toolmakes it possible to copy stripping areas within a layout and repeat them throughout the wholelayout

Before using this tool, identify an area that requires repeating, using the Select Tool.

Having made a selection and activated the repeat copy tool, drag the selection box to surroundthe areas to be filled and the selected area will be repeated into the surrounded areas.

2.6.1 Repeat Copy Options

The symmetry of clones can be used to find additional areas which will produce mirrored orrotated copies of the original selection inside them.

There are two ways to specify how the area will be repeated

• Partially inside - if the dragged rectangle partially contains a repeated area then the selection will be repeated.

• Completely inside - the selection will be repeated only if the repeated area is totally within the dragged rectangle’s area.

The options also enable the creation of clones of the selection instead of copies. This makes itpossible to use clone edit to alter all the internal areas simultaneously, should further changes berequired.

Command Repeat Copy

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Repeat Copy





KASEMAKE

2.7 Auto Repeat Copy

This tool will find all the internal areas which are repeated and add any stripping informationautomatically.

Activate the tool. The Repeat Copy Options dialog is now displayed for you to define the settingsto use. These options are the same as the Repeat Copy tool. See “Repeat Copy Options” on page9-19 for further details.

Once the options are set click on OK to automatically generate the stripping areas.

3 Pins And Struts MenuSupporting struts can be added to the perimeter stripping information on both the backboard and the raised section of the male stripper. Pins or struts can be added to the insidestripping information for the male raised section. The following commands are available tomanipulate struts and pins placed using the stripper tools.

3.1 Move Strut

This tool lets you position struts created by the perimeter or inside stripper tools.

Simply select a strut, then move the cursor to the new position. If the Ctrl key is held downwhilst moving a strut, the strut is constrained to its original path and can only be moved alongit.

3.2 Add Strut

This tool allows you to add additional struts after an area has had its stripping parts added.

Set the options to determine how the strut is displayed. You will now be prompted to place thestrut within the current design. Identify an appropriate point and the strut will be drawn in boththe back board and the raised section grounds.

3.2.1 OptionsDefine the symbol to be used for the strut. Choose from :-

•Circle - Choose this to represent the strut as a circle. You need to specify the radius to use

Command Auto Repeat Copy

Menu Diemaking->Stripper->Auto Repeat Copy


Command Move Strut

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Move Struts


Command Add Strut

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Add Strut




Pins And Struts Menu

KASEMAKE

•Symbol - Choose this to represent the strut as a circle. You need to select the symbol to use from the available drop down list. Each symbol is previewed to help you to identify it.

These options are repeated for the back board.

3.3 Change Strut

This allows the properties of an individual strut to be changed.

Activate the command. You will now be prompted to select a strut. Click near to the requiredstrut. The nearest strut will now be drawn in the selection colour.

Once the strut has been identifed, the Properties dialog will pop up, allowing the settings for thegiven strut to be changed.

For an explanation of the properties please see Options in the previous section.

3.4 Remove Strut

If the stripping commands have produced too many struts, they can be removed manually withthis tool.

Simply click near to the strut you wish to remove. The identified strut will now be removedwithout further interaction.

3.5 Move Pin

This command is used for moving pins created by the inside stripper.

Simply select a pin, then move the cursor to the new position. Holding Ctrl down whilst movinga pin will constrain the pin to the internal area originally stripped.

Command Change Strut

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Change Strut


Command Remove Strut

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Remove S


Command Move Pin

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Move Pin





KASEMAKE

3.6 Add Pin

This command is used to place additional pins to those created with the Inside StripperCommand.

Activate the command. Set the options to determine how the pin is displayed. You will now beprompted to place the pin within the current design. Identify an appropriate point and the pinwill be drawn in both the male and female grounds.

3.6.1 OptionsDefine the symbol to be used for the pin. Choose from :-

•Circle - Choose this to represent the pin as a circle. You need to specify the radius to use

•Symbol - Choose this to represent the pin as a circle. You need to select the symbol to use from the available drop down list. Each symbol is previewed to help you to identify it.

These options are repeated for the back board.

3.7 Change Pin

This command allows the user to adjust the properties of an individual pin.

Activate the command. You will now be prompted to identify the pin to change, Click near tothe required pin. The chosen pin will now be drawn in the selection colour as confirmation.

The properties dialog will then be displayed, allowing you to define an alternative symbol and orsize for the pin. For an explanation of the properties please see ”Options” in the previoussection.

3.8 Remove Pin

The manual removal of unneeded pins from the drawing is achieved using this command.

Activate this command. Click near to the pin to identify it. The pin will now be removed from thedesign without further interaction.

Command Add Pin

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Add Pin


Command Change Pin

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Change Pin


Command Remove Pin

Menu Diemaking->Pins and Struts->Remove Pin




Die Board

KASEMAKE

4 Die Board

In the case of all die cut designs created on KASEMAKE the finished design must ultimately beplaced on a die board. It may be plotted onto wood, sawn by a die saw or burned by a laser. TheDie Board command allows you to specify the size of the board and position the job within it orto specify the size of the board and its position relative to the design.

Before activating this command you should display your completed design. Activate the DieBoard command. The following dialog box is displayed.

The outline page of settings is visible. First decide whether you wish to specify the size of theboard and position the job within it or to specify the size of the board and its position relative tothe design.

Die Board Relative to Current JobIf you wish to define the die board relative to the job on screen, clear the Fixed Size and FixedHeight check boxes. The fields provided for laser beam width and also to input the distancefrom the left, right, back and grip (front) edge of the design to the edge of the die board willnow be displayed as shown above. Set the laser beam width using the arrow keys to scroll ortype it directly. The distances will be measured taking into account the external cut rule and any

Command Die Board

Menu Diemaking->Die Board (Alt i D)





KASEMAKE

stripping knives and the given laser beam width. The grip edge is always assumed to be at thebottom of the screen. Set the offsets using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the requiredvalue or click on the current value and enter the new value directly.

Fixed Size Die BoardIf you wish to work with a fixed die board size and fit the job within it, set the Fixed Size checkbox. Both the width and height fields will now be displayed . Set the dimensions for the dieboard using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current valueand enter the new value directly.

Finally, decide whether you wish to centre the design within the specified die board, or offset itfrom the grip edge. Set or clear the Offset from Grip Edge check box accordingly. If you havechosen to offset the design, the Grip Edge field will be displayed. Enter the required offset asbefore.

Fixed Height Die BoardIf you wish to work with a fixed height die board and fit the job within it, set the Fixed Heightcheck box. The height field will now be displayed. Set the height of the die board using thecorresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter thenew value directly. Also set the left and right trim fields in the same way.

Finally, decide whether you wish to centre the design within the specified die board, or offset itfrom the grip edge. Set or clear the Offset from Grip Edge check box accordingly. If you havechosen to offset the design, the Grip Edge field will be displayed. Enter the required offset asbefore

Additional OptionsSet the fillet corners check box if you require the four corners of the die board to be rounded.Set the radius to use for the fillets using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required valueor click on the current value and enter the new value directly. Clear the fillet corners check box ifrounded corners are not required.

Next determine whether the die board requires tie bridges or not. Tie bridges temporarily retainthe die board within the wood from which it is cut. Set or clear the tie bridges check box asappropriate.

If you have chosen to produce tie bridges, you will need to set the characteristics to use forthem. There are two methods for defining tie bridges

• Specify the number of tie bridges. The number of tie bridges required horizontally and vertically can be set independently.

• Specify the spacing between each bridge

If you wish to specify the number of tie bridges, set the Fixed Number check box. The horizontaland vertical fields will now be displayed. Enter the number of tie bridges required bothhorizontally and vertically using the corresponding arrows to scroll to the required value or clickon the current value and enter the new value directly.

If you wish to specify the tie bridges required by defining the spacing between each bridge, clearthe Fixed Number check box. Enter the spacing to use between bridges using the correspondingarrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value and enter the new valuedirectly.

In both cases, define each tie bridge by setting the depth and width required. Again, use thearrows to scroll to the required value or click on the current value to highlight it and enter therequired value directly.

Specify the colour / ground in which the die board will be stored and displayed.

Finally, set the External cut ground, that is the ground that the design outline is drawn in.



Die Board

KASEMAKE

4.1 OptionsA second page of settings headed Options is also available. This provides further settings asexplained next.

4.1.1 Mounting and Grip EdgeDecide whether you wish to use a mounting and grip edge pattern. The patterns are stored as.AGD drawing files that contain the positions of all mounting holes for a specific die press, e.g.Bobst. The drawing file can also contain grip edge patterns such as the locating notches forBobst presses. The drawing file must be saved with the drawing origin in the front centre. Thefront edge patterns must be stored in a ground number higher than the rest of the board.

Use the tolerance to prevent mounting holes from overlapping external cut elements.

4.1.2 Dowel HolesDowel holes can be optionally added to the wood to allow registration of the die board when arouter is used.

They are represented by markers and placed at predefined positions within the die board.Profiles can also be stored to be reused, detailing dowel hole positions and characteristics.

They are defined through the Dowel Positions dialog accessed through the Configure button.




KASEMAKE

First set the Add Dowel Holes check box to enable the Configure button. Now, click onConfigure. The Dowel Positions dialog now appears. This shows a thumbnail sketch of thecurrent design. Dowel holes can be placed at any of nine pre-defined positions. These positionsare shown with respect to the thumbnail sketch. Margins can also be determined.

Currently loaded profile

The name of the profile currently being used is displayed. Click on the arrow to display a list ofavailable profiles. Scroll to the required profile and click on it to select it.

Any changes made to date will be saved with the previous profile. The newly selected profile willthen be loaded. The dowel hole positions and the margins displayed in the dialog will be updatedto reflect any newly loaded characteristics.

Add New...

The Add New... command allows you to define a new profile. Activate this command to displaythe Add New Registration Profile dialog. Type the name of the new profile then click on OK toclose the dialog. Any changes you now make to the dowel hole settings will be saved as the newlynamed profile.

Delete Profile

The Delete Profile command allows you to delete a profile which is no longer needed. Activatethis command to delete the profile displayed as the current profile. You will first be prompted forconfirmation. Upon choosing Yes the profile will be deleted. Choose No to leave the profileunchanged.

Dowel Hole RepresentationsClick on a dowel position button to change its settings, including whether you require a dowelhole at the corresponding position or not. The following dialog will be displayed:-



Die Board

KASEMAKE

Set the type of dowel hole representation required at this position. Choose from :-

Disabled

Choose this option if you do not require a dowel hole at this position. This is represented bya cross in the Dowel Positions dialog.

Diameter

Choose this option to display the dowel hole as a circle with a cross hair centred on the circle‘scentre in a fixed ratio to the given diameter of the circle.

You will need to set the diameter to use to define the dowel hole by clicking on the value andtyping the new value directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

Finally you need to determine the ground to place the dowel holes in by selecting from thedrop down list.

A circle with a cross hair is displayed in the Dowel Positions dialog to show that this type ofdowel hole is selected for this position.

Symbol

Choose this option to display the dowel hole as a predefined symbol.

Select the symbol to use from the drop down list of available symbols. A preview is displayedto help you to identify the appropriate one. The chosen symbol will be displayed in the DowelPositions dialog.

Click on OK to return to the Dowel Positions dialog. Any amendments to the chosen buttonwill be shown.

Margins

Next specify any margins to be left between the edge of the design and the centre of the dowelhole.

Set the left, right, top and bottom margins required by clicking on the value and typing the newvalue directly or by scrolling with the arrows to the new value.

4.1.3 HandholdsDecide whether you wish to include a handhold on the die board. Choose the type of handholdfromthe drop down list. The handhold name is retrieved from the database.




KASEMAKE

The handhold will be centred along the top edge of the die board positioned below the topedge by the Offset from back setting, so set this appropriately.

4.1.4 Balance KnivesIf the dieboard size is fixed, it may be necessary to add balance knives to distribute wear andtear equally throughout the cut knives. They will be placed beginning from a distance backmargin from the back of the dieboard. You can also define a fixed offset from rear rule. This, ifset, determines how close to the external cut path the balance knives can be placed.

Choosing auto calculate will work out the optimum number of balance knives, or you canspecify how many by giving a fixed number or the spacing between them. The length can alsobe specified.

When all these settings are correct select OK. The die board will be drawn around the designand the design, including die board will be zoomed to fill the screen.

Please note that the Die Board command is not ground specific. It will recognise any groundused and will position the die board around text, dimensions etc.

If you have selected a fixed die board size the most likely problem you will encounter is the sizeof board specified is too small to contain the job. If this happens the following message isdisplayed.

Here the message tells you that the board is too small and also tells you the minimum size boardonto which the job will fit, having consideration for the Grip Edge defined.

Your options are to increase the size of the board or if the board size requested is the largestboard size your machine can handle you will need to change the design or layout in order forthe job fit.

Selecting OK takes you out of the Die Board command and applies the command to thedrawing.

5 CITO Clip Stripper

This command allows you to position strip clips or strip clips and strip forks to help withremoving waste. Strip clips are placed in the female stripping board and strip forks are placed inthe male board.

Set the options to determine the type of clip you wish to use. You will now be prompted for apoint to position the clip. The symbol representing the clip will now appear and you will beprompted for confirmation. As you move the cursor, the symbol will flip over changing itsorientation. Move the cursor until the symbol is orientated correctly then click again to identifyits final position.

Command CITO Clip Stripper

Menu Diemaking->CITO Clip Stripper




Support Bars

KASEMAKE

5.1 OptionsChoose whether you require a clip only or a clip and fork pair and whether a single prong orthree prong fork is required.

The symbols currently used to represent the clips and prongs are simply .agd files. They arelocated in the PARTS subdirectory below your main working directory. The filenames arecurrently hard coded as CLIPSTRIP0.AGD, CLIPSTRIP1.AGD, CLIPSTRIP2.AGD andCLIPSTRIP3.AGD.

6 Support Bars

The Support Bars command allows you to place a pattern of holes to be used to locate a supportbar for the female section of the die.

You should first design the pattern to use. Patterns are stored as .AGD drawing files and containthe positions of all locating holes for a specific die press e.g. Bobst. The holes should bepositioned taking into account the maximum size die which can be handled by the chosen diepress. The file should be saved with the origin at (0,0) which must be the centre of the firstlocating hole.

Activate the Support Bars command. Check or set the options. You are now prompted for theorigin point to locate the holes for the support bar. Simply identify the position using one of theavailable drawing modes. The locating hole pattern you specified will now appear with the firsthole located at the given origin point.

6.1 Options

Command Support Bars

Menu Diemaking->Support Bars

Toolbar button Not available




KASEMAKE

Drawing filename:The name of the file containing the pattern of locating holes. Click on the ... button to display anOpen dialog to help you to identify the correct path and filename for your file. Alternatively typethe file location and name directly.

External Cut GroundSet the ground which is used for external cuts within your design. Click on the arrow to scrollthrough the list of grounds.

HolesSet the ground you wish the holes to be drawn in from the ground combo box.

Offset from Bottom CutThis is the minimum distance to leave above the lowest external cut before placing the first hole.

Margin from Top CutThis is the minimum distance to leave between the last hole and the highest external cut.

Cut Overlap ToleranceThis value controls how close to an external cut a hole or column of holes is placed to avoidoverlap.

7 Nicks

This command is used to mark nicks in external cut elements, to prevent the drawing and wasteseparating from each other after the die is pressed.

To use the tool simply click on a line where a nick is required. A snap cursor is drawn to help youto position it correctly; the cursor point being automatically adjusted to lie on the line.

Once a snap point is identified, the nick(s) is / are drawn as per the current options, withoutfurther interaction.

Note: When placing a double nick, the two nicks are positioned centred about the given snappoint.

Command Nicks

Menu Diemaking->Nicks




Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

7.1 Nicks Options

• Ground - Specify the ground to place the nick(s) in to.

• Nick Length - Set the length of the nick.

• Decide whether a Single or Double nick is required.

• Separation - set the distance between the nicks where a double nick is required.

8 Bridging MenuKASEMAKE will place on a design all relevant bridges for Flat and Rotary Dies. This can be doneautomatically or with user intervention.

Accessing Bridging produces a drop down menu of commands available to produce anynecessary bridging for the current design.

8.1 Roll-up

The Bridging Rollup to define bridges, can be selected by typing the shortcut given above, or byselecting from the Diemaking->Bridging drop down menu.

Starting with a design on screen select the Roll-up… command. The bridging roll up dialognow appears. This comprises four tabbed pages each containing a set of options. The first, Flat,contains the settings which define bridges for flat dies. The second, Rotary, contains thedefinitions of bridges for rotary dies. The third category, Settings, contains the basic bridgedefinitions. The final category, Adjustments, provides a set of commands that can be used tomake manual adjustments to a die.

Command Roll-up…

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Roll-up (Alt i g o)

Toolbar Button: Diemaking Tool Bar




KASEMAKE

8.1.1 SettingsFrom the indexing system at the head of the Bridging roll up select the tab marked Settings.The following page of information is displayed. Within this section we set the widths of bridgesand drills and how they are displayed on the design.

You should set the fields to your individual requirements. This will provide the system with thebasic bridge characteristics that it requires.

Minimum Length to BridgeCertain lines on a design are too short to carry a bridge. This field specifies the length of line atwhich the system will begin to place bridges. Any line of less length will be ignored.

Drill DiameterWhen a die is being automatically prepared for a die saw, drill holes must be provided as entrypoints for the saw. In order to accommodate drill holes, the bridge widths must be adjusted. If asize greater than zero is specified for the drill diameter, drill holes will be displayed and allbridges will be adjusted automatically. Drill holes are displayed as circles with diagonal crosses attheir centres

If you do not require drill holes because the design is being sent to a laser cutter then set the drilldiameter to zero.



Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

If the design is pen plotted the drill holes are drawn as on screen. If the design is sent to a diesaw then the drill holes are physically drilled out.

Standard WidthYou can set a standard bridge width to be used for all bridges in the design. Set the StandardWidth option by clicking on the corresponding radio button, the standard width field will nowbecome accessible. Type the standard default value you want to set for bridge width, 4mm,5mm or some other value, or use the arrows to scroll to the required value.

Variable WidthVariable width bridges, where the width of bridge used depends upon the length of the elementbeing bridged, can also be specified. Click on the Variable Width radio button to choose thismethod of defining bridge widths. The length and bridge width value fields now becomeaccessible. Enter the length of line up to which the bridge width should be applied in the up tofield and the width to use in the use field.

E.g. short lines, up to 100mm might require only a 4mm bridge. Lines up to 500mm mightrequire a 5mm bridge and all lines above this in length a 6mm bridge. Enter these values. Thesystem will place the appropriate width of bridge on all bridged elements according to theirlength.

Rotary Tooth PitchThis is the pitch between teeth on the rotary rule. Set the value by typing directly or scroll to therequired value.

Show as Gaps

When a line is bridged its presence is indicated on screen in one of two ways. Normally it isrepresented by a short line of the same length as the value given for the width of the bridge andoverlays the line with which it is associated. An alternative is to illustrate the bridge simply as agap in the line. If this option is set, by clicking in the Show as Gaps check box, all bridges willappear as gaps in the line.

Bridge ArcsAs a default KASEMAKE will ignore arcs and bridge only lines in the design. By setting this fieldthe system will also place bridges on arcs.

Activate BridgesThis option makes any bridges active. Once active, bridges can be referenced e.g. you can lock tothe end of an active bridge. If bridges are not activated, all commands ignore them.

Hide BridgesSetting this option will cause all bridges to be removed from the design, all lines etc. beingreturned to their original appearance. Clearing it will cause the bridges to once again bedisplayed.

Split prior to Auto BridgeThis option allows you to split continuous lines at intersections with other lines to ensure bridgesare positioned correctly. Set or clear it appropriately.

Show TicksShow ticks displays short lines at each end of a bridge (ina a similar way to drill holes). The tickscan then be used to help a manual diemaker to drill pilot holes for sawing later. The length ofthe tick is also defined here.

Apply Spanish bridges to creasesCheck this option if you wish to place bridges at the start and end of a creased element. This willhelp to strengthen any areas where the are close together cut and crease line e.g. at a slot. Thebridge will typically be half the length of a standard bridge.




KASEMAKE

Set the length of bridge to use at the ends by typing the value directly or scrolling with thearrows.

Close

Selecting Close takes you out of bridging.

8.1.2 Flat BridgingClick on the Flat tab of the bridging rollup to activate the flat bridge parameters. Before you canuse this command you must first have a design on screen. Bridging can be carried outautomatically, where the entire design is bridged automatically as per the bridge parameters.Alternatively, the design can be bridged manually where the number of bridges is specified bythe user rather than calculated from the bridge settings.

An explanation of the flat bridge parameters now follows:-

8.1.2.1 AutomaticTo bridge a design automatically, choose the Automatic option. The rules provided in the BridgeInterval section can now be defined. The width of the bridge is determined in the settingssection of the Bridging roll up, as previously discussed. Now we will set the intervals at whichbridges should be placed on lines and arcs.



Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

Ratio

The most common way to position bridges on a line is to fix a relationship between thedistance in from the beginning of the line at which point the first bridge will appear to thedistance between subsequent bridges. The most common relationship is that the distancebetween bridges shall be twice the distance at the beginning and end of the line to the firstand from the last bridge. Normally this is in the ratio of 1:2:1, run in equals one unit, intervalequals two units and run out equals one unit.

All you need type in is the central digit, the 2 or an alternative value.

Run In

In this field you set the minimum distance from the beginning of the line that must occurbefore the first bridge appears. This also sets the run out at the end of the line. This can beany realistic value you require.

Separation

In this field you set the minimum distance that will exist between bridges.

Alongside each of the above three fields is a radio button. When selected this gives priority tothe chosen feature when bridging is being carried out automatically.

If the Ratio button is selected the system bridges a line having regard to each of the minimumvalues that follow but the bridge interval may never equal the minimum value and the run inmay never equal its minimum. The system calculates the values in the defined ratio.

If the Separation button is selected the system will fix the width of the bridge to the value setand the run in value will be the only flexible value. Its length will vary to centre the bridges onthe line. However this value will never be less than the minimum run in value set. If it becamenecessary to create a run in of lower value than the minimum value set, the system willautomatically remove a bridge from the line and readjust.

The third way to bridge automatically is to fix the Run In value to the minimum value shown.To choose this method, select the Run In button. The system will bridge with the run in alwaysat the value shown. The bridge interval will be flexible but never less than the minimum valueset.

8.1.2.2 Manual BridgingWe have just discussed the features of automatic bridging. The main difference in manualbridging is that you, not the system, decide how many bridges are placed on a line. When theyare placed on the line they ignore the bridging intervals used by auto bridging and place thenumber you require at the specified interval on the line.

By choosing Manual at the top of the roll up the automatic options are greyed out and themanual options highlighted as in the following diagram.

The manual settings are divided into three choices, each discussed individually below.




KASEMAKE

.

Number

By typing a number into this field and pressing the ApplyNow button at the foot of the roll upthe whole design will be bridged and each item will have the number of bridges on it equalto the number set in this field. So, set the number to 3 and select apply now and the bridgingsolution will be 3 bridges per item, irrespective of the length of the item

Add

Pressing the radio button alongside the Add field greys out the other 2 manual options andgives you access to the Add field. If a design has been bridged manually with 2 bridges peritem and you want to add a third set this field to 1 and select apply now. The system rebridgesthe design and each item now has 3 bridges. You can add 1 bridge or 20 bridges, as many asyou want.

Remove

This function is exactly the opposite of add. If the items have six bridges and you want only 4then set this field to 2 and select apply now.



Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

Items to Bridge

Common to both Automatic and Manual bridging is the facility to select the items to bebridged. This is very useful when the bridging characteristics of different rules on the designmay differ. Larger bridges may be required for creasing rule than for cutting rule etc.

All on View

Select this radio button and bridges will be placed on all items on display. This does not meanonly items that are currently on view because you have zoomed in on an area of the drawing.It does mean all items that are turned on via the Ground Definition Table.

Ground

Select this radio button and only items drawn in the particular ground shown in the adjacentGround selection field will be bridged. To select an alternative ground place the cursor on thedown arrow and press the left mouse button. A list of grounds will appear through which youcan scroll before making your selection. The name and number of the selected ground willthen appear in this field.

Selected

Press the Selected radio button and only items identified by standard Windows selectiontechniques will be bridged.

Having set all parameters bridges are produced by pressing the ApplyNow button. To abortbridging select Close.




KASEMAKE

8.1.3 Rotary BridgesClicking on the rotary tab of the bridging roll up gives you access to the Rotary bridgeparameters. The rotary settings are as shown below.

Rotary bridging differs from flat bridging in several ways. The bridge interval, run in etc. are setby the pitch of the rotary knives being used so the interval and run in values are entered as twonumeric values.

Rotary bridge parameters are only applied to the vertical elements within a design as these aredeemed to run with the curve of the cylinder. All other elements have the flat bridge parametersapplied.

8.1.3.1 Bridge IntervalNo. of teeth for Run In

This is the number of teeth to leave at either end before any bridging occurs.

Optimum

This is the preferred number of teeth to leave between bridges and will be used as far aspossible.



Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

Range

It is not always possible to leave the optimum number of teeth between bridges as it dependson the length of the element being bridged. The range is therefore a way of controlling thevariation applied. A value between the two values specified for the range will always be usedwhere the optimum value is not possible.

Set the lower and upper limits of the range to use.

Other factors that affect Rotary bridges are the physical characteristics of the rotary die press andthe shells used on it.

8.1.3.2 Machine Settings Cylinder Diameter

In this field you must enter the diameter of the drum to which the rotary die shells will be fixed.

Die Board Thickness

In this field type the thickness of the die board that forms the rotary shell

Rule Height

How far from the die board do the knives protrude? Type in this figure here.

When you have entered the information two values are computed automatically. The first is thestretch factor. If the design was applied to the shell as if it were a flat die then the resulting boxwould be stretched by the factor shown. However the system makes automatic adjustments andthe Reduction Factor is the value by which the design is scaled down to bring the box back intotrue proportions.

8.1.3.3 Items to BridgeThe final section, Items to Bridge, is exactly the same as for Flat Dies.

To produce a design with bridging for a Rotary Die, now select apply now and the design will bebridged appropriately.




KASEMAKE

8.1.4 AdjustmentsSelecting the adjustments section of the bridging roll up displays the following dialog. Thestarting point for using these features is always a bridged design.

Freehand Add Bridge

Use this command to add a bridge at the cursor position. There are two methods for addinga bridge they are determined by the options associated with this command. Each methodworks slightly differently as explained next. Details of how to access options then follow.

Freehand Method

Activate this command. You will be prompted to identify the new bridge position. Placethe cursor on a line with bridges, press the left mouse button and an additional bridge isplaced on the line where you marked it. Repeat the process and another bridge will appear.

Relative Method

With this method you are first prompted to select the bridge you wish to work relative to.Place the cursor near to the required bridge and press the left mouse button to identify it.A confirmation mark will now be placed the given offset away from the selected bridge toidentify its position. Move the cursor to identify the correct side of the chosen bridge to



Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

place the new bridge and click with the left hand mouse button. The additional bridge isnow placed on the line. Repeat the process for further bridges.

Options

Activate the options throught the options toolbar button or the Draw->Optionscommand or by right clicking in the drawing area and selecting Options from the pop upmenu. Choose which method you wish to use, freehand or relative by clicking on thecorresponding radio button to select it. Where, relative has been chosen, you shouldspecify the offset required by using the arrows to scroll or typing the required value directly.

Freehand Remove Bridge

Select this command and you can delete any bridge on the design. Place the cursor on thebridge, press the mouse button and the bridge disappears. You should note that theremaining bridges do not adjust to fill the line evenly. To achieve this effect you shouldrebridge an individual line.

Move Bridge

Select this command, place the cursor on any bridge and press the mouse button. Now, asyou move the cursor on screen the bridge will slide along the line. It will only move as far asthe adjacent bridge. One more press on the mouse button and the moved bridge is fixed inits new position.

Adjust Bridge Width

Bridge widths are set through settings as a standard width or with the variable bridge facility.However it might be necessary to thicken or thin individual bridges. This command allows youto alter the width of an existing bridge. The bridge width to adjust to is determined throughoptions.

Activate the Adjust Bridge Width command. Identify the bridge to change using any of theselect commands. The selected bridge will automatically adjust to the current bridge width.

Options

To change the bridge width you need to activate the options as follows:-

Activate the options throught the options toolbar button or the Draw->Optionscommand or by right clicking in the drawing area and selecting Options from the pop upmenu.

Set the bridge width required by using the arrows to scroll or typing the required valuedirectly.

Align Bridge

For strength reasons it is sometimes beneficial to align several bridges. Select this command.Mark the bridge to which others are to align. Now move the cursor to the bridge which is tobe aligned and mark it. It will immediately align with the first bridge. To align several bridgeswith another, after marking the first bridge, hold down the Shift key whilst you click on theother bridges and they will align as marked.

Remove All Bridges

Select this command to remove bridging in a specific ground, all bridging or only bridging oncurrently selected elements. Activating this command produces the Bridge Ground dialog.Select the required option from:-

•All on view - to remove all visible bridges

•Ground - to define the ground to use to identify the bridges to remove. Select the ground from the drop down list




KASEMAKE

•Selected - to only remove bridges from currently selected design elements

8.2 Show Bridges

This command toggles the display of bridges which can either be represented as bridge lines oras gaps. Show Bridges will cause all bridges to be removed, the command name will thenchange to Hide Bridges. Next time the command is activated, the bridges will be displayed asbridge lines or as gaps and the command name will be changed back to Show Bridges.

8.3 Add Freehand

The Add Freehand command is the same as Freehand Add Bridge and is described underAdjustments on page 9-40.

8.4 Remove Freehand

The Remove Freehand command works the same as Freehand Remove Bridge and isdescribed under Adjustments on page 9-40.

8.5 Move Bridge

The Move Bridges command is the same as Move Bridges and is described underAdjustments on page 9-40.

8.6 Adjust Bridge Width

The Adjust Bridge Width command is the same as Adjust Bridge Width described underAdjustments on page 9-40

Command Show Bridges

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Show Bridges

Toolbar Button: Diemaking Tool bar

Command Add Freehand

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Add Freehand


Command Remove Freehand

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Remove Freehand


Command Move Bridges

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Move Bridge


Command Adjust Bridge Width

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Adjust Bridge Width




Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

8.7 Align Bridge

The Align Bridge command is the same as Align Bridge described under Adjustments onpage 9-40.

8.8 Remove All

The Remove All command is the same as Remove All Bridging described underAdjustments on page 9-40.

8.9 Rotary Edit

The Rotary Edit command is used to alter the positions of rotary bridging. Rotary bridging isapplied to individual elements only. This command allows you to bridge a group of connectedelements together e.g. a slot. It can also be used to edit bridge positions on an individualelement. For best results, you should use one of the Optimise commands available beforeaccessing this command. See “Optimise Menu” on page 8-11.

Before activating this command, identify the element(s) for which you wish to alter the bridgingusing any of the available selection methods.

Activate the Rotary Edit command. You will now be prompted to identify the start point fromwhich the teeth positions will be calculated. This determines the direction of the path. Mark apoint near to the required end. The teeth positions will now be drawn temporarily as smallcircles. Those where there aren’t bridges will be shown in the same ground as the element.Those where there are bridges will be shown in the reverse ground of the element and anadditional rectangle will be drawn to represent the bridge.

Simply click on a tooth position to toggle a bridge. i.e. if there is currently a bridge at thisposition click on it to remove it. If there is not bridge at the chosen position, one will be added.

Right click to display the pop up menu. You now have two options :-

AcceptChoose this option to accept any adjustments made and make the changes permanent.

CancelChoose this option to abandon any changes made and revert back to the former bridge pattern.

Command Align Bridges

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Align Bridge


Command Remove All

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Remove All


Command Rotary Edit

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Rotary Edit

Toolbar Button: Rotary Toolbar




KASEMAKE

8.10 Rotary Move

The Rotary Move command is used to alter the positions of rotary bridging on a single orgroup of elements e.g. a slot. A single bridge or a group of bridges can be moved.


Activate this command. You will now be prompted to identify the start point from which theteeth positions will be positioned.

Mark a point near to the required end. The teeth positions will now be drawn temporarily assmall circles. Those where there aren’t bridges will be shown in the same ground as the element.Those where there are bridges will be shown in the reverse ground of the element and anadditional rectangle will be drawn to represent the bridge.

Now you need to identify the bridge(s) to move. Simply click near to a required bridge to selectit. The chosen bridge will be drawn in the highlight colour as confirmation. To select furtherbridges hold down the Shift key before you identify the required bridge. To identify a group ofbridges, you can drag a selection box around them. Only those bridges contained within theselection box will be highlighted to show they have been selected.

Next you will be prompted for a reference bridge. This will be used as the reference point toreposition the selected bridges from. Simply click near to the bridge you wish to make thereference bridge. The chosen bridge will be drawn in the highlight colour as confirmation.

Finally you are prompted to identify the new position for the bridge(s). Move the cursor and youwill see that the bridges move a tooth position at a time with respect to the reference bridge.

Mark the final position for the bridge(s). The bridge(s) will now be drawn in their original colourat the new position.

Right click to display the pop up menu. You now have two options :-

AcceptChoose this option to accept the new positions made and make the changes permanent.

CancelChoose this option to abandon any changes made and revert back to the former bridge pattern.

8.11 Rotary Shuffle

The Rotary Shuffle command is used to nudge a complete set of bridging by a givenincrement. This is useful where you wish to use up rotary rule which perhaps has a smallfragment of tooth at one end and your normal run in expects half a tooth. of rotary bridging ona single or group of elements e.g. a slot.


Command Rotary Move

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Rotary Move


Command Rotary Shuffle

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Rotary Shuffle




Bridging Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate this command. You will now be prompted to identify the start point from which theteeth positions will be positioned.

Mark a point near to the required end. The teeth positions will now be drawn temporarily assmall circles. Those where there aren’t bridges will be shown in the same ground as the element.Those where there are bridges will be shown in the reverse ground of the element and anadditional rectangle will be drawn to represent the bridge.

The Adjust Rotary Rule dialog is now displayed. First set the required increment by typing a valuedirectly or using the arrow keys to scroll.

Now click on the + and - buttons to shuffle the entire bridge pattern by one unit of your chosenincrement either along the line from the start using + or back towards the start using -.

Click on Done when you have finished adjusting the bridging. The bridges will stay at their newposition.

8.12 Rotary Remove All

The Rotary Remove All command is used to remove some or all of the rotary bridging fromthe current design.

If you wish to remove only some of the rotary bridging, first ensure that you have selected theapplicable elements before activating this command.

Activate this command. A Remove Rotary Bridging dialog will now be displayed. Determinewhether you wish to remove bridging from only the selected elements or all bridged elements byclicking the appropriate radio button to set it.

Now click on OK. The dialog will close and you will be asked for confirmation as the removal ofrotary bridges cannot be undone. Choose Yes to continue and remove rotary bridging from theapplicable elements or choose No to leave the bridging unchanged.

8.13 Rotary Indicate

The Rotary Indicate command is used to highlight those elements which have rotary bridgingwithin the current design.

Activate this command. All elements with rotary bridging will now be displayed in the selectioncolour to indicate this.

The command acts like a toggle so activating it when elements with rotary bridging are selectedwill remove the selection and restore the original element colour.

Command Rotary Remove All

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Rotary Remove All


Command Rotary Indicate

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Rotary Indicate





KASEMAKE

8.14 Rotary Show End Markers

The Rotary Show End Markers command is used to identify the start and end of a sequenceof elements with rotary bridging.

Activate this command. A marker will now be placed at the start and end of each sequence ofelements which have rotary bridging.

The command acts like a toggle so activating it again will remove any end markers.

8.15 Add Tie Bridges

The Add Tie Bridges command places tie bridges on to the male raised section and femalestripper paths.

Activate this command to add a tie bridge. As you move close to the male raised section orfemale stripper path, a tie bridge will be displayed on the path automatically snapped to theposition on the path from the current cursor position. Click with the left hand mouse button toadd the tie bridge permanently. Its size and position are governed by the options. Repeat theprocess to add further tie bridges.

8.15.1 OptionsWidth

Set the width of the bridge using the arrow keys to scroll or type the required value directly.

Depth

Set the depth of the bridge using the arrow keys to scroll or type the required value directly.

Separation

Set the minimum distance between parallel bridges e.g. when placing a tie bridge within aslot. Again, use the arrow keys to scroll or type the value directly.

Tolerance

Set the tolerance factor to apply to determine whether a tie bridge is drawn or not. Scroll withthe arrow keys or type the value directly.

Command Rotary Show End Markers

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Rotary Show End Markers


Command Add Tie Bridges

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Add Tie Bridges




Rule Menu

KASEMAKE

8.16 Remove Tie Bridge

The Remove Tie Bridge Command allows you to delete any tie bridge on the design. Placethe cursor on to the tie bridge, press the mouse button and the tie bridge disappears. Noconfirmation is required.

8.17 Move Tie Bridge

The Move Tie Bridge command allows a tie bridge to be repositioned.

Place the cursor on any tie bridge and press the mouse button to identify it. Now, as you movethe cursor on screen the tie bridge will slide along the line. It will only move as far as theadjacent tie bridge. One more press on the mouse button and the moved tie bridge is fixed inits new position.

9 Rule MenuOn selecting the Rule command from the diemaking menu a sub menu containing thefollowing commands appears, Costings… and Table….

With these commands you can total the rule content of the design automatically Only lines, arcsand ellipses, are considered, text is ignored. The calculation is based on items drawn in grounds/ layers which are on display. If a ground is switched off the Rule calculation will ignore all itemsdrawn in that ground.

Provision has been made to take into account the complexity of the design to be ruled so that amore accurate costing can be calculated for the die board.

Wood costs which are incurred to produce the die board and miscellaneous costs, such asdelivery costs, can also be incorporated into the costings again to help to produce a moreaccurate final price for production of the die board.

9.1 Costings…

On selecting this command the system automatically totals the rule content of the design Inaddition the wood cost will be calculated if a die board is present and you have selected thisoption. The wood cost if calculated is included in the total cost. An element of complexity canalso be built into the costings.

Command Remove Tie Bridge

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Remove Tie Bridge

Toolbar Button Diemaking Toolbar

Command Move Tie Bridge

Menu Diemaking->Bridging->Move Tie Bridge

Toolbar Button Diemaking Toolbar

Command Costings…

Menu Diemaking->Rule->Costings…





KASEMAKE

For box makers, this rule calculation is useful when trying to keep track of costs being incurredfor die making. If you have an accurate idea of the rule content of a die you can work out a costper metre on completion of the job. This costing factor can then be applied to future jobs forthe purpose of fairly accurate estimation.

Activate this command. The resulting costings are presented as shown below:

Costs are input in the units specified in the Table… command. The wood cost per square unit isdefined as part of the table of costs, as is the option to include wood costs. Please refer to“Table…” on page 50 for details.

Length UnitsThe units that the design is drawn in is set by selecting from the Length Units at the foot of thedialog box. Changing the units alters the length calculations accordingly.

Show Complexity FactorIn order to take into account any complexity in the design and produce a more accurate costing,you should set the Show Complexity Factor setting. You can then either set the Factor manuallyby typing a suitable value then clicking on Recalculate or click on Generate and KASEMAKE willevaluate the design and automatically calculate the factor to use.

In either case, an adjusted cost will now appear in the costings area of the dialog. This adjustedcost is the revised cost which is calculated taking into account the complexity factor. It isautomatically included as part of the Total Cost taking precedence over the basic Rule Total cost.

Miscellaneous CostsThe miscellaneous costs are defined as part of the table of costs, as is the option to includemiscellaneous costs. Both are set through the Table… command. Please refer to “Table…” onpage 50 for details.



Rule Menu

KASEMAKE

Once defined miscellaneous costs can be used by first setting the Miscellaneous Costs check box.The information provided for miscellaneous costs is then displayed as shown:-

First set the type of cost by clicking on the drop down arrow and clicking on the required valueto select it.

The cursor will now automatically move to the next field which will be highlighted and an arrowdisplayed ready for you to select the correct name for this cost. Again, click on the arrow andclick on a suitable value to set it.

The cost field is automatically completed. Additional miscellaneous costs can be added byrepeating the above. Finally, click on Recalculate to update the Total Cost field with theadditional miscellaneous costs.

Change Cost...The table of costs used to produce the costing can be changed using the Change Cost…command. Activate the command and you will be asked to specify the filename for the costtable to use. This should be entered in the usual way. The new costs will then be applied and theresults displayed.

Print...The costing can be printed as a report using the Print... command which brings up thestandard Print dialog.




KASEMAKE

9.2 Table…

Before any costing of the Rule content of a design can be done we must create a table of costswhich will be applied to the design. Select Table… and the following is displayed:-

- In the first column is the number of each ground. The colour corresponding to each ground is used for the number’s background. Next is the name of the ground. Normally these would be named as types of rule. There then follows a field into which you can type a brief descrip-tion of the rule. Finally there is a cost field. The price you enter here will normally represent the cost per unit.

- Next specify the units that the costs are based upon, either metres or feet.

- Set the Include wood check box if you wish to take account of the wood costs in any future calculations based on this table of costs.

- If you set the Include wood option, you can now specify the cost per square unit. Set the required value by typing it directly or use the arrows to scroll. The unit the wood cost is based upon is determined from the cost unit specified, either metres or feet.

- Set the Add miscellaneous check box if you wish to include one or more miscellaneous costs in any future calculations based on this table of costs. You can now access Edit misc... to add, edit or delete miscellaneous costs. Please refer to “Miscellaneous Costs” on page 51 for further details.

- Having completed the table you should now save it. Use the Save command to create a costing file. You will be asked for the heading for the table and the filename which should be specified in the usual way. The system will append a .CST file extension by default. You can create a series of files, one representing net cost, another discount price and another at full retail.

Command Table…

Menu Diemaking->Rule->Table…




Rule Menu

KASEMAKE

- Use the Load command to load back a set of prices. If you cost the job with each table loaded in turn, you will arrive at three different although relevant prices.

- The New command clears out the current settings and creates a blank table for you to fill in.

- Use the Close command to return to the drawing screen.

9.2.1 Miscellaneous CostsAccess Edit Misc... to add, edit or delete miscellaneous costs. The Miscellaneous Costs dialog isdisplayed:-

Adding a new costTo define a miscellaneous costs, first clicking on the Add New... button. You will now beprompted for a name for the new cost. Type a suitable name and click on OK to close the dialogand enter the new name in the name field of the Miscellaneous Costs dialog. Now specify adescription for the type of cost this is by typing directly into the field. Finally, define the actualcost by typing the required value directly or use the arrows to scroll.

You can add additional costs by repeating the above.

EditTo amend information for an existing miscellaneous cost first set the name field to the cost youwish to change by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the drop down list.

Now click on the Edit button. The description and cost fields are now made available so that anyamendments can be made.

Click on Edit again or change the name field to end this process.

DeleteIf you wish to remove a miscellaneous cost entry, first set the name field to the cost you wish toremove. Now click on the Delete button. You will be prompted for confirmation that you wish toremove this cost entry. Click on OK to permanently remove this cost or Cancel to leave itunchanged.

Finally click on OK to close the Miscellaneous Costs dialog and update the miscellaneous costentries with any changes or Cancel to leave them unchanged.




KASEMAKE

10 Drill Freehand

The Drill Freehand command is used to position a drill hole manually, perhaps to make alocating hole. A point is also generated with the drill hole.

Activate the command. You will now be required to identify the centre point of the drill hole.Use any of the modes to identify the centre point. A point and drill hole will then appear centredon the given point. If you have previously activated the Hide Drill Holes command only thepoint will be drawn.

11 Drill Toggle

The Drill Toggle command is used to toggle the display of drill holes. Before activating thiscommand you need to select the elements for which you wish to toggle the drill hole display.

Activate this command. Those selected elements with drill holes on display will have their drillholes removed. Those selected elements with no drill holes on display will have drill holesdisplayed at their start if no drill holes have been defined previously, otherwise any previouslydisplayed drill holes will be redisplayed.

12 Hide Drill Holes/Show Drill Holes

The Hide Drill Holes command acts as a toggle. When first activated it will remove all drillholes that are on display. The command name then changes to Show Drill Holes. Now if thecommand is activated, all the drill holes removed by the previous call to this command will beredisplayed. The command name will then revert back to Hide Drill Holes.

13 Rotary Sub-Menu

13.1 Shell Template Sub-MenuShell templates can be designed and created using the Rotary->Shell Construction menu ofcommands. Different positions for bolts and different types of bolts can be built into thetemplate which is normally drawn to the maximum extents of the rotary press to be used.

The templates can then be loaded and tailored to an individual job using the commands withingthe Rotary sub-menu.

Command Drill Freehand

Menu Diemaking->Drill Freehand


Command Drill Toggle

Menu Diemaking->Drill Toggle


Command Hide / Show Drill Holes

Menu Diemaking->Hide / Show Drill Hole




Rotary Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

13.1.1 Load Shell

This command allows you to load a shell template to tailor to a specific job. It will be overlayedon the current design for trimming and modification.

Activate this command. A File Open dialog now appears asking for the name and location of theshell template .rst file. Set the location and identify the template file in the usual way.

Click on Ok to close the dialog and load the chosen template which is overlaid on the currentdesign. It is inactive by default so is displayed in toned down colours. As the shell is only atemporary overlay at this stage, KASEMAKE’S non-template commands will ignore it.

13.1.2 Shell History List

A list of the most recently loaded template .rst files is maintained. Simply click on the name ofthe template file you wish to work with to open it and display the corresponding template.

13.2 Trim Shell Width...

This command allows you to trim the shell widthways to tailor it to the size required for thecurrent job. Hand holds can also be specified.

Activate the command. The Trim Shell Width dialog now appears:-

Command Load Shell

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Load Shell


Command Shell History List

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Shell History List


Command Trim Shell Width...

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Trim Shell Width...





KASEMAKE

13.2.1 MarginsDefine the margins to leave to the left and right of the cut extents. Type each value directly oruse the arrows to scroll.

13.2.2 HandholdsHandholds can be positioned on the shell at predefined positions. The different handholds aredetermined from the die making database.

13.2.2.1 TypeSet the style of handhold to use from the Type drop down list.

13.2.2.2 Distance from edgeSet the distance from the edge of the shell to place the handhold. Type the value directly oruse the arrows to scroll.

13.2.2.3 PlacementThere are six predefined positions for the hand holds. Top, centre and bottom for both the lefthand edge and the right hand edge of the shell. Each position is represented by a check box.Simply set or clear each check box to activate / deactivate the hand hold position.

13.2.3 Trim to top shell onlyIt is possible to use the top part of the shell only where the design can be accomodated in onehalf only. Set this option if you wish to use the top part only.

Finally click on OK to close the dialog, accept the new settings and trim the shell accordingly.



Rotary Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

13.3 View Shell

The shell is initially loaded for adjustments and is not integrated as part of the main design.Before it is merged with the design, it is possible to switch its display on and off. Simply activatethis command to toggle the display of the shell.

13.4 Split Shell...

The split shell command divides the shell into two separate sections which can then beprocessed individually. It is only applicable where the design spans both halves of the shell.Simply activate the command and the shell and design will be split into two.

13.5 Merge Shell with Drawing

This command allows you to integrate the shell into the current design. It becomes an activepart of the current design rather than just a temporary overlay.

Activate the command. The shell will now appear in its original colours and will be an active partof the design.

13.6 Manual Edit Bolt Holes

The manual edit bolt hole allows you to manually remove one or more bolt holes. In addition,you can switch bolt holes that have been removed back on before they are permanentlyremoved.

Activate this command. You will now be prompted to identify the bolt hole(s) to remove. Mark apoint close to the required bolt hole using any of the available drawing modes. Alternatively, toselect a group of bolt holes, drag a selection box around the required bolt holes.

To switch on a hole or group of holes that have been removed, identify the bolt hole(s) asdescribed above, but hold down the shift key as you identify them. They will then be redrawn intheir original colour.

13.6.1 OptionsThere are options available with this command. Click with the right hand mouse to pop up themenu of options.

Command View Shell

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->View Shell


Command Split Shell...

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Split Shell...


Command Merge Shell with Drawing

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Merge Shell with Drawing


Command Manual Edit Bolt Holes

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Manual Edit Bolt Holes





KASEMAKE

13.6.1.1 Show removed Select this option if you wish to toggle the display of the removed holes.

13.6.1.2 HolesThe remaining items are a list of the different types of bolt holes used by this template. Simplyclick on the name of the bolt hole you wish to work with. A tick will appear next to the chosenname to show that this is the active bolt hole. Only bolt holes of this type will now bemodifiable with the Manual Edit Bolt Hole command.

13.7 Auto Remove Bolt Holes...

The Auto Remove Bolt Hole command will automatically remove bolt holes which do not meetthe criteria specified by its options.

Activate this command. The Auto Delete Bolt Holes dialog is displayed:-

The bolt holes used by the current template are displayed one above the other to the left of thedialog, highest priority first.

The priority can be changed at this stage using the arrow buttons labelled Priority:. Simply clickon the bolt hole you wish to change priority for, then use the up and down arrow buttons tomove it up or down the priority list respectively.

Each bolt hole has three settings the values of which are displayed by clicking on thecorresponding bolt hole in the list. For each bolt hole define the following settings:-

13.7.1 IgnoreSet this option to ignore this particular type of bolt hole when applying the tolerance values todetermine which bolt holes to remove.

Command Auto Remove Bolt Holes

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Auto Remove Bolt Holes




Rotary Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Clear this option if you wish this type of bolt hole to be considered when automatically detectingwhich bolt holes to remove.

13.7.2 Knife ToleranceThis tolerance determines how close to a cut element a bolt hole can be positioned. All boltholes which are not at least the given distance away from all surrounding cut elements, will beremoved. (Unless the ignore parameter has been set).

Set the tolerance by typing directly or using the arrow keys to scroll.

13.7.3 Lower Priority Hole ToleranceThis tolerance determines how close to this type of bolt hole any lower priority bolt holes can bepositioned. All lower priority bolt holes which are not at least the given distance away from thistype of bolt hole, will be removed. (Unless the ignore parameter has been set).

Click on OK to close the dialog. All bolt holes which do not satisfy the given tolerances will nowbe automatically removed.

13.8 Delete Hidden Bolt Holes

The Manual Edit Bolt Holes and Auto Remove Bolt Holes commands described previously onlytemporarily remove the bolt holes from display. Allowing them to be switched back on again ifrequired using the Manual Edit Bolt Holes command.

This command permanently deletes the bolt holes which have previously been removed. Activatethe command. The applicable bolt holes will be removed from the shell template immediately,no confirmation is required.

13.9 Reset Bolt Holes

The Reset Bolt Holes command restores all bolt holes to their original status when the shell wasloaded. Any removed or deleted bolt holes will be restored.

Activate this command. You are prompted to confirm that you wish to reset the bolt holes.Choose Yes for confirmation. All the bolt holes will now be reset to their original state.

13.10 Shell Construction Sub-MenuThe Shell Construction Sub Menu contains commands to enable you to create and modify yourown templates to use for the rotary shell. The template should be drawn initially as a rectanglerepresenting the maximum useable area of the rotary press.

The template should contain one or more types of bolt hole represented by a single element orgroup of elements. All possible bolt hole positions should be included as they can be tailored toa specific job later.

Command Delete Hidden Bolt Holes

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Delete Hidden Bolt Holes


Command Reset Bolt Holes

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Reset Bolt Holes





KASEMAKE

13.11 Load Template...

The Load Template... command allows you to open an existing template for modification.Activate this command. A File Open dialog will now be displayed requesting the location andname of the template .rst file to open.

Set the location and filename in the usual way. Click on Ok to close the dialog.

The template will now be loaded into a new blank window, ready for modification.

13.12 Save Template...

The Save Template... command allows you to save a design as a template or to save an existingtemplate which has been modified.

Activate this command. A File Save dialog is now displayed. Specify the location for the newtemplate .rst file and give it a suitable name. Finally, click on OK to save the template file.

13.13 Define Bolt Hole Type

The Define Bolt Hole Type command allows you to define one or more bolt holes. You must firstselect the element group of elements that you wish to define as a bolt hole using any of theselection methods.

Activate this command. You will now be prompted to name the bolt hole. Type a suitable name,then click on OK. These elements will now be treated as a bolt hole.

Where more than one ground has been used for the bolt hole elements, a Choose Bolt HoleGrounds dialog is now displayed. This contains a list of the grounds used for the bolt hole eachwith a corresponding check box. You now need to set the check box(es) for the ground(s) whichdetermine the bolt hole size. As you set a check box the corresponding elements are selected asconfirmation. Once the grounds are correctly identified, click on OK to complete the bolt holedefinition.

13.14 Auto Bolt Hole Settings...

The Auto Bolt Hole Settings command allows you to define default criteria for each of the bolthole types defined for your template. It is also used to assign a priority to each bolt hole type.

Command Load Template...

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Load Template...


Command Save Template...

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Save Template...


Command Define Bolt Hole Type

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Define Bolt Hole Type


Command Auto Bolt Hole Settings...

Menu Diemaking->Rotary->Auto Bolt Hole Settings...




Current Job Settings

KASEMAKE

Activate this command. The Auto Delete Bolt Holes dialog. This is the same dialog as is used forthe Auto Remove Bolt Hole command. Please refer to the section “Auto Remove Bolt Holes...” onpage 56 for an explanation of the options.

14 Current Job Settings

This command lets you construct a job by choosing settings from the database. It also lets youadd information to the database from the active diemaking tool settings.

The dialog displays the active diemaking settings that are currently in the database. A field thatis shown as blank means that setting is not present in the database. It is possible to change theactive settings by choosing a new value from any of the combo boxes.

The Add button next to a field will transfer the current settings for that field from the applicationto the database. This brings up a dialog which allows the database record name for the newrecord to be entered.

Add All transfers all settings from the application to the database.

Command Current Job Settings

Menu Diemaking->Current Job Settings





KASEMAKE

15 Edit Job Information

This command brings up the diemaking database. Refer to “The DieMaking Database” on page60 for details of how to use this database.

16 Select Job Information

This command is used to choose a job stored in the diemaking database. Upon selection, thesettings for that job will be transferred into the main application and can be used by thediemaking tools.

17 The DieMaking DatabaseIt is essential for diemakers to be able to switch between settings for different jobs andcustomers, and the database provides a central archive which facilitates this.

The following information sets are stored:

• Jobs - contains information about a particular job• Customers - details of each customer• Machines - settings specific to a die press• Job parameters - settings common to several jobs• Dieboard• Stripping knives• Male stripper• Female stripper• Front edge stripper• Bridging• Handholds - standard handholds used• Ground table - ground table settings for a job

17.1 Toolbar CommandsThere are some commands which are common to all record views. These are handily located ona toolbar where they can be easily accessed.

Command Edit Job Information...

Menu Diemaking->Edit Job Information


Command Select Job Information...

Menu Diemaking->Select Job Information


Move first Moves to the first record in the current set



The DieMaking Database

KASEMAKE

Move previ-ous

Moves to the previous record in the current set

Move next Moves to the next record in the current set

Move last Moves to the final record in the current set

Toggle edit mode

Changes between edit and read-only modes.

Record properties cannot be changed in read-only

mode

Add new record

Adds a new record to the current set

Cancel add/changes

Undoes an Add Record operation or, any changes

made by editing the record

Delete current record

Removes the current record

Toggle Table view

Table view can be used to display more than one

record on screen at a time

Find Perform a search opera-tion

Add settingsAdd settings to the data-base from the main appli-

cation settings




KASEMAKE

17.2 The Jobs ViewThe Jobs View contains information about a job. Each job has a customer, machine and jobparameters.

17.3 The Customers ViewThis view contains customer details.




KASEMAKE

17.4 The Machines ViewThis view contains settings relevant to an individual diepress. The locating cutout section is usedin the CAD application when creating a dieboard or performing perimeter stripping.




KASEMAKE

17.5 The Job Parameters ViewThe Job Parameters view contains the possible settings for a job. It is constructed from its ownunique settings, such as sheet size, and also from shared settings like the Die Board Options orthe Bridging Options..




KASEMAKE

17.6 The DieBoard View




KASEMAKE

17.7 The Stripping Knives View




KASEMAKE

17.8 The Male Stripper




KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

17.9 Female Stripper

17.10 Front Edge Stripper




KASEMAKE

17.11 Bridging

17.12 HandholdsThe Handholds view allows handholds to be created. These can then be applied to the dieboardor stripping boards.



Ground Table...

KASEMAKE

17.13 Ground TableThis provides the grounds used by a job.

18 Ground Table...

This command synchronizes the ground settings used in all the diemaking commands.

Activating the command brings up the Diemaking Grounds dialog which lists all the groundsused by the diemaking subsystem. The grounds can be altered then applied to the diemakingcommands.

19 Create Layout Drawing

It is essential before bridging or processing a layout on a laser that any common lines areremoved from a layout. However, since layouts are made up of clones this involves tamperingwith the clone contents so that they are no longer true clones.

Command Ground Table

Menu Diemaking->Ground Table...


Command Create Layout Drawing

Menu Diemaking->Create Layout Drawing





KASEMAKE

This command allows you to generate a temporary version of a layout which has common linesremoved and is given a _DIE suffix to distinguish it. The original drawing with clones still “intact”is also kept.

Activate the Create Layout Drawing command. Common line removal will now automatically beperformed on the cloned layout. Lines common to two clones will be detached from the clonesand kept separate, the rest of the elements of the clone will remain as a clone. In addition, thedesign will have the _Die suffix appended to show that it has been altered.

The original cloned layout can be accessed through the Window menu. Simply click on thedesign name in the drawing list, to reactivate the original design window.



KASEMAKE

10 - View Commands

1 Window...

The Window command allows you to change the portion of design that you are currentlylooking at.

- Activate this command. The window setup dialog appears. Set the window size to the amount of design you wish to view. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll the value, or click on the current value to select it and type the new value.

- Set the window origin, to determine the section of the design that you wish to view. Click on one option from the following:-

• Left - The design will be adjusted so that the coordinate (0, 0) is at the bottom left corner of the window. Only part of the positive quadrant of the design, depending on the window size, will then be visible.

• Centre - The point currently at the centre of the viewable area of the design will be maintained as the centre of the new viewable area when the design is adjusted to the new window size.

• Centre Point - You can mark a point with the cursor which will become the centre of the new viewable area.

- Now click on OK. If you have set the window origin option to Centre Point, you will now need to specify the point to become the new centre. Use any of the available drawing modes to set the new centre.

The design will now be redisplayed within the newly defined window.

2 Set Grid...

The Set Grid command allows you to define a grid to assist you in creating your design. Thegrid helps with alignment of drawing elements. It is also a means of defining exact pointswhen used in conjunction with snap to grid drawing mode, which only allows grid intersec-tion points to be picked.

- Activate the Set Grid command. The Grid Settings dialog will now appear. Set the inter-val in X between grid points, X-Grid, using the up and down arrow keys or typing the new value directly. Set the interval in Y between grid points, Y-Grid, using the up and down arrow keys or typing the new value directly.

If you wish to specify an origin point for the grid, i.e. a point at which the grid mustintersect from which all the other grid intersections can be determined, then set the specifynew origin check box. The default origin point is (0, 0) or the previously set origin point ifa grid has already been defined using a specific origin point.

Command Window

Menu View->Window


Command Set Grid

Menu View->Set Grid...




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

- Click on OK to close the Grid Settings dialog and accept the new settings. If you have selected to specify an origin point, you will now be prompted to define the origin point. Use any of the available drawing modes.

The grid will now appear as a sequence of dots. To remove the grid you should set the intervalto 0.

3 Hide Grid/Show Grid

The Hide Grid command can only be activated when a grid is being used. This commandallows you to make the grid invisible, but still remain active when the snap to grid mode is used.

Activate the command to hide the current grid. Activate again to redisplay the current grid. Thiscommand will toggle between these two states whilst there is a grid set.

4 Redraw

The redraw command allows you to force a repaint of the drawing area. This is useful for tidyingup your design to get rid of markers and redisplay elements which may have been partly obliter-ated by certain commands.

Activate this command. The drawing area will instantly be refreshed.

5 Inside/Outside

The Inside/Outside command allows you to toggle the view of the current design.

Activate this command. The design will flip over to reveal the opposite view and the status barwill be updated to show which view is currently on display.

Command Hide Grid

Menu View->Hide Grid


Command Redraw

Menu View->Redraw

Toolbar Button: Standard Tool Bar

Command Inside/Outside

Menu View->Inside/Outside

Shortcut: Status Bar



Horizontal / Vertical Flute

KASEMAKE

6 Horizontal / Vertical Flute

The View->Horizontal / Vertical Flute command toggles the flute direction. The current directionis displayed as an horizontal or vertical arrow in the flute direction indicator.

The flute direction can be linked to the database to indicate grain direction for a specific job.

7 Overview

The Overview command displays a small overlapping window which overviews the entire design.In addition to providing an overview, a dotted rectangle is displayed showing the current areabeing worked on.

The dotted rectangle can be used to navigate to different areas of the design and can also beresized to zoom in or out on the current area of the design. The overview window supportsrealtime zooming and navigation. It is continually updated as you navigate to different areas ofthe drawing or zoom in or out of the current view.

The Overview command acts as a toggle so activating it when the overview window is on displaywill remove the overview window and vice versa.

7.1 Navigating around the DesignMove the cursor into the navigation rectangle and it changes to a cross indicating that therectangle can be moved. Click and hold the left mouse button in the navigation rectangle anddrag it around the overview window. When the navigation rectangle contains the area of thedesign you wish to work on, release the mouse button. KASEMAKE’S drawing area will nowupdate showing the area of the design that you have identified.

Command Horizontal / Vertical Flute

Menu View->Horizontal / Vertical Flute

Shortcut: Status Bar

Command Overview

Menu View->Overview




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

7.2 Zooming the Current DesignTo zoom the current design, you need to resize the navigation rectangle. Move over one of thenavigation rectangles corner handles. The cursor changes to a direction arrow indicating that therectangle can be resized. Click on the appropriate corner handle with the left mouse button andwhilst holding the left button move the mouse. The corner of the rectangle will now move withthe cursor and the navigation rectangle will resize in response. Release the mouse button whenthe navigation rectangle contains the area of the design you wish to zoom in / pan out to.Decreasing the size of the navigation rectangle has the effect of zooming in on the current areaof the design. Conversely, increasing the size of the navigation rectangle has a panning effect. Ineither case, KASEMAKE’S drawing area will update to show the area of the design that you haveidentified.

Note: A small adjustment might be made to the navigation window depending upon the as-pect ratio of the viewing area.

7.2.1 Zoom SliderFor faster zooming in or out of the design, simply drag the slider bar. Move towards the - to zoomout of the current area or move towards the + to zoom in on the current area. The navigationrectangle will automatically resize and KASEMAKE’S drawing area will update as the slider barmoves to reflect the change in zoom level.

Release the slider bar to accept the current zoom level.

7.2.2 Zoom All ButtonThe Zoom All button automatically zooms KASEMAKE’S drawing area so that it contains theentire design and resizes the navigation rectangle to reflect this.

8 Symbols...

A library of frequently used drawings can be built up to use with your KASEMAKE system.These drawings can then be easily accessed using the Symbols... command.

The drawing files, i.e. .PIC or .AGD files, should be stored together in one or more sub-directo-ries beneath the PARTS sub-directory. Each sub-directory of PARTS will be treated as a symbolcategory. The files contained within each sub-directory, are used to generate the symbols forthat particular category.

“Smart symbols” i.e. those based on parametric .CMF files can also be created. They are referredto as “Smart Symbols” because they still remain active after being positioned in a design. Theycan be resized by changing the main variables associated with the original .CMF file. Similary,the lock points of the original parametric can be adjusted, so they effectively remain “live”. Aswith drawing files, the .CMF files, corresponding variable files .VAR and their preview .CFP filesshould be stored in a sub-directory of the PARTS directory.

Activate this command. The Symbols Rollup dialog will now be displayed either docked or float-ing depending upon previous settings.

Command Symbols

Menu View->Symbols




Symbols...

KASEMAKE

8.1 Symbols RollupThe Symbols dialog can be docked in any of the command bars or floating. When docked, it canbe pushpinned for permanent display or can be made to auto hide, appearing only whenaccessed otherwise it is displayed as a tab.

When floating, it can be rolled up and down manually using the push pin. Alternatively, it can bemade to automatically hide when not being accessed as per the current preferences. See “View”on page 2-47.

The Symbols Rollup whether floating or docked comprises the following:-

Each sub-directory of PARTS, is allocated a page within the Symbols dialog. The page is labelledwith the name of the sub-directory to show which category of symbols it contains.

Each file within a sub-directory is displayed on the corresponding symbol category page as abutton, which depicts the file it represents.

Where several tabs are used which cannot be accomodated in a single row, arrows are providedto allow you to scroll backwards and forwards between the tabs.

Command Buttons

A scroll bar is provided so that where there are a lot of files within a category they can bescrolled into view. In addition, using the + and - command buttons you can zoom the display ofavailable symbols to view more or less symbols.

A command button, Opt, is provided to access the options you can apply to a symbol before itis placed in a design. Simply click on the Opt button to access the Options dialog. These optionsare not applicable to “smart symbols”.

There are four predefined rotation buttons available for the basic symbol category only. Simplyclick on a rotation button to set the corresponding rotation. It is necessary to select a symbolbefore these buttons can be accessed.

8.2 Loading A Basic SymbolSelect the category of symbols to use by clicking on the corresponding tab. Locate the requiredsymbol using the left and right arrow buttons to move between pages, where appropriate. Clickon the button representing the required file. The KASEMAKE system will now prompt for anorigin.

If you require one of the predefined rotation settings, click on the corresponding button to set it.If you require rotation at an angle not predefined, or you wish to scale the symbol before load-ing it, you should click on the Opt button to access the options.

Identify the origin point to use to load the symbol using one of the available drawing modes.The symbol will be displayed in the selection colour as you move the cursor, to help you to locateit correctly. Click with the left hand mouse button to select the required origin point. The symbolwill now be drawn in its actual colours.

8.2.1 OptionsSet the options as follows:-

ScaleThe symbol can be scaled either by specifying a scale factor or by specifying an actual size.

- Scale Symbol

Choose this method to specify a scale factor. Then set the following values:-



10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

• Scale X - the factor to apply to all x values in the symbol. Click on the arrows to scroll, or click on the value and retype it.

• Scale Y - the factor to apply to all y values in the symbol. Click on the arrows to scroll, or click on the value and retype it.

- Set Symbol Size

Choose this method to specify a final size. Then set the following values:-

• Size X - the actual size to make the symbol in X. Click on the arrows to scroll, or click on the value and retype it.

• Size Y - the actual size to make the symbol in Y. Click on the arrows to scroll, or click on the value and retype it.

RotationThe angle to rotate the symbol by can also be specified. Click on the arrows to scroll, or click onthe value and retype it

Show Previews on TooltipsSet this option to display previews of each symbol as a tool tip. Simply pass over the symbol but-ton to display the preview and name.

Clear this option to display the name of the symbol as a tool tip.

Choose Apply to effect any changes made to the options.

8.3 Loading A Smart SymbolSelect the category of “smart symbols” to use by clicking on the corresponding tab. Locate therequired symbol using the left and right arrow buttons to move between pages, where appropri-ate. Click on the button representing the required file. The KASEMAKE system will now promptfor a first point. This is where you wish to position the first symbol lock point.

Identify the point using one of the available drawing modes. You will now be prompted for asecond point. This is where you wish to position the second symbol lock point. Again, identifythe point using any of the available drawing modes.

The symbol will now be displayed in the selection colour positioned between the chosen points.You will now be prompted for a confirmation point. This is because there are two possible orien-tations for the “smart symbol”. As you move the cursor, the orientation will change to enableyou to place the “smart symbol” correctly. Click with the left hand mouse button to confirm theorientation as required. The symbol will now be drawn in its actual colours at the chosen oriena-tation.

8.3.1 Modifying a Smart SymbolOnce a “smart symbol” has been loaded, you can alter it live in one of two ways:-

• adjust the symbol lock points

• adjust the symbol variables

Before either of these functions can be carried out, the “smart symbol” must first be identifiedusing any of the available selection methods.

Once the “smart symbol” is selected, click with the right mouse button to reveal the contextmenu. You can now access the following commands:-

8.3.1.1 Symbol Variables...Access this command to resize the currently selected “smart symbol”. The main parametric vari-ables used by the selected “smart symbol” are now displayed in a Parametric Symbol Options



Symbols...

KASEMAKE

dialog. An example of which is shown:-

Define the variables as required by typing in the new values. Finally click on OK to apply the newvalues and adjust the symbol accordingly.

8.3.1.2 Adjust Lock PointsThis command can be used if you wish to move a lock point and regenerate the locking tabs.Activate the command. The lock points will now be identified with white markers and you willbe prompted to identify the lock point to adjust. Mark near to the required lock point.

You will now be prompted for the new position for the chosen lock point. The chosen point fol-lows the cursor as you move to help you to identify the new position. Move to the new positionand identify it using one of the available drawing modes.

The symbol will now be regenerated and positioned proportionately between the two lockpoints.

8.3.2 Creating a Parametric SymbolA parametric symbol or “smart symbol” is based on a parametric .cmf file. The .cmf file is createdusing the Parametrics menu of commands. A few points to bear in mind when creating theparametric are :-

• The parametric is normally created from left to right

• A variable called PW must be defined which controls the overall width of the symbol when positioned.

• Mirroring can be used to avoid duplication of elements

• Lock points should be defined to assist with positioning the symbol

• A preview should be created

• All files .cmf, .var and .cfp should be copied to a subdirectory below the PARTS directory



10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

9 Clone Edit

A master clone can be editted with this command. Activate the command and your existingdesign will be temporarily replaced with a zoomed version of the master clone.

Edit the clone using the Edit commands and or manipulating it through the selection box func-tions. Once any adjustments are completed. Activate the command again to return to the com-plete design with the adjustments being reflected in all clones.

10 Ground Table...

The KASEMAKE system provides 128 grounds or layers to draw into. The attributes applied toany of these grounds can be examined and changed using the Ground Table command.

Activate this command. The Ground Definition Table dialog appears. The name of the currentlyloaded table is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog.

The attributes are displayed in columns as follows:-

10.1 Ground NumberThe first column is the ground number. This will be highlighted to show that this is the currentactive ground i.e. the ground currently being drawn into.

To change the current ground, simply click on the number of the ground you wish to becomecurrent. This will now be highlighted and the ground combo box in the Style Tool Bar will beupdated to show the change.

10.2 Ground NameEach ground has a name associated with it. Ground_0, Ground_1 etc. by default. To change thename simply click in the name field to select the current name and type the new name.

10.3 DisplayGrounds can be either ON where anything drawn in that ground is displayed, or OFF whereanything drawn in that ground is not displayed. Click in the field to toggle the value betweenON and OFF. The elements will not be redisplayed until the Ground Definition Table dialog isclosed.

10.4 ColourThe colour used to draw elements associated with a ground can be set from the 20 colour pal-ette used by the KASEMAKE system. Click on the Colour field.

A drop down list of available colours will now appear. Scroll to the required colour and click toselect it. Again the elements will not be redisplayed until the Ground Definition Table dialog is

Command Clone Edit

Menu View->Clone Edit


Command Ground Table

Menu View->Ground Table...

Toolbar Button: Style Tool Bar



Ground Table...

KASEMAKE

closed.

10.5 PenThe KASEMAKE system associates a pen on a plotter or a tool on a sample table with aground. A 1 in the pen field corresponds to the first pen or tool, a value of 2 corresponds to thesecond tool or pen etc. To change the pen, click on this field. A drop down list will now appear.Scroll through the list to the required value and click on it to select it.

E.g. If ground 2 has been used for crease information and tool 2 on the sample tablecorresponds to the creasing tool, then 2 should be entered in the Pen field for ground 2.

10.6 WidthThe width is used in printing only, to denote the line thickness in mm to be used for all elementsdrawn in that ground. If an element is drawn using a line width other than 0, the drawn linethickness will take priority over the line thickness specified in the width field, for the element’sground.

Click on the field to select the current value, then type in the new value.

10.7 TagThe tag field is used when printing to coloured printers. If a ground is tagged, elements in thatground will be drawn in black on the printer, rather than in their actual ground colour. This isuseful for ensuring better definition for colours such as yellow, which do not appear very clearlyon the printed page.

Click on the field to toggle the value between tagged, represented by a ‘T’, or not tagged, wherethe field is left blank.

10.8 Ground Table CommandsIn addition to the actual table of attributes for the 128 grounds, the Ground Definition Tableprovides a row of buttons giving access to commands which help to configure the ground table.

10.8.1 Load...Ground Definition Tables can be set up then saved as .GDT files. This allows you to configuredifferent ground definition tables to suit different tasks. The Load command allows you to loada previously saved configuration.

Click on this command. The Open file dialog box appears. Set the drive and directory to search.A list of available ground definition tables will now appear.

Click on the name of the required ground definition table. The name will be copied to the file-name entry field. Alternatively, type the name of the required ground definition table directlyinto the filename entry field. Finally, click on Open to load the selected ground definition table.Refer to “File Open Dialog” on page 2-6 for further details of specifying the filename with thisdialog.

The contents of the table will now change to those saved in the selected ground definition table.The name of the loaded file will now be displayed at the bottom left corner of the ground defi-nition table, to show that this is now the current GDT.

10.8.2 Save...Activating the command opens the Save As file dialog box. Set the drive and directory to storethe new ground definition table in. A list of existing ground definition tables will now appear.

If you wish to overwrite an existing table, click on the name of the required ground definitiontable. The name will then be copied to the filename entry field. Alternatively, type the name for



10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

the ground definition table directly into the filename entry field. Finally, click on Save to savethe new ground definition table.

The contents of the table will now be saved in the named ground definition table file, for futureuse. The name of the current GDT will be changed to the given filename and displayed at thebottom left corner of the ground definition table.

10.8.3 All OnThe All On command affects the visibility of all the grounds. It is a quick way of switching allgrounds to be displayed.

Click on this command to change all grounds to be on. The Display column of the ground def-inition table will be updated to On for all 128 grounds.

On closing the Ground Definition Table dialog, the design will be redrawn with all drawn ele-ments now visible.

10.8.4 All OffThe All Off command affects the visibility of all the grounds. It is a quick way of switching allgrounds to be invisible.

Click on this command to change all grounds to be off. The Display column of the ground def-inition table will be updated to Off for all 128 grounds.

On closing the Ground Definition Table dialog, the design will be redrawn with no elements nowvisible.

The All Off command can be useful where only a couple of grounds are required to be dis-played. It is easier to use All Off to switch all the grounds off, then set the required groundsback to On individually, than it is to switch the majority of them off individually.

10.8.5 CloseThe Close command closes the Ground Definition Table dialog, saving the current configura-tion. Closing the dialog causes the drawing area and Ground Combo box in the Style Tool Bar tobe redisplayed to reflect any changes made.

11 Line Styles...

The Line Styles command allows you to examine the details of any of the 16 line styles availablewith the KASEMAKE system. In addition, you can use the Line Styles command to edit theseline styles as required.

A Line Style comprises two parts:-

• Pattern - broken down into 16 bits to represent the pattern for this line style. A bit can either be on, meaning that a line segment will be drawn for that bit, or off, meaning that a gap will be left for that bit. It is the combination of these line segments and gaps that forms the pattern.

• Plotted Length - the plotted length of the pattern in mm. The pattern bits will be equally spaced over this length.

Activate the Line Styles command. The Line Styles dialog will appear. Set the Current LineStyle, to the line style you wish to view / change, from the drop down list. Click on the arrow to

Command Line Styles

Menu View->Line Styles...




Linetype Properties…

KASEMAKE

open the list. Scroll to the required line style then click on it to select it. The Pattern and Lengthfields will change to display the settings for the selected line style.

The Pattern field comprises a graphical representation of a single repeat of the pattern for theselected linestyle. It also comprises a sequence of 16 buttons representing the 16 bits of the pat-tern, showing their on / off status.

To alter the pattern, simply click on one or more of the buttons to toggle their on / off state. Thepattern will be redisplayed in the pattern box as you click on the buttons, to show the effect ofchanging their status.

Change the plotted length using the scrolling arrows, or click on the current value and type thenew value. Increasing the plotted length causes the pattern to be stretched, decreasing the plot-ted length causes the pattern to compact.

Finally, click on OK to make the changes permanent. Click on Cancel to abandon any changesand restore the previous settings.

12 Linetype Properties…

The KASEMAKE system allows you to define linetypes. Each linetype is made up of the combi-nation of a ground, a linestyle and a linewidth. The linetype is given a name to identify it.

The linetype Default is automatically defined. Use the Linetype Properties… command todefine other linetypes or amend or delete existing linetypes.

Activate the command. The Linetype Properties dialog box is displayed. The linetype field auto-matically selects the current active linetype and the corresponding properties of this linetype aredisplayed in the properties section.

Set the linetype field to the linetype you wish to view / amend by clicking on its name to select it.Its properties will now be displayed.

Alter any or all of the properties of the linetype as follows:-

• Ground - click on the ground combo to select an alternative ground

• Linestyle – click on the linestyle combo to select an alternative linestyle

• Width – scroll the width to the required value or type the value directly

Click on OK to close the dialog and save any changes. The current linetype will be automaticallychanged to the linetype which you were viewing / amending when you closed the Linetype Prop-erties dialog.

If the Linetype Combo, showing the currently active linetype is not on display, use the View->Toolbars->Customise command to switch it on. Refer to further details on page 10-19.

12.1 New(Insert)In addition to amending or viewing an existing linetype you can use the New command todefine a new linetype.

Click on the New button. A rectangle will now be displayed requesting the name for the newlinetype. Enter an appropriate name followed by the return key to set the name into the line typelist. The new line type is allocated the properties of the previously displayed linetype. It is auto-matically selected and can now be changed as described above.

Command Linetype Properties

Menu View->Linetype Properties...




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

12.2 DeleteYou can also delete a linetype by choosing the Delete command. First select the linetype youwish to delete by clicking on its name in the line types list. Click on the Delete button and thelinetype will be removed.

Note: no confirmation is required with this command so ensure the linetype field is set cor-rectly before proceeding.

12.3 Move UpThe Move Up command allows you to reorder the list of line type properties. Each time theMove Up button is pressed the currently selected line type property is moved up one place inthe list.

12.4 Move DownThe Move Down command allows you to reorder the list of line type properties. Each time theMove Down button is pressed the currently selected line type property is moved down oneplace in the list.

13 Background

The background colour can be changed using this command. Activating the command displaysthe Color dialog. This consists of a palette of 48 predefined colours and provision for up to 16custom colours.

If the colour you wish to use for the background is contained within the basic colours palette,simply click on the required colour to select it. Click on OK to close the dialog and change thebackground colour.

13.1 Custom ColoursThere is also provision for defining up to 16 custom colours.

Click on the define custom colours button. The dialog will now extend widthways displaying thedetails of the current background colour. Click on a colour in the basic colours palette, closest tothe colour you wish to define, if any. The definition of this colour will now appear i.e RGB valuesand HSL values. Adjust the RGB values or the HSL values until you achieve the required colour.Click on the Add To Custom Colours button to add the new colour to your colours palette.

Finally, click on OK to set the background to the newly defined colour. Click on Cancel to leavethe background as before.

14 Units...

The units command allows you to change the units youare working with. The change is immedi-ate.

Activate the command. The Change Units dialog is displayed.

Command Background

Menu View->Background..


Command Units...

Menu View->Units...




Drawing Info...

KASEMAKE

• Units - Set the units you wish to change to from the drop down list.

• Rescale - Set this option, if you wish to rescale the current design to take into account the change of units, adjusting all dimensions as appropriate. Clear it if you wish to leave the drawing at the current scale.

Finally, click on OK to effect the change of units. Click on Cancel to abandon this command.

15 Drawing Info...

Drawing Info... produces a dialog detailing specific information about the current design. It isparticularly applicable to parametric designs, as it details information specific to parametrics aswell as more general information such as overall dimensions and nett area.

Activate the command. The Drawing Information dialog is displayed.

16 Layout Info

Layout Info produces a dialog detailing specific information about the current layout. It is there-fore only available where a layout of a design has been generated. It is only applicable to para-metric designs. It provides general information about the layout including drawing limits andinformation about guttering and offsets applied.

Activate the command. The Layout Properties dialog is displayed.

Further information about producing layouts is available in the Tools section of the manual.Refer to “Layout” on page 8-1

17 Database...

The KASEMAKE system provides an integral customer database It contains user definableinformation about drawings, which can be displayed in a form view or table view. Information istransferred between the database and the drawing using the drawing border.

Activating this command causes the customer database to be displayed. Additional informationcan be added or existing information altered. You can also run paramteric files and associateparametric variables with fields in the database.

For an in depth explanation of how to use the AG Database please refer to “Operation” on page13-2.

Command Drawing Info...

Menu View > Drawing Info...


Command Layout Info

Menu View > Layout Info


Command Database...

Menu View->Database...




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

18 Materials...

The KASEMAKE system provides a materials database. It contains user definable informationabout materials available and is linked to the main customer database. The information can bedisplayed in a form view or table view.

Activating this command causes the materials database to be displayed. Additional informationcan be added or existing information altered.


19 Papers...

The KASEMAKE system provides a papers database. It contains user definable informationabout papers available to some of the commands such as the Stora Compression command. It isalso linked to the materials database.

The information can be displayed in a form view or table view.

Activating this command causes the papers database to be displayed. Additional informationcan be added or existing information altered.


20 Plotters

The plotters command provides a means of looking at the settings of currently loaded plotters.In addition, it provides a means of making additional plotter drivers available to the plot com-mand.

Activate this command to access the plotters dialog. Any currently loaded plotters will now bedisplayed. In addition an add plotter icon will appear. You may now examine and change set-tings for one of the loaded plotters. You may also add a new plotter or remove one of the plot-ters already loaded.

20.1 Adding a New PlotterTo add a new plotter for use with the plot command, you should double click on the add plottericon. The Add Plotter Wizard will now be activated.

After reading the introductory screen, click Next to proceed with plotter installation.

A list of manufacturers and supported plotters is now displayed. Select the manufacturer from

Command Materials...

Menu View->Materials...


Command Papers...

Menu View->Papers...


Command Plotters

Menu View->Plotters




Plotters

KASEMAKE

the Manufacturers list using the scroll bars if necessary. The list of plotters supported for thismanufacturer now appears. Select the required plotter or nearest equivalent by clicking on thename. Click Next to proceed.

- Set the port that your selected plotter is connected to. Check the port configuration, where appropriate by clicking on the Configure Port... button. A dialog of properties for the selected port will now be displayed. Set the settings as required. Refer to your manufacturers manual for help with port configuration. Click on OK to accept them and return to the Port Definition screen. Click on Cancel to return to the Port Definition screen and retain the origi-nal port configuration. Click Next to proceed with the installation.

- Next you are asked to provide a name for the plotter. This should be a name which will ena-ble you to identify the current plotter configuration. You can either accept the default name, or type a new name. If you wish to make this newly installed plotter the default plotter, click on this option. Click on Next to proceed with the installation.

- Finally, you will be asked if you wish to plot a test page. Click on this option if this is the case.

- Click on Finish. The plotter will now be installed. An icon will appear in the plotters window to confirm that the plotter is now available.

A Back option is provided on every page of the Plotter Wizard dialogs to enable you to go backto the previous page of settings, to check or correct settings.

A Cancel option is also provided to allow you to abandon the new installation and leave thePlotter Wizard, again at any stage of the installation.

20.2 Amending Settings for an Existing PlotterTo examine the settings of an installed plotter. Click on the corresponding plotter icon with theright mouse button. Select Properties from the pop-up menu. A tabbed dialog of propertiesnow appears.

20.2.1 GeneralThe comment associated with the current driver is displayed, if any. You can edit it or type a newone if required.

The option to plot a test page is also available. Click on the corresponding button to choose thisoption.

20.2.2 DetailsThe details page allows you to ensure the correct driver and port are being used and to confirmthe port settings.

Set the port to use from the drop down list.

Associate a new driver with the current plotter by selecting from the list of installed drivers.Alternatively, click on New Driver for a complete list of available manufacturers and correspond-ing plotters. Confirmation will be required before you change the driver, as any properties will beoverwritten with the new drivers properties.Click on the manufacturer, then on the plotter touse.

If you wish to update the plotter driver, choose the New Driver option as above. Confirmationwill be required before you change the driver, as any properties will be overwritten with the newdrivers properties. If the updated driver is on disk, click on the Have Disk option of the SelectDevice page. Set the disk and drive as appropriate, then click on OK. The Select Device page willnow be updated to show all available plotters on the given disk and directory. Click on the man-ufacturer, then on the plotter to use.



10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

Set the timeout settings, depending on which port is selected.

• Not selected is the time that Windows will wait for the plotter to be online before signal-ling an error.

• Transmission retry is the time that Windows will wait for the plotter to be ready to plot before signalling an error.

Click on the current value and type the new value as appropriate.

Set the port settings, depending on which port is selected. Consult your plotter documentationfor assistance with setting up ports.

20.2.3 PaperThis page allows you to view the paper settings and customise your own paper sizes.

There are two ways to define your own paper sizes:-

User Defined Paper SizeTo change the user defined paper size, click on the User Defined icon in the Paper Size sectionof the dialog, using the scroll bar if necessary. The current size will be displayed above thepaper size icons and the User Defined dialog now appears.

Set the units by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Enter the required width andlength by clicking on the edit box and typing the value, or using the up and down arrows ofthe spin controls.

Click OK to set the new values into the User Defined paper size. The new size will now bedisplayed. Alternatively, use Restore Defaults, to return to the original settings. Use Cancel toreturn to the previous settings.

Custom Paper SizesTo customise your own paper sizes, click on the Custom Paper... button. The Custom Paperdialog now appears. Any existing customised paper sizes will now be displayed in the namelist.

To add a new paper size, click on the Add New button above the paper size icons and the AddNew Custom Paper dialog now appears. Type in a name for the new paper size then click onOK.

Set the units by clicking on the corresponding radio button. Enter the required width andlength by clicking on the edit box and typing the value, or using the up and down arrows ofthe spin controls.

You can now alter settings for other customised sizes by first selecting them from the namelist. Then altering their values if required.

You can delete a custom paper size, by selecting the size from the name list, then clicking ondelete. Confirmation is required.

Click OK to set the new values into the named paper size. You will now return to the Papertabbed page of the Properties dialog. The new size(s) will now be displayed with the existingpaper size icons.

Use Cancel to abandon any changes and return to the Paper tabbed page of the Propertiesdialog.

OrientationSet the orientation to use either Portrait or Landscape, by clicking on the corresponding radiobutton to set it.



Show / Hide Project Toolbars

KASEMAKE

Paper SourceSet the paper source as appropriate by clicking on the arrow and selecting from the list ofavailable values.

Unplottable AreaMargins can be set for each edge separately, to define the unplottable area of the currentdevice. Type the values directly or use the arrows to scroll.

You should also define the units the unplottable area is defined in by clicking next to theappropriate unit.

Click on OK to accept the Unplottable Area settings and return to the Paper Settings page.

20.2.4 SettingsThe settings page contains general settings and is specific to the current plotter. See also “PlotterSettings” on page 2-23.

21 Show / Hide Project Toolbars

The Show / Hide Project Toolbars command allows you to toggle the display of the window dis-playing the current project tree and associated project commands. It is therefore only available ifa project is currently open.

Activate the command. The project bar will be hidden, or will reappear depending on its currentvisibility.

22 Notes

The Notes command allows you to toggle the display of the Notes view.

Notes can be added to a 2D or 3D design to annotate it. The notes are saved along with yourdesign, so that you can discuss the design with a colleague etc. at various stages of generatingyour finished presentation. You can also attach notes to items within the design which are thenvisible as part of the design.

Activate the command the Notes window will be hidden, or will reappear depending on its cur-rent visibility.

Notes can be added, changed, replied to or deleted.

New NoteClick on New Note to add a new note to the list of notes. The New Note dialog is displayed. Typeyour name in the Author field. Give the note a title. Then type the note contents in the large textarea of the dialog. Click on OK to save the note. An entry showing the given title and your namewill now appear in the Notes window.

Command Show / Hide Project Toolbars

Menu View->Show / Hide Project Toolbars


Command Notes

Menu View->Notes




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

Modifying a NoteTo change a note first click on its title in the notes window. The note will now be expanded toreveal its contents and three options:-

Change

Click on Change to modify the note. The Amend Note dialog is now displayed containing theauthor, title and contents of the selected note. Make any amendments by typing in the dialog.Finally click on OK to close the dialog and update the selected note.

Reply

Click on Reply if you wish to reply to a note. A Reply to Note dialog is now displayed. Again,enter your name in the Author field. The title is filled in automatically, but you can change it ifyou wish. Type your reply in the large text area of the dialog. Finally click on OK to append yourreply to the current note.

Delete

Choose Delete to remove the currently selected note or reply. If you choose to delete a note anyattached replies will also be removed. Confirmation is required before the note or reply areremoved.

23 Properties

The Properties command allows you to toggle the display of the Properties window. Propertiesare associated with some 2D designs, primarily those contained in a project. They are also asso-ciated with objects in a 3D scene. Properties are displayed for selected object(s) only.

Activate the command the Properties window will be hidden, or will reappear depending on itscurrent visibility.

To change a property simply edit the property directly in the properties window. In particular,you can modify the material and opacity of an object.

If you select more than one object, the window will display all properties which are commonbetween the objects. However, since the property window can only show one value, if the valueis ambiguous (i.e. if the objects have different values for a particular property) then the propertywill be blank.

If you modify a property with more than one object selected, then the property will be changedfor all objects.

24 Personal Setup Sub-MenuPersonal Setup is actually a sub-menu leading to the following commands:-

24.1 Load Setup

Use this command to load a new set of toolbar settings. These must first have been saved with a

Command Properties

Menu View->Properties


Command Load Setup

Menu View->Personal Setup->Load Setup




Customise Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

user name using the Save Setup command.

Activate the Load Setup command. You will be asked for the user name. Choose the requiredname from the drop down list by clicking on the arrow, then moving the cursor to the requiredname and clicking to select it. The toolbar settings saved for that user name will now berestored.

24.2 Save Setup

This command allows you to save current toolbar settings such as positioning, which ones todisplay etc. You can specify a user name for the settings to make them unique to you.

Activate the command. Choose the user name from the drop down list, by clicking on the arrowthen moving the cursor to the required name and clicking to select it. This will update any set-tings previously saved for this user. Alternatively, click on a user name to select it and type a newname. The current settings will then be saved under this user name.

24.3 Remove Setup

This command allows you to remove a group of personal settings from the AGCAD.INI file.

Activate the command. Choose the user name from the drop down list by clicking on the arrowthen moving the cursor to the required name and clicking to select it. You will now be requiredto confirm that the settings should be deleted as the operation is irreversible. Upon confirma-tion, the settings are removed.

Removing the currently loaded settings will not cause problems as they will be saved as thedefault settings when the system is shut down.

25 Customise Sub-MenuThe Customise sub-menu gives access to three commands allowing you to customise the tool-bars, shortcuts and context menus used by the KASEMAKE system.

25.1 Toolbars...

The Toolbars command allows you to toggle visibility of the toolbars. It is equivalent to clickingon a toolbar button in the main toolbar. However, it allows you to toggle visibility of the main,standard and style toolbars which are not accessible through the main toolbar.

It also provides functions for you to create your own toolbars and to customise the existing tool-bars.

In addition, it gives you the option to vary the size and appearance of the toolbar buttons.

Activate this command. The toolbars dialog appears. This is a tabbed dialog which has three

Command Save Setup

Menu View->Personal Setup->Save Setup


Command Remove Setup

Menu View->Personal Setup->Remove Setup


Command Toolbars

Menu View->Customise->Toolbars




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

pages of settings. The first page of settings, labelled Toolbars, provides settings for manipulat-ing the existing tool bars. The second page labelled Commands, allows you to select com-mands and menus to use when customising new or existing toolbars. The third page of settingslabelled Options allows the display of tooltips and customised menus can be defined.

25.1.1 ToolbarsA list of toolbars with a corresponding check box appears. If there is a tick in the check box, thisindicates that the toolbar is currently open and on display and vice versa. Click on a check box totoggle the value.

If you are just altering the display of the existing toolbars, rather than customising them, closethe Toolbars dialog by clicking on Close.

Toolbars will reappear where they were last positioned. If a toolbar does not appear it may bebecause you have set the exchangeable toolbars option in preferences. See “ExchangeableToolbars” under File->Preferences on page 2-49 for further details.

Creating and Customising Toolbars

You can create new toolbars, tailoring them to your own specific requirements.

From within the Toolbars dialog, click on New.... A New Toolbar dialog will be displayedrequesting the name for the new toolbar. Enter the required name, then click on OK. The outlineof the new toolbar will now appear with the chosen name as its title.

Toolbars can contain both command buttons and menus. While the Toolbars dialog is displayed,any of the existing toolbars and menus are available for copying or moving to both existing ornewly created toolbars.

• To copy / move a command button or menu to another toolbar:-

- Click and hold the mouse on the required menu name, toolbar button

- Drag the toolbar button to its new position within an existing or new toolbar

- To copy the command button or menu hold down the CTRL key, without the CTRL key the item will be moved i.e. will no longer exist in its original position

- Release the mouse button to reposition or copy the chosen menu, command button to its new position

If you move a command button or menu in error, or wish to revert back to the original version ofa toolbar, simply click on the toolbars name within the list of toolbars to highlight it. If the tool-bar is one of the standard toolbars, click on Reset. The original version of the toolbar will berestored. Any toolbars which have had things added from the selected toolbars will remainunchanged.

If the toolbar is a newly defined toolbar, click on Delete the new toolbar will then be removedand any changes cancelled. Alternatively, you can use the Reset All command which upon con-firmation will restore all the toolbars to their original state. There is also a a command Renamewhich allows you to rename any customised toolbars created with the New... command.

Note: The customised toolbar must be highlighted for thise commands to become available.

• To customise toolbars when the Toolbars dialog is not on display:-

- To copy the command button or menu hold down the Alt Gr key, to move it hold down the Alt key

- Click and hold the mouse on the required menu name, toolbar button

- Drag the toolbar button to its new position within an existing or new toolbar



Customise Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

- Release the mouse button to reposition or copy the chosen menu, command button to its new position

25.1.2 CommandsThe commands tab allows quick access to the available toolbar buttons to use to create new orcustomise existing toolbars. Toolbar buttons can be selected from the commands page anddragged to a new position, without fear of deleting them from their original toolbar position.Available commands are displayed in a list with a description as well as the toolbar icon:-

.

Within the Toolbars section, is a New Menu item giving the option to create a new menu to beadded to a newly customised or existing toolbar. This is followed by a list of each of the currenttoolbars. The final item is All commands allowing you to access all the available commands inone list.

Click on a toolbar name to display the command buttons available for that toolbar, or All com-mands to display a complete list of available commands. To help you to identify individual com-mands, click and release the mouse button on any of the command buttons and a description ofthis command will then be displayed.

To choose a command to place in a tool bar, click and hold the mouse on the required commandbutton and drag it to its new position. Release the mouse button to copy the command buttonto the new position.

25.1.2.1 Creating a Customised MenuClick on New Menu and the commands column will now display a New Menu command com-plete with arrow to indicate that it is a menu. To create a new menu, click and hold the mouseon the New Menu text and drag it to its new position in one of the toolbars. Release the mousebutton to create a new menu with arrow ready for commands to be added.

To add commands to the new menu, first click on the arrow to reveal an empty drop down list.Now drag commands from any of the existing menus by first clicking on the toolbar name in theToolbars column to display the available commands. Drag the required command from theCommands list to the empty drop down list.

The new menu is given the name New Menu by default. To change it right click on the newmenu to reveal a popup menu and choose the Button Appearance... option. A dialog will nowbe displayed allowing you to type alternative text for the menu button. The popup menu alsocontains a Delete command for removing customised menus.



10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

25.1.2.2 Customising the Style ToolbarIt is worth considering customising KASEMAKE’S Style Toolbar as it provides access to com-mands which are not available from anywhere else within KASEMAKE and are not automati-cally included in the default Style Toolbar.

Click on the Commands tab of the Customize dialog and set the Categories selection to Style.The complete set of commands available for the Style Toolbar are now displayed.

There are in fact two combo boxes provided for changing the ground and two combo boxesprovided for changing the linetype or profile.

The standard ground combo box allows you to change the current ground by selecting from adrop down list. It will also display a cross symbol over the coloured box representing the groundcolour, to indicate that the ground is switched off where applicable.

An extended ground combo box is also available which has all the functionality of the standardground combo box, but in addition has a check box to allow you to switch grounds on and offdirectly. Simply set the check box to switch the ground on and clear it to switch the ground off.To switch all grounds on simply hold down the Shift key whilst setting any of the ground checkboxes. Similarly, to switch all grounds off, simply hold down the Shift key whilst clearing any ofthe ground check boxes.

This extra functionality for switching grounds on and off is also provided through the extendedlinetype combo box.

If you wish to use either of the extended combo boxes, simply click and hold the mouse on therequired combo box and drag it to its new position in the Style Toolbar. Release the mouse but-ton to copy the combo box to its new position within the default Style Toolbar.



Customise Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

25.1.3 OptionsThe Options tab allows the way screen tips and customised menus are displayed to be deter-mined:-

Screen Tips

Set the Show Screen Tips on toolbars check box if you wish to reveal a description of the under-lying command whilst moving over each toolbar button. Clear it if you wish to switch off the dis-play of screen tips.

Set the Show shortcut keys in Screen Tips check box if you wish the screen tip to include anyshortcut for the command where available. Clear it to switch off the display of shortcut keys.

Personalized Menus and Toolbars

Set the Menus show recently used commands first check box if you want to display shortenedmenus with only the most recently used commands. Clear it if you wish to display menus in theirentirity.

Where you have opted to show only the most recently used commands, you can opt to displaythe full menu after a short delay. Set the Show full menus after a short delay check box if youwish menus to display this behaviour. Otherwise clear it.

25.2 ShortCuts...

The Shortcuts… command allows you to define shortcuts to specific commands. That is acomibnation of keys that you wish to assign to a specific command.

The shortcut when defined is equivalent to clicking on a toolbar button or accessing a commandfrom a dropdown menu. More than one shortcut can be assigned to a command.

Activate the Shortcuts… command. The Shortcut Keys dialog is displayed which contains thefollowing information:-

Command Toolbars

Menu View->Customise->Shortcuts...




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

Shortcuts

The section headed Shortcuts is where all the available commands which can have shortcutsassigned to them are listed. For convenience they are listed menu by menu in the order inwhich KASEMAKE displays them. To define a shortcut or simply view any defined shortcuts,open up the appropriate menu by clicking on ‘+’ if necessary. A list of available commandsfor this menu is displayed. Any commands which have a shortcut defined are displayed in bluewith the shortcut displayed next to the command name. To alter or create a shortcut click onthe name of the command you wish to set.

Description

Once a command name is selected, a description of the command is printed in this field.

Assigned Shortcuts

This field displays any existing shortcuts for the selected command.

25.2.1 Create ShortcutTo create a shortcut ensure that you have selected the correct command in the Shortcuts field.Activate the Create Shortcut button. The Assign Shortcut dialog appears. Press the key combina-tion that you wish to use for the shortcut. A representation of this will now be displayed. Under-neath a comment will be displayed showing whether this key combination is already assigned asa shortcut or not.

Click on OK to close the dialog and assign the shortcut. This will now be added to the list ofexisting shortcuts displayed in the Assigned Shortcuts field. The command name will be redis-played in blue with its shortcut as confirmation that a shortcut now exists for this command.

Click on Cancel to close the dialog and ignore any changes.

25.2.2 Create FileChoose Create File to create a text file containing a list of all the shortcuts currently available inKASEMAKE.

The Save As dialog appears. Enter the location and appropriate name for the text file. Click onOK to close the dialog and create the specified file containing all available shortcuts.

Click on Cancel to close the dialog and abandon this command.

25.2.3 PrintChoose this command to print a list of available shortcuts used by KASEMAKE.

The Print dialog appears. Proceed in the usual way. Please refer to “Print dialog box” on page 2-19.

25.2.4 Removing a ShortcutTo remove a shortcut first select the command in the Shortcuts list, for which you want toremove a shortcut. The available shortcuts for this command will now be displayed in theAssigned Shortcuts field.

Click on the shortcut you wish to remove and press the Remove command button. The shortcutwill now be removed from the Assigned Shortcuts list.

25.2.5 OKTo save any new shortcuts or changes to existing shortcuts, choose OK to close the Shortcut Keysdialog.



Customise Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

25.2.6 CancelTo abandon any changes made to the shortcuts, choose Cancel to close the dialog.

25.2.7 Reset AllThe Reset All command allows you to resume the system default values for all shortcuts.

Click on the Reset All command button. As any changes you have made will be lost upon com-pletion of this command, the system will prompt you for confirmation before executing thecommand. Choose one of the following actions:-

• Click on OK to revert to the system defaults and forget your changes.• Click on Cancel to abandon this command.

25.3 Context Menu...

KASEMAKE provides several context menus each tailored to specific commands. The contextmenu applicable to the current command is automatically displayed when the right hand mousebutton is clicked anywhere in the drawing area.

The Context Menu command allows you to customise the contents of KASEMAKE’S contextmenus, adding commands or even menus of commands

Before activating this command, you should activate a command for which you wish to tailorthe context menu. Activate this command. The Modify Menu dialog appears. This dialog allowsyou to select commands and menus to use to customise an existing context menu:-

Current CommandThe Current Command field shows the command you have just activated. This is the commandwhich the context menu is associated with.

Command Context Menu

Menu View->Customise->Context Menu




10 - View Commands

KASEMAKE

Apply Context Menu To All CommandsWhere Apply Context Menu To All Commands is displayed, you can set it resulting in all changesmade being applied to all of KASEMAKE’S commands which use the standard context menu.Clear this setting it if you only wish to make changes to the current command’s context menu.

Original MenuThe Original Menu section of the dialog displays a list of all menus provided by KASEMAKE.The contents of each menu can be examined by clicking on the corresponding +. Similarly eachmenu can be closed by clicking on the - to collapse it.

Current MenuThe Current Menu section shows the contents of the context menu currently being worked on.Any changes are reflected in this section.

25.3.1 Modifying the Context MenuTo add an existing command to the current context menu, first open up the menu containingthe required command in the Original Menu list.

Next, click and hold the left mouse button over the required command to select it. Drag thecommand to the Current Menu section of the dialog and release the mouse button at the posi-tion within this menu where you would like the chosen command to be placed. The commandwill now be added to the current context menu at the given position.

Entire menus and their contents can also be added to the current context menu by repeating theabove but with the menu, rather than the individual command.

25.3.1.1 Add SeparatorThis function will add a separator, shown as a thin horizontal line, to the context menu. This canimprove readability and help to group similar functions together. First click in the Current Menucolumn to identify the position for the separator. Then click on Add Separator. <<Separator>>will now be placed in the Current Menu column at the chosen position, to indicate that a sepa-rator will be placed here.

25.3.1.2 Add MenuA new menu of commands can be added to the context menu. Again click in the Current Menucolumn first to identify the position for the new menu. Click on Add Menu and a new menu willbe inserted at the chosen position.

The menu can be renamed simply by clicking on the default name Menu and typing a newname. The menu can be opened by clicking on the + ready for commands to be added. Initiallythe menu is empty.

25.3.1.3 RemoveThis command will remove the currently selected menu or command from the context menu.First select the command or menu within the Current Menu column. Click on Remove and thechosen command / menu will be removed from the list.

25.3.1.4 ResetThe Reset command allows you to abandon any changes and restore the Context menu to itsoriginal state. Its effect cannot be reversed, so confirmation is required before the reset takesplace.

Once the context menu is modified, click on OK to make the changes permanent. Cancel willthrow away any changes made.



Status Bar

KASEMAKE

26 Status Bar

The status bar command allows you to toggle the display of the status bar.

Activate the command the status bar will be hidden, or will reappear depending on its currentvisibility.

Command Status Bar

Menu View->Status Bar




KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

11 - Zoom Commands

1 Zoom Box

The Zoom Box command allows you to identify an area of the screen to enlarge. The area isidentified by surrounding it with a box, hence the name Zoom Box.

Activate the command. The magnifying glass cursor with a “+” appears to show that you areenlarging all or part of the design. You now need to identify two points on the diagonal ofthe zoom box this is done in one of two ways depending on the value selected for quick-zoom in preferences. Please refer to “Quickzoom” on page 2-48.

OriginalFirst identify the bottom left corner of the area to be zoomed by clicking and releasing theleft mouse button to define the point. Any of the available drawing modes can be used.

Move the cursor. A dotted selection box will begin to rubber band from the marked corner,following the cursor. When the box encloses the required area, click and release the leftmouse button to identify the top right corner. Again, any of the drawing modes can be usedto identify this corner.

Click & DragIf this option is set click and hold the left mouse button to define the start point for the box.Hold down the button whilst moving the mouse and the dotted selection box will rubberband from the marked corner, following the cursor. Release the mouse button to define thesecond corner and complete the zoom box.

In both cases, the enclosed part of the design will now be redisplayed, so that it fills theentire drawing area. The window size will also change to reflect the proportion of the designnow being displayed.

2 Zoom All

The Zoom All command allows you to maximise a design.

Activate the command. The entire design will be displayed so that it fills the drawing area.The window size will also change to show that a different portion of the design is being dis-played.

Command Zoom Box

Menu View->Zoom Box


Command Zoom All

Menu View->Zoom All




11 - Zoom Commands

KASEMAKE

3 Zoom Cursor

The Zoom Cursor command provides a temporary zoom function. This is useful when you needmore detail to be able to complete a command accurately as you can use Zoom Cursor in themiddle of commands.

Access Zoom Cursor from the View menu to define the settings to use when you zoom. To exe-cute a zoom use the PGUP key at any time. The KASEMAKE drawing view will be zoomed asper the current settings for as long as you keep the PGUP key held down. Once you have com-pleted the current command, simply release the PGUP key to return to the original drawing view.

3.1 SettingsActivate this command from the View menu to change the current settings. The Zoom AboutCursor dialog now appears:-

Zoom SizeThe Zoom Size determines how much of the design is visible within the zoomed view. It deter-mines the radius of the area surrounding the cursor tha is to be viewed.

Set the value by typing directly, or use the arrow keys to scroll.

Centred on Snap CursorSet this option if you wish to centre the view around the snap cursor. This means that if a snapmode is activated, an adjustment for the mode will be applied to the cursor and the adjustedpoint will be used as the centre of the zoomed view.

Clear this option if you wish the zoomed view to be centred about the freehand cursor position.

4 Zoom Last

The Zoom Last command returns you to the previous zoomed view of the current design. Thiscommand is not available until one of the zoom commands has been used.

Activate the command. The design will be redisplayed at the window size that was in effectbefore the last zoom command.

Command Zoom Cursor

Menu View->Zoom Cursor


Command Zoom Last

Menu View->Zoom Last




Zoom In Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activate the command again. The design will be redisplayed at the window size in effect beforethe first Zoom Last command.

The system will now toggle between the previous and current views each time Zoom Last is acti-vated. The two views will only change when a further zoom command is issued making itsresults the current view.

5 Zoom In Sub-MenuZoom in is actually a sub-menu of factors to use with the Zoom In command:-

5.1 10%

Use this command to magnify the design by 10%. The centre of the design will be maintained.

Activate the command. The design will be magnified by 10% maintaining the original centre.The window size will be adjusted to reflect this.

5.2 20%

This command magnifies the current design by 20% but otherwise works identically to Zoom In10%.

5.3 30%


5.4 40%


Command 10%

Menu View->Zoom In->10%


Command 20%



Command 30%



Command 40%





11 - Zoom Commands

KASEMAKE

5.5 50%


6 Zoom Out Sub-MenuZoom out is actually a sub-menu of factors to use with the Zoom Out command:-

6.1 10%

Use this command to decrease magnification of the design by 10%. The centre of the design willbe maintained.

Activate the command. The design will be redisplayed at 10% less magnification, maintainingthe original centre. The window size will be adjusted to reflect this.

6.2 20%

This command decreases magnification of the current design by 20% but otherwise works iden-tically to Zoom Out 10%.

6.3 30%


6.4 40%


Command 50%



Command 10%

Menu View->Zoom Out->10%


Command 20%



Command 30%



Command 40%





Zoom Selected

KASEMAKE

6.5 50%


6.6 100%

This command decreases magnification of the current design by 100% but otherwise worksidentically to Zoom Out 10%.

7 Zoom Selected

The Zoom Selected command takes the currently selected items and redisplays them so thatthey fill the drawing area. This command is not available until at least one drawing element isselected.

Activate the command. The selected elements will be redisplayed zoomed to fill the screen. TheWindow Size will be updated to reflect the change.

8 Quickzoom

The Quickzoom command is a temporary single use command. It allows you to zoom into anarea of a design without breaking out of the current command.

Activate the Quickzoom command. The current command is frozen and the Quickzoom com-mand initiated. You now need to identify two points on the diagonal of the zoom box this isdone in one of two ways depending on the value selected for quickzoom in preferences. Pleaserefer to “Quickzoom” on page 2-48.

OriginalFirst identify the first corner of the area to zoom by clicking and releasing the left mouse buttonto define the point. Any of the available drawing modes can be used.

Move the cursor. A dotted selection box will begin to rubber band from the marked corner, fol-lowing the cursor to assist with identifying the area to zoom. When the box encloses therequired area, click and release the left mouse button to identify the top right corner. Again, anyof the drawing modes can be used to identify this corner.

Command 50%



Command 100%



Command Zoom Selected

Menu View->Zoom Selected


Command Quickzoom

Menu Zoom->Quickzoom




11 - Zoom Commands

KASEMAKE

Click & DragIf this option is set click and hold the left mouse button to define the first corner of the box.Hold down the button whilst moving the mouse and the dotted selection box will rubber bandfrom the marked corner, following the cursor to assist with identifying the area to zoom. Releasethe mouse button to define the second corner and complete the zoom box.

In both cases, the enclosed part of the design will now zoom to show this area in detail. Theoriginal command will now be restored, at the point where you called Quickzoom, ready for youto complete any further steps.



KASEMAKE

12 - Windows Commands

1 New Window

The New Window command allows you to open another window for your current design.The new window can be used to view a different area of the design, perhaps in greaterdetail, whilst keeping the whole design in the original window.

Activate this command. A new window will open displaying the current design. The windowwill be titled as the original window, but will have the suffix “:2” added to show that it is asub-window of the original design. The original window will have the suffix “:1” added to itstitle. Further windows can be opened as required. These will be suffixed in ascending order.

New windows can be resized and moved in the usual way. You can work in any of the sub-windows. Any additions or changes will be replicated through all sub-windows displayingthe current design.

2 Split

The split command allows you to divide a window horizontally, vertically or both. It is usefulfor seeing different parts of the one design.

Activate the command. A large cross hair now appears, representing the horizontal andvertical splitters. Move the cursor to position the splitters. Click to divide the drawing areaand redisplay the design.

The splitters can be moved by dragging them while holding the mouse button down.Releasing the mouse button moves the splitter to the current cursor position and redisplaysthe design as appropriate.

When a design is split, scroll bars appear to enable you to scroll the appropriate part of thedesign into view. Adding or altering a design can be carried out in any of the partitionedareas, the results are replicated in the other sections simultaneously.

To remove a splitter simply drag it to the edge of the drawing area.

3 Close All

The Close All command as its name suggests allows you to close all the currently openwindows.

Activate the command. Confirmation is required before the command is executed as anypreviously unsaved changes will be lost on completion of this command.

Command New Window

Menu Windows->New Window


Command Split

Menu Windows->Split


Command Close All

Menu Windows->Close All





KASEMAKE

After confirmation, all windows will be closed and only a subset of menus will be available.

4 Cascade

The Cascade command is used to display all open windows in an overlapping fashion. It isuseful for checking which designs are currently open. Only the contents of the current activewindow are visible when this method is selected.

Activate the command to display all open windows in this way.

Note: This command is only available if standard MDI windows are used rather than tabbeddesign windows. See Preferences - “Kasemake Look” on page 2-54.

5 Tile Horizontally

The Tile Horizontally command is used to display all open windows in a tiled non-overlapping fashion. It is useful for displaying all of the designs that are currently open.

Activate the command to redisplay all open windows. Each window is resized horizontally to thefull width of the screen. The height of each window is adjusted dependent upon the number ofopen windows so that they all fit one underneath the other and fill the height of the screenwithout overlapping .


6 Tile Vertically

The Tile Vertically command is used to display all open windows in a tiled non-overlappingfashion. It is useful for displaying all of the designs that are currently open.

Activate the command to redisplay all open windows. Each window is resized vertically to thefull height of the screen. The width of each window is adjusted dependent upon the number ofopen windows so that they all fit side by side without overlapping to fill the width of the screen.


Command Cascade

Menu Windows->Cascade


Command Tile Horizontally

Menu Windows->Tile Horizontally


Command Tile Vertically

Menu Windows->Tile Vertically




Arrange Icons

KASEMAKE

7 Arrange Icons

The Arrange icons command is used to line up all minimised windows in a non-overlappingfashion

Activate the command to display all minimised windows in this way.


8 Changing the Active WindowThe final section of the Windows menu contains a list of most recently accessed windows, acti-vated through the New, Open, Run or Record commands.

A list of drawing titles for some or all of the open windows is displayed. The currently activewindow has a tick next to it to distinguish it.

The number of drawing titles displayed depends upon the number of items in window optionavailable through the Settings page of the Preferences dialog. Please refer to “Number of itemsin window” on page 2-44. The final entry in the list, where not all windows are displayed, isMore Windows... which allows access to the other open windows not shown.

To change the active window to one in the list, simply move the cursor to the required windowname and click to make it active, otherwise use the More Windows... command explained in thenext section.

9 More Windows...

The More Windows... command allows access to the open windows not shown in the openwindows list.

Command Arrange Icons

Menu Windows->Arrange Icons


Command More Windows...

Menu Window->More Windows...





KASEMAKE

Activating this command brings up the Current Window List dialog as shown:-

This displays the entire list of currently opened windows. Simply click on a filename to select it.Hold down the CTRL key as you click if you wish to identify multiple files. Click and hold the CTR-Lkey on a selected filename to deselect it.

In addition, there is a set of command buttons. The commands work on the selected files andavailability varies according to whether a single or multiple file(s) are identified.

ActivateThe Activate command button becomes available only when a single file is selected. Simply clickon this button to activate the window containing the currently selected file.

SaveThe Save command is available for both single and multiple files. Click on this button to save thecurrently selected files(s). You are prompted with a Save As dialog for each file in turn.

Close Window(s)The Close Window(s) command allows you to close one or more selected windows. Where awindow contains a design with unsaved changes, you will be prompted to save it before thewindow is closed. Simply, activate the Close Window button to close the selected windows.

Tile Horizontal The Tile Horizontal command only works with multiple file selections. It allows you to tile theselected windows horizontally. Simply, activate the Tile Horizontal button to display the selectedwindows one above the other.

Tile VerticalThe Tile Vertical command only works with multiple file selections. It allows you to tile theselected windows vertically. Simply, activate the Tile Vertical button to display the selected win-dows side by side.

CascadeThe Cascade command only works with multiple file selections. It allows you to cascade theselected windows. Simply, activate the Cascade button to display the selected windows over-lapped.



More Windows...

KASEMAKE

MinimizeThe Minimize command allows you to minimize the selected window(s). Simply, activate theMinimize button to minimize each of the selected windows in turn.

OKChoose OK to close the Current Window List dialog.



KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

13 - AG Database

1 IntroductionThe AG Database is an integral part of the KASEMAKE application, and is accessed fromthe Kasemake menu View/Database. It contains user definable information about drawings,which can be displayed in a form view or table view. An example form view is shown inFigure 12.1.

Information is transferred between the database and the drawing using the drawing border,see Borders on page 13-6. Full searching and querying facilities are provided, see Querieson page 13-5. Reports can be produced using Kasemake drawings as templates, see Reportson page 13-8.

Figure 12.1 - AG Database

2 Default configurationThe default database has all the fields that were present in the AG/DATA system, along withan extra field called Drawing ID, which is an AutoNumber field. This is a standard databasetype that automatically generates a unique number for each record, see “Adding a new field”on page 13-14.

When transferring information from a drawing border to the database, one of the databasefields must be used to identify the correct record to update. This field is termed the ‘key’field, and by default is set to the Filename field (it is stored in the AGCad configuration file,



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

see AG Database configuration settings on page 13-12. Transfer between border and databaseis detailed in Borders on page 13-7. Other fields can be used as the key field by modifying theconfiguration file. Note that the AG/DATA system used the Spec No as the key field, and if AG/DATA database files (FoxPro *.dbf format) are used in the AG Database, then the Spec No fieldwill also be used as the key field.

Other properties of the database can be changed to suit individual requirements, these aredetailed in Database Tools on page 13-13.

3 Operation

3.1 ToolbarThe four toolbar buttons shown move through the database records, moving to the first,previous, next, and last records respectively.

The edit toolbar button must be pressed before the contents of a database record can beamended. Once pressed, any changes made will be saved when the ENTER key is pressed,or another record is selected.

The add, cancel, and delete record toolbar buttons are shown. Pressing the addbutton will display a new record with default information, and data can be entered asrequired. The new record is saved by pressing ENTER, or moving to a new record.

The cancel button will remove any changes that have not been saved.

The delete button will delete the current record. (NB. In table view, one or more recordsmust be selected before they can be deleted. Multiple records can be deleted in this way).Confirmation is requested before records are deleted, as this operation is permanent.

The table view button above displays the current set of records as a table. Pressing itagain will return to the form view.

The query button allows a query (or filter) expression to be entered, which determines theset of records that are viewed, see Queries on page 13-5.

The find button displays the Find dialog in Figure 12.2. The current field is searched, inthis case the field ‘Customer’. To search another field, click on the field in the databaseview.

Figure 12.2



Operation

KASEMAKE

Pressing the load border button will display the border file selection dialog, load theselected border, and transfer information from the current record to any database fields inthe border.

The load drawing button will load the drawing specified by the filename field in thecurrent record.

Pressing the new project button will display the new project dialog, create the newproject, and set links with the project file and drawing files to the database. For a fullexplanation of working with projects within the database please see “New Project...” onpage 11.

Pressing the run button will display the Run dialog to open and run in a parametriccommand file. Values for parametric variables (e.g. length, width and depth) will be takenfrom fields in the current record where prior associations have been made.

The view buttons alter the information on display, choose from customer, jobs or jobs percustomer.

3.2 Right Button Popup MenuIn the form view, pressing the right mouse button in a field displays the popup menu shown inFigure 12.3. This allows the records to be sorted by the active field, e.g. ‘Customer’, and therecords to be filtered by the contents of the active field. For example, selecting the ‘Filter by field’option in this case would display only the records with ‘AG/CAD’ in the Customer field. The ‘Find’option is the same as the toolbar button. The ‘Remove Filter/Sort’ option removes any filtering orsorting and displays all the records.



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

Figure 12.3 - Popup menu

3.3 Adding and Deleting RecordsTo manually add or delete records, use the appropriate toolbar buttons or the Record menuoptions, see Toolbar on page 13-2.

Records can also be added to the database by creating or modifying a drawing bordercontaining database information, see Borders on page 13-7.

3.4 Copying a RecordThe menu option Record/Copy adds a copy of the current record to the end of the database, andmakes the copied record the current record. The key field value should then be changed so thatit is unique (if the key field is an AutoNumber field, it will be changed automatically).



Queries

KASEMAKE

4 QueriesDatabase queries return records that match the specified conditions. The query editor is shownin Figure 12.4.

Figure 12.4 - Query Editor

Queries can be stored in the database file. To create a stored query, press the ‘New Query’button, and a new query with a default name will be created. Change the name and query asrequired. The query will be stored in the database file when the Run Query or Store Querybuttons are pressed.

The query conditions can be typed in directly, or created using the query setup controls. The firstquery setup control selects one of the fields in the database. The second query setup controlselects one of logical expressions ‘= < > <> Like’. The third query setup control allows input oftext. Pressing the ‘Add to Query’ button will create the query expression and add it to the mainquery control. The ‘Run Query’ button will then display all the records that match the query, inthe case of Figure 12.4, all records where the Customer field contains the text ‘AG/CAD’ will bedisplayed. The database status bar will display the word ‘(Filtered)’ next to the number ofrecords to indicate a filter is active, and only a subset of the database is displayed.

The logical expression ‘Like’ allows wildcard characters to used in the text. The following tableshows how you can use Like to test expressions for different patterns.

Kind of match Pattern Match No match Multiple characters a*a aa, aBa, aBBBa aBC

*ab* abc, AABB, Xab aZb, bacSpecial character a[*]a a*a aaa

Multiple characters ab* abcdefg, abc cab, aabSingle character a?a aaa, a3a, aBa aBBBa

Single digit a#a a0a, a1a, a2a aaa, a10aRange of characters [a-z] f, p, j 2, &

Outside a range [!a-z] 9, &, % b, aNot a digit [!0-9] A, a, &, ~ 0, 1, 9



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

The query editor adds the multiple character wildcard (*) before and after the text when theoperator ‘Like’ is selected. If any other match is required, the query expression can be editeddirectly.

Multiple expressions can be constructed by adding multiple queries, as in Figure 12.5.

Figure 12.5 - Query Editor

Expressions are combined using the logical ‘AND’ operator by default. Expressions can becombined with the logical ‘OR’ operator by manually changing the AND to OR. Running thequery in Figure 12.5 will display all records that have ‘AG/CAD’ in the customer field and have adate later than 2nd August 1998. (NB. When dates are entered into queries, they must be in USformat. A note is displayed in the query setup whenever dates are being entered).

4.1 Query syntaxThe AG Database query editor uses SQL, an industry standard database language. A full guide toSQL is outside the scope of this manual, but the majority of query requirements can be createdusing the query editor which does not require knowledge of SQL.

Some main points of SQL syntax are as follows. Field names are enclosed in square brackets, e.g.[Customer]. Text is enclosed in double quotes, e.g. “AG/CAD”. Dates are enclosed in #characters, e.g. #08/02/98#, and must be in US format. Wildcard characters can be used withthe ‘Like’ operator to match character patterns, see Queries on page 13-5.

5 BordersInformation is transferred between the database and drawings using the drawing border. Theinformation can be transferred in both directions between the database record and the border.The database must be open for any transfer to occur, although the database window does nothave to be visible (closing the database window does not close the database). The information istransferred when a border or drawing is loaded from the database, and when a drawing with aborder is saved (after editing the border).

Combined a[!b-m]# An9, az0, a99 abc, aj0



Borders

KASEMAKE

5.1 Border formatA typical border consists of pairs of text elements termed prompts and masks. The mask is thelink to the information in a database field. When a border is created, to link a mask to adatabase field, the mask should be the name of the database field in square brackets, e.g.[Customer]. To enable the number of characters to be controlled in the border, the mask willlimit the number of characters to that in the original text, so the mask should be padded withthe required extra characters (any characters will do). So to create a mask that will display thecustomer name up to 20 characters, the original mask would be ‘[Customer]**********’. Anydatabase field can be referred to in this way. (Note that this number of characters does notaffect the field size of the database field).

When creating borders, it is possible to have multiple masks per prompt. Hold the shift keydown to mark multiple masks. These must be used to link to a database field of memo type,such as the Notes field. Each mask must have the field name and padding characters, and willlink to the corresponding line of text in the memo field.

An example border template drawing (to create the border from) and the corresponding borderfile are located in the ‘Samples’ directory.

5.2 Transfer from database to borderA border can be loaded round a drawing, and filled with information from a database record.Display the required record in the database, and press the ‘Load Border’ toolbar button or selectthe Drawing/Load Border menu item. Select the required border file, the border will be loadedround the drawing, and any masks in the border that link to database fields are replaced by theinformation in the corresponding database field. (Note that if the key field has been changed inthe configuration file, the border will now be linked to the current database record).

If there is a filename in the database ‘Filename’ field, pressing the ‘Load Drawing’ toolbar buttonor selecting the Drawing/Load Drawing menu item will load the drawing into Kasemake. Anymasks in the drawing border that link to database fields will be compared with the current fieldinformation, and if they are different the message in Figure 12.6 is displayed.

Figure 12.6 - Load drawing message

This enables changes to be made to the database record and the drawing to be kept up to date.

5.3 Transfer from border to databaseTo load a border without replacing masks from the database, close the database window, andload the border (ensure the ‘Update border from database’ checkbox in the load border dialog iscleared). Each mask is replaced by a string of ‘*’ characters indicating the maximum number ofcharacters the mask will accept (the number of characters the database will accept is determinedby the database file).

The border masks can then be edited (Tools/Border/Edit). Any AutoNumber fields (see Adding anew field” on page 13-14) in the border do not need a value, as one will be generatedautomatically by the database when it is updated.



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

There is a checkbox on the File/Save As dialog which determines whether the database isupdated when the drawing is saved – this is enabled by default. When the drawing is saved, thedatabase will be updated with the border mask information (any AutoNumber fields generatedby the database will be updated in the border). If the database is not open, it will be openedautomatically.

The key field defined in the configuration file is used to identify the correct database record. Thedefault setting is to use the drawing filename, which gives the following two possibilities:

• The drawing filename does not exist in any database records. If the current record does not have a drawing filename, then the current record is updated, otherwise a new record is cre-ated in the database, and information transferred from the border.

• The drawing filename already exists in a database record. The record is displayed, and confir-mation requested to update the record with the new border information.

If the key field has been changed in the configuration file, then this field information is used toidentify the database record. This can produce a third possibility that the border does notcontain the key field. The database will just update the current record. If the border has beenloaded from the database however, the key field value will be stored with the border, andsubsequently the database will be able to move to the correct record.

6 ReportsReports can be created involving all or any set of records from the database. To use only certainrecords, create a query defining the required conditions, and display the result in the databaseform or table view. Any subsequent reporting will then only use the current set of records.

6.1 Create reports using Kasemake drawingsAny report can be produced from a drawing by inserting text linked to database fields into thedrawing. A section of the drawing is then repeated for each record in the current database,replacing the text with information from each field. Any drawing element (including bitmapsetc.) can be included in any section of the report. Reports are saved with an extension *.agr, andan example report file ‘report.agr’ is installed in the Samples directory.

Database fields are inserted into the drawing as text with the field name in square brackets, e.g.[Customer]. Control codes are used to mark the section of the drawing to repeat for eachdatabase record, and also to indicate special properties such as the number of pages. Controlcodes are indicated by braces {}. The following control codes are currently recognised:

{StartRecord}This indicates the start of the drawing section to be

repeated for each database record. This must be present for multiple records, and is not printed.

{EndRecord}This indicates the end of the drawing section to be repeated for each database record. This must be present for multiple records, and is not printed.

{EndPage}

This indicates end of the page, so that the number of records to fit on a page can be calculated. This must be present for multiple records, and is not

printed.{Date} This is replaced by the current date.{Page} This is replaced by the current page number{Pages} This is replaced by the number of pages.



Parametrics

KASEMAKE

Reports can be printed from the database by using the File/Print To Report menu. A single recordcan also be printed to a report using the database File/Print Current Record To Report menu.Both of these options display a preview of the selected report file before printing.

Reports can also be previewed and printed from the Kasemake File menu. When a report isprinted there is an extra check box ‘Merge from Database’ in the Print/Options dialog. Thismerges the database records into the drawing as described above, but can be disabled to printthe drawing without modifying any fields or control codes. This can be useful for checkinglayout and size of the report.

6.2 Using AG/DATA reportsReports created in AG/DATA can still be used if the properties of the database file have not beenchanged. This condition is necessary because the AG/DATA report generator can only readdatabase files in its original format. The field names can be changed, but the number of fieldsand the type of each field cannot be changed. If the database format is incompatible, a warningmessage will be displayed.

Selecting the File/AG Data Report menu item from the AG Database will export the databaserecords to a temporary file and start the AG/DATA report generator. AG/DATA must beconfigured to load the temporary file, by running DBConfig and selecting Report.dbf from theKasemake directory as the database file.

The location of AG/DATA and the temporary filename are stored in the Kasemake configurationsettings, see AG Database configuration settings on page 13-12.

7 ParametricsParametric files can be run from the database, taking the values for parametric variables (e.g.length, width and depth) from fields in the current record. Associations have to be definedbetween the parametric variables and the database fields. There are two levels of associatingdatabase fields with parametric variables – default associations that apply to all files, and specificassociations individual for each parametric file.

To run a parametric from the database, select the Parametrics/Run menu item from AGDatabase, and select the required parametric file.

7.1 Default associationsFrom the AG Database, select the Parametrics/Default Variable Association menu item, thedialog as in Figure 12.7 is displayed. This shows the default associations that are defined afterinstallation, i.e. Length, Width and Depth database fields are linked to parametric variables L, W,and D respectively. The associations defined here are applied to all parametrics run from thedatabase unless they are defined differently in the parametric file.



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

Figure 12.7 - Default association dialog

7.2 Parametric file associationsTo associate a database field with a different parametric variable for an individual file, the linkcan be defined in the parametric variable table. Run the parametric in Kasemake, and open thevariable table editor (Parametrics/Variables). Click on the ‘Show associated database fields’toolbar

button to display the Database Field column. Enter the database field name in therequired row (click the right mouse button to display a list of the available database fieldnames). This will be saved in the parametric variable file, and will override any defaultassociations for that field.

7.3 Updating the database from a parametric variable tableAssocations defined in the parametric variable table between a variable and a database field arealso used to update the database from the variable table when the parametric drawing is saved.A border must be loaded around the drawing for this update to occur, as the border defines thedatabase record for the drawing. The ‘Update database from border’ checkbox in the File/SaveAs dialog must be checked as in Transfer from border to database on page 13-7, and when thedrawing is saved, the specified database fields will be updated with the corresponding variabletable values. Variables that update the database in this way usually do not want their expressionto be updated from the database when the parametric is run – this can be achieved by makingthe first character of the variable name a ‘%’, eg ‘%AREA’. This allows properties of the drawingto be calculated in the variable table, and the value to be transferred automatically to a databasefield.



Projects

KASEMAKE

8 ProjectsProjects can be created from within the database. Associations can be defined between thedatabase fields and the name and location of the new project. It is also possible to opt to createa database record for the project only or one for the project and one for each of the files itcontains. These records will then be automatically created or updated as the project is saved.

8.1 New Project...Select the Project->New Project... command from the AG Database menu. The following dialogwill appear:-

Project NameThe project name is automatically supplied. It is either a default value, or where an associationhas been made it corresponds to the value of the associated field in the current record.

Amend the project name if necessary, by typing directly in the field. Alternatively, you can clickon Next Available to randomly generate a name.

Project LocationThe project location is automatically supplied. It consists of the location specified for ProjectFolder in File->Preferences if any. This is followed by a sub folder corresponding to the value ofthe field associated with project location as defined in the current record if one has beendefined.

If you wish to use an alternative location, you can enter the required project location directly.Alternatively, click on the ... button to display the Browse for Folder dialog to assist you withidentifying the required location. Click on the appropriate folder names until the required loca-tion is displayed. Finally click on OK to enter the location automatically.

Add Project to DatabaseThis option determines whether or not a database record is created for the project file when it issaved. Set or clear this option as required.

Add Drawing(s) to DatabaseThis option determines whether or not a database record is created for each drawing filecontained within the project when the project is saved. Set or clear this option as required.

Full PathThis field provides confirmation of the final location and name of the project which will becreated.



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

Finally click on OK to create the new project as specified in Full Path.

8.2 Associate Project NameThe project name can be associated with a database field. Select the Project->Associate ProjectName command from the AG Database menu the following dialog will appear:-

Database FieldThe database field is a combo box containing a drop down list of the names of all the fieldswithin the database. Its current value is displayed to show any current association with theproject name.

To change the association, simply click on the arrow and scroll through the drop down list. Clickon the name of the required field to set it. Finally click on OK to confirm the new association.

8.3 Associate Project LocationThe project location can be associated with a database field. Select the Project->AssociateProject Location command from the AG Database menu. Proceed as for Associate Project Nameabove.

9 Format of Database FilesThe database files are Microsoft Access format (*.mdb), and can be modified directly in Access ifrequired. The AG Database will open the first table in the database file. If this is not the requiredtable, the table name can be specified in the configuration file, see AG Database configurationsettings on page 13-12The database files used by AG/DATA are FoxPro 2.6 (*.dbf) files. Thesefiles can be loaded into AG Database if required (change the ‘Files of type’ option in thedatabase open dialog), but facilities such as storing queries and modifying database propertiesare not available, and the database key field is always the Spec No. It is recommended thatexisting AG/DATA databases are upgraded to Access format.

10 AG Database configuration settingsThese are configuration settings stored in AGCad.ini which are used by the AG Database.

- DatabaseFilePath=C:\Kasemake\Agcad.mdbThis is the last database file that was opened by the AG Database, and will be the database that is opened when the database is run for the first time.

- DatabaseDrawingFileLocation=C:\This is the file path that determines where drawing files are stored on a network, see Config-uration for network database on page 13-15.



Database Tools

KASEMAKE

- ??portedFoxProDatabase=d:\agwin32\database\Report.dbfThis is an optional entry to specify the path of the AG/DATA report file. This will not get writ-ten by the application, and must be added manually if required.

- AGDataReportCommandLine=c:\agbasew\agdataw.exe RPTThis is the command line to start the AG/DATA report generator. This must be changed if the AG/DATA is installed in a non standard directory.

- DatabaseFilenameColumn=FilenameThe AG Database needs to know the field name in the database file that stores the drawing filenames so it can be updated when a drawing is saved. This will need to be changed if the name of the filename column in the database is changed.

- DatabaseKeyColumn=FilenameThe AG Database needs to know the field name to use as the key field, which is used to iden-tify records when transferring information from a border to the database. If a different field is to be used, close the database (File/Close Database), edit AGCad.ini as required, and reo-pen the database (File/Open). Note that any existing borders may need the new key field added.

- BooleanTrueText=YesThis is the text used in a border when linked to a Bool field in the database, and the Bool field value is TRUE.

- BooleanFalseText=NoThis is the text used in a border when linked to a Bool field in the database, and the Bool field value is FALSE.

- DatabasePreviewWidthHeight=164,164This is the width and height (in display pixels) of the preview bitmap to be displayed in the form view.

- DatabaseFormMaxFieldDisplayWidth=50This determines the maximum displayed width (in characters) of the edit fields in the form view, so that long text fields (e.g. Filename allows 255 characters) do not stretch the data-base window larger than the screen.

- DatabaseTableName=This specifies the table to be opened by the AG Database. The entry is empty by default, and the first table in the database will be opened.

11 Database ToolsThe Database tools are accessed from the Tools menu item. This allows the properties of thedatabase file to be changed, and the database file to be compacted. Tools are not available forAG/DATA format database files (*.dbf).

11.1 Guide to changing database propertiesModifying the database properties will affect the operation of the database, and should only beattempted by advanced users who understand the implications. It is recommended that a copyof the database file is made manually before modifying the database. It is recommended thatthe Filename field is not deleted or changed.



13 - AG Database

KASEMAKE

The advantage of being able to modify the database is that it can be customised for differentenvironments. The names of existing fields can be changed, and extra fields can be added tostore extra information, e.g. a field called Ordered of type Bool (which will display a check box)can be added to indicate whether the drawing has been ordered or not. Note that if thefilename or the key field names are changed, the corresponding entries in the configuration filemust be changed as well.

11.2 Edit FieldsSelecting the Tools/Edit Fields menu item displays the Database Fields dialog. This allowsdatabase fields to be added or deleted, and properties of each field to be changed. Any changesmade to the database will not be displayed in the database until the Database Fields dialog isclosed.

11.2.1 Adding a new fieldPress the ‘Add Field’ button, and the Add Database Field dialog is displayed, as in Figure 12.8.÷

Figure 12.8 - Add Database Field

Enter the required field name. This will be the name displayed in the AG Database, and can beused in borders and reports to identify the field. Names can be up to 64 characters. The.!`[]characters cannot be used, and neither can leading spaces.

Select the required data type, note that this cannot be changed once the field has been added.The Bool type is a Boolean value which displays a check box on the AG Database views, andexchanges ‘Yes/No’ text with borders and reports. The Boolean text can be changed in theconfiguration settings if required. The AutoNumber type produces a unique sequential numberin each record automatically. The value of an AutoNumber field cannot be .

The field size only applies for text fields, and indicates the maximum number of charactersaccepted for that field.

The field position is the relative position of the new field in the database. The default of 0 placesthe new field as the last displayed field.

The Allow duplicate values property allows this field to have the same value in two or morerecords. If this property is switched off, then the database will not allow the same value to beentered into this field in different records.

The allow zero length property applies to text and memo fields only. This determines whether anempty string is a valid value for this field.



Configuration for networkdatabase file

KASEMAKE

11.2.2 Deleting a fieldSelect the field to be deleted in the Database Fields dialog, and press the ‘Delete Field’ button.Confirmation is required before the field is deleted. Once the field has been deleted, it cannot beretrieved. It is recommended that the Filename field (and the key field if different) is not deleted.

11.2.3 Editing a fieldSelect the required field in the Database Fields dialog, and press the ‘Edit Field’ button. The datatype and data size properties can not be changed for existing fields.

11.3 Compact DatabaseAs records and fields are added and deleted, the database can become fragmented and takes upmore disk space than necessary. This option will normally reduce the size of the database file byrearranging how the file is stored. It is advisable to make a copy of the database file beforeperforming this operation.

12 Configuration for network database fileEach Kasemake application stores the path of the database file to open in the AGCad.ini file, seeAG Database configuration settings on page 13-12. This can include a network path ormapped drive, and so once the database file has been opened, the path will be stored for futuresessions.

13 Configuration for network drawing filesIf multiple Kasemake stations access drawing files in a common location, the drawing file pathcan be specified for each station. The drawing file directory is specified by selecting File/Locations from the AG Database menu. This directory is then combined with the drawingfilename when drawings are loaded from the database. When a drawing with a border is saved,the database is updated with the filename. If the drawing is saved in the specified drawinglocation, the location is removed from the filename before it is stored in the database. If thedrawing is saved in a different directory, the full drawing path is stored in the database.

If just a drive is specified, the database will store the drawing path and filename, and appendthe drive when necessary. If a drive and path are specified, the database will store the drawingfilename, and append the drive and path when necessary.



KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

14 - 3D File Commands

1 File Commands - GeneralThis section covers those file commands specific to 3D. All file commands common to 2D and 3Dcan be found in the 2D - File Commands section.

1.1 3D File TypesThere are five additional file types used by KASEMAKE whilst in the 3D view. These are :-

• .KSN file type - used for a complete KASEMAKE 3D scene which can include objects, panoramas, environment maps, cameras, etc. This is the default file format produced when a File->Save or File->Save As... is performed. A .KSN file is a superset of all of the other file formats.

• .KOB file type - used for an object from a KASEMAKE 3D scene including its artwork. For example a box design. This file type is created using the File->Export Object... com-mand. .KOB files can be imported and exported using the appropriate 3D File menu commands.

• .KTH file type - used for a KASEMAKE theme file which includes the background, ground, watermarks, etc. but no objects. This file type is created with the File->Export Theme... command. You can also import a theme into your current scene using File->Import Theme....

• .KNO file type - used for a KASEMAKE notes file • .KPN file type - used for a KASEMAKE cubic panorama. These are generally created

using the Cubic Panorama option within the Background dialog. Choose the View->Background command then select Cubic Panorama. They can also be imported using this command.

• .KAM file type - a KASEMAKE camera set. These files store cameras and camera ani-mations only. They can be imported and exported using the appropriate commands in the Cameras menu.

1.2 .VIZ File TypesThe .VIZ file type generated by earlier versions of KASEMAKE (pre release 6.0) is now obsoletedue to folding being so much improved in this version. We strongly advise that you refold anyexisting replay files.

Unfortunately you are not able to fully import .VIZ files into this version of KASEMAKE.However, you can extract the 2D drawing information from a .VIZ file if you no longer have thecorresponding .AGD design file. Use File->Open to open an existing .VIZ file and extract the 2Dinformation. You can then refold it and save it in the new 3D format.




KASEMAKE

2 Import Object...

Use this command to import 3D objects into your 3D scene. All the KASEMAKE 3D file formatscan be imported. KASEMAKE can also import numerous external file formats.

Activate the command. A File Open dialog is displayed allowing you to specify the type of file,name and location of the object to be imported. Set the required file type by clicking on the downarrow Click on OK to import the chosen object to your 3D scene. The imported object is notbrought in to scale, however you can quickly apply a scale. Simply type in a scale in the propertieswindow, using View->Properties. Alternatively, select the object and scale it using the scalemode.

External file formats which are supported by this command include the following:

.3DS, .ASC, .ASE - Autodesk 3D Studio Graphics Files

The .3DS format is a proprietary format of AutoDesk developed for modelling, animation andrendering for creating visual effects, character animation and next generation gamedevelopment

.DXF , .DWG - AutoCAD Files

.DXF and .DWG files are the native formats which AutoDesk’s AutoCAD produces from 2D and3D designs and drafts.

.OBJ - Wavefront 3D Object Files

Object files define the geometry and other properties for objects in Wavefront's AdvancedVisualizer. Object files can also be used to transfer geometric data back and forth between theAdvanced Visualizer and other applications. Object files can be in ASCII format (.obj) or binaryformat (.mod). However, KASEMAKE only supports ASCII format.

.IV - OpenInventor Files

Open InventorTM is an object-oriented 3D toolkit developed by SGI offering a comprehensivesolution to interactive graphics programming problems.

.IGS, .IGES - IGES Files

Initial Graphics Exchange Specification is an American standard started by the AmericanNational Standards Institute back in 1979. It is by far the most widely used data exchangespecification. However, IGES is a very complex specification and fully utilising IGES data filesrequires expert knowledge of the format.

.STP, .STEP Files

The Standard for the Exchange of Product model data (STEP) is an international standard forthe representation of product data. The primary goal of the standard is to provide a neutralformat for product data exchange over the entire life cycle of a product.

.CSF, .CSFDB - CSFDB Files

Open Cascade 3D Model files can be exported.

.BREP - Brep Files

Boundary representations (BRep) of solids are the means of describing the geometrical modelto the mesher, thus enabling the generator to proceed without user intervention. Significant

Command Import Object...

Menu File > Import Object...




Import Object...

KASEMAKE

effort has been devoted in the past to BRep construction in the framework of solid modelingsystems.

.PLY - PLY Polygon File Format

Used by the ZipPack polygon mesh "zippering" package on the Silicon Graphics platformwritten at Stanford University. The file format has two sub-formats: an ASCII representationand a binary version for compact storage and for rapid saving and loading

.X, .XOF - Direct 3D

The DirectX file format is an architecture and context free file format. It is template driven andis free of any usage knowledge. The file format may be used by any client application andcurrently is used by Direct3D Retained Mode to describe geometry data, frame hierarchies,and animations.

.HTM, .XML, .HTML - Direct Animation

HTML (Hypertext Markup Language) files as used by the World Wide Web may be exported.

.WRL, .WRZ - VRML 2.0

VRML (Virtual Reality Modelling Language) version 2.0. These 3D scene description languagefiles may be exported.

Quake - MD2, MD3

MD3 is the 3D data format used in Quake 3: Arena and derivative games (Q3 mods, Alice,Return to Castle Wolfenstein, etc.). The file format is used to describe 3D objects in the gamethat move and interact with players, other objects, and/or the environment. Animation isrecorded by describing the position of every vertex in the model for each frame of animation.This style of animation may also be known as "mesh deformation", "vertex animation"

.MDL - Half Life

The .MDL file format is the export file type for MilkShape 3D.

.TXT - Milkshape 3D ASCII

MilkShape 3D is a low-polygon modeler, which was initially designed for Half-Life. Duringdevelopment, many file formats have been added. MilkShape 3D also has skeletal animationcapabilities. This allows the user to export morph target animations like the ones in the Quakemodel formats or to export to skeletal animations like Half-Life or Genesis3D.

.BEZ, .BBP, .MESH, .OFF, .QUAD, .VECT - OOGL Files

These files can be displayed using the public domain Geomview program for SGI, X, and otherplatforms, written by staff members of the Geometry Center at the University of Minnesota.OOGL uses the .OFF format for its polygonal files. An extension of the .MESH and .OFF filesare used by the Meshview program developed at Indiana University

.IWO - Lightwave Files

This is NewTek's Lightwave Native file Format. LightWave 3D objects are stored on disk as 3Dmeshes consistsing of points, polygons (which can be faces, curves or patches), and surfaces.Files can contain a single connected mesh or several disjoint meshes describing a single logicalobject. An object file may also contain one or more surface definitions with no mesh.

.STL - STL Files

The STL (Stereo Lithography) format was developed primarily by the Albert Consulting Groupand is perhaps the main standard for rapid prototyping systems. The format is specified asboth an ASCII (printable character) format as well as a binary format.




KASEMAKE

.3DM - Rhino 3D Files

.3DM is the file format of the commercial Rhino 3D modeller for Windows. The modeller canoutput a variety of other formats as well.

3 Export Object...

Use this command to export 3D objects from your 3D scene. The resulting .KOB files can then beimported into different designs.

Activate the command. A File Save As dialog is displayed allowing you to specify the name of the.KOB file and location to use to store it. Click on OK to export the selected object and create thegiven .KOB file.

4 Import Theme...

Use this command to import a KASEMAKE 3D theme, .KTH file.

Activate the command. A File Open dialog is displayed allowing you to specify the name andlocation of the required .KTH file. Click on OK to import the theme.

5 Export Theme...

Use this command to export 3D themes from Kasemake. The resulting .KTH files can then beimported for use in other designs.

Activate the command. A File Save As dialog is displayed allowing you to specify the name of the.KTH file and location to use to store it. Click on OK to create the named .KTH file.

Command Export Object...

Menu File > Export Object...


Command Import Theme...

Menu File > Import Theme...


Command Export Theme...

Menu File > Export Theme...




KASEMAKE

15 - 3D Edit Commands

This section covers those edit commands specific to 3D. All edit commands common to 2Dand 3D can be found in the 2D - Edit Commands section.

1 Paste Array

This command is provided mainly to assist with making copies of lathed or extruded objects.As it can be memory intensive, it is advisable to use with caution if copies of 3D objects withcomplex meshes are required.

Activate this command. The Paste Array dialog is displayed as follows:-

Set the array properties:-

Rows

Enter the number of rows required. This is the number of vertically spaced copies. Type thevalue directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

Columns

Enter the number of columns required. This is the number of horizontally spaced copies. Typethe value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

Depth

Enter the number of copies deep that you require. This is the number of copies of the n rowby n column array you have specified. Type the value directly or use the arrow keys to scroll.

Spacing

Enter the distance between the individual copies. Type the value directly or use the arrow keysto scroll.

Command Paste Array

Menu Edit > Paste Array





KASEMAKE

Finally click on OK to generate the array of objects as per the current setting.s

2 Selection Mode Sub-MenuThe Selection mode sub menu gives access to commands for selecting the whole or part of anobject.. The selection mode is modal as it applies to all subsequent selections made until thealternative selection mode is chosen.

2.1 Objects

Choose this command if you wish to identify whole objects. This is particularly useful for foldingwhere you want to select a whole object and fold every crease in one go

Activate this mode, then click on an object to select it in its entirety. If you have run a parametric,and brought it into a 3D view, then when you click on the parametric object the entire parametricis selected.

2.2 Panels / Sub Objects

This mode allows you to select individual panels. The sub object selection mode also works onimported objects (such as 3D Studio models).

This feature is particularly useful for folding, where you want to select a single panel, then foldit.

Activate this mode, then click on the required panel to select it.

3 Scene Mode Sub-MenuThe Scene mode sub menu provides access to manipulation commands and navigation modesfor the current scene.

While you have an object selected you can manipulate it in four ways: you can move it, rotate it,scale it or fold it. Folding is dealt with in a later section.

The first three commands (move mode, rotate mode, scale mode) are available through thescene mode sub-menu and determine how the object interacts with the mouse.

There are four navigation modes available. Once a navigation mode is selected it remains currentuntil an alternative navigation mode is chosen.

Command Objects

Menu Edit > Selection Mode > Objects

Toolbar Button: 3D View Toolbar

Command Panels / Sub Objects

Menu Edit > Selection Mode > Panels / Sub Objects




Scene Mode Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

3.1 Move

If you choose the default, move mode, you can move an object. The object must first be selectedin the usual way.

Activate the move option. Click with the left mouse button and release to select an object. Themovement grid now appears to show which axes the object can move through. To drag theobject, click and hold down the left mouse button on the object, then move the cursor. The objectwill now be dragged as the cursor moves. The object is placed wherever the cursor currentlypoints to on the grid. If you drag outside the grid, then the computer does not know where toplace the object - and it temporarily jumps back to where it started. When you are happy withthe object’s position release the mouse button.

Remember if you make a mistake simply use the Undo option, Edit->Undo.

3.2 Rotate

If you choose the rotate mode option, then you can rotate a selected object. The effect of therotation depends upon which plane is current. For example, if you are in perspective mode, andyou have the XZ plane selected. Then your object will rotate around the Y plane (i.e. it will turnon the XZ plane). Rotation is best done in Front, Top, or Side view as the rotation is more intuitive.

First click with the left mouse button on the object and release to select it. You can now rotatethe object by holding down the left mouse button over it and dragging the cursor. Once it iscorrectly positioned, release the mouse button to keep the rotation.

You can also rotate the object in 1 degree increments using the arrow keys.

3.3 Scale

If you choose the scale mode option, then your object can be scaled. Scaling occurs through allthree axes simultaneously.

First, click with the left mouse button on an object and release to select it. Then click on the objectagain, holding down the left button and drag the cursor to see the effects of the scaling. Releaseto make the adjustment permanent.

Command Move

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Move


Command Rotate

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Rotate


Command Scale

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Scale





KASEMAKE

3.4 Examine Mode

In examine mode you imagine that the camera is a static object a fixed distance away from yourscene which has the ability to move, and zoom in and out. However, when you rotate this view-point rather than rotate itself, the scene rotates. This allows the object to remain at a certainpoint and for you to rotate the scene in from it.

3.5 Walk Mode

Walk mode is similar to Fly mode except the camera is constrained to lie just above the ground.It cannot leave the ground.

3.6 Fly Mode

In fly mode you imagine that the camera is a moveable object which moves, zooms, and rotatesas a real camera would. Zooming a viewpoint in fly mode actually moves the location of thecamera.

So if you zoom then rotate, your camera moves, and then looks in a different direction. Com-pare this to examine mode where if you zoom then rotate, the effect is to zoom then rotate thescene; the camera is still looking at the same point.. This is particularly useful when you want toanimate the position of a camera, because you want the camera to move along a path. In addi-tion this is useful if you load a walkthrough into the scene (i.e. a complete scene, which includesrooms and objects, and you want to move between rooms.).

3.7 Static Mode

Static mode does not allow you to move the camera at all.

4 Plane / Axis Sub MenuNotionally, there are always three axes, located at the origin, which never move. X is to the right,Z is into the screen, and Y is up the screen.

Depending on your current viewpoint, there are up to six options available through this submenu, for you to specify movement. They are also available through the 3D View Toolbar.

The effect of a command is modal restricting movement within the chosen plane / axis until analternative mode is chosen.

Command Examine

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Examine


Command Walk

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Walk


Command Fly

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Fly


Command Static

Menu Edit > Scene Mode > Static




Plane / Axis Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

4.1 Horizontal plane

This command provides movement in the horizontal plane (which allows you to move objectsacross the ground). This is also the default plane for the top, and folding viewpoints.

4.2 Vertical plane

This command provides movement in the front plane (which allows you to move objects up/downleft/right). You will usually only make use of this plane while you are in the front viewpoint.However, you can also use it in perspective view, if you wish.

4.3 Side plane

This command provides movement in the side plane (which allows you to move objects up/down into/out of the screen). This is the default plane for the side viewpoint. You will usuallyonly make use of this plane while you are in the side viewpoint. However, you can also use itin perspective view, if you wish.

4.4 X Axis only

Allows you to limit the movement to just the x-axis for precision.

Command Horizontal plane

Menu Edit > Plane / Axis > Horizontal plane


Command Vertical plane

Menu Edit > Plane / Axis > Vertical plane


Command Side plane

Menu Edit > Plane / Axis > Side plane


Command X Axis only

Menu Edit > Plane / Axis > X Axis only





KASEMAKE

4.5 Y Axis only

Allows you to limit the movement to just the y-axis for precision.

4.6 Z Axis only

Allows you to limit the movement to just the z-axis for precision.

Command Y Axis only

Menu Edit > Plane / Axis > Y Axis only


Command Z Axis only

Menu Edit > Plane / Axis > Z Axis only




KASEMAKE

16 - 3D Draw Commands

This section covers those draw commands specific to 3D. All draw commands common to 2Dand 3D can be found in the 2D - Draw Commands section.

1 Edit artwork

It is possible to change the artwork applied to your presentation at any stage while workingin the 3D window. You can add artwork to both the front and reverse of your box, arbitrarilyscale and move artwork about on the box, etc.

Any artwork applied in the 2D stage of the design process is automatically brought across tothe 3D view and applied.

To change the artwork, first select it, then activate this command. The tabs at the bottom ofthe drawing area change to outside and inside. Click on the tab to change the view.

The design is also flattened (don't worry your folds have not been lost!). You can nowmanipulate the artwork by clicking on items of artwork as if they were physical entities, thenscale them, move them etc. You can also cut, copy, paste, etc. with artwork.

Activating this command again, takes you out of artwork mode.

2 Import artwork

This command allows you to add new artwork to either the inside or outside of your design.For multi-part designs, the artwork is applied across every object. You can overlap multipleparts, or scale an image across a single part.

Before you use this command you need to be in artwork mode, choose Draw->Artwork to setthis mode. Activate the Import Artwork command. The Import Image wizard now appearswhich allows you to import an image, use your scanner, or draw a rectangular area in a givencolour.

Initially the wizard outlines the various options available, select Next to continue.

Next you need to determine the source of the image. Choose from the following :-

Import Image

Selecting this option allows you to import various graphical formats which Windowssupports.

Enter the name of the Image file by typing directly, or click on ... button to produce a fileopen style dialog, allowing you to browse for a specific file on your computer or network.A preview of the chosen image file is displayed as visual confirmation.

Command Edit artwork

Menu Draw > Edit Artwork

Toolbar Button: 3D Drawing Toolbar

Command Import artwork

Menu Draw > Import Artwork





KASEMAKE

The image can be rotated by a factor of 90 degrees. Choose Rotate -90 to rotate the imageanticlockwise by a factor of 90 degrees. Choose Rotate +90 to rotate the image 90 degreesclockwise.

The image can be flipped horizontally or vertically where a mirrored effect is required. ChooseFlip Horizontal to mirror the image in the x axis. Choose Flip Vertical to mirror the image inthe y-axis.

Finally, click on Finish to close the dialog and import this image file.

Image Colour

Selecting this option will allow predefined colour or custom colour to be applied to the design.

Click on the arrow to produce a display of predefined colours and to allow you to customiseyou own. Refer to “Outside Colour” on page 4-78 for a full explanation.

Once you have chosen the colour, select Finish to apply it to you design

Acquire Image from Scanner or Digital Camera

Select this option to allow an image to be acquired from a Twain Device. TWAIN is a cross-platform interface for acquiring images captured by certain scanners, digital cameras, andframe grabbers.

Note:You must install the TWAIN device and its software, then restart yourcomputer, before you can use it to import images into Kasemake. Seethe documentation provided by your device manufacturer for installa-tion information.

Click on the arrrow and select the Twain Device from the pull down list of available devices.

Click on Acquire, then follow the instructions given by Twain Software. Once an image ischosen a preview is displayed as visual confirmation.

Select Finish to apply the artwork.

Whichever method you use, the chosen artwork is fitted across the whole drawing. You can nowscale it as necessary.

Once you have made your changes, hit the artwork mode button again. This will return you tothe perspective view or whatever view you had visible before entering artwork mode.

3 Attach Note

The Attach Note command allows you to annotate your 3D scene.

Once the command is activated, your mouse cursor will change to a cross with a note by it. Simplyleft click within the current scene on the object you wish to add a note to. After doing so, a dialogwill appear which lets you type in the note you wish to add.

Command Attach Note

Menu Draw > Attach Note




Geometry Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

.

Type your name, the title of the note, and the text of the note (which will get displayed withinyour scene.)

When you click OK, the note will be attached to your object. The note will also appear in thenotes window.

Your note is shown on the design as a line which goes from the rectangular note area (contain-ing the text of your note) to the exact position you clicked on the object. The note is alwaysadded such that the line is perpendicular to the surface of the object where you clicked. You canselect the note as if it were an object within the scene simply by clicking on it.

Any time you select the note in the Notes window, the view will jump back to where you werewhen you attached the note. Additionally, notes are specific to a particular 'time' (more aboutthis in the animation section). When you select the note, the animation will jump back to the'time' when you added the note also.

The note also has properties associated with it. Click on the note to select it and its properties aredisplayed in the properties window. Full details are given in“Notes” on page 22-18.

4 Geometry Sub MenuThe Geometry sub menu provides commands which alter the appearance of one or more panels.

4.1 Mesh Subdivision

The Mesh Subdivision command allows you to subdivide underlying meshes of each panel furtherthan the default value to improve the way light is reflected. Light will bounce back morerealistically but there will be a slight increase in file size because of the increased complexity.

Command Mesh Subdivision

Menu Draw -> Geometry > Mesh subdivision





KASEMAKE

First select the object(s) which you wish to apply this command to. Activate the command.KASEMAKE will instantly perform the further subdivisions for the selected object(s).

4.2 Corrugate

The Corrugate command allows you to simulate corrugated board and show the flute profile.

First select the object(s) which you wish to apply this command to. Activate the command.KASEMAKE will now display the corrugated dialog for you to determine the required settingsfor the corrugated flute, as shown:-

Material Colour

Set the material colour by clicking on the arrow to display the colour palette. Simply click on oneof the predefined colours to select it. Alternatively, click on Others... to define further colours. Forfurther details please refer to “Defining Colours (3D)” on page 1-19.

Shadow Colour

As above but defines the colour used for shadow.

Wall Type

Set the wall type by clicking on the arrow and choosing from the drop down list.

Flute

To specify the flute size to apply for both outer and inner flutes, type the required value directly.Alternatively, click on the calculator symbol to specify a value, using the = key to close thecalculator and enter the given value into the Flute field. See “Calculator (3D)” on page 1-19.

Orientation

Finally determine the direction of the flute by clicking on the appropriate arrow to set it.

Command Corrugate

Menu Draw -> Geometry > Corrugate




Dimensions Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

Once the settings are correct, click on OK to close the dialog. The edges of the design will nowbe displayed with fluting details visible, as per the given settings.

5 Dimensions Sub MenuThe Dimensions sub menu provides commands for dimensioning the 3D design.

5.1 Selected

The Selected command will place lifesize dimensions for the X, Y and Z extents of any selectedobject(s).

First select the object(s) you wish to dimension. Activate this command. The extents will now bedimensioned.

5.2 Centre of Gravity

The Centre of Gravity command will indicate the centre of gravity of the current selected object(s).This is useful when designing a point of sale as it helps to determine that the finished design willbalance.

First select the object(s) for which you wish to identify the centre of gravity. Activate thiscommand. A red arrow will appear indicating the centre of gravity of the currently selectedobjects.

6 Freeform Deformation Sub MenuThe Freeform Deformation sub menu provides a command to assist with adding curvature to oneor more objects.

Command Selected

Menu Draw -> Dimensions > Selected


Command Centre of Gravity

Menu Draw -> Dimensions > Centre of Gravity





KASEMAKE

6.1 4x4x4

The 4x4x4 command will place a 4x4x4 dimension mesh onto the current object. This providescontrol points which can then be moved to deform the selected object and provide curvature.

First select the object(s) as required. Activate this command. A mesh will be drawn over theselected objects. Click on the mesh to reveal the control points. Now simply click and hold on acontrol point to move it and deform the underlying object. Release the mouse to make thechange permanent.

Select the command again to further subdivide the mesh and increase the available controlpoints.

7 Parametric Deformation Sub MenuThe Parametric Deformation sub menu provides a command to assist with adding curvature toone or more parametric objects.

7.1 Bend

The Bend command is currently unavailable.

8 Panel Deformation Sub MenuThe Panel Deformation sub menu provides commands to assist with adding curvature to one ormore panels.

8.1 Curve 0

The Curve 0 command unfolds the selected panel(s) by changing the angle of curvature to 0degrees.

First select the panel(s) as required. Activate this command. The selected panel(s) will now bedisplayed flat.

Command 4x4x4

Menu Draw > Freeform Deformation > 4x4x4


Command Bend

Menu Draw > Parametric Deformation > Bend


Command Curve 0

Menu Draw -> Panel Deformation > Curve 0

Toolbar Button: 3D Curvature Toolbar



Panel Deformation Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

8.2 Curve 90

The Curve 90 command curves the selected panel(s) by changing the angle of curvature to 90degrees.

First select the panel(s) as required. Activate this command. The selected panel(s) will now bedisplayed curved to a 90 degree angle.

8.3 Curve 180



8.4 Curve 270



8.5 Curve 360



Command Curve 90



Command Curve 180



Command Curve 270



Command Curve 360






KASEMAKE

8.6 Curve -90

The Curve -90 command curves the selected panel(s) outwards by changing the angle ofcurvature to 90 degrees.

First select the panel(s) as required. Activate this command. The selected panel(s) will now bedisplayed curved outwards through a 90 degree angle.

8.7 Curve -180



8.8 Curve -270



8.9 Curve -360



Command Curve -90

Menu Draw -> Panel Deformation > Curve -90


Command Curve -180



Command Curve -270



Command Curve -360





Panel Deformation Sub Menu

KASEMAKE

8.10 Curve Angle (+)

The Curve Angle (+) command curves the selected panel(s) inwards by the given angle.

First select the panel(s) as required. Activate this command. The Choose Angle dialog will now bedisplayed. Set the angle of curvature by typing the value directly, as before. Alternatively, click onthe calculator symbol to specify the required angle through a calculator. See “Calculator (3D)” onpage 1-19.

Finally, click on OK to close the dialog. The selected panel(s) will now be displayed curved to thespecified angle.

8.11 Curve Angle ( - )

The Curve Angle (-) command curves the selected panel(s) outwards by the given angle.

First select the panel(s) as required. Activate this command. The Choose Angle dialog will now bedisplayed. Set the angle of curvature by typing the value directly, as before. Alternatively, click onthe calculator symbol to specify the required angle through a calculator. See “Calculator (3D)” onpage 1-19.

Finally, click on OK to close the dialog. The selected panel(s) will now be displayed curvedoutwards through the specified angle.

8.12 Remove Curvature

The Remove Curvature command removes any curvature from the selected panel(s).

First select the panel(s) as required. Activate this command. Any curvature will now be removedfrom the currently selected panels without further confirmation.

Command Curve Angle ( + )

Menu Draw -> Panel Deformation > Curve Angle ( + )


Command Curve Angle ( - )

Menu Draw -> Panel Deformation > Curve Angle ( - )


Command Remove Curvature

Menu Draw -> Panel Deformation > Remove Curvature





KASEMAKE

9 Show / Hide Deformation

The Show / Hide Deformation command toggles the display of the additional curves which illus-trate any curvature within each panel.

Activate this command to toggle between displaying or hiding the additional curves.

10 Take Snapshot...

The Take Snapshot command allows you to save a snapshot of your 3D scene which can beloaded as an image in the 2D view. Several image formats are supported so snapshots can becreated for use by external software also.

Activate the command. A File Save As dialog is displayed for you to specify the type of file, nameand location for the snapshot file.

Type the required file name

Select the Snapshot File Type from:

Windows Bitmap - *.bmp

JPEG Files - *.jpg

Portable (Public) Network Graphic (proposed GIF replacement) - *.png

UNIX Portable Bit Map Graphic - *.pbm

Portable Graymap Graphic - *.pgm

PBM Portable Pixelmap Graphic - *.ppm

TARGA Files - *.tga

TIFF Image Files - *.tif

Set the location for the file.

Click on Save to create the specified snapshot file.

11 Take Snapshot (vector)

The Take Snapshot (vector) command allows you to save a snapshot of your 3D scene as a vector

Command Show / Hide Deformation

Menu Draw -> Show / Hide Deformation


Command Take Snapshot...

Menu Draw -> Take Snapshot...


Command Take Snapshot (vector)

Menu Draw -> Take Snapshot (vector)




Take Snapshot (vector)

KASEMAKE

representation to be loaded in the 2D view.

Activate the command. A File Save As dialog is displayed for you to specify the type of file, nameand location for the snapshot file.

Type the required file name

Select the Snapshot File Type from:

Kasemake Drawing File - *.agd

Common File Format File - *.cf2

Kasemake Report File - *.rpt

Set the location for the file.

Set the Perform hidden line removal option if you wish to remove hidden lines before generatingthe vector format file, otherwise clear this setting.

Set the method required by clicking on the corresponding radio button:-

• Vector format - gives much more accurate results but on complicated multipart designs it may take more time to create the snapshot

• Overlayed format - based on mesh triangles rather than individual vectors so is quicker for more complicated designs.

Both methods take account of the Perform hidden line removal option to remove hidden linesbefore generating the vector format file.

Click on Save to create the specified vector format snapshot file.



KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

17 - 3D Fold Commands

Various mechanisms for folding exist: you can type in an absolute angle, press a button tofold to a given angle, or drag a slider to change a fold angle dynamically.

If you select more than one panel at a time, each panel is folded at the same time.

1 Constrain

This is an advanced command which you may never need to use. Ordinarily the system cor-rectly figures out connected panels, so that folding one panel causes another dependentpanel to correctly follow its predecessor.

This is a stand-by which allows you to independently set the fold angles of dependent panels.Use it only when you have to! Incorrect usage allows you to break your object apart.

2 Flat

The Flat command is used to flatten an object or one or more selected panels. First select therequired panels or object. Activate this command. The selected panels / object are now flat-tened - i.e. every crease is set to the absolute 0 degrees fold angle.

3 Fold To 90

Activate this command. All selected panels are set to 90 degrees - for most boxes this is therequired angle.

4 Fold To 180

Activate this command. All selected panels are set to 180 degrees i.e. the crease folds com-pletely back on itself

Command Constrain

Menu Fold > Constrain

Toolbar Button: 3D Folding Toolbar

Command Flat

Menu Fold > Flat


Command Fold To 90

Menu Fold > Fold To 90


Command Fold To 180





17 - 3D Fold Commands

KASEMAKE

5 Fold To 270

Activate this command. All selected panels are set to 270 degrees (or -90 degrees). - i.e. thecrease is folded outwards.

6 Fold To Angle...

Choose this command to change the fold angle directly. Activating this command brings up adialog box which allows you to enter the exact fold angle to use for every selected panel.

The fold angle can be set by typing the value directly. Alternatively, click on the calculator symbolto specify the required angle using a calculator. Please refer to “Calculator (3D)” on page 1-19for details.

The toolbar button displays either the current angle of selected panels where they are all thesame, or ... where the selected panels have different fold angles.

7 Increase Fold Angle

Adds a given increment to the fold angles of selected panels. The increment can be set via theFold->Fold Increment.... command. The default angle is 45 degrees.

Activate this command. The selected panels will now fold by a further number of degrees asdeterrmined by the current increment.

8 Decrease Fold Angle

Subtracts a given increment from the fold angles of selected panels. This increment can be setvia the Fold->Fold Increment... command. The default angle is 45 degrees.

Command Fold To 270



Command Fold To Angle

Menu Fold > Fold To Angle


Command Increase Fold Angle

Menu Fold > Increase Fold Angle


Command Decrease Fold Angle

Menu Fold > Decrease Fold Angle




Fold Increment...

KASEMAKE

9 Fold Increment...

Choose this command to change the fold increment to use for the Increase Fold Angle andDecrease Fold Angle commands. Activating this command brings up a dialog box which allowsyou to enter the increment to use.

The fold increment can be set by typing the value directly. Alternatively, click on the calculatorsymbol to specify the required angle using a calculator. See “Calculator (3D)” on page 1-19.

Command Fold Increment...

Menu Fold > Fold Increment...




KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

18 - 3D Arrange Commands

This section covers those arrange commands specific to 3D. All arrange commands commonto 2D and 3D can be found in the 2D - Arrange Commands section.

1 Centre At Origin

The Centre at origin command as its name suggests, allows you to take the selectedobject and centre it at the origin.

Before activating this command, you should first identify the object using one of theavailable selection methods.

Activating this command centres the selected object with no further user interventionrequired.

2 Stand on ground

The Stand on ground command allows you to take the selected object and move it suchthat it is in contact with the ground.

Before activating this command, you should first identify the object to move using one of theavailable selection methods.

Activating this command moves the object immediately.

3 Reset Position

The Reset Position command allows you to move the selected object back to its original state.

Before activating this command, you should first identify the object to move using one of theavailable selection methods.

Activate this command. The selected object will now return to its position prior to the lastmove command.

Command Centre At Origin

Menu Arrange > Centre At Origin

Toolbar Button: 3D Alignment and Rotation Toolbar

Command Stand on ground

Menu Arrange > Stand on ground


Command Reset Position

Menu Arrange > Reset Position





KASEMAKE

4 Stand up

The Stand up command will take the selected object and stand it on its end.

First identify the object using the available selection methods. Activate this command, the objectwill be displayed stood up.

5 Lie on side

The Lie on side command will take the selected object and reposition it such that it lies on itsside.

First select the object using one of the available selection methods. Activate this command. Theselected object will now reposition on its side.

6 Lie Down

The Lie down command will take the selected object and lie it down.

First select the object using one of the available selection methods. Activate this command. Theselected object will now be displayed lying down.

7 Align Sub-MenuAlign is actually a sub-menu of align related commands. You will need to select one or moreobjects before the alignment commands can be accessed. Remember that any alignment will bewith respect to the current plane. Refer to “Plane / Axis Sub Menu” on page 4 of the 3D EditCommands section.

7.1 Abut left

The Abut left command will attempt to align the selected objects so that one is completely leftof the other.

Command Stand Up

Menu Arrange > Stand Up


Command Lie On Side

Menu Arrange > Lie On Side


Command Lie Down

Menu Arrange > Lie Down


Command Abut left

Menu Arrange -> Align > Abut left




Align Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) selected will move.Activating this command adjusts the second and subsequent objects to lie completely to the leftof the original chosen object. Movement is within the current plane only.

7.2 Left

The Align Left command will attempt to align selected objects at the left hand edge.

The objects must first be selected using one of the available selection methods. The first objectselected will not move but will be used to determine the new position of any further selectedobjects.

Activating this command causes each of the selected elements to be moved such that the lefthand edge of each object is in line with the first selected object. The objects move within thecurrent plane.

7.3 Centre

The Align Centre command repositions any selected objects so that their centres are in linewith respect to the current plane.

Activating this command causes any selected objects to be positioned so that their centres arealigned with the object which was selected first.

7.4 Right

The Align Right command will attempt to align selected objects at the right hand edge.


Command Left

Menu Arrange -> Align > Left


Command Centre

Menu Arrange -> Align > Centre


Command Right

Menu Arrange -> Align > Right





KASEMAKE

7.5 Abut right

The Abut right command will attempt to align the selected objects so that one is completelyto the right of the other.

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) selected will move.Activating this command adjusts the second and subsequent objects to lie completely to theright of the original chosen object. Movement is within the current plane only.

7.6 Abut top

The Abut top command will attempt to align the selected objects so that one iscompletelyabove the other.

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) selected will move.Activating this command adjusts the second and subsequent objects to lie completely above theoriginal chosen object. Movement is within the Y plane with respect to the current plane.

7.7 Tops

The Align top command will attempt to align selected objects at the top edge.


Activating this command causes each of the selected elements to be moved such that the topedge of each object is in line with the first selected object. The objects move within the Y planewith respect to the current plane.

7.8 Middles

The Align Middles command repositions any selected objects so that their centres arevertically aligned with respect to the current plane.

Command Abut right

Menu Arrange -> Align > Abut right


Command Abut top

Menu Arrange -> Align > Abut top


Command Tops

Menu Arrange -> Align > Tops


Command Middles

Menu Arrange -> Align > Middles




Horizontal Spacing Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

Activating this command causes any selected objects to be positioned so that their centres arealigned with the object which was selected first.

7.9 Bottoms

The Align Bottoms command will attempt to align selected objects at the bottom edge.

The objects must first be selected using one of the available selection methods. The first objectselected will not move but will be used to determine the new position of any further selectedobjects. Movement is in the Y plane with respect to the current plane.

7.10 Abut bottom

The Abut bottom command will attempt to align the selected objects so that one iscompletely below the other.

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) selected will move.Activating this command adjusts the second and subsequent objects to lie completely below theoriginal chosen object. Movement is within the current plane only.

8 Horizontal Spacing Sub-MenuHorizontal spacing is a sub-menu of spacing commands. You will need to select one or moreobjects before the spacing commands can be accessed.

8.1 Make equal

The Make equal command works on three or more selected objects. It adjusts the horizontalspacing between the selected objects so that it is equal.

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) selected will move.Activating this command adjusts the second and subsequent objects to be equally spaced.

Command Bottoms

Menu Arrange -> Align > Bottoms


Command Abut bottom

Menu Arrange -> Align > Abut bottom


Command Make equal

Menu Arrange -> Horizontal spacing > Make equal





KASEMAKE

8.2 Increase

The Increase command will increase the horizontal spacing between two or more objectsincrementally.

The objects must first be selected using one of the available selection methods

Activating this command adjusts the horizontal spacing between the selected objects by a fixedincrement.

8.3 Decrease

The Decrease command will decrease the horizontal spacing between two or more objectsincrementally.


Activating this command reduces the horizontal spacing between the selected objects by a fixedincrement.

8.4 Remove

The Remove command will remove any horizontal spacing between two or more objects.


Activating this command adjusts the selected objects so that they are touching horizontally.

9 Vertical Spacing Sub-MenuVertical spacing is a sub-menu of spacing commands. You will need to select one or moreobjects before the spacing commands can be accessed.

Command Increase

Menu Arrange -> Horizontal spacing > Increase


Command Decrease

Menu Arrange -> Horizontal spacing > Decrease


Command Remove

Menu Arrange -> Horizontal spacing > Remove




Vertical Spacing Sub-Menu

KASEMAKE

9.1 Make equal

The Make equal command works on three or more selected objects. It adjusts the verticalspacing between the selected objects so that it is equal.

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) selected will move.Activating this command adjusts the second and subsequent objects to be equally spaced.

9.2 Increase

The Increase command will increase the vertical spacing between two or more objectsincrementally.


Activating this command adjusts the vertical spacing between the selected objects by a fixedincrement.

9.3 Decrease

The Decrease command will decrease the vertical spacing between two or more objectsincrementally.


Activating this command reduces the vertical spacing between the selected objects by a fixedincrement.

9.4 Remove

The Remove command will remove any vertical spacing between two or more objects.


Activating this command adjusts the selected objects so that they are touching vertically

Command Make equal

Menu Arrange -> Vertical spacing > Make equal


Command Increase

Menu Arrange -> Vertical spacing > Increase


Command Decrease

Menu Arrange -> Vertical spacing > Decrease


Command Remove

Menu Arrange -> Vertical spacing > Remove





KASEMAKE

10 Make Same Size Sub-MenuMake same size is a sub-menu of sizing commands. You will need to select one or more objectsbefore the sizing commands can be accessed.

10.1 Horizontally

The Horizontally command adjusts two or more selected objects so that they are the samesize horizontally.

Select the objects in the usual way. Only the second and subsequent object(s) will resize, the sizebeing determined from the first object selected. Activating this command adjusts the secondand subsequent objects to be equally sized horizontally.

10.2 Vertically

The Vertically command will resize two or more objects so that they are the same sizevertically.

The objects must first be selected using one of the available selection methods. The first objectselected determines the size of the other selected objects.

Activating this command adjusts the size of the second and subsequent selected objects to bethe same size vertically as the first object selected.

11 Rotate +

The Rotate + command will rotate one or more objects incrementally by the current rotationangle.


Activating this command increases the rotation angle of the selected objects by the currentrotation angle.

Command Horizontally

Menu Arrange -> Make same size > Horizontally


Command Vertically

Menu Arrange -> Make same size > Vertically


Command Rotate +

Menu Arrange -> Rotate +




Rotate -

KASEMAKE

12 Rotate -

The Rotate - command will rotate one or more objects incrementally by the current rotationangle.


Activating this command decreases the rotation angle of the selected objects by the currentrotation angle.

13 Rotation Angle...

The Rotation Angle... command determines the current rotation angle used by the Rotate +and Rotate - commands.

Activating this command produces the Angle dialog. You can specify the angle in one of twoways:-

• Type a new value directly• Click on the calculator symbol and enter the required value through the resulting calculator

key pad. See “Calculator (3D)” on page 1-19.

Command Rotate -

Menu Arrange -> Rotate -


Command Rotation Angle...

Menu Arrange -> Rotation Angle...




KASEMAKE




KASEMAKE

19 - 3D Lights Commands

1 Lights 1 ... Lights 8

The light buttons switch on/off individual lights within the scene.

Simply activate the command corresponding to the light you wish to change. Thecorresponding light will then be switched on / off.

2 Lighting

The Lighting command as its name suggests toggles the lighting effects such as shine, etc.

Simply activate the command to switch any lighting from on to off and vice versa.

3 Ambient...

The Ambient... command allows you to change the colour used to represent the ambientlighting.

Activate this command. An Ambient Lighting dialog now appears. Showing the currentcolour chosen to represent ambient lighting. Click on the arrow to display a palette ofexisting colours or to define a custom colour. See “Outside Colour” on page 4-78 for furtherdetails.

The display will now update to reflect the new colour change.

4 Reset All Light Positions

The Reset All Lights Positions command restores the light representations to their originalposition.

Simply activate the command to return the lights to their original position.

Command Lights 1 ... Lights 8

Menu Lights > Lights 1 ... Lights 8

Toolbar Button: 3D Lights Toolbar

Command Lighting

Menu Lights > Lighting


Command Ambient...

Menu Lights->Ambient...


Command Reset All Light Positions

Menu




19 - 3D Lights Commands

KASEMAKE

5 Toggle Lights

The Toggle Lights command toggles the display of the light representations. It does not turnlighting on and off.

Simply activate the command to turn on / off the display of any lights.

Command Toggle Lights

Menu




KASEMAKE

20 - 3D Animation Commands

1 AnimationKASEMAKE uses the familiar concept of key frame animation to generate a final presenta-tion. In a very short time, it is possible to create apparently complex animations.

You will need to display the Key Frames window using View->Timeline. In addition, you willalso need to use the 3D Animation toolbar.

Choose View->Customise->Toolbars and tick the check box next to 3D animation to displaythis bar. The 3D animation toolbar contains rewind, stop and play buttons (as you would seeon a video recorder), as well as a record button and a slider which allows you to very easilynavigate between frames.

1.1 Animation - General The following things can be animated within a scene:

• Object Position and Orientation - Objects can be smoothly animated along straight or curved paths, while also rotating. You can edit curved paths using grab handles to change the positions at key frames, and the curvature at key frames.

• Object Folds - Objects can be smoothly folded. You simply record the angle of a fold at key frames and the system automatically smooths the fold angle between key frames

• Object Scaling - Objects can be smoothly scaled between key frames. This is probably the least used of the animations.

• Camera Position and Orientation - Cameras can be smoothly animated between key frames, in exactly the same way as you would animate objects.

• Camera Selection - You can switch between cameras during the animation, to have multi-ple camera angles, etc.

• Light Position - Lights can be smoothly animated between key frames, in exactly the same way as you would animate objects.

• Sound, Music, CD Tracks - You can incorporate sound files (in the RAW, WAV, MP2, MP3, OGG, WMA, and ASF file formats), music files (in the MOD, S3M, XM, IT, MID, RMI, and SGT file formats), and CD tracks (by selecting tracks from the CD in your CD player.) Of course you will need a sound card in order to take advantage of this feature.

1.2 Recording An AnimationTo start recording, all you have to do is click the red animation button, labelled recording onthe animation toolbar. Any changes you make to the scene will now be recorded against thecurrent time. For instance, if you make a 90 degree fold or move an object, these events willautomatically be turned into key frames. You can look at the key frames and manipulatethem in the key frame window.

To change the current time simply drag the slider on the animation bar to another time. Thecurrent time and duration of the animation are shown to the left of the slider. For example014/200 means frame 14 of 200.

1.2.1 Animation SettingsYou can also change the current time through the animation settings. These can be accessedthrough the animation menu or by clicking on the number button (which may say 014/200)in the animation toolbar. In either case, the following dialog will be displayed:-




KASEMAKE

1.2.1.1 PlayBack

Current FrameThe current frame. In this example it will be 14. You cannot make the current frame greaterthan the maximum frame.

Maximum FrameThe duration of the animation. This will be saved along with your scene so you only have tochange it once.

Frame RateThe number of frames per second. i.e. it would take 7 seconds to go from frame 1 to 14inclusive if you selected 2FPS. Please note that this does not mean that the system will onlydraw 2 FPS: this is just the number of frames on the slider which it will pass per second. If youhave a very fast computer, then any number of intermediate frames will be drawn:KASEMAKE is designed to dynamically adapt to the speed of your computer. Regardless, theconstant is that the time line will only be processed at this speed so that you can guaranteethat a 200-frame movie will take exactly the same time on any computer regardless of howfast it is.

1.2.1.2 Quick FoldingThe following option is applicable when the Quick Folding command is used.

Frames Between FoldsThis is the number of frames to leave between each fold. Set the value directly or scroll withthe arrows.

Once you are happy, click on OK.

The best way to describe how to produce an animation is to provide a few examples:

1.2.2 Example 1: Recording A Movement AnimationTo smoothly animate an object moving between points and rotating, you should first make surethe record button is pressed in.

Go to frame 1, say, by moving the slider to the left. Click on it and drag it, releasing it at frame 1.

Select an object, then drag it. A white square will appear at the centre of the object which indi-cates that a key frame has been created. In fact this is the start of an animation spline which youwill later be able to edit.



Animation

KASEMAKE

Next go to frame 11, say, by moving the slider to the right. Move the object again. A yellow lineappears which joins the first position to the new position. Note that it you move the objectagain at frame 11 the spline updates to reflect the new position.

To play this animation (also see playing an animation) drag the time slider back to frame one,then press the play button. (You do not have to turn off recording). You should see your objectsmoothly moving between the two points you recorded.

If you look in the key frame window you will see that two squares appear against the object (youmay have to expand the hierarchy to find the squares). These are the key frames. You should seeone at frame 1 and another at frame 11. You can move, delete, copy and paste these as youwish (more later).

To further illustrate an animation spline, record another movement at frame 21, say. You shouldthen see a yellow line with three points on it , shown as white squares.

1.2.3 Editing An Animation SplineIf you hover the mouse over any square the mouse cursor will change to indicate that it is over a'hotspot'. You can click on the square and drag it: you should see an orange line appear whichyou can use to manipulate the curvature of the given key frame. Clicking on the same squareagain, this time you can move the point itself.

If you do not want to edit the curvature yourself, or if you only want straight lines, then you canchange the type of the spline that an object follows. Within the properties window (on the Viewmenu select Properties) for an object is a property called Spline Type. This has three alternatives:

• Curved - which is the default allows you to manually edit the curvature of the spline by drag-ging in the way described above. You get orange lines which allow you to modify the curva-ture.

• Curved Auto - which does not allow you to edit the curvature yourself, but automatically creates the smoothest path between nodes.

• Straight - which is a simple point-to-point movement.

You may want to work with the Curved Auto spline type until you get the positions of the keyframes right, then change to CURVED in order to fine tune the curvature afterwards.

One last point: if you do not want to move your object to create a movement key frame (butwant the current position) you can click the 'key' button on the animation toolbar or move theobject then undo it.

You can add intermediate key frames using the key frame window. Find the object in the hierar-chy and double click on the row (at the time you want) to create a key frame. This point is auto-matically calculated from a prior and subsequent key frame (if they exist).




KASEMAKE

1.2.4 Example 2: Recording a Folding AnimationTo record a folding animation, select an object or panel using the appropriate selection mode,Edit->Selection Mode. Every time you fold the panel, a key frame is created.

For example, go to frame 11, select a panel, then click 'fold to 90'. This action (because it is thevery first fold applied to the panel) creates two key frames: the first at frame 1 which says thatthe panel is folded flat, the second at frame 11 which says that the panel is folded to 90. Now atframe 21, click 'fold flat'. A third key frame is created. You have just created an animation whichfolds the panel to 90 by frame 11, then flat again by frame 21.

If you play this animation you will see that the panel smoothly folds between flat and ninetydegrees, then back again. While folding, bear in mind that the system automatically interpolatesbetween key frames.

Consider the following example: you want a panel to start folding at frame 11, be at 90 degreesby frame 21, remain at 90 degrees until frame 31, then go flat again by frame 41. This requiresfour key frames:

Frame 11: fold flat (you will need to explicitly click the fold flat button at frame 11)

Frame 21: fold to 90

Frame 31: fold to 90

Frame 41: fold flat

Don't forget to include the key frame at frame 11, otherwise the object will fold to 90 fromframe 1 (rather than frame 11). Also do not forget to include the key frame at frame 31 (other-wise the object will fold to flat between frames 21 and 41.)

In order to perform folding you must think to yourself 'at frame **, I want this panel to be at **angle'. Too many key frames won't hurt; just don't forget to add the ones you need!

1.2.5 Quick FoldingThe Quick Folding command assists in creating a Folding Animation. It removes the need toinsert additional key frames to ensure that not all folds start at key frame 0. In addition, it auto-matically advances the time line by the number of frames determined from the Animation Set-tings. Please refer to “Animation Settings” on page 1.

Simply choose Quick Folding before starting to create the fold sequence you require.

1.2.6 Example 3: Recording a Camera AnimationJust like moving objects, you can record the position of a camera at a particular point in time. Ifyou are looking through a camera pane, and you use the arrow keys or if you drag a camerafrom within another pane, then key frames will be recorded.

In exactly the same way as other objects, you can edit the spline along which a camera moves,by looking at the camera through, say, a top view, then dragging the nodes of the spline.

Cameras are automatically added to the hierarchy when you create a new camera, and keyframes are automatically added to the hierarchy when you move the camera.

1.2.7 Example 4: Recording a Light AnimationJust like moving objects, you can record the position of a light at a particular point in time. Ordi-narily you cannot see lights in order to select them. However in the key frame window click onthe 'eye' next to a light in order to see it. You can then select the light, modify its properties inthe property window, and animate its position. You can work with the spline of the light objectin the same way as other objects, including changing the spline type.



Animation

KASEMAKE

1.2.8 Object Hierarchy And Key Frames WindowThe KeyFrames window can seem a little daunting to begin with. It is possible to produce anima-tions without using this window at all. However, once you get the hang of animation you willsoon want to do more complex things like :

• insert some blank frames to stretch out an animation• delete a specific key frame because it isn't right.

For more advanced animation, you can make changes from the key frames window.

In the hierarchy, there are various icons. Each row equates to one animation (which can haveany number of key frames). The 'box' icon always relates to a movement/position animation. The'panel' icon always relates to a folding animation: you can't move a panel (besides folding it)independently of the rest of the box otherwise it would break apart! As you add key frames, youwill see squares appear in the relevant rows.

All manipulation in this window is done using a context menu. You select frames using the leftbutton. You can select rectangular areas of the key frames by pressing the left button and drag-ging, if you wish.

Right clicking in the key frames window produces the context menu which provides the follow-ing commands:

1.2.8.1 Show/HideYou can show or hide individual parts of a scene. This is not specifically to do with animation.For example, you can hide individual panels, lights (by default lights are hidden), etc. You canalso do this by clicking the 'eye' icons which pervade the hierarchy.

1.2.8.2 SplineFor movement animations (i.e. those with the box icon, lights, cameras, etc.) you can smooth orsharpen parts of animations. Drag a rectangle over the key frames of a movement animation,right click and choose sharpen or curve.

Or simply right click on a key frame and 'sharpen' or 'smooth' it.

1.2.8.3 Cut FramesYou can cut frames (in the usual cut and paste way) in order to delete or paste them elsewhere:Select a range of frames and select Cut frames.

1.2.8.4 Copy FramesYou can copy frames (in the usual copy and paste way) in order to duplicate frames. Select arange of frames and choose Copy frames.

1.2.8.5 Paste FramesYou can paste frames. Note however that you can only paste compatible frames. For example,frames copied from a movement animation cannot be pasted into a folding animation and viceversa.

1.2.8.6 Create Key FrameCreates a key frame (or any number of key frames, throughout a selection rectangle) which isautomatically interpolated from surrounding key frames.

1.2.8.7 Insert FramesInserts frames at the insertion point. It will insert as many frames as are selected: if you have fiveframes selected then five will be inserted. This is specifically provided so that you can elongatean animation.

1.2.8.8 Remove FramesRemoves frames. This does not delete key frames, and is not available if a key frame is selected.




KASEMAKE

All frames are removed, shifting any frames which were to the right of the removed frame, leftto close the gap left.

1.2.8.9 Destroy Key FramesDeletes the entire animation for the selected row. This is only available if you are recording.

1.2.8.10 Destroy All Key FramesDeletes every single animation on every row. Naturally, this asks for confirmation before pro-ceeding.

1.2.8.11 Recording A Camera SwitchYou can create a camera switching animation (i.e. shifting from one camera to another at givenkey frames) from within the Key Frame window.

Suppose you have created a number of cameras, and have them animating. You might want tojump to a particular camera at a given frame, then to another at another frame.

This is achieved within the key frame window by double clicking within the Active Camera row.Doing so brings up a window which allows you to choose one of the cameras. When you playthe animation, the main window will automatically jump to the correct camera.

1.2.8.12 Adding SoundsYou can also include sounds, music, and cd tracks with your animation, using the key frame win-dow.

To do so, double click within the Sound row. Doing so brings up a window which allows you tochoose a sound file, music file, or cd track.

When you play the animation, your sounds will automatically play. Note that playing anothersound stops the first one: you cannot play concurrent sounds. However, you can play music,sound, and a cd track all at the same time, if you enjoy cacophony that is.

1.2.9 Playing an AnimationThis is the easy bit! The animation toolbar has buttons you will recognise from your home videorecorder: including full rewind, step back, pause, play, step foward, and full forward (i.e. go tothe end.)

1.2.10 KASEPLAYEROnce you have created your animation and saved the scene, customers will be able to watchyour animation using the companion KASEPLAYER program.



KASEMAKE

21 - 3D Camera Commands

1 New Camera

You can create additional cameras as entities which you can see and select in any view. Youcan look through any camera in any pane.

To create a new camera, activate this command. The immediate effect is that a new tab isadded to every pane, called 'Camera 1'. While the 'perspective' tab is still selected look aroundthe scene, you will see a camera has been added. For further details of moving around ascene, refer to “Moving About” on page 4-83.

The new camera object can be selected in the same way as you select any other object in theview (more about moving objects later). To look through this new camera simply click on the'Camera 1' tab at the bottom of the 3D view.

2 Cameras...

To delete a camera, choose Cameras->Cameras.... This will bring up a dialog box listing allcurrent cameras. Simply select the one you wish to remove by clicking on it then choose thedelete button.

3 Import Cameras...

To import a previously saved camera, choose Cameras->Import Cameras.... This will bring upa file open dialog box for you to specify the name and location of the camera file. Camerasare stored in a .KAM type file by default. Simply set the location and name of the requiredcamera file, then choose the OK button to import the camera.

4 Export Cameras...

To save a camera for future use, choose Cameras->Export Cameras.... This will bring up a filesave as dialog box for you to specify the name and location of the camera file. Cameras arestored in a .KAM type file by default. Simply set the location and name of the required cam-era file, then choose the OK button to export the camera.

Command New Camera

Menu Cameras > New Camera


Command Cameras...

Menu Cameras > Cameras...


Command Import Cameras...

Menu Cameras > Import Cameras...


Command Export Cameras...

Menu Cameras > Export Cameras...





KASEMAKE

5 One pane

It is possible to have more than one pane or window for displaying / manipulating a scene. Theremaining Cameras commands provide alternative layouts for up to four concurrent panes.

Choose one pane to return to the default single pane 3D view.

6 Horizontal split

Choose this command to view two equally sized panes positioned side by side. Each pane istabbed allowing two different views of the 3D object(s) to be viewed simultaneously.

7 Vertical split

Choose this command to view two equally sized panes positioned one above the other. Eachpane is tabbed allowing two different views of the 3D object(s) to be viewed simultaneously.

8 Horizontal split - 2

Choose this command to view three panes of equal width. The view is split horizontally in twoand the left hand view is then split vertically. Allowing three views of the 3D object(s).


Choose this command to view three panes of equal width. The view is split horizontally in twoand the right hand view is then split vertically. Allowing three views of the 3D object(s).

Command One pane

Menu Cameras > One pane


Command Horizontal split

Menu Cameras > Horizontal split


Command Vertical split

Menu Cameras > Vertical split


Command Horizontal split - 2

Menu Cameras > Horizontal split - 2







Vertical split - 2

KASEMAKE

10 Vertical split - 2

Choose this command to view three panes of equal height. The view is split vertically in two andthe lower view is then split horizontally. Allowing three views of the 3D object(s).


Choose this command to view three panes of equal height. The view is split vertically in two andthe higher view is then split horizontally. Allowing three views of the 3D object(s).


Choose this command to view four panes of equal width. The view is split horizontally in twoand the left hand view is then split vertically into three panes of equal height. Allowing foursimultaneous views of the 3D object(s).


Choose this command to view four panes of equal width. The view is split horizontally in twoand the right hand view is then split vertically into three panes of equal height. Allowing foursimultaneous views of the 3D object(s).


Choose this command to view four panes of equal height. The view is split vertically in two andthe higher view is then split horizontally into three equal width panes. Allowing four views ofthe 3D object(s).

Command Vertical split - 2

Menu Cameras > Vertical split - 2

















KASEMAKE


Choose this command to view four panes of equal height. The view is split vertically in two andthe lower view is then split horizontally into three panes of equal width. Allowing four views ofthe 3D object(s).

16 Four panes

Choose Four panes to display four panes displaying up to four different views of the current 3Dobjects.




Command Four panes

Menu Cameras > Four panes




KASEMAKE

22 - 3D Publishing Commands

1 VRML

You can create VRML movies for publication on the Internet. The user seeing your movie willneed to have a VRML player installed such as Cosmo or Blaxxun. You can now export animat-ing VRML. If you wish you can have the user click on an object in your movie in order to startit. VRML files have the advantage of being very small for Internet use.

Choose Publish->VRML. The Publish VRML dialog will now be displayed:-

Note: Clicking on an option reveals a hint at the bottom left of the dialog as to the purposeof the setting.

Set the VRML Options required as follows:-

1.1 VRMLThe options relating to the VRML movie are defined as follows:-

• Animated - If set, creates animated VRML files from the 3D recording which has been cre-ated. Click to set or clear as required.

• Click to Start - option to use the Mouse cursor to start animation• View After Publishing - Set this option to display the rendered bitmap in a viewer. Clear if

not required.• Start Frame - frame number from 3D recording to start animation• End Frame - frame number from 3D recording to end animation• Frames per sec - defines the frame rate to use for the movie. Simply enter a value for the

number of frames per second.

Command VRML

Menu Publish > VRML





KASEMAKE

1.2 HTMLThe HTML settings are:-

HTML Page

The style for the HTML page. Choose from :-

• No HTML - creates VRML action file

• No Frame Page - produces full screen HTML/VRML file

• Frame - produce VRML file with framed HTML file

HTML Frame Page

Where a frame is chosen, you can click on this option to tailor the frame to your requirements.The ... symbol is displayed. Simply click on it to reveal the Customise Frames Page dialog:-

Width of the frame page

Absolute - Set this option to specify the width as the number of pixels of the HTML Page.Enter the number of pixels by typing directly or scrolling to the required value.

Percentage - Set this option to define the width as a percentage of the HTML Page. Typethe percentage directly or scroll to the required value.

Choose XXXX Frame Page

Link to an existing web page on the Server - Select the Address on existing web page

Choose a web page to be published on the server from your Hard Disk - Enter the locationof an existing local page by typing directly, or click on the open button to displaythe Open file dialog allowing you to browse for and select the required page toset these options and close the customise dialog.

Choose OK to set these options and close the customise dialog.



AVI Movies

KASEMAKE

1.3 Published FileOutput File

Select the VRML File Type from the drop down list:-:

•Compressed VRML (*.wrz) - Creates Compressed Files (Please note some VRML Viewer may not support this file)

•ASCII VRML (*.WRL) - Creates Uncompressed Files

The default filename will be updated with the newly selected file extension. Type a newfilename if required.

Publish to

The published file can currently only be placed on a network or local directory, so the publishto folder option is permanently set. To set the required folder, either type the new locationdirectly or click on the browse button to display the Browse for Folder dialog allowingyou to search the current directory structure for the correct location or even to makea new folder if required.

Choose Publish to complete the publication.

2 AVI Movies

For the simplest possible distribution to your customers, you can also create AVI movies which,while often quite large, can be played by virtually everybody using Windows Media Player oranother AVI player.

You will be able to:

• Specify the AVI dimensions • Specify the AVI frame rate • Specify the AVI CODEC (compressor / decompressor) - a mechanism whereby the AVI file is

compressed in order to meter the result to your exact requirements.Additionally you will be able to add frames to the start and the end of the movie to show yourcompany insignia or contact information.

Choose Publish->Movie to display the Publish Movie dialog and enable you to define the set-tings required to publish the AVI movie:-

Command Movie

Menu Publish > AVI Movie





KASEMAKE

2.1 AVIMovie width - the width of the window for the completed movie. The larger the window sizethe larger the overall movie file size. Type a suitable value.

Movie height - the height of the window for the completed movie. Type a suitable value.

Start Frame - Enter the frame number from the 3D Recording to use to start animation

End Frame - Enter the frame number from the 3D Recording to use to end Animation

Source frame rate (fps) - the number of frames per second for the animation. Set the value bytyping it directly.

2.2 CodecCodec filter - Choose the filter to use to produce the movie. The available Codec's are deter-mined by the Windows System installed. Different Codecs can produce different Movie Typesand File Sizes. Choose from the drop down list of available filters.

Configure - This setting allows you to configure the selected codec filter. Configuration is specificto each filter and is done through a dialog. Click on the configure field to display the ... button.Click on this button to access the configuration dialog for the current codec filter, if available.

Frame Rate (fps) - Enter the number of frames per second for the movie.

2.3 PrologueYou are now asked to define characteristics of the movie prologue, this is an image to be shownat the start of the movie:-.

Use Prologue - Click on this setting and choose Yes or No from the drop down, dependingwhether you require a prologue or not.

Prologue image - Where an image is required, click on this setting. The ... button will now bedisplayed. Click on this button to activate the Image import / acquisition wizard, providing sev-eral methods for selecting the image to use.



Snapshots

KASEMAKE

Prologue time - Set the length of time to display the chosen frame at the start of the Movie.

2.4 EpilogueYou are now asked to define characteristics of the movie epilogue, this is an image to be shownat the end of the movie:-.

Use Epilogue - Click on this setting and choose Yes or No from the drop down, dependingwhether you require an epilogue or not.

Epilogue image - The image is defined as for the prologue using the Image import / acquisitionwizard, activated through the ... button.

Epilogue time - Set the length of time to display the chosen frame at the end of the Movie.

2.5 Published FileOutput FileA default filename with the .AVI file extension is supplied. You can change this to any nameyou require by typing directly.

Publish to Please refer to the previous format, “Publish to” on page 3.

Finally choose Publish to close the dialog and create the movie file.

3 Snapshots

Publish->Snapshots allows you to export multiple images (for example .BMP files). The mostcommon use of this is to recombine them at a later stage into an MPEG movie or animated .GIFfile. You could then publish the animated .GIF file on your web site.


• Specify the Frame Size• Create Single or Multi Images of Frames

Activate Publish->Snapshots to display the Publish Snapshots dialog:-

Command Snapshots

Menu Publish > Snapshots





KASEMAKE

3.1 Image export Image width - specify the width of the snapshot

Image height - specify the height of the snapshot

3.2 Image export multiple Multiple images - Set this option if you wish to create multiple snapshots from the 3D recordingor clear it if this is not required.

If you choose multiple snapshots, you should also set the following:

Start frame - set the frame number from the 3D recording to start animation

End frame - set the frame number from the 3D recording to end animation

Frame step - determine the number of frames between snapshots

3.3 Published FileOutput FileSelect the Snapshot File Type from the drop down list:

•Windows Bitmap - *.bmp

•JPEG Files - *.jpg

•Portable (Public) Network Graphic (proposed GIF replacement) - *.png

•UNIX Portable Bit Map Graphic - *.pbm

•Portable Graymap Graphic - *.pgm

•PBM Portable Pixelmap Graphic - *.ppm

•TARGA Files - *.tga



Kasemake (2D)

KASEMAKE

•TIFF Image Files - *.tif

The default filename will be updated with the newly selected file extension.

Publish to Set the location for the file. Please refer to the HTML format, “Publish to” on page 3.

Choose Publish to complete the publication.

4 Kasemake (2D)

This command allows you to create snapshots (with hidden lines removed if requested) whichyou can re-import in order to create assembly diagrams.


• Produce CFF2, RPT and AGD format designs• Specify Hidden Line Removal or Wireframe• Specify frame size

Activate this command. A Publish Kasemake (2D) dialog will appear allowing you to define thecharacteristics of the published file:-

4.1 ExportOutput width - set the width for the published CAD drawing

Output height - set the height for the published CAD drawing

Command Kasemake (2D)

Menu Publish > Kasemake (2D)





KASEMAKE

Hidden Line Removal - Set or clear this option to enable / disable hidden line removal

4.2 Published FileOutput FileSet the file export type using the drop down to determine the type of Kasemake file toproduce, choose from:-

•Kasemake 2D Drawings (*.AGD)

•Kasemake Report Files (*.RPT)

•Common File Format (*.CF2)

The default filename will be updated with the newly selected file extension.

Publish to Please refer to the HTML format, “Publish to” on page 3.

Select Publish to publish the file.

5 POVRAY

For really nice raytraced presentations we have provided an export facility to a freeware programcalled POVRAY. Raytracing provides you with shadows and reflections and gives you a superiorresult for printing. POVRAY has excellent help, and for expert users, you will be able to modifythe end result within POVRAY. In order to see the result, you will need to run install POVRAYwhich should be available on the KaseMake installation disc.

Activate this command. The Publish POVRay dialog is displayed as shown:-

Command POVRAY

Menu Publish > POVRAY




POVRAY

KASEMAKE

5.1 RenderingOutput width - Define the width of the image in pixels. Simply type the value directly.

Output height - Define the height of the image in pixels. Simply type the value directly.

Antialiasing - Antialiasing helps to make the image appear smoother. Set or clear as appropriate.

Render Immediately - the image can be rendered immediately by automatically launching POV-Ray if installed. Set or clear this setting as appropriate.

View image after rendering - Set this option to display the rendered bitmap in a viewer. Clear ifnot required.

Use radiosity - radiosity is an extra calculation that more realistically computes the diffuse inter-reflection of light. Set to render using radiosity or clear as required.

Bump map - Mapping is directed to effect on the surface normals, so that the object looksbumpy and rough. White areas in the texture image turn the surface normal to the oppositedirection than black. This is only a pseudo effect: it applies only to rendered images. Also, thecontour of the surface remains smooth. Set or clear as appropriate.

5.2 ReflectionsReflections - Set or clear to enable / disable reflections

Reflectivity - increase / decrease the reflectivity of an object

5.3 Sky Sphere

Use Sky Sphere - the sky sphere is used to create a realistic sky background without the need ofan additional sphere to simulate the sky. Set or clear as appropriate.

Sky Colour - Define the colour to use for sky. The current value is displayed as a colour and acolour code. Clicking on the field produces a drop down palette of predefined colours. Simplyclick on the required colour to close the palette and update the field with the new colour infor-mation. Alternatively, click on Other... to define alternative colours See “Defining Colours (3D)”on page 1-19.




KASEMAKE

Ground Colour - Define the colour to use for the ground. The current value is displayed as acolour and a colour code. Clicking on the field produces a drop down palette of predefinedcolours. Simply click on the required colour to close the palette and update the field with thenew colour information. Alternatively, click on Other... to define alternative colours See “Defin-ing Colours (3D)” on page 1-19.

5.4 Published FileOutput FileA default filename with the .POV file extension is supplied. You can change this to any nameyou require by typing directly.

Publish to Please refer to the HTML format, “Publish to” on page 3.

Finally choose Publish to close the dialog and create the POV Ray file.

6 Launch POVRAY...

If POV-RAY is installed on the system activating this command will cause KASEMAKE to run thePOV-RAY program.

7 KASEPLAYERCustomers can replay your scene (.KSN) file using Kase Player which accompanies Kasemake. Thisis a highly customisable program with specifically plays .KSN files - customised with a programcalled Kase Skin Maker which also accompanies Kasemake. You can create your own playerwhich can be tailored to your own requirements (much like the skins you see in Windows MediaPlayer). To create a .KSN file choose File->Save.

Command Launch POVRAY...

Menu Publish > Launch POVRAY...




KASEMAKE

23 - 3D View Commands

This section covers those view commands specific to 3D. All view commands common to 2Dand 3D can be found in the 2D - View Commands section.

1 Home

Choose View->Home to return the 3D object(s) to their home position.

2 Fill Sub-MenuFill is actually a sub-menu of fill type commands.

2.1 Wireframe

Choose Wireframe to display the 3D object(s) as wireframe objects.

2.2 Hidden line

Choose Hidden line to display the 3D object(s) as wireframe objects with hidden linesremoved.

2.3 Solid

Choose Solid to display the 3D object(s) as solid filled objects.

2.4 Textured

Choose Textured to display the 3D object(s) as solid filled textured objects.

Command Home

Menu View > Home


Command Wireframe

Menu View -> Fill > Wireframe


Command Hidden line

Menu View -> Fill > Hidden line


Command Solid

Menu View -> Fill > Solid


Command Textured

Menu View -> Fill > Textured





KASEMAKE

3 Shade Sub-MenuShade is actually a sub-menu of shading types.

3.1 Facet

Choose Facet to vary the shading applied to the 3D object(s).

3.2 Smooth

Choose Smooth to apply even shading to the 3D object(s).

4 Outline Sub-MenuOutline is actually a sub-menu of outline commands.

4.1 None

Choose None to display the 3D object(s) without a visible outline.

4.2 Black

Choose Black to display the 3D object(s) with a black outline.

4.3 White

Choose White to display the 3D object(s) with a white outline.

Command Facet

Menu View -> Shade > Facet


Command Smooth

Menu View -> Shade > Smooth


Command None

Menu View -> Outline > None


Command Black

Menu View -> Outline > Black


Command White

Menu View -> Outline > White




Background...

KASEMAKE

4.4 Colour

Choose Colour to display the 3D object(s) with a coloured outline.

5 Background...

This command allows you to change the background of the 3D view. Activate the command. TheBackground dialog is displayed. This contains a list of the five different alternative type ofbackground which are presented as buttons. When these buttons are activated, they open up apage of settings for the corresponding background type and display any preview.

Click on a button to display the corresponding table of settings headed Property and Value, asfollows :-

5.1 SolidChoose this to define a solid background colour. The field is displayed as a colour and a colourcode. First, click on the current value to reveal an arrow, then click on the arrow to display adropdown palette of predefined colours as shown. Simply click on the required colour to closethe palette and update the field with the new colour information. Alternatively, choose Other...to select from further predefined colours or customise your own. See “Defining Colours (3D)” onpage 1-19 for further details.

Command Colour

Menu View -> Outline > Colour


Command Background...

Menu View > Background...





KASEMAKE

The chosen colour is shown in the preview area. Click on OK to change the entire background tothe newly chosen colour.

5.2 GradientChoose this option to define four colours, corresponding to the four corners of the background.KASEMAKE automatically interpolates colour between the four corners.

Each corner colour is displayed as a colour and a colour code. Set each corner colour in turn.

First, click on the current value to reveal an arrow, then click on the arrow to display a dropdownpalette of predefined colours. You can now choose from the palette or customise your own.Please refer to “Defining Colours (3D)” on page 1-19 for further details.

The chosen colour is applied to the corresponding corner in the preview area and the previewupdated. Click on OK to update the background with the newly chosen colours.

5.3 ImageThis option allows you to choose an image for your background. The image can then bestretched, tiled or centred in the middle of the drawing area.

Click on the Image button to activate the Image settings.

Image

First define the image to use. Click on the Image value field to produce the ... button. Click onthis button to display the Import Image wizard outlining the options available, select Next. Younow have five alternative methods of determining the image to use. These are :

Import Image Allows you to import an image (.BMP,.GIF,.JPG, etc.) which is applied as the background inthe tiling that you specify.

Identify the image file as described for Draw->Import artwork. See “Import artwork” on page16-1 for details.

Acquire Image Allows you to acquire an image from a scanner. Refer to “Import artwork” on page 16-1 forfurther details.

Colour Allows you to choose a solid image colour. Duplicates changing the background to a solidcolour. Refer to “Import artwork” on page 16-1for details.

Load Movie Allows you to choose a movie to play in the background. Depending on your operatingsystem, you may or may not get sound. You can choose to play .AVI,.MPG, or .DIVX files (thelatter is only available if you have the DIVX codec installed, which you can get from http://www.divx.com).

Specify the movie image filename by typing directly or using the browse button ... to locate iton your computer or network.

The chosen movie will start when you press play. Choose Finish to set this chosen image asyour background.

Live Video Feed If you have a webcam attached to your computer, or another live imaging device you can alsoplay this in the background.



Background...

KASEMAKE

The camera image will appear in the preview area. Press play to start. Choose Finish to set thechosen image as your background.

Mode

Click in the Mode field to display an arrow. Click on the arrow to produce a drop down list ofavailable options for displaying the image. Choose from:-

•Tiled

•Stretched

•Centred

5.4 Walkthrough Click on the Walkthrough button to choose complete fully textured scenes to use for the back-ground.

KASEMAKE uses the 'Quake 3' (.BSP) file format in more or less its entirety for walkthroughs.(.ROQ movies are not supported).

There are various free editors available for 'Quake 3' including GtkRadiant which allows you todesign levels, i.e. walkthroughs as required.

Note: More often than not, when you look for a Quake level on the internet they will be inthe .PK3 file format. All you have to do is uncompress these using Winzip to get at the.BSP file.

The great advantage of this file format is that it only draws the room you are currently in, andthe parts of the rooms that are visible from the current room. Hence you can have vast walk-throughs which render extremely quickly. In addition, bezier surfaces are supported so that youcan have smooth arches, and columns.

To define a walkthrough, first click on the Walkthrough value field to reveal the ... button. Clickon the ... button to display a standard File Open dialog. Specify the name of the file containingthe walkthrough in the usual way.

5.5 Cubic Panorama A cubic panorama is a series of six images (i.e. six sides of a cube) which are warped such thatwhen you place a camera at the centre you see a panorama with no edges. Cameras exist whichautomatically take six images and stitch them together. Cheaper alternatives also exist using con-ventional digital cameras.

Click on this button to import an existing panorama or to create a new one or to edit the currentpanorama.

Choose PanoramaClick on this field if you wish to import an existing panorama. The ... button will now bedisplayed. Click on this button to display a standard file open dialog. Specify the filename andlocation for the .KPN file in the normal way. The chosen panorama will now be loaded anddisplayed in the preview area.

Design PanoramaClick on this field if you wish to select individual images to make up the cubic panorama. The... button is displayed. Click on this button to display an Edit Cubic Panorama dialog whichallows you to choose the six images. Click on each rectangle to choose its correspondingimage. In each case, the Choose Image dialog will be displayed, allowing you to specify thefilename and location of the required image.




KASEMAKE

In addition there are two further options allowing you to import or export a panoramarespectively:-

Import QuickTime VR...There is another relatively widely used format for panoramas available on the Internet:QuickTime VR. You should be able to find these files on the Internet and import them.Unfortunately they have the .MOV file extension which is exactly the same as QuickTimefiles.

Click on this option to produce a file open dialog, allowing you to locate the required.MOV file. Choose Open to import it.

Export panorama...Use this option to save your panorama. Click on the button to display a file Save As dialog.Type the name and location then click on Save to save the panorama to the specified .KPNfile.

Once you have defined your cubic panorama. Choose OK to close the Edit Cubic Panoramadialog and preview the newly defined cubic panorama.

Once you have a cubic panorama loaded you can make use of the reflectivity property of objects.The cubic panorama reflects on the surface of objects with reflectivity >0, however your graph-ics card needs to support cubic environment maps. Some graphics cards will also only supportreflectivity 1 or 0 (not anything in between) since they do not support texture factors.

6 Environment Map...

In order to support reflectivity, you need to have a cubic panorama loaded. In addition, yourgraphics card needs to support environment mapping. Otherwise, you will see no effect.

To use a reflective surface, select an object and change its reflectivity to 1 in the properties win-dow. Choose View->Properties to toggle display of the Properties window. Next you need toselect an environment map. Activate this command. The Environment Map dialog is now dis-played, previewing any existing environment map:-

Command Environment Map...

Menu View > Environment Map...




Advanced...

KASEMAKE

You can now import an existing panorama or create a new / edit an existing panorama. Referto“Cubic Panorama” on page 5 for details.

Once you have a panorama loaded you can make use of the reflectivity property of objects. Thepanorama reflects on the surface of objects with reflectivity >0, however your graphics cardneeds to support cubic environment maps. Some graphics cards will also only support reflectivity1 or 0 (not anything in between) since they do not support texture factors.

7 Advanced...

This command allows you to modify more advanced settings. These include the avatar height.,ground, watermark settings, and fog. Activate this command to display the Advanced Optionsdialog. The settings are grouped into different categories and displayed as a scrolling list. Scrollto a category to access its corresponding settings:-

Command Advanced...

Menu View > Advanced...





KASEMAKE

7.1 AvatarAn avatar is your presense in the 3D scene, i.e. the distance between your eyes and your feetwhile standing.

NavigationClick on the current value to display an arrow. Click on the arrow to display a drop down listof available settings. Move the cursor to the required navigation mode and click on it to selectit. The field is now updated to the new value.

Width

Set the width by typing the value directly or use the scroll buttons.

HeightSet the height by typing the value directly or use the scroll buttons.

Step heightSet the step height by typing the value directly or use the scroll buttons.

7.2 GroundShow GroundClick on this setting to display an arrow. Then click on the arrow to display a list of possiblevalues it can take. Move the cursor to yes if you wish to display the ground, or no if you donot wish to display it.



Advanced...

KASEMAKE

TypeClick on this setting to display an arrow. Then click on the arrow to display a list of possiblevalues it can take. Move the cursor to the required type and click on it to select it.

TiledClick on the arrow and choose the type of tiling to apply.

ColourChoose a colour for the ground. Click on the current value to display an arrow. Click on thearrow to display a dialog of predefined colours or to customise your own colour. See “DefiningColours (3D)” on page 1-19 for further details.

OpacityDefine an opacity setting (or reflectivity setting) depending on whether reflective is set or not.Type the required value directly.

ReflectiveSet this option to make the ground reflective. You will see a reflection of the objects on thefloor. This does not require an expensive graphics card to achieve either. Clear it if you preferan opaque effect.

TextureYou can also select a bitmap which is tiled across the ground. Click in the value field to displaythe ... button. Then click on this button to activate the Image Import / Acquisition Wizardproviding three alternative methods for defining the image to use. The newly selected imagewill be previewed in the preview section of the Advanced Options dialog.

Note: Note that the ground will be exported into both VRML and POVRAY while you haveShow ground set to yes.

7.3 WatermarkThis group of settings relate to defining a permanent watermark for your scene. The watermarkcan be either an image or text. For Example, '©2005 your company' could be used. The water-mark can be placed in five places within the view (it does not move while you rotate the scene).

Show watermarkClick in the value field to display an arrow, then click on the arrow to display a list of possiblevalues. Move the cursor to yes if you wish to show a watermark, or no if you do not wish todisplay it.

Watermark PositionDefine the position for the watermark by clicking in the value field to display an arrow. Clickon the arrow to display a list of possible values. Move the cursor to the required position andclick on it to select it.

TextType in the text to display for the watermark. This is displayed in the preview screen asconfirmation.

SizeSet the height of the text by typing the required value directly.

OpacityDefine the opacity setting by typing the required value directly.




KASEMAKE

ColourChoose a colour for the ground. Click on the arrow to display a dialog of predefined coloursor to customise your own colour. See “Defining Colours (3D)” on page 1-19 for further details.

FontClick in the value field to display an arrow, then click on the arrow to display the Choose fontface dialog. Click on the arrow to display the drop down list of available fonts. Scroll throughthe list by clicking on the arrows. Click on the name of the required font to select it. Finallyclick on OK to close the Choose font face dialog and update the current font value.

ImageYou can also select an image to use as the watermark. An image works best when it has sometransparency (use a .gif or .png image).

Click in the value field to display the ... button. Then click on this button to activate the ImageImport / Acquisition Wizard providing three alternative methods for defining the image to use.The newly selected image will be previewed in the preview section of the Advanced Optionsdialog.

7.4 NotesAnnotation added with the Edit->Attach Note command can be switched off with this option.In addition, you can specify the font size, opacity, etc. used to display all notes within the 3Dscene.

Show NotesClick in the value field to display an arrow, then click on the arrow to display a list of possiblevalues. Move the cursor to yes if you wish to display notes within the scene, or no if you donot wish to display any notes.

SizeType in the height to use for the notes directly.

OpacityDefine the opacity setting by typing the required value directly.

ColourChoose a colour for the notes. Click on the arrow to display a dialog of predefined colours orto customise your own colour. See “Defining Colours (3D)” on page 1-19 for further details.

FontClick in the value field to display an arrow, then click on the arrow to display the Choose fontface dialog. Click on the arrow to display the drop down list of available fonts. Scroll throughthe list by clicking on the arrows. Click on the name of the required font to select it. Finallyclick on OK to close the Choose font face dialog and update the current font value.

7.5 FogFor atmospheric effects you can switch on fog and define the thickness and colour. '

Show FogClick in the value field to display an arrow, then click on the arrow to display a list of possiblevalues. Move the cursor to yes if you wish to show fog, or no if you do not wish to display it.



Artwork...

KASEMAKE

TypeSet the type of fog required. Click in the value field to display an arrow, then click on the arrowto display a list of possible values. Move the cursor to the required type and click on it to selectit. Choose from:-

•linear - hazy effect

•exponential - foggy

•exponential squared - thick fog

ColourChoose a colour for the fog. Click on the arrow to display a dialog of predefined colours or tocustomise your own colour. See “Defining Colours (3D)” on page 1-19 for further details.

8 Artwork...

While in artwork mode activated by choosing Draw->Edit artwork or from the 3D View toolbar,it is possible to change the artwork quality. The initial artwork quality was set during the initialfold stage.

Activate this command. The Quality Settings dialog is now displayed. This allows you to changethe quality, and outside and inside colours. The two colours are applied in regions outside theartwork.

These settings are identical to those described in the section “Artwork” on page 4-78.

Choose Draw->Edit artwork again to leave artwork mode and update the artwork quality /colours as requested.

9 Snapshots..

Activate this command to determine the frame size of a snapshot. A Snapshot Options dialogwill appear for you to specify the width and height of the snapshot. For each dimension, you caneither enter the value directly or use the arrows to scroll to the appropriate value.

10 Nudge..

The Nudge command allows various increments to be set which are used by some of the SceneMode commands accessed through the Edit menu and also the Spacing commands accessedthrough the Arrange menu.

Command Artwork...

Menu View > Artwork...


Command Snapshots...

Menu View > Snapshots...


Command Nudge...

Menu View > Nudge...





KASEMAKE

Activate this command to display the Nudge Settings dialog as shown:-

10.1 Movement Nudge SettingsThe Movement Nudge Settings are used where Move has been selected for the scene mode.Please refer to “Move” on page 15-3.

They are applicable to movement through the arrow keys only.

•Nudge defines the movement increment for each press of an arrow key. Set the value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

•Shift Nudge defines the movement increment for each press of an arrow key when used in conjunction with the Shift key. Set the value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

10.2 Rotation Nudge SettingsThe Rotation Nudge Settings are used where Rotation has been selected for the scene mode.Please refer to “Rotate” on page 15-3.

They are applicable to movement through the arrow keys only.

•Angle Nudge defines the rotation increment for each press of an arrow key. Set the value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

•Shift Angle Nudge defines the rotation increment for each press of an arrow key when used in conjunction with the Shift key. Set the value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

10.3 Spacing Nudge SettingsThe Spacing Nudge Settings are used by the horizontal and vertical spacing commands. Theydefine the increments used by the Increase and Decrease commands for both horizontal andvertical spacing. Please refer to “Horizontal Spacing Sub-Menu” on page 18-5.

•Increase defines the spacing increment used by the Increase commands acessed through both the horizontal and vertical spacing menus. Set the value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

•Decrease defines the spacing decrement used by the Decrease commands acessed through both the horizontal and vertical spacing menus. Set the value directly or scroll with the arrows to set it.

Finally click on OK to close the dialog and update the settings or Cancel to abandon anychanges.



Timeline

KASEMAKE

11 Timeline

KASEMAKE uses the familiar concept of key frame animation to generate a final presentation.In a very short time, it is possible to create apparently complex animations.

You can see the current key frames in the Animation window. Choose View->Timeline to displayit. It is displayed at the bottom of the drawing area by default but can be moved and push-pinned or autohidden in the usual way if required. Selecting this command again will removethe Animation window, as it works as a toggle

The Animation window displays the hierarchy of object(s) and any components defined in thecurrent scene, in a column format to the left of the display. Any corresponding animation isshown frame by frame to the right.

Within a typical 3D scene you might have one or more boxes. Each of these is made up of one ormore panels. This is reflected in the object hierarchy. Other objects affecting the view e.g. camerasand lighting are also displayed.

Any animation is displayed in the form of keyframes. As in the making of films, KASEMAKEanimation divides lengths of time into frames. A keyframe is a frame in which you define a changein an animation or include frame actions to modify a movie. Keyframes are used to produceanimation without the need to draw each frame; they make creating movies easier. KASEMAKEcan tween, or fill in the frames between keyframes to produce fluid animations.

The timeline header at the top of the timeline indicates frame numbers. The timeline statusdisplay at the bottom of the timeline indicates the selected frame number, the current frame rate,and the elapsed time to the current frame.

Note: When an animation is played, the actual frame rate is displayed; thismay differ from the movie frame rate if the computer can't displaythe animation quickly enough.

The order in which frames and keyframes appear in the Timeline determines the order in whichthey are displayed in a movie. You can change the length of a tweened animation by dragging akeyframe in the timeline. By rearranging keyframes in the timeline you can edit the sequence ofevents in a movie. You can also insert, delete, select, and move frames in the Timeline by rightclicking to access a pop up menu of animation commands.

Command Timeline

Menu View > Timeline





KASEMAKE

12 Properties

Every object in a 3D scene has properties which you can examine and change with this com-mand.

The object must first be selected in the usual way. Once this command is activated the PropertiesWindow will be displayed containing the properties specific to the selected object. If multipleobjects are selected only properties which have the same value for all objects will be displayed,those properties where the values differ, will be left blank.

The Properties window is displayed at the left hand edge of the screen by default. It can bemoved or floated as required. Activating this command when the Properties window is visiblewill remove it from the screen.

The properties have been organised into groups with headings as shown :-

Command Properties

Menu View > Properties




Properties

KASEMAKE

To change a property, simply click in a field. You can change the current value in one of the fol-lowing ways :-

• drop down list - if an arrow appears after clicking in the field, select from the drop down list of available options by clicking on the arrow and moving the cursor to the required value and clicking to select it

• direct entry - type the new value. Press the Enter key to update the object.• via a dialog (...) - if ... appears after clicking in the field, click on the ... button to display a

dialog. Change the required settings in the usual way.• sliding scale - click and hold the slider and drag to vary the scale. Release the mouse to set

the new value.

12.1 ThicknessFor foldable objects, the properties window displays a thickness property. Thickness is measuredin drawing units. By changing this value you can override the thickness you originally specifiedwhen starting the fold operation.

12.2 MaterialAnother of the most notable properties are the materials (for foldable objects there are three




KASEMAKE

materials: inside, outside, and edge.) You can set the materials independently by clicking theellipsis button (...) against each of the properties.

Upon doing so, a Texture Edit dialog will appear as illustrated, allowing you to change one ormore properties of the current material. This window has a large preview of the material so thatyou can see your changes straight away within the preview. You can hide / display the large pre-view section by clicking on the arrow.

This dialog allows you to choose the following properties of the texture:

ColourThis property allows you to specify the colour which is blended with the artwork on your box.Your artwork and this colour will be combined to give a hybrid colour which is roughly theaverage of the two on a colour wheel.

Click on the arrow to display a palette of available colours. You can also customise your owncolour. Refer to “Outside Colour” on page 4-78 for full details.

GlowGlow is a colour which is always added to your object: to give your design a red hue, simplychange the glow colour to red. This colour applies even in the absence of lighting.


ShineIndicates the reflective colour of your material. This colour is prevalent at points of your boxwhich are particularly highlighted by lighting.




Properties

KASEMAKE

Filteringis an advanced setting which indicates the type of filtering your graphics card applies whilerendering the material onto a shape. This can be used to improve the quality of images on thescreen with some, slight, performance degradation.

Click on the arrow and move the cursor to the required setting. Click to select this new setting.

ModulationModulation is an advanced setting which indicates whether the Colour property is blendedwith the artwork on your box. Shine does not occur when this is set to Decal.

Click on the arrow and move the cursor to the required setting. Click to select this new setting.

OpacityOpacity is a general opacity setting. The opacity ranges from 100% opaque at the top of thescroll bar to completely transparent at the bottom.

Simply hold the left mouse button on the slider and drag to vary the effect. Alternatively clickon the arrows to increase or decrease opacity.

ShininessShininess is used in combination with the Shine colour, which becomes more prevalent themore shiny your material is. The shininess of the object ranges from very shiny, located at thetop of the scrollbar to matte being at the bottom.

Simply hold the left mouse button on the slider and drag to vary the effect. Alternatively clickon the arrows to increase or decrease shininess.

ReflectivityReflectivity is an advanced setting which indicates how reflective the surface of the material is.This is only used by the POVRAY (ray-tracing) export, and in cases where you have anenvironment map or panorama loaded in the background which you wish to have reflectedoff the surface of the object. This is particularly nice when you want to render metallicsurfaces, however your graphics card will need to support this feature in order for you to seeanything during general rendering.

The reflectivity of the object ranges from very reflective, located at the top of the scrollbar tonot reflective being at the bottom.

Simply hold the left mouse button on the slider and drag to vary the effect. Alternatively clickon the arrows to increase or decrease reflectivity.

Note: POVRAY does not require your graphics card to support reflectivity.

Image as FrameThe central part of the image can be removed to give a frame effect. Click on the button toremove the centre.

ImageImage allows you to choose a single image which becomes the artwork chosen for thismaterial. Note that if you edit the artwork (see later) then you will - at that stage - lose thissetting. This is particularly useful for loading textures onto imported, lathed or extrudedshapes.

Activating the Image Button will have one of two effects depending upon the Use ImageWizard option. (See next option).

Either the Choose Image dialog will be displayed or the Image import / acquisition wizard willbe activated.




KASEMAKE

Use Image WizardSet the Use Image Wizard option if you wish to use the Image import / acquisition wizard toselect the image. The Image Wizard allows you to import an image, movie or live video feed.

Clear this setting if this is not required.

Library...Use the Library... command to choose from a user-defined library of textures, or savecommonly used materials. Click on the Library... button. The Texture Library dialog nowappears.

12.3 Artwork PropertiesArtwork has a different set of properties to an object. The properties are as follows:

Image - allows you to choose another image. Activating this displays the Image import /acquisition wizard to guide you through importing an alternative image. See “Import artwork”on page 16-1.

MirrorX - determines whetherr you mirror the image horizontally.

MirrorY - allows you to mirror the image vertically

Proportional - constrains the image to being in the same aspect ratio as the original. If this isset to Yes, stretching the image horizontally automatically adjusts the vertical scale to retainthe original aspect ratio.

13 Notes

Activating this command toggles display of the Notes window displayed below. This window isthe same as you get when working with a 2d drawing - i.e. you can have threaded discussions -plus you can attach notes to objects within the scene which are visible within the scene.

The notes are saved along with your scene, so that you can discuss the scene with a colleagueetc. at various stages of generating your finished presentation.

You can reposition and resize the Notes window or make it float in the usual way.

Command Notes

Menu View > Notes




Notes

KASEMAKE

13.1 Attaching A Note To An ObjectNotes can be added to a drawing in one of three ways :

• right click in the drawing area then select Attach Note from the context menu which appears.

• use the Edit->Attach Note command• click on [New Note] in the 3D Notes window

Once the command is activated, your mouse cursor will change to a cross with a note by it. Sim-ply left click within your scene on the object you wish to add a note to. After doing so, a dialogwill appear which lets you type in the note you wish to add.

Type your name, the title of the note, and the text of the note (which will get displayed withinyour scene.)




KASEMAKE

When you click OK, a note will be attached to your object; and the note will also appear in thenotes window.

Your note is shown on the design as a line which goes from the rectangular note area (contain-ing the text of your note) to the exact position you clicked on the object. The note is alwaysadded such that the line is perpendicular to the surface of the object where you clicked. You canselect the note as if it were an object within the scene simply by clicking on it.

Any time you select the note in the notes window, the view will jump back to where you werewhen you attached the note. Additionally, notes are specific to a particular 'time' (more aboutthis when we deal with animation). When you select the note, the animation will jump back tothe 'time' when you added the note also.

Properties

When you select a note attached to an object, its properties are displayed in the property win-dow. You can then edit the properties for the note through the property window. Choose View->Properties to display the properties window.

Each note has the following properties:

• Distance - the distance from the object to the rectangular note area. This is not in drawing units. Choose a value which is between 0 and 10 to get your note placed exactly where you want it.

• Width - the width of the rectangular note area (always in pixels). You can change this to any value you wish.

Notice that when you rotate your scene, the notes are always shown face-on to make them easyto read. In addition, when the note goes around the back of the object (when you rotate thescene) the note disappears. In addition, if you change the current 'time' on the animation slider(more later) then the note only appears at the time it was created.

13.2 Modifying NotesOnce a Note is added it is possible to modify it. Select the note you wish to modify by clicking onits title in the 3D Notes window.

Choose Change. An Amend Note dialog is now displayed showing the current title, author andtext content of this note. You can now alter any of the details of the note by clicking on the textand retyping it. Choose OK to close the dialog and update the Notes window with any changes.

13.3 Adding Sub NotesTo create a sub note for an existing note, select the note you wish to add to by clicking on itstitle in the 3D Notes window, then choose Reply. The following Reply to Note dialog nowappears:



Notes

KASEMAKE

Type an appropriate reply and choose OK to close the dialog. A sub note will now appear in the3D Notes window as illustrated

13.4 Deleting NotesNotes can also be removed from the 3D Notes window. First select the required note by clickingon it. Choose Delete. A confirmation dialog now appears:

Choose Yes to confirm deletion and remove the note from the notes field and the design whereit has been attached to an object.




KASEMAKE

14 Material

Activating this command toggles display of the Material window displayed below. This windowpreviews the material available for use with any 3D objects. In addition, it displays several com-mands which are available to help to apply and manipulate the material used.

You can reposition and resize the Material window or make it float in the usual way.

14.1 Pipette Material The Pipette Material command allows you to sample material from an existing 3D object. This iscopied to the preview window and becomes the current material, so can be applied to furtherobjects.

Select this command. The cursor changes to a pipette. Simply click on the object you wish tosample. The preview within the material window will now be updated to show the sampledmaterial.

14.2 Paint with Material The Paint with Material command allows you to take the current material and apply it to an

Command Material

Menu View > Material




Material

KASEMAKE

existing panel / object.

Select this command. The cursor will change to a paintbrush. Click on a panel / object. The cur-rent material will now be applied to the chosen panel / object.

14.3 Apply Material to Selection The Apply Material to Selection command allows you to take the current material and apply it tothe currently selected 3D object(s).

First select the panel(s) / object(s) to which you wish to apply the material. Select this command.The current material will now be applied to the selected panel(s) / object(s).

14.4 Edit Material The Edit Material command allows you to change the current material.

Select this command. The Edit Texture dialog will now be displayed. This is the same dialog as isused by Properties->Material. Please refer to “Material” on page 15 for further details.



KASEMAKE




Index

KASEMAKE

Symbols.VIZ File Types 14-1

Numerics2 Entity Fillet 4-222 Entity Fillet Options 4-222 Point Circle 4-183 Entity Fillet 4-233 Entity Fillet Options 4-233 Point 4-203 Point Circle 4-193D

Artwork import 16-1Draw

Edit Artwork 16-1Image - colour 16-2Image - Digital camera 16-2Image - Scanner 16-2

3D AlignAbut bottom 18-5Abut Right 18-4Abut top 18-4Bottoms 18-5Centre 18-3Left 18-3Middles 18-4Right 18-3Tops 18-4

3D Alignment Tool Bar 1-163D Animation 20-1

20-3Adding Sounds 20-6Animation Spline 20-5Camera 20-4Camera orientation 20-1Camera Position 20-1Camera Seledtion 20-1CD Tracks 20-1Copy Frames 20-5Cut Frames 20-5Editing 20-3Folding - record 20-4Frame Rate 20-2Key Frame - create 20-5Key frames 20-5

Key Frames - destroy 20-6Key Frames - destroy all 20-6Key Frames - insert 20-5Key Frames - remove 20-5Light 20-4Light Position 20-1Music 20-1Object Folds 20-1Object hierarchy 20-5Object Orientation 20-1Object position 20-1Object Scaling 20-1Paste Frames 20-5Playing 20-6Recording 20-1Recording - camera switch 20-6Show Scene 20-5Sound 20-1Spline properties - Curved auto spline

20-3Spline properties - curved spline 20-3

3D Animation Commands 20-13D Animation Tool Bar 1-163D Arrange

Abut left 18-2Centre At Origin 18-1Lie Down 18-2Lie on side 18-2Reset 18-1Rotate anticlockwise 18-9Rotate clockwise 18-8Rotation Angle 18-9Stand on ground 18-1Stand up 18-2

3D Arrange Commands 18-13D Axis

X 15-5Z 15-6

3D Background 23-3Cubic panorama 23-5Gradient 23-4Image 23-4Image - acquire 23-4Image - colour 23-4Image - import 23-4


Release 8.0Page I-1

Index

KASEMAKE

Image - live video feed 23-4Image - load movie 23-4Solid 23-3walkthrough 23-5

3D Camera Commands 21-13D Cameras

Cameras 21-1Export 21-1Import 21-1New 21-1Single pane 21-2Split - horizontal 21-2Split - horizontal 2 21-2Split - horizontal 3 21-2Split - horizontal 4 21-3Split - horizontal 5 21-3Split - vertical 21-2Split - vertical 2 21-3Split - vertical 3 21-3Split - vertical 4 21-3Split - vertical 5 21-4

3D Curvature Tool Bar 1-163D Deformation

Curve 0 16-6Curve -180 16-8Curve 180 16-7Curve -270 16-8Curve 270 16-7Curve -360 16-8Curve 360 16-7Curve -90 16-8Curve 90 16-7Curve Angle - 16-9Curve Angle + 16-9Freeform 16-6Parametric 16-6Remove Curvature 16-9

3D DimensionsCentre of Gravity 16-5Selected 16-5

3D DrawAttach Note 16-2Corrugate 16-4Display Deformation 16-10Mesh subdivision 16-3

Snapshot 16-10Snapshot Vector 16-10

3D DrawingTool Bar 1-163D Edit

Paste Array 15-13D Edit Commands 15-1, 16-13D Environment Map 23-63D File Commands 14-13D File Types 14-13D Fill

Hidden line 23-1Solid 23-1Textured 23-1Wireframe 23-1

3D FoldAngle Decrease 17-2Angle Increase 17-2Constrain 17-1Flat 17-1Increment 17-3To 180 17-1To 270 17-2To 90 17-1To Angle 17-2

3D Fold Commands 17-13D Folding Tool Bar 1-153D Lighting

Ambient 19-1Reset 19-1Toggle Lights 19-2

3D LightsLighting display 19-1

3D Lights Commands 19-13D Lights Tool Bar 1-153D Outline 23-2

Black 23-2Colour 23-3None 23-2White 23-2

3D PlaneHorizontal 15-5Side 15-5Vertical 15-5

3D PropertiesArtwork 23-18

Release 8.0Page I-2


Index

KASEMAKE

Material 23-15Texture - colour 23-16Texture - filtering 23-17Texture - glow 23-16Texture - image 23-17Texture - library 23-18Texture - modulation 23-17Texture - opacity 23-17Texture - reflectivity 23-17Texture - shine 23-16Texture - shininess 23-17Thickness 23-15

3D Publish2D Kasemake file 22-7POVRAY 22-8Povray - launch 22-10Snapshots 22-5VRML 22-1VRML - customisable frames 22-2

3d PublishAVI Movies 22-3

3D Publishing Commands 22-13D Rotation Tool Bar 1-163D Scene

Mode - examine 15-4Mode - fly 15-4Mode - static 15-4Mode - walk 15-4Move 15-3Rotate 15-3Scale 15-3

3D Screen Layout 1-73D Selection

Objects 15-2Panels 15-2Sub objects 15-2

3D Shade 23-2Facet 23-2Smooth 23-2

3D SpacingHorizontal - decrease 18-6Horizontal - increase 18-6Horizontal - make equal 18-5Horizontal - remove 18-6Make Same Size 18-8

Make Same Size - horizontally 18-8Make Same Size - Vertically 18-8Vertical 18-6Vertical - decrease 18-7Vertical - increase 18-7Vertical - make equal 18-7Vertical - remove 18-7

3D View 4-82Advanced 23-7Artwork 23-11Avatar 23-8Fill 23-1Fog 23-10Ground 23-8Home 23-1Material 23-22Notes 23-10, 23-18Properties 23-14Settings Nudge 23-11Snapshots 23-11Timeline 23-13Watermark 23-9

3D View Commands 23-13D ViewTool Bar 1-153DAxis

Y 15-6

AAbut bottom 18-5Abut left 18-2Abut Right 18-4Abut top 18-4Acquire Image 23-4Add Bridge

Freehand 9-40Add Frames 8-51Add New Values 7-15Add Pin 9-22Add Strut 9-20Adding Sub Notes3D Notes

Sub Notes 23-20Adjust 4-57Adjust Lock Points 10-7Adjust Options 4-58AdjustFrames 8-54


Release 8.0Page I-3

Index

KASEMAKE

Advanced 23-7AG Database 13-1AI Format 2-34Air Holes 9-16Align

Elements 6-3Left 18-6To angle 6-5To grid 6-4

Align Elements 6-3Align Sub-Menu 18-2Align To Angle 6-5Align To Grid 6-4Ambient 19-1Angle 4-1, 4-20

Text 4-32Angle Relative 4-2Angle Super 4-3Animation 20-1Append 2-33, 7-9Arc Sub-Menu 4-19Arc Tangent 4-12Area Units 2-52Arrange

Explode 6-2Group 6-1Set view 6-3Toggle View 6-3Unclone 6-1Unclone All 6-2Ungroup 6-1Ungroup All 6-1

Arrange Commands 6-1Arrange Icons 12-3Array 8-6Arrow 4-8Arrow Options 4-8Artwork 23-11Artwork Properties 23-18Attach Note 16-2Auto Bolt Hole Settings 9-58Auto Counter Plate

Board Thickness 8-44Chamfer - Extended 8-45Chamfer - Internal 8-46

chamfer settings 8-43Crease Rule Pointage 8-44Grain Direction 8-45Horizontal Crease 8-45material 8-44Matrix Thickness 8-45Profile - extended 8-45Profile - internal 8-46Simulation 8-46Vertical Crease 8-45

Auto Counter PlateCountersAuto Counter Plate 8-42

Auto Cut 4-51Auto Remove Bolt Holes 9-56Auto Repeat Copy 9-20Auto Save 2-45Auto Snap 2-48Auto snap freehand 2-48Auto Snap Mode 5-5Auto Snap Properties 5-13Auto Trim 4-52Automatic 9-34Automatic Regular Options 8-8Automatic Stripping Knives 9-3Avatar 23-8AVI Movies 22-3Axes 2-50

BBackground 10-12, 23-3

Colours - Custom 10-12Backup files 2-45Backup prefix 2-46BACKUP.AGD 2-45Between 2 Points 5-12Bevel

MountBevel 8-25

Bevel / VGroove 8-27Bevel Knife Angle 8-26Bevel Overcut 8-26Bevel Overrun Angle 8-26Bevel Profile 8-25Bevel Slow In Pen 8-27Bevel Tool Settings 8-26

Release 8.0Page I-4


Index

KASEMAKE

Bevel Undercut 8-26Bezier Curve 4-28Bezier Curve Options 4-29Bisect Angle 4-55Bisect Angle between Construct Lines 4-75Bisect Angle between Elements 4-74Bisect Element 4-53Bitmap Zoom Factors

PreferencesBitmap 2-51

Black 23-2Blank Drawing 2-14Bolt Holes

Delete hidden 9-57Knife Tolerance 9-57Lower Priority tolerance 9-57Reset 9-57

BorderCreate 8-55Drawing Area - identifying 8-56Edit 8-55Load 8-54Prompts, masks - identifying 8-56Template 8-56

Border EditDelete Mask 8-55

Border Sub-Menu 8-54Borders - database 13-6Bottom Lock Point 7-23Bottoms 18-5Bounds 2-27

absolute 2-47visible 2-47

Box 4-5Box Options 4-6Break 4-54Bridge Arcs 9-33Bridge Interval 9-38Bridges

Hide 9-33Rotary 9-38

BridgingAdd Freehand 9-42Add Tie Bridges 9-46Adjust Bridge Width 9-41

Adjust Width 9-42Align 9-43Align Bridge 9-41Automatic 9-34Indicate Rotary 9-45manual 9-35Move 9-42Move Bridge 9-41Move Tie Bridge 9-47Remove All 9-43Remove All Bridges 9-41Remove All Rotary 9-45Remove Freehand 9-42Remove Tie Bridge 9-47Roll-up 9-31Show Bridge 9-42Show End Markers Rotary 9-46Shuffle Rotary 9-44Spanish bridges 9-33

Bridging Menu 9-31Bridging Roll up

Adjustments 9-40Bridging Roll-up

Drill Diameter 9-32Flat Bridging 9-34Settings 9-32Show as Gaps 9-33Width 9-33

Build Sub-Menu 4-49Build Tool Bar 1-14Bulge 4-62Button 1-17

CCalculator 8-65Call 7-20Camera Animation 20-4Camera Position 20-1Camera Selection 20-1Camera Switch 20-6Cameras 4-83, 21-1Carrot Holes 9-18Cascade 12-2CD Tracks 20-1Centre 4-20, 18-3


Release 8.0Page I-5

Index

KASEMAKE

Centre At Origin 18-1Centre Line 8-61Centred - Print 2-21Centred In 2-26CF2 Format 2-30, 2-32Chamfer 4-8Chamfer Guide 8-41

Options 8-41Chamfer Options 4-9Chamfers 8-43Change 3-17

Profile 3-18Style 3-17Text Settings 3-18

Change Nudge AngleEdit commands - nudge angle 3-16

Change Pin 9-22Change Strut 9-21Changing the Active Window 12-3Channel Width

Counterschannel width 8-41

Check Box 1-17Check Integrity 8-62Choosing A Layout 8-2, 8-10Clear Area 3-5Clone Edit 10-8Close 7-6Close All 12-1Close Command 2-7Close Project 2-17CMF Format 2-36Colour 2-42, 23-3, 23-4, 23-16Combo Box 1-18Command Bar 1-2Commands 10-21Common Line 2-25Common Lines 8-16, 8-17Completing Manual Optimisation 8-13Compression 8-48

Compression Information 8-48End 8-50Material Settings 8-49Print 8-50Proceed 8-50

Save 8-50Condition Statements 7-8Constrain 17-1Construct Line Colour 2-50Context Menu 10-25Controls 1-17Convert 8-60Convert To Arcs

ArcsConvert To 8-17

Convert To Contour 4-68Conveyor Plot

Add Frames 8-51Adjust Frames 8-54

Conveyor Plot Sub-Menu 8-51Coordinate Drawing Mode 5-6Copy 3-3, 3-7Copy Frames 20-5Copy Horizontal Mirror 3-7Copy Vertical Mirror 3-7Corrugate 16-4Counters

Channel width - horizontal 8-41Channel width - vertical 8-41locating holes 8-42options - locating holes 8-42Sample 8-40Simulate Matrix 8-46Simulation 8-42

Counters Sub-Menu 8-40CountersChamfer guide 8-41Create Border 8-55Create DB Symbol 8-63Create Key Frame 20-5Create Layout Drawing 9-73Create New Document 2-13Create Panel 4-12Create Preview 2-17, 7-22Create Revision 2-13Creating a Parametric Symbol 10-7Crossover Angle 2-25Cubic Panorama 23-5Cubic Spline 4-27Cubic Spline Options 4-27Current Job Settings 9-59

Release 8.0Page I-6


Index

KASEMAKE

Curve Generation 2-30Curve Sub-Menu 4-26Curved 20-3Curved Auto 20-3Customisable Frames 22-2Customise

Context menu 10-25Context Menu - modify 10-26Shortcuts 10-23Toolbars 10-19, 10-25Toolbars - commands 10-21Toolbars - options 10-23Toolbars - style 10-22

Customise Sub-Menu 10-19Customising the Style Toolbar 10-22Cut 3-3

by Length 8-31by Number 8-31Even Spacing 8-31

Cut - Crease 8-29Cut Crease

Display 8-34display labels 8-34example - cut by length 8-32example - cut by number 8-33Label options 8-34

Cut Frames 20-5

DDangling Nodes 4-81DAT Format 2-37Data Units 2-52Database 2-9, 10-13, 13-1

Add & Delete Records 13-4Border format 13-7Borders 13-6changing properties 13-13Compact 13-15Configuration for network drawing files

13-15Configuration for network file 13-15configuration settings 13-12Copy Record 13-4DefaultConfiguration 13-1Edit Fields 13-14

Format of files 13-12Operation 13-2Parametric file associations 13-10Parametrics 13-9Popup menu 13-4Projects 13-11Queries 13-5Query syntax 13-6Reports 13-8Toolbar 13-2Tools 13-13Transfer from border 13-7Transfer to border 13-7Update from parametric variable table

13-10DDES Format 2-36, 2-37, 2-38Decrease 18-6, 18-7Decrease Fold Angle 17-2Def Point 7-3Default configuration 13-1Default Units 2-52Default View

Preferencesview 2-50

Define Bolt Hole Type 9-58Defining .DSC Style Files 7-30Defining Panels & Flaps 7-25, 8-37Defining the Parts to be called 7-31Delete Field 2-33Delete Files 2-14Delete Hidden Bolt Holes 9-57Delete Image 3-5Delete Mask 8-55Delete Selection 3-4Delete Value 7-15Delete Visible 3-4Deleting Notes3D Notes

Deletion 23-21Depth In X 2-25Depth In Y 2-25Design Context Menu 2-12Designs 8-8Destroy All Key Frames 20-6Destroy Key Frames 20-6Dialog Boxes 1-17


Release 8.0Page I-7

Index

KASEMAKE

DiameterDimension 4-33

Die Board 9-23Die board/counter locating holes 8-42Die board/counter locating holes Options8-42Diemaking 9-1

Bridging 9-31Copy - auto repeat 9-20Create Layout Drawing 9-73Current Job Settings 9-59Database 9-60Die board 9-23Drill freehand 9-52Drill toggle 9-52Edit Job Info 9-60Ground Table 9-73L-Shaped Knives 9-5L-shaped knives - options 9-6Nicks 9-30Rotary 9-52Rotary - Load Shell 9-53Rotary - Shell History List 9-53Rotary - Trim Shell Width 9-53Rule menu 9-47Select Job Info 9-60Single Knife 9-5stripping knives - automatic 9-3stripping knives - grip edge 9-4stripping knives - manual 9-1stripping knives - options 9-2Support Bars 9-29

Diemaking Database 9-60Diemaking Tool Bar 1-15Digital Camera 16-2Dim. Centre of Gravity 16-5Dim. Selected 16-5Dimension

Angle 4-35Arc Length 4-37Area 4-45Automatic Overall 4-44Crease To Crease 4-39Diameter 4-36Ellipse 4-37

Horizontal 4-34Info 4-49Linear 4-32, 4-38Nett Area 4-46Overall 4-44Parallel 4-38Perimeter 4-44Perpendicular 4-33Radial 4-36Report Only 4-48Selected elements 4-43Text String 4-42Text Style 4-41Vertical 4-35Wastage 4-46

Dimension Line 4-40Dimension Options 4-40Dimension Text Positioning 4-42Dimension Tool Bar 1-14Dimension Toolbar 4-32Dimensions General 4-33Dimensions Sub-Menu 4-32Direction 8-18

Indicate 8-18Indicate Bevels 8-18Reverse 8-20

Display 8-24, 8-34Display Deformation 16-10Display Labels 8-34Divide 4-53Draw

2 Entity Fillet 4-222 point circle 4-183 Entity Fillet 4-233 point circle 4-19angle 4-1Arc straighten 4-62Arc tangent 4-12Arrow 4-8Bezier 4-28Box 4-5Build

Auto Trim 4-52Bulge 4-62bulge radius 4-63

Release 8.0Page I-8


Index

KASEMAKE

Chamfer 4-8Construct - Bisect Angle between 4-75Construct - Bisect Angle Between Ele-

ments 4-74Cubic spline 4-27Ellipse 4-24, 4-26Elliptical Arc 4-26Enlarge 4-61Envelope 4-24Extrude 4-86, 4-90Fold Box 4-76Folding 4-75Image 4-69Image proportional 4-69Lathe 4-90line 4-1Line of known length 4-9Multi Intersect 4-50Multi line 4-10Offset Construct Line 4-72Offset element 4-67options 4-70Panel Create 4-12Parallel 4-10Perpendicular Construct Line 4-74Point 4-7Point tangent 4-11Polygon 4-13Polyline 4-7Quick trim 4-51relative line 4-4relativeangle 4-2Sketch 4-7super angle 4-3Text 4-29Toggle Construct Lines 4-75

Draw arc3 point 4-20Angle 4-20centre 4-20Fillet 4-21Radius 4-19

Draw buildAdjust 4-57adjust options 4-58

Amend 4-60Bisect angle 4-55Bisect Element 4-53Break 4-54Convert To Contour 4-68Divide 4-53Element Path 4-64Hatch 4-59Holes Hatch 4-61Inflate / Deflate Path 4-66Intersect 4-49Island 4-59Lead In 4-64Point Intersect 4-50Point On Line 4-56Project 4-55Thicken 4-56

Draw CircleRadius 4-17

Draw Commands 4-1Draw Tool Bar 1-14DrawBuild

Auto Cut 4-51Drawing Area 1-3Drawing Description 2-9Drawing Info... Command 10-13Drawing Mode

Coordinate 5-6Freehand 5-1Joined 5-13Lock 5-1Relative 1 5-7Relative 2 5-9

Drawing Modes 5-1Drill

Hide/Show Holes 9-52Drill Freehand 9-52Drill Holes 2-43Drill Toggle 9-52DSP Format 2-37DXF Format 2-30, 2-35DXF Layer Info 2-35DXF Linestyle Info 2-35


Release 8.0Page I-9

Index

KASEMAKE

EEdit

clear area 3-5Copy 3-3Cut 3-3Delete Image 3-5Delete Selection 3-4Delete visible 3-4Entities Select 3-29Fill Elements 4-94Guidelines Select 3-33Image Ground 3-5Move/Copy 3-9Paste 3-4Polygon Select 3-31Quick Edit

Copy 3-7Copy Horizontal Mirror 3-7Copy Vertical Mirror 3-7Move 3-6Move Horizontal Mirror 3-6Move Vertical Mirror 3-6

Redo 3-2Reset 3-3undo 3-1

Edit - Change 3-17Edit artwork 16-1Edit Bezier Curve 3-20Edit Border 8-55Edit Clone 3-21Edit Control 1-18Edit Dimension 7-34, 7-35, 7-36Edit Job Info 9-60Edit Label 2-12, 2-14Edit Task List 8-66Edit Text 3-19Edit Tool Bar 1-14Edit Tool Passes 8-23Edit TrueType 3-19Edit Value 7-15Editing An Animation Spline 20-3Element Path 4-64Element Path Options 4-65Elements

selection 3-27

Ellipse 4-24, 4-26Ellipse Options 4-25Ellipse Sub-Menu 4-24Elliptical Arc 4-26Elliptical Arc Options 4-26E-Mail 2-11End Markers 8-21, 8-25Enlarge Detail 4-61Entity 7-21Envelope 4-24Envelope Options 4-24Environment Map 23-6EPS Format 2-34Examine Mode 15-4Example 1 - Cut by Length Method 8-32Example 2 - Cut by Number Method 8-33Exit Command 2-57Explode 6-2Export Cameras 21-1Export Command 2-31Export Object 14-4Export Theme 14-4Extrude 4-86, 4-90

FFacet 23-2File

3D Export Theme 14-43D Import Theme 14-4Close 2-7Drawing Info... 10-13Exit 2-57Export 2-31Export Object 14-4History list 2-40Import 2-28Import Object 14-2Insert 2-6Layout Info 10-13Load Image 2-40Multi Export 2-38New 2-1, 2-4, 2-5Open 2-5Plot 2-22Plot Selected 2-28

Release 8.0Page I-10


Index

KASEMAKE

Preferences 2-41Preferences - Selection 2-41Print 2-18Print Options 2-20Print Preview 2-19Print setup 2-21Project management 2-11Publish e-mail 2-11Publish Local Network 2-10Publish World Wide Web 2-10Publish/e-Mail 2-9Recover Drawings 2-57Save 2-7Save as 2-7Send To 2-9

File Locations 2-46, 7-27File Open dialog box 2-6File Preferences 2-45File preview delay 2-46File Save As dialog box 2-8File Suffix 2-6File Suffixing 7-22File Type 2-53Files

3D File Types 14-13D Viz files 14-1

Fill Elements 4-94Fill Sub-Menu 23-1Fillet 4-21Fillet Options 4-21Filtering 23-17Flat 17-1Flat Bridging 9-34Flip 8-22Flip About 2-27Flute 2-51, 10-3, 11-5Flute direction 1-4Fly Mode 15-4Fog 23-10Fold

Fefco 0422 4-85Fold Box 4-76Fold Increment 17-3Fold Options 4-76Fold To 180 17-1

Fold To 270 17-2Fold To 90 17-1Fold To Angle 17-2Folding 4-75

cameras 4-83Moving about 4-83Moving objects 4-84navigation modes 4-84notes 4-85objects - folding 4-84objects - multiple selection 4-84objects- movement axes 4-84orthogonal views 4-83panes 4-82perspective view 4-83Requirements 4-80Selecting objects 4-84slider 4-85

Folding Animation 20-4Folding Objects 4-84Folding Slider 4-85Foldling

object - properties 4-85Font 4-31Four panes3D Cameras

Four panes 21-4Fractional Keypad 8-65Frame Rate 20-2Freeform Deformation 16-6Freehand 5-1Front Edge

magic eyes 9-16Options - front edge 9-15

Front Edge Stripper Options 9-14Front/Back Surface Plotting 8-26

GGenerate Guide Lines 7-34Global Variables 7-32Glow 23-16Gradient 23-4Grip Edge Stripping Knives 9-4Ground 23-8Ground Table 2-51, 9-73, 10-8

All Off 10-10



Index

KASEMAKE

All On 10-10Colour 10-8Commands 10-9Display 10-8Ground Name 10-8Ground Number 10-8Load 10-9Pen 10-9Save 10-9Tag 10-9Width 10-9

Group 6-1Group Lines 4-6Guide Intersect 5-12Guide Lines 7-34Guidelines Tool Bar 1-15

HHandholds 9-54Handle Size - Selection Preferences 2-42Hatch 4-59Hatch Holes 4-61Hatch Holes Options 4-61Hatch Options 4-60HGL Format 2-33Hidden line 23-1Hide/Show Grid 10-2History List Command 2-40Holes 2-43Home 23-1Horizontal plane 15-5Horizontal split 21-2Horizontal split - 2 21-2Horizontal split - 3 21-2Horizontal split - 4 21-3Horizontal split - 5 21-3Horizontal width 8-41Horizontally 18-8

IImage 4-69, 23-4, 23-17

Centre line 8-61Convert 8-60Invert 8-60Outline 8-61

Image Colour 16-2Image Ground 3-5Image Proportional 4-69Image sub menu

ToolsImage menu 8-60

ImportCurve Generation 2-30

Import / Export Ground Mappings 2-52Import artwork 16-1Import Cameras 21-1Import Command 2-28Import Image 23-4Import Object Command 14-2Import Theme 14-4Increase 18-6, 18-7Increase Fold Angle 17-2Indicate Rotary Bridging 9-45Inflate / Deflate Path Options 4-66Inflate Deflate Path 4-66Info 4-49Insert Command 2-6Insert Files 2-14Insert Frames 20-5Inside

Female Settings 9-14Male Raised Section 1 9-11Male Raised Section 2 9-12

Inside / Outside View 6-3Inside Stripper 9-11Inside/Outside 10-2Interlocking Options 8-3Interlocking Options (2) 8-5Intersect 4-49Invert 8-60Island 4-59Items to Bridge 9-39

JJoined Drawing Mode 5-13

KKasemake (2D) 22-7Kasemake Look 2-54KASEPLAYER 20-6, 22-10



Index

KASEMAKE

Kaseweb Tool Bar 1-16Key Frames 20-5Knife Tolerance 9-57

LLabel Options 8-34Language 2-51Lathe 4-90Launch POVRAY 22-10Layout 8-1

Choosing 8-2Options - Interlock 8-5Options - interlock 8-3

Layout Algorithm 8-8Layout Info Command 10-13Layout Menu 8-1Layout Wizard 8-7

layout - choosing final layout 8-10layout - performing the layout 8-10Sheet size 8-7

Layout wizardalgorithm 8-8designs 8-8options - automatic 8-8options - multi part 8-10options - regular 8-9

Lead In Arc 4-64Leader Line 4-40Left 18-3Length of Line to Bridge 9-32Library 23-18Lie Down 18-2Lie on side 18-2Light Animation 20-4Light Position 20-1Lighting 19-1Lights 19-2Line 4-1Line Angle Increment 2-43Line Length Increment 2-43Line of known length 4-9Line Styles 10-10

Pattern 10-10Lines Sub-Menu 4-1Linestyle 2-27

LinetypeAdd New 10-11Delete 10-12Properties 10-11

Link Variable 7-16Live Video Feed 23-4Load Border 8-54Load Image Command 2-40Load Movie 23-4Load Shell 9-53Loading a Smart Symbol 10-6Lock Mode in a Command File 5-2Lock To End Point 5-1Lock Toolbars

Toolbarslock 2-49

Lock X and Y Depth 2-24Lower Priority Hole Tolerance 9-57L-Shaped Knives 9-5L-Shaped Knives Options 9-6

MM Format 2-37Magic Eyes Options 9-16Main Tool Bar 1-12Make equal 18-5, 18-7Make Same Size 18-8Manipulate

Flip 8-22Rotate -45 8-23Rotate 45 8-22Rotate -90 8-22Rotate 90 8-22

Manipulate Sub-Menu 8-22Manual Bridging 9-35Manual Edit Bolt Holes 9-55Manual Stripping Knives 9-1Margins 2-26Material 23-15, 23-22Materials 10-14

add new 7-15delete value 7-15Edit value 7-15link variable 7-16show active value 7-16



Index

KASEMAKE

view values 7-15Mathematical Formulae 7-7Matrix 8-46Max Angle before lifting 8-26Menu

3D Align 18-2Menus

Pop-up 1-21Merge from Database - Print 2-21Merge Shell with Drawing 9-55Mesh subdivision 16-3Middles 18-4Min Line Length 8-61Mirror 3-10Mix & Match 7-24

Bottom Lock Point 7-23Design 7-25, 8-37File Locations 7-27Global variables 7-32Lock Point 7-33parts - design 7-31style files 7-30Top Lock Point 7-23

Mix And Match Ground 2-51Mix Match Lock Point 7-33Mode highlight colour 2-50Mode Tool Bar 1-13Modes

Drawing 5-1Modify DB Symbol 8-64Modifying a Smart Symbol 10-6Modifying Notes3D Notes

modifying 23-20Modifying the Context Menu 10-26Modulation 23-17More windows 12-3Mouse

Features - wheel 1-23Mouse Wheel 2-50Mouse wheel 1-23Move 3-6, 15-3Move Horizontal Mirror 3-6Move Pin 9-21Move Points 3-8, 3-13, 3-14Move Rotary Bridging 9-44

Move Strut 9-20Move Vertical Mirror 3-6Move/Copy 3-9

Mirror 3-10Reference Points 3-9

Movement Axes 4-84Moving About 4-83Moving Objects 4-84Multi Export Command 2-38Multi Extrude 4-90Multi Intersect 4-50Multi Line 4-10Multi-Line Options 4-11Multipart Options 8-10Multiple Selection 4-84Music 20-1

NN Format 2-37Navigation Modes 4-84New Camera 21-1New Command 2-1, 2-4, 2-5New Folder 2-14New Project 2-14, 2-15New Window 12-1newlink Draw->TrueType 4-31newlink Select Command Options 3-27newlink Selecting Elements Individually 3-27Next Available 2-8Nicks 9-30Nodes-Dangling 4-81None 23-2Notes 4-85, 10-17, 23-10, 23-18Nudge 3-13, 3-15Nudge Angle 1-4Nudge Factor 1-4, 2-42Nudge Settings 23-11Number of items 2-44

OObject Folds 20-1Object Hierarchy 20-5Object Position 20-1Object Properties 4-85



Index

KASEMAKE

Object Scaling 20-1Objects 15-2Offset Construct Line 4-72Offset Element 4-67Offset Element Options 4-67One pane 21-2Opacity 23-17Open Command 2-5Open Project 2-16Open Quick 7-36Open Revision 2-13Operation 13-2Operation with the Ctrl Key 8-12Operation with the Shift Key 8-12Optimise

Automatic 8-11Choice 2-25completion - manual 8-13Manual 8-12manual operation with Ctrl key 8-12manual operation with shift key 8-12Order 8-14Slot 8-13

Optimise and Order 8-14Optimise Menu 8-11Options 1-22, 4-70, 10-23

Dimension line 4-40Dimension text 4-42

Orientation 20-1Origin 2-6, 2-8

Absolute coordinates 2-7original 2-6Original origin 2-7Specify 2-7

Orthogonal Views 4-83Outline 8-61, 23-2Overview 10-3, 11-5

PPack Project 2-18Page Setup Command 2-21Page Setup dialog box 2-21Panel Deformation 16-6, 16-7, 16-8, 16-9Panels 15-2Panes 4-82

PaperMargins 2-21Orientation 2-21Size 2-21, 2-26Source 2-21

Papers 10-14Paragraph Style 4-30Parallel 4-10Parallel Options 4-10Parameterics Tool Bar 1-14Parametric 2-14

Guide Lines 7-34Parametric Deformation 16-6Parametric file associations 13-10Parametrics

Call 7-20Close 7-6Command File - lock mode 5-2Create Preview 7-22Database 13-9different materials 7-15Entity 7-21Mix & Match 7-24Mix & Match Run Macro 7-32Record 7-4Record to copy 7-5relative 1 mode 5-9Run 7-1Run Insert 7-4Run Interactively 7-2Run Non-Interactively 7-2Set Element 7-20Set Point 1 7-17Set Point 2 7-18Units 7-23Variables 7-6

Parametrics Commands 7-1ParametricsDefining Condition Statements7-8ParametricsDefining Mathematical Formu-lae 7-7ParametricsDefining Variable Expressions7-7Pass Number - Profiles 2-24Paste 3-4



Index

KASEMAKE

Paste Array 15-1Paste Frames 20-5PDF Format 2-37Performing a Layout 8-10Perimeter 9-6

Female 9-10Front Edge 9-14Male 9-7Male Raised Section 9-8

Perpendicular Construct Line 4-74Personal Setup 10-18

Load 10-18Remove 10-19Save 10-19

Perspective View 4-83Pick Ground 3-21Pins And Struts 9-20, 9-21Pins and Struts 9-22Playing an Animation 20-6Plot 2-27

Common Line 2-25Plot Circles below given radius 2-24Plot Command 2-22Plot Selected Command 2-28Plotter Settings 2-23Plotter Setup-Completing 2-27Plotters 10-14

Add 10-14Amend Settings 10-15Custom Paper Sizes 10-16Paper 10-16Settings 10-17

Point 4-7Point Intersect 4-50Point On Line 4-56Point Tangent 4-11Polygon 4-13

Options 4-14Options - edge 4-16Options - start / end 4-17

Polyline 4-7Pop-up Menus 1-21POVRAY 22-8Preference

back up on save 2-45

PreferencesAngle Increment 2-43auto save 2-45Auto Snap 2-48Auto Snap Freehand 2-48Construct Line colout 2-50Data units 2-52display axes 2-50Drill Holes 2-43File Locations 2-46File preview delay 2-46File settings 2-45Flute 2-51Ground Table - default 2-51import/export mappings 2-52Kasemake Look 2-54Language 2-51Length Increment 2-43mapping file type 2-53mix & match 2-51mode highlight colour 2-50Mouse wheel 2-50Nudge Factor 2-42plotted point size 2-44prefix - backup file 2-46Quick change 2-49Rollups 2-49Save Images 2-45Selection Colour 2-42Selection Rectangle 2-42Selection Tolerance 2-41Settings 2-43Small Gap 2-42Snap cursor 2-48Symbols delay 2-50units 2-52units area 2-52units rule length 2-52View 2-47window items 2-44Zoom 2-47zoom radius 2-48Zoom to cursor 2-47, 2-48

Preferences Command 2-41Print Command 2-18



Index

KASEMAKE

Print dialog box 2-19Print Options Command 2-20Print Preview Command 2-19Print Progress Dialog 2-19Printer- destination 2-21Profile -Plotter Settings 2-23Project 4-55

Blank Drawing 2-14Close 2-17Commands 2-13Context menu 2-12Create New 2-13Create Preview 2-17Delete Files 2-14Design Context Menu 2-12Insert Files 2-14New 2-14, 2-15New Folder 2-14Pack Project 2-18Parametric 2-14Project Bar 2-11Project Tree 2-12Revision Context Menu 2-13Revision Info 2-18Save 2-14, 2-17Save Menu 2-14Save Project As 2-17Show Tiled View 2-14Toolbars - show/hide 10-17Unpack 2-18

Project Bar 2-11Project Bar Commands 2-13Project Context Menu 2-12Project Folder

Edit Label 2-14Project Management 2-11Project Menu 2-15Project Open 2-16Project Sub-Menu 2-15Project Tree 2-12Projects

Database 13-11Prompts and Masks 8-56Properties 2-12, 23-14

View

Properties 10-18Properties3D Notes

Properties 23-20Protection

Instability 1-23Publish / e-Mail command 2-9Publish to a Server on a Local Network 2-10Publish World Wide Web 2-10

QQuick Change 2-49Quick Parameterics Tool Bar 1-15Quick Parametrics

Edit Dimension 7-34, 7-35, 7-36Open 7-36Regenerate Drawing 7-34Save 7-36Show Guide Lines 7-35Show Parametric Dims 7-35

Quick Trim 4-51Quick Zoom 1-22

RRadio Buttons 1-18Radius 4-19Radius Arc Options 4-19Radius Bulge 4-63Radius Circle 4-17Record 7-4Record To Copy 7-5Recording An Animation 20-1Recover Drawings 2-57Redo 3-2Redraw 10-2Reduction 3-10, 8-62Reference Points

Move/Copy 3-9Reflectivity 23-17Regenerate Drawing 7-34Registration 8-57Registration mark

symbol 8-52, 8-59, 9-27Regular Options 8-9Relative 4-4Relative 1 Drawing Mode 5-7



Index

KASEMAKE

Relative 1 In A Command File 5-9Relative 2 Drawing Mode 5-9Remove 18-6, 18-7Remove All Rotary Bridging 9-45Remove Bridge

Freehand 9-41Remove Frames 20-5Remove Markers 8-63Remove Pin 9-22Remove Strut 9-21Remove Zero Length 8-17Repeat Copy 9-19, 9-20Report

Create 13-8Using AG/DATA 13-9

Reports 13-8Reset 1-22, 3-3Reset Bolt Holes 9-57Reset Lights 19-1Reset Position 18-1Resetting Chosen Point 7-17, 7-19Resize 3-11Reverse

MountReverse 8-28

RevisionSet Active 2-13

Revision Context Menu 2-13Revision Info Command 2-18Revision Properties 2-13Right 18-3Roll-up 9-31Rollup Dialogs 2-49Rotary 9-52

Bolt Holes - auto remove 9-56Bolt Holes - edit 9-55Handholds 9-54Shell - Merge 9-55Shell - split 9-55Shell - View 9-55Shell Construction 9-57Trim to top shell only 9-54

Rotary Bridges 9-38Machine Settings 9-39

Rotary Bridging

Edit 9-43Interval 9-38Items to bridge 9-39Move 9-44

Rotary Diemaking Tool Bar 1-17Rotary Edit 9-43Rotary Shell

Auto Bolt Hole 9-58Define Bolt Hole 9-58Template - save 9-58

Rotate 15-3Rotate - 18-9Rotate + 18-8Rotate -45 8-23Rotate 45 8-22Rotate -90 8-22Rotate 90 8-22Rotate to angle 3-11Rotation Angle 18-9Rotation of plot 2-27RP2 Format 2-36RPT Format 2-36Rule

Costings 9-47Table 9-50

Rule Length Units 2-52Rule Menu 9-47Run 7-1Run Insert 7-4Run Mix & Match 7-32Run Task List 8-66

SSave As Command 2-7Save as Email 2-9Save Border File

BorderSave 8-57

Save Command 2-7Save Images Compressed 2-45Save Project 2-14, 2-17Save Project As 2-17Save Project Menu 2-14Save Quick 7-36Save Selected Elements 2-9



Index

KASEMAKE

Save Template 9-58Scale 2-26, 2-40, 15-3Scale / Rotate 3-10Scale- Print 2-20Scanner 16-2Screen Layout 1-1Select 3-26

All 3-29Ground 3-31Next 3-28

Select Entities 3-29Select Guidelines 3-33Select Job Info 9-60Select Options 3-27Selecting Objects 4-84Selection 2-41Selection Rectangle 2-42Selection Set

move 3-22nudge 3-25rotate by fixed increment 3-25scroll automatic 3-22

Selection setclearing 3-22copy 3-22mirror 3-24resize 3-23rotation 3-25

SelectPolygon 3-31Send To 2-9Set Element 7-20Set Grid 10-1Set Inside/Outside View 6-3Set Point1 7-17Set Point2 7-18Set Units 7-23Set Up Display End Markers

End MarkersSetup 8-21

Settings 2-43, 10-17preserving 1-23

Shade 23-2Sheet Settings 8-68Sheet Size 8-7Sheets

Sheet Settings 8-68Trim 8-71

Shell Construction 9-57Shell History List 9-53Shine 23-16Shininess 23-17Shortcut

Create 10-24Create File 10-24

ShortCuts 10-23Shortcuts

Print 10-24Remove 10-24

Show 20-5Show / Hide Construct Line 4-75Show / Hide Project Toolbars 10-17Show Active Value 7-16Show End Markers 8-21Show End Markers Rotary Bridging 9-46Show Guide Lines 7-35Show Parametric Dims 7-35Show Tiled View 2-14Shrinkage Factor 3-11Shuffle Rotary Bridging 9-44Side plane 15-5Single Knife 9-5Size of Plotted Points 2-44Sketch 4-7Slot Optimise 8-13Small Gap 2-42Smooth 23-2Snap

Along 5-3arc quad point 5-5Auto Snap 5-5Auto Snap Properties 5-13Between 2 Points 5-12Guide Intersect 5-12To Arc Centre 5-4, 5-5To Grid 5-4To Intersection 5-5To Midpoint 5-3

Snap Along Mode 5-3Snap Cursor 2-48Snap Quad Point Mode 5-5



Index

KASEMAKE

Snap To Arc Centre Mode 5-4Snap To Grid Mode 5-4Snap To Intersection Mode 5-5Snap to Midpoint Mode 5-3Snapshots 22-5, 23-11Solid 23-1, 23-3Solid Handles - Selection Preferences 2-42Sound 20-1Sounds 20-6Spanish bridges 9-33Speed 2-25Spin Box 1-18Spline 20-5Spline properties - straight spline 20-3Split 12-1Split prior to Auto Bridge 9-33Split Shell 9-55Stand on ground 18-1Stand up 18-2Standard Tool Bar 1-13Static Mode 15-4Status Bar 1-4, 10-27

Flute direction 1-4Nudge Angle 1-4Nudge Factor 1-4

Step & RepeatLinear Copies 3-12Radial Copies 3-12

Stora Compression 8-51Straight 20-3Straighten Arc 4-62Stripper 9-6, 9-16, 9-18, 9-19, 9-20, 9-21

Front edge - options 9-14Inside 9-11Perimeter 9-6Remove Pin 9-22

Stripping Knives Options 9-2Style Tool Bar 1-13Sub Objects 15-2Suffix - file 7-22Support Bars 9-29Symbol 8-52, 8-59, 9-27Symbol Lock Point 7-33Symbol Variables 10-6Symbols 10-4

Create DB symbol 8-63Loading 10-5Lock Point 7-33Modify DB symbol 8-64Options 10-5Smart - creating 10-7Smart - loading 10-6Smart - lock points 10-7Smart - modifying 10-6Smart - variables 10-6

Symbols delay 2-50System instability 1-23

TTake Snapshot 16-10Take Vector Snapshot 16-10Text 4-29

Options 4-30paragraph 4-30Spacing 4-32style 4-30

Text Input Dialog 4-31Textured 23-1Thicken 4-56Thicken Options 4-56Thickness 23-15TIF 2-40Tile 12-2Timeline 1-7, 23-13Title Bar 1-1Tolerance 2-41, 8-61Tool Passes

Display 8-24Edit 8-23

Tool Passes Sub-Menu 8-23Toolbar

Dimension 4-32ToolBars

3D Alignment 1-163D Animation 1-163D Curves 1-163D Draw 1-163D Folding 1-153D Lights 1-153D Rotation 1-16



Index

KASEMAKE

3D View 1-15Build 1-14Diemaking 1-15Dimension 1-14Draw 1-14Edit 1-14Guide lines 1-15Kaseweb 1-16Main 1-12Mode 1-13Parametrics 1-14Quick Parametrics 1-15Rotary Diemaking 1-17Standard 1-13Style 1-13Tools 1-14

Toolbars 1-9Customise 10-19, 10-25Customise new 10-20Exchangeable 2-49Print Preview 2-20

ToolsArray 8-6Border Sub-menu 8-54calculator 8-65Common lines 8-16, 8-17Compression 8-48Compression Stora 8-51Conveyor Plot Sub-menu 8-51counters menu 8-40Cut-Crease 8-29Diemaking 9-1Direction 8-18Edit Task List 8-66End Markers 8-21, 8-25Fractional Keypad 8-65Integrity 8-62Layout 8-1Layout menu 8-1Layout Wizard 8-7Manipulate menu 8-22markers - show / hide 8-21Optimise menu 8-11Reduction 8-62Registration 8-57

Remove Markers 8-63Run Current Task 8-66Tool passes menu 8-23zero length line removal 8-17Zipper 8-35

Tools Tool Bar 1-14Top Lock Point 7-23Tops 18-4Trim Sheet 8-71Trim Shell Width 9-53Trim to top shell only 9-54TrueType 4-31

UUnclone 6-1Unclone All 6-2Undo-Edit Commands 3-1Ungroup 6-1Ungroup All 6-1Units 2-26, 2-40, 10-12Units - Print 2-20Unpack Project 2-18Upgrade File Format 2-13User Name and Password 2-10

VV Groove

MountV Groove 8-27

Variable ParameterCut Crease

Variable parameter 8-32Variable Table

Append 7-9Associated Fields 7-12Choices 7-13Clear 7-10Close 7-12Commands 7-9Comments 7-13Copy 7-11Cut 7-11Delete Field 7-10Delete Variable 7-10Insert Variable 7-10



Index

KASEMAKE

Paste 7-11Print 7-12Print preview 7-13Recalc 7-11Run 7-12Run Zoom 7-12Show All 7-12Show Prompts 7-12Trig. calculator 7-13

Variables 7-6Vertex 4-15Vertical plane 15-5Vertical Spacing 18-6Vertical split 21-2Vertical split - 2 21-3Vertical split - 3 21-3Vertical split - 4 21-3Vertical split - 5 21-4Vertical width 8-41Vertically 18-8View 2-47

Background 10-12Clone Edit 10-8Customise menu 10-19Database 10-13Ground Table 10-8Hide/Show Grid 10-2Horizontal / Vertical Flute 10-3, 11-5Inside/Outside 10-2Line styles 10-10Linetype 10-11Materials 10-14Notes 10-17Overview 10-3, 11-5Papers 10-14Personal setup menu 10-18Plotters 10-14Redraw 10-2Set Grid 10-1Status bar 10-27Symbols 10-4Units 10-12Window 10-1Zoom all 11-1Zoom box 11-1

Zoom Cursor 11-2Zoom last 11-2Zoom Selected 11-5

View Commands 10-1, 11-1View Defined Values 7-15View Shell 9-55Visible Handles - Selection Preferences 2-42Visible Rectangle - Selection Preferences 2-42VRML 22-1

WWalk Mode 15-4Walkthrough 23-5Wastage

Corrugated Case 4-48Solid Board 4-48

Wastage Options 4-47Watermark 23-9Web Address 2-10White 23-2Whole Drawing - Print 2-20Width - Profiles 2-25Window 10-1

Changing active window 12-3Windows

Arrange icons 12-3Cascade 12-2Close all 12-1More Windows 12-3New 12-1Split 12-1Tle 12-2

Windows Commands 12-1Wireframe 23-1Working with Different Materials 7-15Working with Different Materials - Example7-16

XX Axis only 15-5

YY Axis only 15-6



Index

KASEMAKE

ZZ Axis only 15-6Zipper Rule 8-35Zoom All 11-1Zoom Box 11-1Zoom Cursor 11-2Zoom In Sub-Menu 11-3Zoom Last 11-2Zoom out menu 11-4Zoom Radius 2-48Zoom Selected 11-5Zoom To 2-41, 2-47Zoom To Cursor 2-47, 2-48



Index

KASEMAKE



user manual

Education